You are on page 1of 584

DesignModeler User's Guide

ANSYS, Inc. Release 15.0
Southpointe November 2013
275 Technology Drive
Canonsburg, PA 15317 ANSYS, Inc. is
ansysinfo@ansys.com certified to ISO
9001:2008.
http://www.ansys.com
(T) 724-746-3304
(F) 724-514-9494

Copyright and Trademark Information

© 2013 SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use, distribution or duplication is prohibited.

ANSYS, ANSYS Workbench, Ansoft, AUTODYN, EKM, Engineering Knowledge Manager, CFX, FLUENT, HFSS and any
and all ANSYS, Inc. brand, product, service and feature names, logos and slogans are registered trademarks or
trademarks of ANSYS, Inc. or its subsidiaries in the United States or other countries. ICEM CFD is a trademark used
by ANSYS, Inc. under license. CFX is a trademark of Sony Corporation in Japan. All other brand, product, service
and feature names or trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Disclaimer Notice

THIS ANSYS SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND PROGRAM DOCUMENTATION INCLUDE TRADE SECRETS AND ARE CONFID-
ENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS OF ANSYS, INC., ITS SUBSIDIARIES, OR LICENSORS. The software products
and documentation are furnished by ANSYS, Inc., its subsidiaries, or affiliates under a software license agreement
that contains provisions concerning non-disclosure, copying, length and nature of use, compliance with exporting
laws, warranties, disclaimers, limitations of liability, and remedies, and other provisions. The software products
and documentation may be used, disclosed, transferred, or copied only in accordance with the terms and conditions
of that software license agreement.

ANSYS, Inc. is certified to ISO 9001:2008.

U.S. Government Rights

For U.S. Government users, except as specifically granted by the ANSYS, Inc. software license agreement, the use,
duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions stated in the ANSYS, Inc.
software license agreement and FAR 12.212 (for non-DOD licenses).

Third-Party Software

See the legal information in the product help files for the complete Legal Notice for ANSYS proprietary software
and third-party software. If you are unable to access the Legal Notice, please contact ANSYS, Inc.

Published in the U.S.A.

Table of Contents
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................... 1
CAD Integration ..................................................................................................................................... 2
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 3
Toolbars ........................................................................................................................................... 4
Tree Outline and Toolboxes ............................................................................................................... 5
Graphics Window ............................................................................................................................. 5
Details View ..................................................................................................................................... 6
Status Bar ......................................................................................................................................... 9
DesignModeler Application Fundamentals .............................................................................................. 9
Introduction to the Modeling Environment ........................................................................................... 10
Introduction to Parametric Sketching and Modeling ........................................................................ 10
Sketch and Model Information .............................................................................................................. 11
Project Schematic Operations .................................................................................................................. 13
DesignModeler Application Behavior in Project Schematic .................................................................... 13
Context Menu Operations ............................................................................................................... 14
Properties List ................................................................................................................................ 23
Project Files List .............................................................................................................................. 25
Data Sharing and Data Transfer ....................................................................................................... 26
License Preferences ........................................................................................................................ 28
File Management ............................................................................................................................ 28
Parameters in Project Schematic ........................................................................................................... 28
DesignModeler Application Parameter Publishing ........................................................................... 28
CAD Parameter Publishing .............................................................................................................. 31
Mechanical Parameter Publishing ................................................................................................... 32
Changing Parameters in the DesignModeler Application ................................................................. 33
Changing Parameters in ANSYS Workbench .................................................................................... 33
Updating Parameters from CAD ...................................................................................................... 34
Parameter Units .............................................................................................................................. 34
DesignModeler Application in Project Schematic ................................................................................... 35
CAD in Project Schematic ...................................................................................................................... 37
Licensing .............................................................................................................................................. 38
Typical Usage ............................................................................................................................................ 41
ANSYS Release 15.0 Tutorials ................................................................................................................. 41
GUI Navigation ..................................................................................................................................... 41
Glossary ............................................................................................................................................... 42
DesignModeler Hotkeys ........................................................................................................................ 42
Menus ....................................................................................................................................................... 45
File Menu ............................................................................................................................................. 45
Refresh Input .................................................................................................................................. 46
Start Over ....................................................................................................................................... 47
Load DesignModeler Database ....................................................................................................... 48
Save Project .................................................................................................................................... 49
Export ............................................................................................................................................ 49
Attach to Active CAD Geometry ...................................................................................................... 51
Notations ................................................................................................................................. 53
Attach Properties ...................................................................................................................... 53
Import External Geometry File ........................................................................................................ 56
Import Properties ..................................................................................................................... 57
Geometry Interface Recommendations ..................................................................................... 59
Import and Attach Options ....................................................................................................... 60

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. iii

DesignModeler User's Guide

Import Shaft Geometry ................................................................................................................... 64
Write Script: Sketch(es) of Active Plane ............................................................................................ 65
Run Script ....................................................................................................................................... 70
Print ............................................................................................................................................... 70
Auto-save Now ............................................................................................................................... 71
Restore Auto-save File ..................................................................................................................... 72
Image Capture ................................................................................................................................ 73
Recent Imports ............................................................................................................................... 74
Recent Scripts ................................................................................................................................. 75
Close ANSYS DesignModeler ........................................................................................................... 75
Create Menu ......................................................................................................................................... 76
Concept Menu ...................................................................................................................................... 78
Tools Menu ........................................................................................................................................... 79
Repair Features ............................................................................................................................... 81
Analysis Tools ................................................................................................................................. 81
Form New Part ................................................................................................................................ 82
Parameters ..................................................................................................................................... 82
Electronics ...................................................................................................................................... 82
Addins ............................................................................................................................................ 83
Options .......................................................................................................................................... 83
Units Menu ........................................................................................................................................... 84
View Menu ........................................................................................................................................... 85
Help Menu ........................................................................................................................................... 86
Context Menus ..................................................................................................................................... 87
Delete right mouse button option in Model and Details View .......................................................... 88
Delete right mouse button option in Feature Tree Outline ............................................................... 88
Edit Dimension Name/Value ........................................................................................................... 89
Edit Selections ................................................................................................................................ 89
Explode Part ................................................................................................................................... 89
Export Cross Sections to Script ........................................................................................................ 90
Feature Insert ................................................................................................................................. 90
Feature Suppression ....................................................................................................................... 91
Form New Part ................................................................................................................................ 91
Go To Body ..................................................................................................................................... 91
Go To Feature ................................................................................................................................. 92
Hide/Show Faces ............................................................................................................................ 93
Measure Selection .......................................................................................................................... 94
Move Dimensions ........................................................................................................................... 94
Named Selection from Model View Window .................................................................................... 94
Named Selection Suppress/Hide Body and Face .............................................................................. 94
Quick Cut Copy Paste ...................................................................................................................... 95
Rename right mouse button option ................................................................................................ 95
Select All ........................................................................................................................................ 96
Show Dependencies ....................................................................................................................... 96
Show Problematic Geometry .......................................................................................................... 96
Sketch Instances ............................................................................................................................. 97
Sketch Projection ............................................................................................................................ 99
Sketch/Plane ................................................................................................................................ 102
Suppress/Hide Part and Body ........................................................................................................ 103
Suppress/Hide Parts from Feature Tree Outline .............................................................................. 104
Viewing ................................................................................................................................................... 107
Model Appearance Controls ................................................................................................................ 107

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
iv of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

DesignModeler User's Guide

Shaded Exterior and Edges ........................................................................................................... 107
Shaded Exterior ............................................................................................................................ 108
Wireframe .................................................................................................................................... 109
Graphics Options .......................................................................................................................... 109
Edge Coloring ......................................................................................................................... 110
Face Coloring .......................................................................................................................... 113
Display Legends ............................................................................................................... 113
Frozen Body Transparency ............................................................................................................ 115
Edge Joints ................................................................................................................................... 115
Cross Section Alignments ............................................................................................................. 116
Display Edge Direction .................................................................................................................. 117
Display Vertices ............................................................................................................................ 118
Cross Section Solids ...................................................................................................................... 119
Ruler ............................................................................................................................................ 120
Triad ............................................................................................................................................. 121
Outline Options ............................................................................................................................ 121
Context Menu Viewing Options ........................................................................................................... 122
Graphics Options Toolbar .................................................................................................................... 123
Edge Types ................................................................................................................................... 123
Display Toolbar ................................................................................................................................... 124
Display Plane ................................................................................................................................ 125
Display Model ............................................................................................................................... 125
Display Points ............................................................................................................................... 125
Look at Face/Plane/Sketch ............................................................................................................ 125
Rotation Modes Toolbar ...................................................................................................................... 126
Rotate .......................................................................................................................................... 126
Pan ............................................................................................................................................... 126
Zoom ........................................................................................................................................... 127
Box Zoom ..................................................................................................................................... 127
Zoom to Fit ................................................................................................................................... 128
Magnifier Window ........................................................................................................................ 128
Previous View ............................................................................................................................... 129
Next View ..................................................................................................................................... 129
Isometric View .............................................................................................................................. 130
Section Planes .............................................................................................................................. 131
Print Preview ...................................................................................................................................... 136
Window Layout .................................................................................................................................. 137
Reset Layout ................................................................................................................................. 137
2D Sketching ........................................................................................................................................... 139
Sketches and Planes ........................................................................................................................... 140
Construction Sketches .................................................................................................................. 141
Color Scheme ............................................................................................................................... 141
Sketch Status ................................................................................................................................ 142
Auto Constraints ................................................................................................................................. 142
Details View in Sketching Mode .......................................................................................................... 143
Sketch Details ............................................................................................................................... 143
Edge Details ................................................................................................................................. 145
Dimension Details ........................................................................................................................ 146
Right mouse button option items with (icon) check marks ............................................................. 146
Draw Toolbox ..................................................................................................................................... 147
Line .............................................................................................................................................. 148
Tangent Line ................................................................................................................................. 148

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. v

DesignModeler User's Guide

Line by 2 Tangents ........................................................................................................................ 148
Polyline ........................................................................................................................................ 148
Polygon ........................................................................................................................................ 149
Rectangle ..................................................................................................................................... 149
Rectangle by 3 Points .................................................................................................................... 150
Oval ............................................................................................................................................. 150
Circle ............................................................................................................................................ 150
Circle by 3 Tangents ...................................................................................................................... 150
Arc by Tangent .............................................................................................................................. 150
Arc by 3 Points .............................................................................................................................. 151
Arc by Center ................................................................................................................................ 151
Ellipse ........................................................................................................................................... 151
Spline ........................................................................................................................................... 152
Construction Point ........................................................................................................................ 153
Construction Point at Intersection ................................................................................................. 153
Modify Toolbox ................................................................................................................................... 153
Fillet ............................................................................................................................................. 154
Chamfer ....................................................................................................................................... 154
Corner .......................................................................................................................................... 154
Trim .............................................................................................................................................. 154
Extend .......................................................................................................................................... 155
Split ............................................................................................................................................. 155
Drag ............................................................................................................................................. 155
Cut ............................................................................................................................................... 156
Copy ............................................................................................................................................ 156
Paste ............................................................................................................................................ 157
Move ............................................................................................................................................ 157
Replicate ...................................................................................................................................... 158
Duplicate ...................................................................................................................................... 158
Offset ........................................................................................................................................... 158
Spline Edit .................................................................................................................................... 160
Select New Spline ................................................................................................................... 161
Re-Fit Spline ........................................................................................................................... 162
Create Missing Fit Points ......................................................................................................... 162
Create Missing Control Points .................................................................................................. 162
Delete New Fit Points .............................................................................................................. 162
Drag Fit Point .......................................................................................................................... 162
Drag Control Point .................................................................................................................. 162
Insert Fit Point ........................................................................................................................ 163
Delete Fit Point ....................................................................................................................... 163
Dimensions Toolbox ........................................................................................................................... 163
General ........................................................................................................................................ 164
Horizontal .................................................................................................................................... 165
Vertical ......................................................................................................................................... 165
Length/Distance ........................................................................................................................... 165
Radius .......................................................................................................................................... 165
Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... 166
Angle ........................................................................................................................................... 166
Semi-Automatic ............................................................................................................................ 166
Edit .............................................................................................................................................. 166
Move ............................................................................................................................................ 167
Animate ....................................................................................................................................... 167

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
vi of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

DesignModeler User's Guide

Display Name/Value ...................................................................................................................... 167
Constraints Toolbox ............................................................................................................................ 168
Fixed ............................................................................................................................................ 169
Horizontal .................................................................................................................................... 169
Vertical ......................................................................................................................................... 170
Perpendicular ............................................................................................................................... 170
Tangent ........................................................................................................................................ 170
Coincident .................................................................................................................................... 170
Midpoint ...................................................................................................................................... 170
Symmetry ..................................................................................................................................... 171
Parallel ......................................................................................................................................... 171
Concentric .................................................................................................................................... 171
Equal Radius ................................................................................................................................. 171
Equal Length ................................................................................................................................ 172
Equal Distance .............................................................................................................................. 172
Auto Constraints ........................................................................................................................... 172
Settings Toolbox ................................................................................................................................. 173
Grid .............................................................................................................................................. 173
Major Grid Spacing ....................................................................................................................... 174
Minor-Steps per Major .................................................................................................................. 174
Snaps per Minor ........................................................................................................................... 174
Selection ................................................................................................................................................. 175
Selection Toolbar ................................................................................................................................ 177
New Selection .............................................................................................................................. 178
Select Mode ................................................................................................................................. 178
Selection Filter: Points ................................................................................................................... 179
Selection Filter: Sketch Points (2D) ........................................................................................... 180
Selection Filter: Model Vertices (3D) ......................................................................................... 180
Selection Filter: PF Points (Point Feature Points, 3D) .................................................................. 180
Selection Filter: Edges ................................................................................................................... 180
Selection Filter: Sketch Edges (2D) ........................................................................................... 180
Selection Filter: Model Edges (3D) ........................................................................................... 181
Selection Filter: Line Edges (3D) ............................................................................................... 181
Selection Filter: Faces .................................................................................................................... 181
Selection Filter: Bodies .................................................................................................................. 181
Selection Filter: Solid Bodies (3D) ............................................................................................. 182
Selection Filter: Line Bodies (3D) .............................................................................................. 182
Selection Filter: Surface Bodies (3D) ......................................................................................... 182
Extend Selection ........................................................................................................................... 182
Extend to Adjacent ................................................................................................................. 183
Extend to Limits ...................................................................................................................... 183
Flood Blends ........................................................................................................................... 184
Flood Area .............................................................................................................................. 184
Extend to Instances ................................................................................................................. 185
Expand/Shrink Face Selection ....................................................................................................... 185
Expand Face Selection ............................................................................................................ 186
Shrink Face Selection .............................................................................................................. 187
Graphical Selection ............................................................................................................................. 189
Highlighting ................................................................................................................................. 190
Picking ......................................................................................................................................... 190
Painting ........................................................................................................................................ 190
Depth Picking ............................................................................................................................... 190

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. vii

DesignModeler User's Guide

Planes and Sketches ............................................................................................................................... 193
Active Plane/Sketch Toolbar ................................................................................................................ 193
Active Plane Drop Down ............................................................................................................... 194
New Plane .................................................................................................................................... 194
Active Sketch Drop Down ............................................................................................................. 195
New Sketch .................................................................................................................................. 195
Terminology ....................................................................................................................................... 195
Reference Geometry ........................................................................................................................... 195
Point Reference ............................................................................................................................ 195
Direction Reference ...................................................................................................................... 195
Direction Reference Toggle Window ........................................................................................ 196
Plane Properties ................................................................................................................................. 197
Plane Transforms ................................................................................................................................ 198
Tangent Plane ..................................................................................................................................... 200
Plane Preview ..................................................................................................................................... 201
Rotation Axis Rules ....................................................................................................................... 202
Planar vs. Curved-Surfaces Base Faces Behavior ................................................................................... 202
Apply/Cancel in Plane ......................................................................................................................... 203
Geometry Representations .................................................................................................................... 205
3D Modeling ........................................................................................................................................... 209
Bodies and Parts ................................................................................................................................. 209
Bodies .......................................................................................................................................... 211
Body States ............................................................................................................................ 211
Body Types ............................................................................................................................. 211
Body Status ............................................................................................................................ 213
Body Inheritance .................................................................................................................... 215
Bodies Created by the ANSYS DesignModeler Application ................................................. 215
Bodies Imported from CAD ............................................................................................... 216
Parts ............................................................................................................................................. 216
Shared Topology ..................................................................................................................... 216
Examples .......................................................................................................................... 220
Shared Topology Limitations ............................................................................................. 226
Form New Part ........................................................................................................................ 226
Explode Part ........................................................................................................................... 228
Part Status .............................................................................................................................. 228
Part Persistence ...................................................................................................................... 229
Multibody Part Transfer from CAD to ANSYS DesignModeler .............................................. 229
ANSYS DesignModeler Part Manipulation .......................................................................... 230
Instancing Support ....................................................................................................................... 231
ANSYS DesignModeler Instancing ........................................................................................... 231
Transfer from CAD ............................................................................................................ 231
Creation of Instances by the Pattern Feature ...................................................................... 232
Creation of Body Instances by the Body Transformation Feature ......................................... 232
Feature Modeling's Effect on Instance Data ....................................................................... 232
Viewing Instance Data ...................................................................................................... 237
ANSYS DesignModeler Part Instance Transfer to ANSYS Mechanical ......................................... 237
Details View in Modeling Mode ........................................................................................................... 238
Details .......................................................................................................................................... 239
Units ............................................................................................................................................ 239
Information .................................................................................................................................. 240
Optimizations ............................................................................................................................... 240
Graphics ....................................................................................................................................... 242

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
viii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

DesignModeler User's Guide

Boolean Operations ............................................................................................................................ 242
Material Types .............................................................................................................................. 242
Model Size Box ............................................................................................................................. 244
Manifold Geometry ....................................................................................................................... 245
Types of Operations ............................................................................................................................ 246
Profiles ............................................................................................................................................... 246
Edit Selections for Features and Apply/Cancel ..................................................................................... 248
3D Features ........................................................................................................................................ 251
Generate ...................................................................................................................................... 252
Share Topology ............................................................................................................................. 253
Extrude ........................................................................................................................................ 255
Fixed Type .............................................................................................................................. 256
Through All Type .................................................................................................................... 257
To Next Type ........................................................................................................................... 257
To Faces Type .......................................................................................................................... 259
To Surface Type ....................................................................................................................... 259
Revolve ........................................................................................................................................ 260
Sweep .......................................................................................................................................... 261
Skin/Loft ....................................................................................................................................... 264
Thin/Surface ................................................................................................................................. 268
Blend ............................................................................................................................................ 270
Fixed Radius ........................................................................................................................... 270
Variable Radius ....................................................................................................................... 271
Vertex Blend ........................................................................................................................... 271
Selection Rules for Blends and Chamfers ................................................................................. 272
Chamfer ....................................................................................................................................... 274
Point ............................................................................................................................................ 275
Point Group Properties ........................................................................................................... 283
Point Group User Interface and Behavior ................................................................................. 283
Advanced Feature Properties ........................................................................................................ 285
Target Bodies .......................................................................................................................... 286
Merge Topology ..................................................................................................................... 288
Primitives ........................................................................................................................................... 289
Sphere .......................................................................................................................................... 289
Box ............................................................................................................................................... 290
Parallelepiped ............................................................................................................................... 291
Cylinder ........................................................................................................................................ 292
Cone ............................................................................................................................................ 293
Prism ............................................................................................................................................ 293
Pyramid ........................................................................................................................................ 294
Torus ............................................................................................................................................ 295
Bend ............................................................................................................................................ 296
Advanced Features and Tools .............................................................................................................. 297
Freeze .......................................................................................................................................... 298
Unfreeze ....................................................................................................................................... 300
Named Selection .......................................................................................................................... 301
Multiple Selection Types ......................................................................................................... 303
Named Selection Propagation ................................................................................................. 303
Named Selection after Share Topology .................................................................................... 306
Named Selection in Regions of Shared Topology (Propagate Selection “No”) ............................ 307
Attribute ...................................................................................................................................... 308
Mid-Surface .................................................................................................................................. 310

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. ix

DesignModeler User's Guide

Joint ............................................................................................................................................. 317
Enclosure ..................................................................................................................................... 322
Face Split ...................................................................................................................................... 327
Split Location Group Control via Context Menu ....................................................................... 334
Graphics Context Menu Options ............................................................................................. 336
Errors/Warnings Status of Face Split Group .............................................................................. 337
Symmetry ..................................................................................................................................... 337
Fill ................................................................................................................................................ 340
Fill Using By Cavity Method ..................................................................................................... 341
Fill Using By Caps Method ....................................................................................................... 343
Surface Extension ......................................................................................................................... 344
Surface Extension Selection Methods ...................................................................................... 345
Surface Extension Properties ................................................................................................... 348
Surface Extension User Interface and Behavior ........................................................................ 354
Surface Patch ................................................................................................................................ 357
Surface Flip ................................................................................................................................... 361
Merge .......................................................................................................................................... 363
Merging Edges ....................................................................................................................... 364
Merging Faces ........................................................................................................................ 365
Merge Automated Search ....................................................................................................... 365
Merge Properties .................................................................................................................... 366
Merge Context Menu Options ................................................................................................. 368
Connect ....................................................................................................................................... 368
Connect Properties ................................................................................................................. 369
Topological Change Occurrences ............................................................................................ 371
Release-specific Notations ...................................................................................................... 371
Connect Feature Behavior ....................................................................................................... 371
Using Connect after Share Topology ........................................................................................ 376
Connect Limitations ................................................................................................................ 378
Projection ..................................................................................................................................... 378
Edges On Body Type ............................................................................................................... 379
Edges On Face Type ................................................................................................................ 380
Points On Face Type ................................................................................................................ 381
Points On Edge Type ............................................................................................................... 381
Conversion ................................................................................................................................... 382
Conversion Context Menu Options .......................................................................................... 383
GUI Navigation: to use Conversion to cleanup a body .............................................................. 383
Pattern ......................................................................................................................................... 385
Body Operation ............................................................................................................................ 388
Body Transformation ..................................................................................................................... 395
Boolean ........................................................................................................................................ 399
Slice ............................................................................................................................................. 404
Slice by Plane .......................................................................................................................... 408
Slice Off Faces ......................................................................................................................... 408
Slice by Surface ....................................................................................................................... 409
Slice Off Edges ........................................................................................................................ 411
Slice by Edge Loop .................................................................................................................. 411
Delete .......................................................................................................................................... 413
Body Delete ............................................................................................................................ 414
Face Delete ............................................................................................................................. 414
Forms of Healing .............................................................................................................. 417
Edge Delete ............................................................................................................................ 419

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
x of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

DesignModeler User's Guide

Repair ................................................................................................................................................. 420
Automatically Finding Faults ......................................................................................................... 421
Generating the Repair Feature ...................................................................................................... 423
Viewing Faults/Results .................................................................................................................. 424
Repair Context Menu Options ....................................................................................................... 424
Repair Feature Types ..................................................................................................................... 425
Repair Hard Edges .................................................................................................................. 425
Repair Edges ........................................................................................................................... 427
Repair Seams .......................................................................................................................... 428
Repair Holes ........................................................................................................................... 429
Repair Sharp Angles ................................................................................................................ 432
Repair Slivers .......................................................................................................................... 433
Repair Spikes .......................................................................................................................... 435
Repair Faces ........................................................................................................................... 436
Analysis Tools ..................................................................................................................................... 438
Distance Finder ............................................................................................................................. 438
Entity Information ......................................................................................................................... 440
Bounding Box ............................................................................................................................... 441
Mass Properties ............................................................................................................................ 441
Fault Detection ............................................................................................................................. 442
Small Entity Search ....................................................................................................................... 442
Concept Menu .................................................................................................................................... 443
Lines From Points ......................................................................................................................... 444
Point Segments ...................................................................................................................... 445
Adding Line Bodies Created by Point Segments ....................................................................... 445
Lines From Sketches ..................................................................................................................... 446
Adding Line Bodies Created by Lines From Sketches ................................................................ 447
Lines From Edges .......................................................................................................................... 447
Edges ..................................................................................................................................... 448
Faces ...................................................................................................................................... 448
Adding Line Bodies Created by Lines From Edges .................................................................... 448
Edge Joints ............................................................................................................................. 449
3D Curve ...................................................................................................................................... 450
Split Edges .................................................................................................................................... 452
Surfaces From Edges ..................................................................................................................... 455
Edge Joints ............................................................................................................................. 456
Surfaces From Sketches ................................................................................................................ 457
Surfaces From Faces ...................................................................................................................... 458
Cross Section ................................................................................................................................ 461
Coordinate Systems for Cross Sections .................................................................................... 462
Editing Cross Sections ............................................................................................................. 462
Cross Section Assignment ....................................................................................................... 463
Cross Section Offset ................................................................................................................ 464
Cross Section Alignment ......................................................................................................... 464
Cross Section Inheritance ........................................................................................................ 468
Cross Section Types ................................................................................................................ 469
Rectangular ...................................................................................................................... 471
Circular ............................................................................................................................. 471
Circular Tube .................................................................................................................... 472
Channel Section ............................................................................................................... 473
I Section ........................................................................................................................... 474
Z Section .......................................................................................................................... 475

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xi

..................................................................... All rights reserved.......... 476 T Section .......................................................................................................................... 510 Opening ....................................................................................................... 520 Script Features .... 516 Scripting API ................................ 479 User Integrated .......................................................Contains proprietary and confidential information xii of ANSYS................................................................................................................................................... 491 Creating Parameters ...................................... 481 Deleting Cross Sections ........................................................................................ 498 Context Menus in Parameter Panes .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ............... 497 Deleting Parameters .............. 530 Form New Part (from All Bodies & Selected Bodies) .................................................................................................... 500 Parametric Functions .................. 483 Parameters ....................... 502 Electronics ........................... 511 Set ANSYS Icepak Object Type ...................... 519 Script Constants ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 501 Sending Parameters to the Mechanical Application ........ Inc........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 506 Level 0: Bounding Box .......................... 516 Revert View ............................................................................ 523 Dimensions ................................................... 522 Sketch ............... 495 Type Settings ..................................................................................................................................................................... 533 Release 15.............................................................................................................................................. 524 Units ............................ 516 Show CAD Bodies .................................................................................... 523 Constraints ...................................................... ............................................ 521 Functions within Script Features ................. 477 Hat Section ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 508 Level 3: CAD Block ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 521 Point Access Functions ............................................. 507 Level 2: Polygonal ........................................................ 526 Features within Script Features .............................................................................................................© SAS IP......................................................................................... 527 Surface from Line Edge Feature ..............................................DesignModeler User's Guide L Section .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 513 Show Ice Bodies ................. 521 Plane Access Functions ..................................................................................... 505 Simplify ................... 522 Sketch Functions ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Inc........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ and its subsidiaries and affiliates........................................................0 ...................................................................................... 526 Point ......................................................................................................................................... 521 Selection Functions ............................................................................................................................................................................... 511 Icepak Enclosure ..................................................... 529 Cross Section Feature ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 507 Level 1: Non-Polygonal Shapes ................................................................................ 480 User Defined ............................................................................ 483 Winding Tool ............................................................................................................................................................... 478 Rectangular Tube ......................................... 522 Sketch Edge Functions ....................... 499 Parametric Expressions .. 491 Parameters Windows ............................................. 482 Legacy Features ............................................................................ 531 Extrude ........................................................................................................................... 530 Plane Features .. 508 Fan ...................................................................... 526 Line from Points Feature ..

................................................................................... 555 Units ............................................. 539 Application Options in ANSYS DesignModeler ............................................................................................................................... and its subsidiaries and affiliates.................................................................................................................................................................................................................Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.........0 .................................................................. 534 Sweep .................................................................. xiii ................ Inc................. All rights reserved......................................................© SAS IP........................................................................................................................................ 545 Geometry .. 552 Toolbars ................................................................. 557 Frequently Asked Questions ..... 565 Release 15....................................................................... DesignModeler User's Guide Revolve ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 536 Skin .................. 549 Miscellaneous ......................................... 538 Features Example ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 551 Sketching ......................................... 546 Graphics ......................................................................................................... ............................... 559 Index ................ Inc..........................................................................

Release 15.© SAS IP. . . All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information xiv of ANSYS. Inc.0 . Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

cell operation and parameters in ANSYS Workbench project schematic. graphics options. Inc. graphics window. 3) section. "DesignModeler Typical Usage" (p. viewing options. 13): information about geometry system. 10): information to begin a new sketch. and properties.0 . If you are an experienced user in parametric modeling. . toolboxes. glossary. 175): detailed information about selection tools and options accessible via the Selection toolbar. and status bar. Inc. "DesignModeler 2D Sketching" (p. modeling 3D parts. All rights reserved. 1 . 10): information about feature-based func- tionality. Introduction to the Modeling Environment (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. tree outline. Note Whether new to ANSYS DesignModeler or knowledgeable about the application. "DesignModeler Selection" (p. toolbars. model display and rotation modes. and splines into 3D models. DesignModeler Application Fundamentals (p. The ANSYS DesignModeler application is a parametric feature-based solid modeler designed so that you can intuitively and quickly begin drawing 2D sketches. "DesignModeler Planes and Sketches" (p. "DesignModeler Geometry Representations" (p.DesignModeler Introduction The ANSYS DesignModeler application is designed to be used as a geometry editor of existing CAD models. 193): detailed information about the active plane and sketch functions. or uploading 3D CAD models for engineering analysis preprocessing. 139): information about the sketching mode to create a solid body from a sketch. 11): distinction of Details View in sketching and modeling modes. Sketch and Model Information (p.© SAS IP. you will find the ANSYS DesignModeler application easy to learn and use. "DesignModeler Viewing" (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. details view. "DesignModeler Menus" (p. Detailed in the ANSYS DesignModeler application help are the following primary topics: Overview (p. "DesignModeler Project Schematic Operations" (p. Introduction to Parametric Sketching and Modeling (p. your exper- ience will be enriched by reading the Overview (p. 107): information about model appearance controls. terminology. 205): information about importing geometry from CAD models into ANSYS DesignModeler in one of two geometry types: Workbench or DesignModeler. 9): information about sketching and modeling modes. Release 15. and hotkeys. 41): information about tutorials. If you have never used a parametric solid modeler. the ANSYS DesignModeler application offers you the functionality and power you need to convert 2D sketches of lines. 3): information about graphical user interface. 45): definitions and links to individual menus. arcs. systematic usage instruc- tions of features. and printing.

primitives.0 . 9) Introduction to the Modeling Environment (p. .Introduction "DesignModeler 3D Modeling" (p. All rights reserved. 505): information about tools to convert complex geometry into manageable model to perform thermal modeling analysis. "DesignModeler Scripting API" (p. 209): information about body and parts. 11) CAD Integration For detailed CAD-related information specific to the ANSYS DesignModeler application and ANSYS Workbench. "DesignModeler Frequently Asked Questions" (p. unit. The CAD Integration section includes topics about: • Overview • Geometry Interface Support for Linux and Windows • Project Schematic Presence • Mixed import Resolution • CAD Configuration Manager • Named Selection Manager • Caveats and Known Issues • Installation and Licensing • File Format Support (with information specific to DesignModeler) ACIS AutoCAD BladeGen CATIA Creo Elements/Direct Modeling Creo Parametric (formerly Pro/ENGINEER) ANSYS DesignModeler GAMBIT Release 15. parametric expressions and functions. 491): instructions to create and delete parameters. Boolean operations. and grid default options. analysis tools and legacy features. graphic. toolbar.© SAS IP. advanced features and tools. miscellaneous.Contains proprietary and confidential information 2 of ANSYS. Inc. click the Contents tab and open the CAD Integration folder in the hierarch- ical tree. 519): detailed information about use of the Scripting Ap- plication Program Interface to covert large files to geometry. "DesignModeler Application Options" (p. When accessing the ANSYS Workbench Help from the Help menu. 3D features. 10) Sketch and Model Information (p. 559): behavioral questions frequently asked about the ANSYS DesignModeler application. and sending parameters to the ANSYS Mechanical application. Inc. "DesignModeler Parameters" (p. "DesignModeler Electronics" (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 545): information about setting geometry. Related topics: DesignModeler Application Fundamentals (p. . see the CAD Integration section of the product help.

6): Located in the bottom left corner of the interface. the Tree Outline or Toolboxes are displayed depending on the mode of the application. 5.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. the Graphics window is proportion- ately the dominant region.0 . Release 15. 3. the status bar displays information about the current state of the application. Inc. there are nine toolbars.© SAS IP. 4): Located at the top of the interface. the Details View displays different types of information depending on the mode of the application. . 3 . see the Introduction. All rights reserved. 5): Located in the center of the interface. Graphics Window (p. 4. Details View (p. Toolbars (p. Tree Outline and Toolboxes (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Overview IGES Inventor JT Monte Carlo N-Particle NX Parasolid Solid Edge SolidWorks SpaceClaim STEP • ANSYS Teamcenter Connection • SpaceClaim Related to CAD Integration • Frequently Asked Questions • Troubleshooting • Glossary • Updates Overview Note For a hierarchal understanding of the ANSYS DesignModeler application. 9): Located at the bottom of the interface. 2. Status Bar (p. Inc. The graphical user interface is comprised of five basic regions: 1. 5): Located at the far left of the interface. The ANSYS DesignModeler application's interface is similar to that of most other feature-based modelers.

. Inc. see "DesignModeler 2D Sketching" (p. All rights reserved. 45) Undo/Redo toolbar: For detailed information about the contents and usage. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . 124) Graphics Options toolbar: For detailed information about the contents and usage. see File Menu (p. see Rotation Modes Toolbar (p. 139) Selection toolbar: For detailed information about the contents and usage. 123) Active Plane/Sketch toolbar: For detailed information about the contents and usage. The toolbars include: Menus toolbar: For detailed information about the contents and usage.0 .Introduction Toolbars The application displays toolbars along the top of the screen. see Graphics Options Toolbar (p.© SAS IP. 177) Rotation Modes toolbar: For detailed information about the contents and usage. Inc. see "DesignModeler Menus" (p. 45) File toolbar: For detailed information about the contents and usage.Contains proprietary and confidential information 4 of ANSYS. see Selection Tool- bar (p. see Active Plane/Sketch Toolbar (p. 193) Release 15. see Display Toolbar (p. 126) Display toolbar: For detailed information about the contents and usage.

meaning the Tree Out- line (p. 252) is displayed and the Modeling tab is displayed below at the bottom of the Tree Outline window.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 5 . See the "DesignModeler Frequently Asked Questions" (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Overview Feature toolbar: For detailed information about the contents and usage. Graphics Window The Model View tab is displayed below the window in both Sketching and Modeling mode. Inc. Likewise. To open a different toolbox. The Draw Toolbox (p. 136) tab in both Sketching and Modeling mode. You can change the default mode via the Print Preview category in the Miscellaneous section of the Options panel. select the Print Preview (p. The entire contents of a toolbox can be displayed by placing the cursor under the Sketching and Modeling tabs and the cursor down the interface with the left mouse button. 559) section for behavioral scenarios specific to the tree outline (p. 251) Tree Outline and Toolboxes By default. click on the name of the toolbox. Sketching tab Modeling tab The sketching mode displays five toolboxes described in the DesignModeler Application Fundamentals section.0 . Release 15. Selecting the Sketching tab will display the Sketching toolboxes in the same region of the in- terface. 147) is displayed by default in sketching mode. . Inc. 42). You can change the default mode via the Display category in the Miscellaneous section of the Options panel.© SAS IP. All rights reserved. see 3D Features (p. the ANSYS DesignModeler application starts in modeling mode.

All rights reserved. 252) to populate the Details View. For more information. . 559) section for behavioral scenarios specific to the Graphics window. Inc. In modeling mode. 8) Release 15. 559) section describes behavioral scenarios specific to the details view. the information in the Details View is grouped as: • Details of the object (p. Inc. .Introduction Context Menu Options Named Selection from Model View Window (p. 7) • Basic Geometry Options (p. The "DesignModeler Frequently Asked Questions" (p. click an entry in the Tree Outline (p. Specific to the Import and Attach Options (p. see Details View. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 60). 94) Note See the "DesignModeler Frequently Asked Questions" (p.© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information 6 of ANSYS.0 . For detailed information about the Details View in sketching and modeling mode see the Sketch and Model Information section of the ANSYS DesignModeler application help. Details View The Details View is populated during the sketching operation.

53) in the Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 57) in the Import External Geometry File (p. Details of the object • Source: See Attach Properties (p. • Operation: See Attach Properties (p. 53) in the Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 8) • DesignModeler Geometry Options (p.© SAS IP.0 . 7 . 51) section and Import Properties (p. 23) in the DesignModeler Application in Project Schematic (p. Inc. Inc. 35). . • Base Plane: See Attach Properties (p. See DesignModeler Application Behavior in Project Schematic (p. • Target Bodies: See Target Bodies (p. 57) in the Import External Geometry File (p. 13) for more information. 53) in the Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. 56) section for details. 9) The names of the properties listed in the Details View (shown below) are the same as those in the Properties List (p. Release 15. 56) section for details. 51) section and Import Properties (p. 51) section for details. 286) in the Advanced Feature Properties (p. All rights reserved. Overview • Advanced Geometry Options (p. 285) section for details.

• Work Points: See Import and Attach Options (p.0 . 56) section for details. .© SAS IP. 56) section for details. 60) in the Import External Geometry File (p. Advanced Geometry Options • Analysis Type • Use Associativity • Coordinate Systems: See Import and Attach Options (p. 60) in the Import External Geometry File (p. 60) in the Import External Geometry File (p.Introduction • Bodies • Refresh: See Attach Properties (p. 57) in the Import External Geometry File (p. 56) section for details. 56) section for details. 51) section and at Import Properties (p. • Line Bodies: See Body Filtering Property at Attach Properties (p. 53) in the Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. 56) section for details. 53) in the Attach to Active CAD Geo- metry (p. 51) section for details. • Attribute Key: See Import and Attach Options (p. 53) in the Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. • Parameters • Parameter Key: See Attach Properties (p. All rights reserved. 56) section for details. 60) in the Import External Geometry File (p. 57) in the Import External Geometry File (p. 51) section and at Import Properties (p. Basic Geometry Options • Solid Bodies: See Body Filtering Property at Attach Properties (p. 56) section for details. at Attach Properties (p. • Publish All Parameters • Attributes: See Import and Attach Options (p. 57) in the Import External Geometry File (p. • Named Selection Key: See Import and Attach Options (p. 53) in the Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. 56) section for details. 57) in the Import External Geometry File (p. • Surface Bodies: See Body Filtering Property at Attach Properties (p. 56) section for details. • Reader mode Saves Updated File Release 15. 51) section and at Import Properties (p. 57) in the Import External Geometry File (p. 51) section for details. 53) in the Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. 60) in the Import External Geometry File (p. 51) section and at Import Properties (p. 53) in the Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. Inc. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. • Named Selections: See Import and Attach Options (p. .Contains proprietary and confidential information 8 of ANSYS. • Material Properties: See Attach Properties (p. 53) in the Attach to Active CAD Geo- metry (p. 60) in the Import External Geometry File (p. 56) section for details. 56) section for details. 51) section and Import Properties (p.

• Clean Bodies: See Import and Attach Options (p. DesignModeler Application Fundamentals The DesignModeler application features two basic modes of operation: "DesignModeler 2D Sketch- ing" (p. • Mixed import Resolution: See Mixed import Resolution in the CAD Integration section of the ANSYS Workbench help. • Heal Bodies: See Import and Attach Options (p. and selection measurements. feature information when selected in the Graphics window. From the 2D sketches you can generate 3D solid models as described in "DesignModeler 3D Modeling" (p. • Decompose Disjoint Geometry: See Import and Attach Options (p. 56) section for details. 1. 60) in the Import External Geometry File (p. 60) in the Import External Geometry File (p. rectangles. 56) section for details. DesignModeler Geometry Options • Simplify Geometry: See Import and Attach Options (p. For details about Selection. All rights reserved. and pasting Release 15. Basic Options: Project Schematic Basic Geometry Options Advanced Options: Project Schematic Advanced Geometry Options Status Bar The status bar provides instructions in using the features. 209).Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 60) in the Import External Geometry File (p. 60) in the Import External Geometry File (p. Draw Toolbox (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 139) and "DesignModeler 3D Modeling" (p. Inc. 209). and splines 2. Sketching Mode In the Sketching mode.© SAS IP. see the following tables in Geometry Preferences. 153): modifying by trimming. Modify Toolbox (p. cutting. 60) in the Import External Geometry File (p. Inc. • GAMBIT Geometry: See Reader in the GAMBIT entry of the CAD Integration section of the ANSYS Work- bench help for more details. DesignModeler Application Fundamentals • Use Instancing • Smart CAD Update: See Import and Attach Options (p. 56) section for details. CAD Integration For more information about accessing the geometry preferences via the Geometry cell in the Project Schematic.0 . 147): drawing lines. you have five toolboxes to create 2D sketches by adding and removing 2D edges. . 56) section for details. see the Selection category in the Geometry section of the Options panel. 56) section for details. 9 .

Constraints Toolbox (p. More generally. Introduction to the Modeling Environment The DesignModeler application is a parametric feature-based modeler. 261). and concentricity constraints.© SAS IP. 168): applying tangent. such as Extrude (p. 255) or Sweep (p.0 . symmetry. you are presented with three mutually perpendicular planes. Because the DesignModeler application is a feature-based modeler. You can select a different sketch from the feature Tree Outline (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 10 of ANSYS. However not all features.” To make an existing sketch the active sketch. require you to create sketches prior to their definition. Some features. In the DesignModeler application. Only a single sketch can be worked on at a time. Before a sketch can be used to create a feature. the features shown in the feature Tree Outline (p. All sketches are attached to unique planes. Release 15. 264) and Sweep (p. features are collections of geo- metric shapes with which you add or cut material from a model. . 252) list all of the operations used to create the model. Inc. 5. 10) Introduction to Parametric Sketching and Modeling Before starting a new model in the DesignModeler application. Its modeling paradigm is to sketch 2D profiles and use them to generate features. or even inserted into the middle of the feature list. As you become acquainted with the tools and controls. The last sketch/plane that you worked on is the "active" sketch/plane. 270) and Chamfer (p. 274). Inc. . such as Blend (p. You can use the sketching toolbox to draw edges on the planes. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the YZPlane and the ZXPlane). and angle 4. 252) to change this input. you can add dimensions or constraints between edges of different sketches in the active plane. This feature list represents the model's history. you must define it on a plane. in the DesignModeler application you can apply features to the task of enhancing your models for the purpose of engineering simulation. In CAD systems. Dimensions Toolbox (p. deleted. All rights reserved. require you to create sketches. 193). 261) that require more than one sketch as input. Features may be modified and the model rebuilt to reflect your changes. Similarly. you can also use features to slice a model into separate bodies for improved mesh generation or to imprint faces for patch loading. the active sketch is the default input for that feature creation. 195) menu in the Active Plane/Sketch Toolbar (p. for example. 252) is used for sketch selections. 252) or in the Active Sketch Drop Down (p. A sketch is always required at the start of creating a new model. If any of the feature construction tools are selected.Introduction 3. Features may also be suppressed. by extruding or revolving profiles from your sketches. for features like Skin/Loft (p. corresponding to the three mutually perpendicular planes in the Cartesian co- ordinate system (the XYPlane. 173): plane settings such as grid and grid spacing Modeling Mode The Modeling mode allows you to create models. Even though you can only add edges to the active sketch. diameter. This sketch is the “active sketch. the feature Tree Outline (p. You can then select the sketching tab to enter the sketching mode and edit the sketch. Settings Toolbox (p. you will quickly feel comfortable using the DesignModeler application for sketching and modeling tasks. select the sketch object in the feature Tree Outline (p. The edges form the sketches used for feature creation. 163): defining dimensions in length/distance. Introduction to Parametric Sketching and Modeling (p.

Features can only be defined using entire sketches. 252) icon to update the model. 252) will display corresponding specifics in the Details View (p. A plane can have any number of sketches attached to it. Sketch and Model Information New planes can be inserted in the model by clicking the New Plane (p.© SAS IP. or by checking the "driven" check mark (if available) next to the feature or plane dimensions. and change them to generate different model configurations. The Generate (p. This is required in many instances because different features created on a plane may use different profiles. Inc. for use in feature creation. Depending on the mode of the ANSYS DesignModeler session.0 . 238) In general. You are free to specify any number of such changes before using the Generate (p. see: Details View in Sketching Mode (p. Related Topics: • Details View Release 15. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The left column typically lists the non-editable details of the object. 252) icon updates the model after a dimension or parameter change is made. Inc. You can add these dimensions at any time. You will then be prompted for input to clearly define the plane using the different options available. 6) provides information about the highlighted object in the feature Tree Outline (p. modeling or sketching properties. For example. 194) icon in the Active Plane/Sketch Toolbar (p. All rights reserved. Extrusions have a depth. 6) and Graphics window. • Design Parameters: You can promote both feature dimensions and plane dimensions to "design parameters" using the Parameters tool. 143) Details View in Modeling Mode (p. ignoring others. Note The DesignModeler application distinguishes dimensions as: • Feature Dimensions: The features themselves have defining dimensions. the Details View (p. 11 . and then pass them into the ANSYS Mechanical application for parametric studies. Fixed Blends have a blend radius.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The information is displayed in two columns. and geometry options. and Revolves have an angle of revolution. The inform- ation in the right column is typically editable so that you may refine the details and change the options. 193). • Plane Dimensions: You can dimension the edges in the planes/sketches. . 252). Sketch and Model Information Selecting an object in the feature Tree Outline (p. The DesignModeler application does not allow you to select certain portions of a sketch.

© SAS IP. Release 15. All rights reserved. .Contains proprietary and confidential information 12 of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. .0 . Inc.

Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. When a system is first created. Release 15. It is denoted by a gray box icon. Creating Independent Systems Double-clicking the Geometry item in the Component Systems toolbox will create a new stand-alone geometry system in the project schematic.© SAS IP. The systems and components that you add to your project appear here. Component Geometry systems are simply named “Geometry” by default. Access to the geometry system is available in the project toolbox under the Component Systems group in the Toolbox.0 . Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. you have the option to rename it. 13 . 37) • Licensing (p. For a basic understanding of the geometry system and cell operations. 28) • DesignModeler Application in Project Schematic (p. 35) • CAD in Project Schematic (p. 13) • Parameters in Project Schematic (p. Inc. as well as all the links between them and the parameter bar. . 38) DesignModeler Application Behavior in Project Schematic The Project Schematic is a region of the ANSYS Workbench interface where you will manage your project. All rights reserved.DesignModeler Project Schematic Operations Geometry imported into the Project Schematic is integrated via the DesignModeler application. see: • DesignModeler Application Behavior in Project Schematic (p.

20) Update (p. 15) Import Geometry (p. 18) Replace Geometry (p. 19) Transfer Data to New (p. . File Reference If a geometry cell contains a reference to a file that is not present. 21) Reset (p. 28) • File Management (p. Inc.Project Schematic Operations For information about creating linked systems. Note that context menu items that appear in bold font in the user interface represent the default action when you double- clicks the cell. 16) Edit (p. Other behavioral operations include: • Context Menu Operations (p. see Creating and Linking a Second System. Operations include: New Geometry (p.© SAS IP. 14) • Properties List (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. a small red exclamation icon will appear next to it. indicating that the file is missing. 23) • Project Files List (p. 21) Stop (p.0 . 26) • License Preferences (p. 21) Refresh (p. 25) • Data Sharing and Data Transfer (p. 19) Transfer Data from New (p. 18) Duplicate (p. All rights reserved. 22) Release 15. Inc. . 28) Context Menu Operations The following operations are applicable from the context menu of geometry cells.Contains proprietary and confidential information 14 of ANSYS. 20) Update From CAD (p.

that SpaceClaim session becomes disconnected from ANSYS Workbench. Inc. 79). Release 15. If you Edit the geometry again from the cell. either DesignModeler or SpaceClaim Direct Modeler. 15 . DesignModeler Application Behavior in Project Schematic Rename (p. Select Options> Geometry Import> Preferred Geometry Editor to set the default editor. the model is automat- ically saved into a temporary folder. You may open other documents in SpaceClaim. the model is opened as it was before.© SAS IP. The editor that you select is shown in bold. If you close the connected document. 23) Quick Help (p. The geometry will be created from scratch in the DesignModeler application. as if you had started SpaceClaim stand-alone from the Start menu. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. Inc. but these will have the regular docu- ment tab icon. That document is connected to the geometry cell.0 . Specific to SpaceClaim: The New SpaceClaim Geometry command starts a SpaceClaim session with an empty design.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Each geometry cell starts a separate SpaceClaim session. 23) New Geometry This context menu item will launch a new session of the DesignModeler application when there are no input files specified in the geometry cell. . Note You can choose either DesignModeler (the default) or SpaceClaim Direct Modeler (SCDM) via the Tools Menu (p. which is the command that is executed if you double-click. When the connected document is closed or when SpaceClaim is closed by you. and its document tabs are shown with the yellow ANSYS Workbench icon. This is the default action when you double-clicks an empty geometry cell. 22) Properties (p.

. Import . Click right mouse button on geometry cell and click on "Edit Geometry in SpaceClaim Direct Modeler. The document names of the active CAD files will appear. • Browse from Repository: This spawns a file selection dialog in which you may browse for a file to import from the EKM Repository. the active model will be loaded into the geometry cell and added to the recent file list for quick access later. The workaround here is to start another SpaceClaim Direct Modeler session using the following steps: 1. 2) Open Workbench via SpaceClaim Direct Modeler (click on 15. see Opening a Project Containing Repository Files.Project Schematic Operations There is no need to use the Save command in SpaceClaim for a document connected to WB. • Active CADs: Up to four active CAD models will be displayed in this list. there will be no affect on the geometry cell inside Workbench.0 button in Prepare tab). The submenu contains three fields: • Browse: This spawns a file selection dialog in which you may browse for a file to import.0 button in Prepare tab to launch Workbench. If a CAD system is open.scdoc file in SpaceClaim Direct Modeler and click on 15. The second document cannot be connected to Workbench as there is already one document connected to Work- bench. Release 15. but does not contain an active document. Only one document inside SpaceClaim Direct Modeler session is allowed to connect with a geometry cell in Workbench. Create another geometry system in the existing Workbench session 2. Inc. You can see the geometry cell created inside Workbench. All rights reserved. A SpaceClaim session that is connected to ANSYS Workbench is closed when the Workbench project is closed.scdoc file using geometry cell's context menu. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. It is harmless if you use Save or Save As. because this will not affect the path used to save the document for ANSYS Workbench. • Recent Files: Up to four recently used files will be displayed in this list.".0 . . Inc.© SAS IP. It is also closed when the Stop (stop editing) or Reset (start from scratch) commands are used. that file path will be loaded into the geometry cell and added to the top of the recent file list for quick access later. Now if you open another . Only the file names are listed and not their full paths. the file path will be loaded into the geometry cell and the moved to the top of the recent file list for quick access later. For more information..scdoc file.. Import Geometry This fly-out menu will appear in the context menu when there are no files specified in the geometry cell. Once chosen. CAD systems that have unsaved documents will also be blocked. then it will appear in this group as disabled and report “No active document”. SpaceClaim Direct Modeler Caveats: 1) Open SpaceClaim Direct Modeler and import any . If chosen. 3. and when ANSYS Workbench is closed.Contains proprietary and confidential information 16 of ANSYS. If chosen.

this starts an ANSYS Workbench session. or any of the most recently used files at the bottom are chosen. This copy will be saved with the system name (e. Inc. this cell will automatically be connected to the active model of the SpaceClaim session that launched ANSYS Workbench. The middle section of the Import Geometry context menu is shown only if there are one or more running CAD sessions. • If the document has been saved. • If the document has not been saved. you will see the disabled entry for the SpaceClaim active model. Only documents that have been saved can be connected to. 17 . Inc. and creates an initial geometry cell. This comes about either because SpaceClaim was started from the Start menu and the WB button in SpaceClaim has not been used. even before it is saved. . instead of the name of the file that was imported. and the SpaceClaim document tabs will change to show the yellow ANSYS Workbench icon. a connection is immediately made to that SpaceClaim session. If you use the Import Geometry command. or the WB button has been used.g. The entries show CAD active models. and when it later gets saved. With SpaceClaim.scdoc”). this will import that file into the SpaceClaim. but the active document has not been saved. If the Browse command at the top of the context menu is chosen. as if you had just created a standalone geometry system form the toolbox.scdoc or another file type that SpaceClaim can open. because the path is needed to restore the state of the geometry cell if the project is saved and later reopened. If it cannot be opened by SpaceClaim. When the WB button is used. “Geom. if it has been saved. SpaceClaim active models are the active documents in SpaceClaim sessions that are not already connected to WB. a copy will be saved inside the project folder (along with copies of any external scdocs). pressing the WB button simply brings that Workbench session to the front. otherwise it shows the display name (e.g.0 . this is only if those sessions are not already connected to a geometry cell. If a SpaceClaim active model is chosen. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. which should be enough to remind you to save the document. DesignModeler Application Behavior in Project Schematic Specific to SpaceClaim: Import Geometry is an alternative to New SpaceClaim Geometry. All rights reserved. the initial geometry cell will be empty. The file can be an . and is for using an existing file. because the file exists outside the project folder. When the Edit command is then used. The term is “import”. and the document tabs will change to show the yellow ANSYS Workbench icon.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Release 15. The active model entry shows the name of the file. If the SpaceClaim session is already connected to a Workbench session. a message is shown when the Edit command is chosen. this selects a file. “Design1”) and the entry is disabled.© SAS IP. and the document tab shows this name too.

Contains proprietary and confidential information 18 of ANSYS. you must first break the shared link Specific to SpaceClaim: The Edit operation will also appear when the cell has a SpaceClaim file defined. . or agdb file defined. Its contents and behavior are exactly the same as Import Geometry above. active CAD model. If a file is specified but is a type that cannot be edited in the DesignModeler application. such as FEDB or ANF.0 . Release 15. If you choose the Edit option while the DesignModeler application's editor for that system is already open. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. then it will simply switch focus to that open editor. It is the default action when a user double-clicks the geometry cell under these conditions. then the Edit option will appear but is disabled. All rights reserved.Project Schematic Operations Edit The Edit context menu option will appear when the geometry cell already has a CAD file. To edit the cell. Inc. . Replace Geometry This option will appear whenever you have geometry defined in the geometry cell and the DesignModeler editor is not currently open. Inc.© SAS IP. the Edit operation will appear disabled in the context menu. In these cases. You may not edit geometry on a cell if it has a shared connection with an upstream cell. The option will NOT appear if the geometry cell is empty.

Transfer Data from New This operation will create a Provides-To type connection between a new upstream system and the se- lected geometry cell.© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Release 15. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. DesignModeler Application Behavior in Project Schematic Duplicate This operation will copy the current system to a new system. then a new system is created and any cells above the geometry cell will be shared: If you perform a duplicate operation on a cell below the geometry cell. then geometry will be shared between the source system and the duplicated system: Lastly. then the geometry cell will be shared and it will be shaded in gray to indicate that the shared link cannot be broken: See Data Sharing for more information on this topic. . then the data is simply copied as a new independent system: If you perform a duplicate on the geometry cell where the cell is part of a larger system. If the system is a utility geometry system. Inc. Inc. All rights reserved. if a duplicate operation is performed at a level below the model cell. 19 .0 .

Contains proprietary and confidential information 20 of ANSYS. Release 15. After selecting a system in the flyout menu. forcing it to regenerate using the latest set of active design parameters. Update The Update context operation will trigger an update event on the geometry cell. Workbench will create the new system to the right of the current system and establish a Provides-To connection from the geometry cell to that new system.Project Schematic Operations After selecting one of the systems in the fly-out menu. . . and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. Transfer Data to New This operation will create a Provides-To type connection between the selected geometry cell and a new downstream system.0 . Workbench will create the new system to the left of the current system and establish a Provides-To connection to the selected geometry cell. Inc. Inc. All rights reserved.

Any CAD parameters that have been promoted to design parameters in Workbench will be overwritten with the new parameter values coming from the CAD system.0 . The Refresh menu item is not applicable when there are no upstream changes to consume. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Refresh The Refresh command will force the DesignModeler application to refresh its upstream input data. The operation will terminate the editor and discard any changes you have made since the DesignModeler application's data was last saved.© SAS IP. 21 . Inc. This signals to downstream cells that their upstream data has changed. It allows users to perform a refresh operation from the CAD system. Update From CAD The Update From CAD operation will appear when the source geometry comes from an external CAD system that has not been edited in the DesignModeler application. Up- stream input data can come from a Provides-To connection supplying data to the geometry cell or parameter changes made in ANSYS Workbench that have not yet been consumed by the DesignModeler application's editor. DesignModeler Application Behavior in Project Schematic Specific to SpaceClaim: Because SpaceClaim models do not need regenerating. . and then changed back to “up to date”. When a change is made in SpaceClaim. updating both the geometry and design parameters with the values currently in the CAD model. the model state is always “up to date” and the Update command is always enabled. Release 15. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. the model state is briefly changed to “needs updating”. Stop The Stop operation will appear only when the DesignModeler application's editor is open. All rights reserved.

Reset The Reset option will delete any geometry files associated with the cell and clear its contents. Rename Renames the selected cell. this is reflected in the SpaceClaim title bar. Release 15. If you rename the geometry system (double-click on the name beneath it). When a change is made in SpaceClaim.Project Schematic Operations Specific to SpaceClaim: Because SpaceClaim models do not need regenerating.0 . • The geometry data object is cleared so that no geometry source is listed. and then changed back to “up to date”. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Several things happen during this operation: • If the DesignModeler application is currently open. Inc. the state is always “up to date” and the Update command is always enabled.Contains proprietary and confidential information 22 of ANSYS.© SAS IP. Inc. • Any files registered in the project files list by that geometry cell will be unregistered. This signals to downstream cells that their upstream data has changed. the model state is briefly changed to “needs updating”. . then it will be closed and your changes will be discarded. All rights reserved. . Specific to SpaceClaim: The Rename operation refers to renaming the geometry cell rather than the geometry system of which it is a part.

© SAS IP. If the source file is CAD. This is the same help dialog that appears when clicking the blue triangle in the geometry cell.0 . Note that the CAD Plug-In property in the image below will appear only when an appropriate plug-in is defined for the selected geometry source. . DesignModeler Application Behavior in Project Schematic Properties Displays the Properties pane. Properties List Each geometry cell contains a list of import preferences. The item should not appear if the Properties pane is already visible. Release 15. Inc. When a geometry cell is created. All rights reserved. Once a CAD file has been edited in DesignModeler . The import preferences listed for that cell in the property view will be used when importing the geometry into an editor. These preferences should appear in the prop- erties pane when you enable property viewing in the project schematic.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. 23 . it should inherit its initial settings from the preferences listed under the Geometry Import section of the Options Dialog. the preferences then dictate the settings for transferring DesignModeler geometry to a downstream application. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. then those preferences are used to import the geometry into either the DesignModeler application or Mechanical/Mesh applications' editors. Quick Help Launches the quick help dialog.

which it should inherit from the geometry cell. It will not filter parameters that are defined in DesignModeler. You are permitted to alter import preferences on the Import and Attach features at any time. Note that the Parameter Key property will filter parameters from CAD that enter Workbench. . . All rights reserved. Release 15.© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information 24 of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc.0 . Specific to SpaceClaim: The Import feature cannot be used with SpaceClaim to re-import later and update the SpaceClaim document.Project Schematic Operations DesignModeler will continue to display the import preferences in its Import and Attach features. Inc.

© SAS IP. files are listed from three sources: • agdb and scdoc files used in the project schematic • Imported CAD files used in those agdb files • CAD files used in the project schematic Note that files used in the agdb files may not appear until the agdb has been opened in DesignModeler. A typical project file list may look like this: Release 15. Project Files List The Project files pane will display a list of files used in the project. Inc. . however those settings will be read-only.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. All rights reserved. Inc. In this case. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.0 . changes to the preferences should be applied in the project schematic. 25 . DesignModeler Application Behavior in Project Schematic The ANSYS Mechanical application will also display the geometry import preferences in its user interface. For geometry.

Connection Types There are two connection types in the project schematic: • Shares-With : The data is shared between the two cells. Inc. Shares-With Links The geometry cell can establish a Shares-With connection to any other geometry cell in the project by dragging and dropping cells onto each other. Changes to the upstream cell will mark the downstream cell as Refresh Required. A missing file will not necessarily impact the state of the geometry cell itself. . you will see the properties of the geometry cell change to reflect the new file chosen. Provides-To connections are denoted by a round connector. any system with a geometry cell should have the ability to share or provide data to other systems. the cell’s state can indicate Up-To-Date while its source file is missing. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information 26 of ANSYS. After repairing a missing geometry file. They can be recovered using the context menu option to repair the file. In general. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. A geometry cell may share its data with any number of Release 15. The Type field will identify files registered by the modeling applications as “Geometry File”. Data Sharing and Data Transfer The geometry cell’s data may be shared among several systems by dragging and dropping systems on top of each other. • Provides-To: The upstream cell provides input data to the downstream cell.© SAS IP. Missing files will appear in red text.0 .Project Schematic Operations Files registered by DesignModeler will display the generic gray geometry icon. meaning there is really just one underlying data object serving both cells. Changes made to one cell immediately affect the other because they are essentially the same data. . that is. Shares-With connections are denoted by a square connector. All rights reserved.

and its subsidiaries and affiliates. then it must be edited in the DesignModeler application before it can be transferred to Mechanical APDL. the file type will be FEDB and the geometry will not be editable in the DesignModeler application. IGES. then. If you have performed real geometry conversion in FE Modeler. DesignModeler Application Behavior in Project Schematic downstream cells. This connection is possible only if the geometry is from the DesignModeler application with the BladeEditor application active. If any other file type is present in the geometry cell.0 . and STEP files directly from the geometry cell without needing the DesignModeler application. Otherwise. then the file type will be x_t and you may edit it in the DesignModeler application. All rights reserved. 27 . Specific to SpaceClaim: SpaceClaim does not support any of the above export types. Receives From Likewise. Release 15.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. For more details see DesignModeler to Icepak in the Workbench User Guide. . • Finite Element Model (Setup cell): The geometry cell will receive either an FEDB file or Parasolid x_t file from FE Modeler. it is ex- ported to a model file which the Icepak system then consumes. • Vista TF (Setup cell): Geometry is exported to a GEO file which Vista TF consumes. Inc. as shown in system B of the project schematic below: Provides-To Links The geometry cell can provide data to downstream systems with a Provides-To link. it must be edited in the DesignModeler application before it can be transferred to ANSYS Icepak. Geometry must be edited in the DesignModeler application using the BladeEditor application before it can be used in an analysis. • Mechanical APDL (Analysis cell): If the geometry cell contains the DesignModeler application geometry. This connection is possible only if the geometry is from the DesignModeler application with the BladeEditor application active. but it can only receive shared data from a single source. it is exported to an ANF file which the Mechanical APDL system then consumes. the geometry cell can receive input data from several upstream sources: • TurboGrid (Blade Design cell): The geometry cell receives data in the form of a BGD file. If any other file type is present in the geometry cell. It can also read Parasolid.© SAS IP. Those systems that can receive transfer data from the geometry cell are: • Icepak (Setup cell): If the geometry cell contains the DesignModeler application geometry. • TurboGrid (TurboMesh cell): Geometry is exported to the TurboGrid system.

For more information see Project File Management. 34) DesignModeler Application Parameter Publishing The DesignModeler application publishes its parameters directly to ANSYS Workbench upon their creation. such as when the data needs to be read from a downstream cell. the permanent project file’s agdb is updated while the temporary file is deleted. This temporary save also occurs when an update is performed in the project schematic. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. . 28) • CAD Parameter Publishing (p. Additionally. the changes are not committed to the project until you select the Save Project operation. Temporary Files In ANSYS Workbench. . The default setting is ANSYS DesignModeler. before saving at the project level. 32) • Changing Parameters in the DesignModeler Application (p. Once a parameter is published. Other parameter operations include: • DesignModeler Application Parameter Publishing (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 28 of ANSYS. If ANSYS BladeModeler is the preferred geometry license. If you select Save As or exit/close the DesignModeler application. Inc. File Management ANSYS Workbench’s file management system keeps multiple databases under a single project. Parameters in Project Schematic Geometry parameter publishing behaves differently depending on which application is publishing the parameters. though it depends on the licenses installed on the license server. the changes are stored in a temporary file and a “Saving File” message displays in the status bar. then the DesignModeler application will start with BladeEditor enabled in its user interface. 34) • Parameter Units (p. 31) • Mechanical Parameter Publishing (p. the applications function as editors. This behavior is different than most other applications. When you perform the Save Project operation. Selecting the parameter bar will reveal a list of design parameters that the you may modify in ANSYS Workbench.Project Schematic Operations License Preferences The DesignModeler application's editor should be launched using the license specified in the geometry license preference from the Licensing Preferences Dialog. 33) • Updating Parameters from CAD (p. If you edit a model in the DesignModeler application.0 . you may continue to edit design parameter values in the DesignModeler application after it has published them to Workbench. a parameter bar will appear below the system in the project schematic. Inc. as well as which source the parameters come from. but it allows Release 15. 33) • Changing Parameters in ANSYS Workbench (p.© SAS IP.

All rights reserved. Any changes made in the DesignModeler application will be reflected in the Workbench parameter manager after the next evaluation. ANSYS Workbench Release 15. Parameters in Project Schematic the DesignModeler application users the flexibility of modifying parameters without having to toggle back and forth between Workbench and the DesignModeler application's editor. Inc. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. or toggle of a parameter manager pane in the DesignModeler application.© SAS IP. Any design parameter created in DesignModeler will immediately appear in the project schematic’s parameter table. The DesignModeler application’s parameters are not filtered by the Parameter Key property of the geometry cell in the project schematic.0 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 29 . which occurs during any generate.

deleted.agdb file is selected as a source geometry file and has not yet been opened. • SpaceClaim Model Opened in DesignModeler: Parameters must be promoted from DesignModeler (External CAD Mode) • SpaceClaim Model Opened in Meshing/Mechanical: Parameters must be promoted from Mesh- ing/Mechanical (External CAD Mode). . its parameters will not be published until the DesignModeler application's editor is opened or until the geometry is accessed by a downstream consumer. Specific to SpaceClaim: Parameters in SpaceClaim are known as Group Dimensions. All rights reserved. All parameter pro- motion must be manually done within the host application. the values in Workbench are not updated until the Update Parameters command is executed from the SpaceClaim Prepare tab. Parameter publishing within Workbench differs depending on how SpaceClaim is connected to the Geometry system (Addin mode or as an Ex- ternal CAD system).0 . or renamed.© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information 30 of ANSYS. the Parameter Set in Workbench is updated immediately. Inc. .Project Schematic Operations DesignModeler application If an . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The published parameters will only be visible in the Geometry properties view when SpaceClaim is connected to the Geometry system as an external CAD system. • SpaceClaim Model Opened in SpaceClaim: All parameters are published and promoted automatically (Geometry Editor Mode) • SpaceClaim Model Opened in DesignModeler: Parameters must be promoted from DesignModeler (External CAD Mode) • SpaceClaim Model Opened in Meshing/Mechanical: All parameters are published and promoted automatically (Geometry Editor Mode) External CAD (Plugin) Mode Parameter Publishing Parameters are not automatically published when SpaceClaim is connected to the Geometry system as an external CAD system. Inc. Addin Mode Parameter Publishing When parameters are created. When parameter values are changed from within SpaceClaim. Release 15.

. you may unpublish specific parameters by unchecking the corresponding boxes. all parameters are published to Workbench during the next update of the CAD source. 6). 31 . Release 15. When the Publish All Parameters property is set to Yes. CAD Parameter Publishing When a CAD file is imported into the DesignModeler application.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. but can be promoted by you clicking the check box. These parameters are not exposed to Workbench. Inc. Afterwards.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. all parameters are imported to the Design- Modeler application but not published. its parameters are listed in the Attach feature’s Details View (p.0 . Parameters in Project Schematic Basic Geometry Options When the Publish All Parameters property is set to No. All rights reserved.

Inc. . where you can manually choose to publish them to Workbench. Specific to SpaceClaim: Parameters from other CAD files are not imported into SpaceClaim. All rights reserved. Release 15.Project Schematic Operations CAD files that are imported by the ANSYS Mechanical application are published by you while in the Mechanical application. but it only if the geometry source is a CAD system and not from the DesignModeler application. To change them. 6).© SAS IP. Mechanical Parameter Publishing The ANSYS Mechanical application will publish geometry parameters as well. • From CAD: The ANSYS Mechanical application will list the parameters in its Details View (p. but parameters created in SpaceClaim are transferred to ANSYS Workbench. The CAD parameter values will be read-only in the Mechanical application.Contains proprietary and confidential information 32 of ANSYS. Publishing of the DesignModeler application parameters is handled solely by the DesignModeler application. 6). .0 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. you must promote the values to Workbench. • From DesignModeler: The ANSYS Mechanical application will neither publish parameters from the DesignModeler application nor display them in its Details View (p. Inc.

Upon regaining focus. Parameters in Project Schematic ANSYS Workbench Mechanical Changing Parameters in the DesignModeler Application Typically changing a parameter in the DesignModeler application will mark its state as modified. Inc. 33 . and prompt them to refresh input data with a dialog box: Release 15. then it will remain that way. setting its corresponding geometry cell into an Update Required state.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. All rights reserved. . those applications that are affected by the change will set their cell state to Refresh Required. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. Changing Parameters in ANSYS Workbench Changing a parameter value in Workbench does not immediately send the change to all active editors. the DesignModeler application's editor will then inform you that upstream data has changed. If the cell’s state is already Update Required. Inc. Instead. The parameter change will immediately be reflected in Workbench after the next evaluation.0 .

0 .© SAS IP. Choosing No. even if you change the session units in DesignModeler. You may choose to update using the CAD’s geometry parameters or the set of parameters listed in the DesignModeler application. . Updating Parameters from CAD CAD updates are handled differently in the DesignModeler application and the ANSYS Mechanical ap- plication. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. it handles CAD updates in its Attach feature. Parameter Units ANSYS Workbench supports units for both design parameters and "DesignModeler Parameters" (p. but the cell state in the schematic will remain as Refresh Required until a refresh is performed in the application. 491). . All rights reserved. Since the DesignModeler application supports multiple imports. Furthermore. Inc. it will continue to publish in the Project units. • Update From CAD: This will refresh the geometry in the ANSYS Mechanical application using the CAD file’s own parameter values. Release 15. will not update parameters in the DesignModeler application's editor. This allows persistence of the promoted parameters in the event that the filter is reverted back to any previous filter. DesignModeler application • DesignModeler: The CAD file is updated using the Attach feature’s Refesh property. the CAD parameter values are pushed back to Work- bench. while the Mechanical application uses ANSYS Workbench to handle parameters. The geometry will be refreshed using CAD parameters from Workbench.Contains proprietary and confidential information 34 of ANSYS.Project Schematic Operations Clicking Yes to the dialog will import the latest parameter values from Workbench. all previously promoted parameters remain in the Parameter Manager and the ANSYS Workbench project schematic. Once a parameter is posted to the Project Schematic page. When the parameter filter is changed and the source file remains unchanged. if they were published. Mechanical application The CAD is updated using the geometry cell’s Update and Update From CAD context menu options: • Update: Marks the geometry cell as changed so that the ANSYS Mechanical application will need to refresh its input data. along with any up- stream input data that has not been consumed.

or for values that do not have a unit type. . All rights reserved. Therefore. each with their own geometry. Changes made to the system name or letter assignment in the project schematic will be immediately reflected in your interface of the editor. Release 15. • The Save Project command is enabled. Specific to SpaceClaim: There are various ways to tell that a SpaceClaim session is connected to an ANSYS Workbench geometry cell: • You can see some yellow ANSYS Workbench document tab icons. Inc. DesignModeler Application in Project Schematic Multiple Windows Since the project schematic may have many systems. To distinguish between them. the window’s title bar will indicate the system letter and system name that the geometry editor is associated with. see Type Settings (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. it is likely a user will want to edit several geometries at the same time. Dimensionless is used for CAD parameters. DesignModeler Application in Project Schematic You can use the arrow following the units in the Project Schematic page to change what unit that a parameter is displayed in. 497). 252)’s root node. 35 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. This name will also be displayed in the feature Tree Outline (p. • The SpaceClaim title bar shows the system ID and name.0 . several modeling windows may be open at once. Inc.© SAS IP. minus the “DesignModel- er” suffix. The windows operate independently of each other. For more information. Note Parameters imported from CAD systems remain Dimensionless.

but a few changes from ANSYS Workbench will impact their behavior: • Preferences: The initial geometry import preferences loaded into the feature will now come from ANSYS Workbench. Inc. Note A sketch created with exactly 1000 cubic kilometers sides symmetric in all directions to the origin may not be usable with features such as Extrude. Once the feature has been created in the DesignModeler ap- plication. Surfaces From Sketches. Inc. Import and Attach These features work the same as before. etc. .Project Schematic Operations Units The ANSYS DesignModeler application can inherit Units of both length and angle from the project schematic. There are two cases: Geometry cell Edit: If a user edits a CAD file selected in the geometry cell in the project schematic. Use the Refresh option in ANSYS Workbench to use the parameter values from Workbench. Save Project Sends an event back to the ANSYS Workbench telling it to save the project. Release 15.© SAS IP. then the import preferences from geometry cell’s properties are used to initialize the Import or Attach feature. preference changes in the geometry cell no longer control the Import or Attach. Specific to SpaceClaim: This is on the Application menu in SpaceClaim. To enable this.Contains proprietary and confidential information 36 of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Specific to SpaceClaim: Project units are not used in SpaceClaim. Upstream data could come from up to three sources: • Finite Element Modeler: A Parasolid x_t file generated in FE Modeler. If the project has never been saved before. Refresh Input This operation re-reads the latest upstream data.0 . . a file save dialog will appear. All rights reserved. the corresponding option is to be set as “Use Project Unit” in the Design- Modeler Options dialog box. • BladeGen : A BGD file to be consumed by BladeEditor • Parameters: Changes to design parameters in ANSYS Workbench Specific to SpaceClaim: The Refresh Input option does not exist in SpaceClaim.

Regarding the handling of CAD parameters. you will see a CAD Materials property appear in the Engineering Data pane. Closing the DesignModeler Application When you close the DesignModeler application. Clicking Workbench will launch ANSYS Workbench and create a utility geometry system.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. CAD in Project Schematic New Import ort Attach: If the Import or Attach feature is created manually by a user in the DesignModeler application.0 . see the Parameters in Project Schematic (p. Selecting the CAD Materials property will then display the materials from the imported geometry. In previous releases. When the import completes. CAD Configuration Manager The CAD Configuration Manager allows you to reconfigure Workbench CAD connections. 37 . but the DesignModeler application only holds the materials – it will not publish them to Engineering Data until the model enters the ANSYS Mechanical application. You will see the names of the materials assigned to bodies in the DesignModeler application.© SAS IP. All rights reserved. Material Processing Material properties imported from CAD will be published to Engineering Data when the model is read into the Mechanical editor if the Material Properties option in the geometry cell’s properties list is checked. changes are automatically saved to the temporary file. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 28) section. Release 15. In lieu of a prompt being given.0 program group under the Utilities submenu. then the initial import preferences are fetched from the ANSYS Workbench preference manager. you are likely to see a “Saving File…” message in the status bar. Inc. you needed to reinstall Workbench to reset their CAD configuration. with the active CAD selected as the source file for the geometry cell. The utility is accessible from the ANSYS 15. . • Registration: The imported files will now be registered in the Project Files list upon generation. CAD in Project Schematic Launching ANSYS Workbench from CAD Systems The ANSYS 15. CAD Materials are NOT immediately published when imported into the DesignModeler application. Inc.0 menu should appear in the CAD systems with a menu item to launch ANSYS Workbench.

Windows Installation Guide. Linux Installation Guide. Inc. All rights reserved. Each DesignModeler application session needs a separate license. .0 . some of which allow for shared licensing among other applications.Project Schematic Operations Linux: For additional information about using this tool to setup your ANSYS CAD products see Using the CAD Configuration Manager on Linux in the ANSYS. . One license will be checked out for each session of the DesignModeler application that is running. The above rule regarding multiple the DesignModeler application sessions still applies with shared licensing – there must be a separate license for each instance of the DesignModeler application that is running. DesignModeler: This runs just the DesignModeler application. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information 38 of ANSYS. Release 15. although the DesignModeler application does not support license sharing.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Licensing Multiple DesignModeler Application Sessions You can have multiple DesignModeler application sessions running simultaneously. Inc. License Types There are three license keys that the DesignModeler application can run with. Inc. Shared Licensing The DesignModeler application has the ability to run under several license keys. Windows: For additional information about using this tool to setup your ANSYS CAD products see Using the CAD Configuration Manager in the ANSYS.

This license type allows multiple BladeGen sessions to run together.0 . The other running applications will often pause/unpause their ap- plications. Academic: This license is a generic type that will allow practically any application to run under a single license. including the ANSYS Mechanical application and CFX. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. while the DesignModeler application will not. The same one license per the DesignModeler application session rule applies.© SAS IP. Release 15. All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. 39 . Licensing BladeModeler: Allows the DesignModeler application and BladeGen to run simultaneously. Inc. The one license per the DesignModeler application session rule still applies. .

All rights reserved. Inc.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . .0 . Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information 40 of ANSYS.Project Schematic Operations Release 15.

All rights reserved. 327): to split a face Lines From Points (p. With the understanding that all engineering simulation is based on geometry to represent the design. . Inc.0 . Via plug-ins. 131): to delete a section plane Other Typical Usage topics: ANSYS Release 15. ANSYS Release 15.DesignModeler Typical Usage ANSYS Workbench is a CAD-neutral environment that supports bidirectional. Following the feature name below is a link to systematic usage instructions. the associative interface allows you to make parametric changes from either a CAD system or from within ANSYS Workbench.0 Tutorials ANSYS DesignModeler-related tutorials are accessible via the ANSYS Customer Portal in the tutorials and input files section. direct. See the Workbench User Guide for complete information about the ANSYS Workbench interface. You can manipulate existing native CAD geometry directly without translation to intermediate geometry formats.0 Tutorials GUI Navigation Glossary DesignModeler Hotkeys ANSYS Release 15.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 131): to modify a section plane Section Planes (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Outlined here are topics to aid your ease of use of the application. 382): to use Conversion to cleanup a body Face Split (p. The DesignModeler application section of the ANSYS Workbench help provides descriptions of the ap- plication’s features. Inc.0 Tutorials Glossary DesignModeler Hotkeys Release 15. 131): to add a section plane Section Planes (p. 41 . 444): to create lines from points Section Planes (p. and associative in- terfaces with CAD systems.© SAS IP. see the CAD Integration section of the ANSYS Workbench help. Conversion (p. Other Typical Usage topics: GUI Navigation Glossary DesignModeler Hotkeys GUI Navigation Descriptions of the following features are in the DesignModeler application section of the ANSYS Workbench help.

157) (Sketching Mode (p. 178) (if button is not grayed out. 45)) Ctrl+ O: equivalent to Load DesignModeler Database (p. 9) only.and Y-Axis) with an orientation (determined by the plane normal vector). . you can also specify a separate thickness for individual faces of a surface body. also accessible via the Modify Tool- box (p. Planes can be transferred to the ANSYS Mechanical application where they appear as coordinate systems. 177)) Ctrl+ S: equivalent to Save Project (p. 156) (Sketching mode only.Typical Usage Glossary Face Thickness: Surface bodies normally have a uniform thickness. also accessible via the Modify Toolbox (p. 96) Ctrl+ B: equivalent to Selection Filter: Bodies (p. 153)) Ctrl+ E: equivalent to Selection Filter: Edges (p. (See Body Types (p. 49) option (also accessible via the File Menu (p. 153)) Ctrl+ Y: equivalent to Redo (p. Inc.© SAS IP. Feature Tree: In the DesignModeler application. 156) (Sketching Mode (p. Other Typical Usage topics: ANSYS Release 15. 48) option (also accessible via the File Menu (p. 177) Ctrl+ A: equivalent to Select All (p. The hotkeys are not case-sensitive in the ANSYS DesignModeler application. All rights reserved. 139) (Sketching Mode (p. 179) (also accessible via the Selection Tool- bar (p.0 . Escape: equivalent to New Selection (p. also accessible via the Selection Toolbar (p. However. 181) (also accessible via the Selection Tool- bar (p. 252) allows you to modify individual features from any point in the history of the model.0 Tutorials GUI Navigation DesignModeler Hotkeys DesignModeler Hotkeys You can use individual keys and combination of keys on your computer keyboard to perform specific functions when pressed. the Tree Outline (p. Project Tree: See Tree Outline (p. a plane is considered to be a 2D object (X. 87)) Ctrl+ N: equivalent to Start Over (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 42 of ANSYS. 9) only. 45)) Ctrl+ V: equivalent to Paste (p. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 87)) Ctrl+ F9: equivalent to Hide All Other Bodies (also accessible via the Context Menus (p. 9) only. 252). . This "Face Thickness" is then passed on for use by analysis. 9) only. are listed below. also accessible via the Modify Toolbox (p. 181) (also accessible via the Selection Tool- bar (p. also accessible via the toolbar) Release 15. 177)) Ctrl+ F8: equivalent to Hide All Other Faces (also accessible via the Context Menus (p. 177)) Ctrl+ F: equivalent to Selection Filter: Faces (p. The hotkeys programmed in ANSYS DesignModeler. 45)) Ctrl+ P: equivalent to Selection Filter: Points (p. 177)) Ctrl+ C: equivalent to Copy (p. and the option they perform. Plane: In the DesignModeler application. 139) (Sketching Mode (p. 211) for more information). also accessible via the toolbar) Ctrl+ Z: equivalent to Undo (p. 47) option (also accessible via the File Menu (p. 180) (also accessible via the Selection Tool- bar (p. 153)) Ctrl+ X: equivalent to Cut (p.

108). Inc. 251) toolbar) F6: equivalent to Shaded Exterior and Edges (p. 87)) F9: equivalent to Suppress/Hide Part and Body (p. for more information. 203)) F5: equivalent to Generate (p. for more information. 87)) Note The hotkeys are active whenever the Graphics Window (p. 43 . All rights reserved. 103) (also accessible via the Context Menus (p. see Apply/Cancel in Plane (p. 128) (also accessible via the Rotation Modes Toolbar (p.0 Tutorials GUI Navigation Glossary Release 15. 177) and context menu) F1: ANSYS Inc. 6) are in focus. 126) toolbar) F8: equivalent to Hide/Show Faces (p. and Wire- frame (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Other Typical Usage topics: ANSYS Release 15. 107). DesignModeler Hotkeys Ctrl+ +: equivalent to Expand Face Selection (p. 252) (also accessible via the 3D Features (p. see Help Menu (p.© SAS IP. see Apply/Cancel in Plane (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 86) F2: equivalent to Rename F3: Apply (during feature creation. 186) (also accessible via the Selection Tool- bar (p. for more information. Inc. 85)) F7: equivalent to Zoom to Fit (p. . 177) and context menu) Ctrl+ -: equivalent to Shrink Face Selection (p. 187) (also accessible via the Selection Tool- bar (p.0 . 87)) Shift+ F9: equivalent to Show All Bodies (also accessible via the Context Menus (p. Shaded Exterior (p. or Details View (p. also accessible via the View Menu (p. tree outline. 5). 87)) Shift+ F8: equivalent to Show All Faces (also accessible via the Context Menus (p. 109) model appearance controls (toggle between three. sketching tool- boxes. They are NOT active in the Parameter Manager panes. 93) (also accessible via the Context Menus (p. 203)) F4: Cancel (during feature creation. online help with DesignModeler highlighted.

. All rights reserved.© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information 44 of ANSYS. Inc. . Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Release 15.0 .

Release 15. The Units can be changed through the Units Menu. 86): provides access to online application documentation. All rights reserved. and global modeling operations.0 . 45): contains basic file operations. • Create Menu (p. File Menu Units can be set when creating a new ANSYS DesignModeler application model. . 45 . 85): used to modify display settings. • View Menu (p. The toolbar consists of the following menus: • File Menu (p.© SAS IP. parameter management.DesignModeler Menus All features and tools available in the ANSYS DesignModeler application are accessible via drop down menus in the "DesignModeler Menus" (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. • Units Menu (p. the Start Over and Close DesignModeler options are available. When running ANSYS DesignModeler in stand-alone mode. 78): contains tools to create line bodies and surfaces. • Tools Menu (p. When ANSYS DesignModeler operates in the ANSYS Workbench. • Concept Menu (p. 45) toolbar. 76): contains various 3D creation and modification tools. Inc. The toolbar also reflects differences in file-management functionality.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 87) are accessible via the right mouse button and vary in content by feature. 84): used for changing unit settings. Inc. the Units preferences can be changed through the Options dialog box. 79): used for program customization. The Context Menus (p. • Help Menu (p.

70) • Print (p. 75) • Close ANSYS DesignModeler (p. Inc. All rights reserved. 73) • Recent Imports (p. 71) • Restore Auto-save File (p. 65) • Run Script (p. Release 15. 72) • Image Capture (p. 49) • Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p.Menus • Refresh Input (p. 85) • Units Menu (p. 48) • Save Project (p.0 .Contains proprietary and confidential information 46 of ANSYS. 49) • Export (p.© SAS IP. . 86) • Context Menus (p. 76) • Concept Menu (p. 47) • Load DesignModeler Database (p. 45) toolbar: • Create Menu (p. 51) • Import External Geometry File (p. 78) • Tools Menu (p. 64) • Write Script: Sketch(es) of Active Plane (p. 84) • Help Menu (p. 75) Other menus accessible via the "DesignModeler Menus" (p. 56) • Import Shaft Geometry (p. Inc. Upstream input data can come from a Provides-To connection supplying data to the geometry cell or parameter changes made in ANSYS Workbench that have not yet been consumed by the DesignModeler application's editor. 70) • Auto-save Now (p. 46) • Start Over (p. . 79) • View Menu (p. 87) Refresh Input The Refresh Input command forces DesignModeler to refresh upstream input data. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 74) • Recent Scripts (p.

49) • Export (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Note that your model name is retained. 74) • Recent Scripts (p. 47) • Load DesignModeler Database (p. 71) • Restore Auto-save File (p. 75) Start Over Hotkey: Ctrl-N Available only in the ANSYS Workbench mode. 49) • Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. 56) • Import Shaft Geometry (p. 72) • Image Capture (p. All rights reserved. 65) • Run Script (p. Inc.0 . 49) • Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. 51) Release 15. 70) • Print (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 70) • Auto-save Now (p. 75) • Close ANSYS DesignModeler (p. 47 . . 49) • Export (p. 73) • Recent Imports (p. 46) • Load DesignModeler Database (p. For more information about upstream data.© SAS IP. 48) • Save Project (p. 51) • Import External Geometry File (p. use the Start Over option to begin a new model. Other file management options: • Start Over (p. 48) • Save Project (p. Other file management options: • Refresh Input (p. see Data Sharing and Data Transfer (p. File Menu The Refresh menu item is not applicable when there are no upstream changes to consume. 64) • Write Script: Sketch(es) of Active Plane (p. 26). Inc.

70) • Print (p. 49) • Export (p. All rights reserved. 18). 65) • Run Script (p.” You should either select Save Project (p. and then choosing “Edit. 70) • Print (p. clicking the right mouse button on the Geometry cell and choosing Replace Geometry (p. 71) • Restore Auto-save File (p. .© SAS IP. then the current file is closed and the new one is loaded. Inc. 72) • Image Capture (p. 75) Load DesignModeler Database This option provides a quick way to load a different file into DesignModeler. 74) • Recent Scripts (p. 47) • Save Project (p. Then. 36). 51) • Import External Geometry File (p.Menus • Import External Geometry File (p. or Export your current file if you do not want to lose changes to the current model before using this option (you are asked if you want to discard the current model). 73) • Recent Imports (p.0 . once you choose a new file (must end in the . so it is much quicker. This is done without closing and reopening the DesignModeler session. 49) • Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. 56) • Import Shaft Geometry (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 48 of ANSYS. 70) • Auto-save Now (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. It is equivalent to closing DesignModeler (but without the saving that would happen here). 65) • Run Script (p. 64) • Write Script: Sketch(es) of Active Plane (p. 46) • Start Over (p.agdb extension). 70) • Auto-save Now (p. . 64) • Write Script: Sketch(es) of Active Plane (p. Other file management options: • Refresh Input (p. selecting a DesignModeler file. 56) • Import Shaft Geometry (p. 71) Release 15. 75) • Close ANSYS DesignModeler (p. Inc.

75) • Close ANSYS DesignModeler (p.wbpj extension at the specified location. 47) • Load DesignModeler Database (p. 49 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.0 . 73) • Recent Imports (p. 46) • Start Over (p. Other file management options: • Refresh Input (p. 51) • Import External Geometry File (p. 74) • Recent Scripts (p. 72) • Image Capture (p. 70) • Print (p. 56) • Import Shaft Geometry (p. 65) • Run Script (p. Inc. 73) • Recent Imports (p. Inc. 49) • Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. 72) • Image Capture (p. . 70) • Auto-save Now (p. File Menu • Restore Auto-save File (p. 48) • Export (p. 75) Export Release 15. All rights reserved. 75) Save Project Hotkey: Ctrl-S The Save Project option stores the project with the . 71) • Restore Auto-save File (p. 64) • Write Script: Sketch(es) of Active Plane (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. 74) • Recent Scripts (p. 75) • Close ANSYS DesignModeler (p.

xmt_txt or . Therefore. Note that bodies that are grouped in multiple body parts do not share topology when exported to formats other than the DesignModeler application's agdb. IGES or STEP file from a DesignModeler session with Large Model enabled. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 48) • Save Project (p. • When exporting to a Parasolid. the name of the file on the File browser does not change. see DesignModeler Electronics.Menus The Export option is used to export a model to the DesignModeler application (. Starting in release 14. 64) • Write Script: Sketch(es) of Active Plane (p. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information 50 of ANSYS. a limitation exists that when changing the export format type to Icepak Model file format. 70) • Print (p. .anf) . Additionally. 46) • Start Over (p.0 . 49) • Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. Parasolid (. IGES (. • When exporting to Monte Carlo N-Particle files. Monte Carlo N-Particle. 65) • Run Script (p. 70) Release 15. Models edited in the DesignModeler application are stored in meters internally.0. those exported files may appear in the Recent Imports list. 56) • Import Shaft Geometry (p. All rights reserved.mcnp).x_t.igs). The original model name still presides over the DesignModeler application session. . Inc. In those cases. . when you Export to any CAD interface. all bodies are treated as if they are single body parts. and STEP formats. • When exporting to an ANSYS Icepak Model file format. IGES. it is recommended that you create an Enclosure (p.agdb). For more inform- ation about Icepak.x_b. Monte Carlo N-Particle (. 322) feature as the last feature that represents the Outside world model. a model scaled down by one thousand times will be exported. 47) • Load DesignModeler Database (p. • When exporting to Parasolid. STEP (. or may not be exported at all. the model is in meters.© SAS IP.xmt_bin).stp) format or ANSYS Icepak Model (model) format. Notations: • When exporting to IGES. the ANSYS DesignModeler application's part-body structure will be exported as Icepak assemblies when exporting to an Icepak model file. Other file management options: • Refresh Input (p. . non-manifold line bodies may not be exported properly. a file of name “model” will be written in the directory where the export file is specified. ANSYS Neutral File (. 51) • Import External Geometry File (p. The use input for the filename will be ignored.

74) • Recent Scripts (p. 53) Attach Properties (p. You do not need to begin a new model to use the Attach to Active CAD Geometry option and it can be used at any time (and multiple times) during any the DesignModeler application session. 75) Attach to Active CAD Geometry You can import a model into the DesignModeler application that is currently open in a CAD session on your computer. Related topics: Notations (p. Inc. 252). 73) • Recent Imports (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. click the Contents tab and open the CAD Integration folder in the hierarch- ical tree. All rights reserved. . 53) Face Geometry Transfer "DesignModeler Geometry Representations" (p. where it will appear as an attached feature in the feature Tree Outline (p. File Menu • Auto-save Now (p. 205) CAD Integration For detailed CAD-related information specific to the ANSYS DesignModeler application and ANSYS Workbench. Inc. 72) • Image Capture (p. 75) • Close ANSYS DesignModeler (p. see the CAD Integration section of the product help. When accessing the ANSYS Workbench Help from the Help menu. The CAD Integration section features topics about: • Overview • Geometry Interface Support for Linux and Windows • Project Schematic Presence • Mixed Import Resolution • CAD Configuration Manager • Named Selection Manager • Caveats and Known Issues • Installation and Licensing • File Format Support (with information specific to DesignModeler) Release 15.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Use the Attach to Active CAD Geometry option to import the model into the DesignModeler application.© SAS IP. 71) • Restore Auto-save File (p.0 . 51 .

65) • Run Script (p. 47) • Load DesignModeler Database (p.0 . 70) • Auto-save Now (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 72) Release 15. 49) • Export (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 52 of ANSYS. . Inc. 56) • Import Shaft Geometry (p. 70) • Print (p. 46) • Start Over (p. 49) • Import External Geometry File (p.© SAS IP. All rights reserved. 48) • Save Project (p. . Inc. 64) • Write Script: Sketch(es) of Active Plane (p.Menus ACIS AutoCAD BladeGen CATIA Creo Elements/Direct Modeling Creo Parametric (formerly Pro/ENGINEER) ANSYS DesignModeler GAMBIT IGES Inventor JT Reader Monte Carlo N-Particle NX Parasolid Solid Edge SolidWorks SpaceClaim STEP • ANSYS Teamcenter Connection • SpaceClaim Related to CAD Integration • Frequently Asked Questions • Troubleshooting • Glossary • Updates Other file management options: • Refresh Input (p. 71) • Restore Auto-save File (p.

File Menu • Image Capture (p. Selecting an active CAD document source item from the property drop-down list will assign the active CAD document as the geometry source. 56) Source Property The Source Property controls the geometry source. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 73) • Recent Imports (p. For more information on specific CAD systems. 55) • Operation Property (p. 53 . DesignModeler will automatically detect active CAD documents on your computer when the Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. 55) • Body Filtering Property (p. Attach Properties The Attach properties are: • Source Property (p. Inc.© SAS IP. 54) • Refresh Property (p. 53) • Model Units Property (p. see CAD System Support. • Refresh Active CAD List: Selecting the Refresh Active CAD List item from the property will update the property drop-down menu with the current active CAD documents in running and supported CAD systems. The Attach to Active CAD Geometry option is not supported for Linux. 75) Notations You can only attach to parts in active CAD sessions that have been saved.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Release 15. The geometry source can be set by either browsing to an on-disk location or attaching directly to an active CAD document in a running CAD system. 74) • Recent Scripts (p. 54) • Material Property (p. The list of all available geometry import sources. 54) • Parameter Key Property (p. as well as Browse and Refresh Active CAD List items are included in the drop-down property. 55) • Target Geometry Type Property (p. • Browse Source: Selecting the Browse item from the property will open a file browser dialog and allow selection of the geometry source from file. 54) • Base Plane Property (p. All rights reserved.0 . 51) feature is first created. Inc. 75) • Close ANSYS DesignModeler (p. .

51) features. CAD parameters should be uniquely named. Model Units Property Some CAD sources are without units. Material property transfer is supported for Autodesk Inventor. change the Refresh property to Yes. To reflect changes made with the CAD program in the DesignModeler application or to reflect changes in the original active CAD source. they could enter DS. then it will be attached to the bodies. The default setting is off for all new Import External Geometry File (p. It is a string that helps you filter the CAD para- meter names to attach. you can continue to edit it in your CAD program. DesignModeler will automat- ically re-connect to a previously established active CAD document if a match can be found. that is because there are special characters in the name that are not valid for parameter names in DesignModeler. When selecting the Refresh Active CAD List item or resuming a database.Menus The Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. Material Property The DesignModeler application can process material properties for imported bodies by setting the Material property to Yes. . In those cases a Model Units property is provided to allow users to choose the units of the imported geometry.Contains proprietary and confidential information 54 of ANSYS. Each of the values is to be entered separated by a semicolon. Creo Parametric. 51) feature. 56) and Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. 51) feature can be reconnected to an active CAD document in a later session by re-selecting the associated item from the Source property or browsing for the geometry source. Inc. If the imported geometry contains material information. Note that the corresponding CAD system must support material properties and have materials assigned to the bodies in order for the material properties to be processed in the DesignModeler application. . 51) features will generate a warning. So if you want to import parameters. all independent parameters regardless of name are selected. and NX. but does not display with a check box in front of it in the Details View (p. Inc. the Import External Geometry File (p. If a parameter is read. 6) for the Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. The text is case-insensitive so ds.0 . Parameter Key Property Also in the Details View is the property Parameter Key. All rights reserved.© SAS IP. it is not recommended to use spaces in CAD parameter names or name parameters starting with a numeric.PARAM in the Parameter Key field. There is no limit on the number of prefixes\suffixes that can be used in a single key preference. since they cannot be used in the DesignModeler application's Parameter Manager. The parameter key supports multiple prefixes/suffixes values entered in the parameter key preference.param would work just as effectively. If blank. You should change these names in the CAD source so that they are usable. Refresh Property Once a model is attached. 56) and Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. Additionally. If duplicate parameter names exist. The default is "DS" meaning that only names prefixed or appended with "DS" are selected. By default the unit is set to the same units as the DesignModeler session. The material properties can be seen when viewing the body's details. which are keyed with DS and others that are keyed with PARAM. These are the three choices for the Refresh property: Release 15. It is not recommended to create design parameters from CAD parameters whose names are non-unique. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

See Basic Geometry Options in the Geometry Preferences section of CAD Integration for list of supported systems. see the Body Filtering Property (p. 51) feature. The DesignModeler application will not add material when the Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. • Yes (Use DesignModeler Parameter Values): The feature will refresh the CAD geometry using the parameter values displayed in the Details View. 51) feature also has an Operation property. Body Filtering Property There are three body filtering properties: • Solid Bodies • Surface Bodies • Line Bodies Their value is set in the Project Schematic and they determine what bodies will be imported to the DesignModeler application. Base Plane Property The Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. the DesignModeler application will automatically apply the "Add Frozen" material type instead and mark the feature with a warning. it is best to perform them with the DesignModeler application than with attached CAD programs. When attaching active CAD geometry. This allows you to specify the coordinate system in which the attached model is brought in. Note that when body suppression operations are needed in your model. If the suppression of a body using the CAD program results in a the DesignModeler application part being added or deleted.© SAS IP. 51) feature has a property called Base Plane. Operation Property The Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. This allows you to do things other than add bodies to your model. Note that the Add Material option does not always apply.0 . Inc. 252) button is clicked. See the Geometry Preferences section of CAD Integration for list of supported systems. 51) feature consists of multiple bodies AND active bodies already exist in the current model. The refresh will be completed to reflect any changes once the Generate (p. 55 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. • Yes (Use Geometry Parameter Values): The feature will refresh the CAD geometry using the para- meters of the original CAD source. From certain CAD programs. . All rights reserved. you can attach surface thicknesses. You are still allowed to modify the thickness of a Release 15. You can change the Base Plane by selecting planes from the feature Tree Outline (p. 51) feature will be updated to reflect the current values from the CAD system. When creating a new Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. 252).Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 58) for importing external geometry files. The default setting is Yes for Solid and Surface Bodies and No for Line Bodies. Parameters of the Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. In this case. Additional CAD systems are supported when importing external geometry files. the active plane is chosen as the Base Plane by default. you may lose associativity on the part in the ANSYS Mechanical application. Inc. File Menu • No: The feature will not refresh the CAD geometry. only specific CAD systems support line body imports into the DesignModeler application. Surface thicknesses are automatically transferred to bodies in the DesignModeler application and are updated whenever the CAD geometry is refreshed.

57) Geometry Interface Recommendations (p. Material property transfer is supported for Autodesk Inventor.xmt_bin for neutral binary files) • SpaceClaim (extension . 46) • Start Over (p.iges) • Parasolid (extension . though if you do.sat) • BladeGen (extension .igs or . All rights reserved.bgd) • GAMBIT (extension . 51) features. 59) Import and Attach Options (p.mcnp) • CATIA V5 (extension . . . 48) Release 15.CATPart and . extension . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the default is No.Contains proprietary and confidential information 56 of ANSYS. 54) option through the Details View.CATProduct) • IGES (extension . Inc. 205) Other file management options: • Refresh Input (p. then that surface's thickness will no longer update when the CAD geometry is refreshed.x_t and . Import External Geometry File The Import External Geometry File option is used exclusively to import foreign models such as: • ACIS (extension . The default setting is Yes for all new Import External Geometry File (p. and NX. Related topics: Import Properties (p.scdoc) • STEP (extension .x_b and . 47) • Load DesignModeler Database (p.Menus surface body. For . You do not need to begin a new model to use the feature.xmt_txt for text files. Creo Parametric. 56) and Attach to Active CAD Geo- metry (p.dbs) • Monte Carlo N-Particle (extension . Target Geometry Type Property Choose the target geometry type (Workbench or DesignModeler geometry) to import the model. Material properties transfer is controlled by the Material Property (p.agdb files created prior to Release 8. Inc.sab and .step and .© SAS IP.stp) Imports can be applied at any time during your the DesignModeler application session.0. 60) Face Geometry Transfer "DesignModeler Geometry Representations" (p.0 .

Note that some model types store their units. 70) • Print (p. Inc. 56) feature has a property called Base Plane.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Before clicking Generate (p.agdb files prior to this upgrade. the DesignModeler application will automatically apply the "Add Frozen" material type instead and mark the feature with a warning. Base Plane Property The Import External Geometry File (p. File Menu • Save Project (p. 57 . All rights reserved. The DesignModeler application will not add material when the Import consists of multiple bodies AND active bodies already exist in the current model.0 . 252). . you may be able to change the model units from the Details View (p. Release 15. 51) • Import Shaft Geometry (p. 49) • Export (p. 56) feature also has an Operation property. depending on the type of import. 56) feature. 56) features in all . so no Model Units property will appear when importing them. This allows you to do things other than add bodies to your model. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Note that the Add Material option does not always apply. This allows you to specify the coordinate system into which the model is brought.© SAS IP. Inc. 75) Import Properties Model Units Property Some import types (ACIS and AutoCAD) allow you to specify the units of the imported model. 49) • Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. 75) • Close ANSYS DesignModeler (p. the active plane is chosen as the Base Plane by default. 70) • Auto-save Now (p. 64) • Write Script: Sketch(es) of Active Plane (p. 72) • Image Capture (p. 6). 73) • Recent Imports (p. 252). 65) • Run Script (p. You can change the Base Plane by selecting planes from the feature Tree Outline (p. In this case. When creating a new Import External Geometry File (p. 74) • Recent Scripts (p. Operation Property The Import External Geometry File (p. the default operation is Add Material. 71) • Restore Auto-save File (p. For Import External Geometry File (p.

all body filtering properties will be read only. To reflect changes made to the CAD file in the DesignModeler application. Surface port Line Line No import Line Line Solid and Sur. Blade Sets Property This property appears only when importing BladeGen models. Refresh Property Sometimes an imported CAD file may have changed since it was first imported into the DesignModeler application. or if the number entered is greater than the number of blade sets in the model. the solid bodies would be imported). The following table shows the expected body imports based on the composition of the part (top row) and the mixed dimension import resolution preference. Solid Surface face face Surface and Surface and Line Surface Line Surface and Line Line This processing becomes significant after handling the basic import options (e.0 . Solid Edge. SolidWorks. Solid and Surface Solid and Sur. if a part is Solid-Surface- Line. The default setting is Yes for Solid and Surface Bodies and No for Line Bodies. and STEP. The property Process Solid Bodies will be set to Yes and the other two will be set to No because only solid bodies may be defined in Monte Carlo N-Particle files. If the value is zero. Solid-Surface Solid. Parasolid. CATIA V5 (Spatial and CAPRI). and its subsidiaries and affiliates. With this property. File formats that support line body imports include ACIS. . Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information 58 of ANSYS. Creo Parametric.Menus Body Filtering Property There are four body filtering properties: • Solid Bodies • Surface Bodies • Line Bodies • Mixed Import Resolution (used in conjunction with the primary options to determine what is imported) Their value is set in the Project Schematic and they determine what bodies will be imported to the DesignModeler application. All rights reserved. Inc. but only Import Solids is selected. you can specify how many blade sets to import. then all blade sets are imported. Surface-Line Line Line None No import No import No im. Solid-Surface.mcnp”.g.© SAS IP. . The default value is 1. It is assumed for this table that the body types indicated in the part are selected in the primary import options. No import port Solid Solid Solid Solid No import Surface Surface Surface No im. When importing a file with an extension of “. IGES. change the Refresh Release 15.

Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.© SAS IP. 59 . you should implement one or more of the Import and Attach Options (p. This will cause the DesignModeler application to refresh the imported geometry the next time you click Generate (p. models that import into the Mechanical application may not necessarily import into the DesignModeler application. File Menu property to Yes. Under certain system limitation cir- cumstances. The File Format Support section of the CAD Integration section of the ANSYS Workbench help provides geometry interface recommendations for: Parasolid BladeGen ACIS CATIA IGES STEP Autodesk Inventor Creo Elements/Direct Modeling Creo Parametric (formerly Pro/ENGINEER) Solid Edge SolidWorks NX Monte Carlo N-Particle GAMBIT SpaceClaim For detailed CAD-related information specific to the ANSYS DesignModeler application and ANSYS Workbench. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. . Note that when you modify the Process property or change the CAD source. 60). The CAD Integration section features topics about: • Overview • Geometry Interface Support for Linux and Windows • Project Schematic Presence • Mixed import Resolution • CAD Configuration Manager • Named Selection Manager • Caveats and Known Issues Release 15. All rights reserved. 252). the Refresh is automatically set to Yes. If a model imports into the ANSYS Mechanical application but does not import into the DesignModeler application. Geometry Interface Recommendations Note that successful importation of CAD models into the DesignModeler application requires that the geometry's mathematical representation be as complete and exact as possible. Inc. When accessing the ANSYS Workbench Help from the Help menu.0 . click the Contents tab and open the CAD Integration folder in the hierarch- ical tree to access the CAD Integration section. see the CAD Integration section of the product help.

Default is Normal with the options being No/Nor- mal/High. 51) operation. while others apply to some. 56) or Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. setting the Simplify Topology property to Yes can significantly improve the speed of the Automatic Selection Method option. Too small a value will leave many unwanted gaps. You should exercise caution when using this property. • Clean Bodies: Attempts to heal geometry for solid and surface bodies after performing Import Ex- ternal Geometry File (p. or a previous value that you set. • Tolerance: Choose either Normal. and is 1. • Simplify Geometry: If Yes. Relevant to the Mid-Surface feature. High attempts additional cleaning steps. allowing you to set a tolerance value of your choosing. Inc. setting the Simplify Geometry property to Yes can significantly improve the speed of the Automatic Selection Method option. All rights reserved. It is used for sewing neighboring faces together and for some healing operations. 51) operation. due to body cleaning only being performed one time for multiple body instances. while too large a value Release 15. Default is Normal. but not all CAD packages.0 e-4 in meters. Some options are available only for specific CAD packages. Default is Yes. Default is No.Contains proprietary and confidential information 60 of ANSYS.0 . edges. . “User Tolerance” appears. • Simplify Topology: If Yes. and vertices from the model where possible. Instanced body import should be significantly faster when the Clean Bodies property is set to Yes.© SAS IP.Menus • Installation and Licensing • File Format Support (with information specific to the ANSYS DesignModeler application) • ANSYS Teamcenter Connection • SpaceClaim Related to CAD Integration • Frequently Asked Questions • Troubleshooting • Glossary • Updates Import and Attach Options Geometry Options Several options are available for the various types of geometry imported or attached to the Design- Modeler application. including Share Topology. Relevant to the Mid-Surface feature. Property appears in the Details View only when you select an IGES file for import. Loose or User Tolerance stitching tolerance. Below is a description of the geometry options. Inc. If your selection is “User Tolerance”. including Share Topology. Performing a Simplify operation may increase the robustness of further modeling operations. Default is No. but can take noticeably longer. The default for “User Tolerance” will be either the “Loose” value.5 e-3 for “Loose”. then an additional property. the DesignModeler application will simplify the surfaces and curves of the model into analytical geometry where possible. Imported line bodies are ignored by the Clean Bodies option. 56) or Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. • Heal Bodies: Attempts to heal geometry before performing Import External Geometry File (p. . the DesignModeler application will remove redundant faces. Performing a Simplify operation may increase the robustness of further modeling operations. followed by a chart showing which options are available for each CAD package or file type. “Normal” tolerance is 1.

If on (set to Yes). If a modification of a preference(s) that changes the geometry import (Import types. 51) feature completes. 56) and Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Subsequent updates will occur using the smart update flag as defined by the user preference. and can also lead to unwanted gaps. See the Advanced Geometry Options table in the Geometry Preferences section of CAD Integration for applicable CAD packages. Default is No. material processing. See Named Selection Manager. If the filter is set to an empty string all applicable attributes will be imported. • Import Coordinate Systems: These are imported as Planes. etc. See Geometry Preferences for options that are specific to the ANSYS Mechanical application. See Imported Sub-features (p. .DDM. See the Advanced Geometry Options table in the Geometry Preferences section of CAD Integration for applicable CAD packages. 61 .© SAS IP. attributes. Inc. 63) for usage information. See Imported Sub-features (p. Property appears in the Details View only when you select an IGES or STEP file for import. 63) for usage information. • Import Named Selections: These are imported as defined in the CAD system. etc. will not be respected if the component can be smart updated. Essentially. It is only shown if the option to Import Attributes is set to Yes. • Attributes Key: This allows you to set the attribute processing prefix key. This field can have any number of prefixes with each prefix delimited by a semicolon. • Reader Save Part File: See the Advanced Geometry Options table in the Geometry Preferences section of CAD Integration for applicable CAD packages. the modeler will attempt to stitch together all surface bodies resulting from import. All rights reserved. the Named Selection feature will still be created. with the default for Export of the Co- ordinate System set to Yes. Further details available in the ANSYS Mechanical application help. but the items that no longer exist will not be in it. This override is not reflected in the user interface.) is made it will override the smart update flag by turning it off for an update to keep the imported model consistent with the preferences and the CAD model. • Use Associativity: Indicates if action should be taken to allow associativity. • Analysis Type: A read-only indication of the current analysis type. See Imported Sub-features (p. Release 15. A large tolerance value can also cause future modeling operations to fail. If the items pointed at by the named selection do not exist once the Import External Geometry File (p. File Menu can end up making some faces disappear. when you modify preferences such as the parameter key. the interface will save the part file of a model at the end of an update process using the same file name in the same directory. If on. this will attempt to fill in holes in surface bodies.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The DesignModeler ap- plication allows this. • Replace Missing Geometry: If Yes. Property appears in the Details View only when you select an IGES or STEP file for import. The default is Yes. • Stitch Surfaces: If on. parameter processing. • Do Smart Update: See the Advanced Geometry Options table in the Geometry Preferences section of CAD Integration for applicable CAD packages. import type. This means that they may have items in them of differing dimensions such as bodies and edges. missing geometry will be replaced. • Import Attributes: These are imported as Attribute features that can have multiple “Attribute Groups” within them with different values. 63) for usage information. See Imported Sub-features (p.0 . Inc. 63) for usage information. The default is SDFEA. but they will be split into separate Named Selections if taken to the Mechanical application.

Note that legacy Import or Attach features with this option set to No might have persistence issues on changing the Target Geometry Type and is not recommended. See Imported Sub-features (p. faces metry logy ing Geo- metry ACIS √ √ √ AutoCAD BladeGen CATIA V4 CATIA V5 √ √ √ CATIA V6 CATIA V5 CADNexus CAPRI CAE Gateway Creo Ele. √ √ √ ments/Direct Modeling Creo Paramet. This option allows you to set only the work points processing from CAD system. Sim. Inc. See Imported Sub-features (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 62 of ANSYS. Sim. disjoint bodies or faces are always decomposed irrespective of the value set. See the Advanced Geometry Options table in the Geometry Preferences section of CAD Integration for applicable CAD packages.© SAS IP. Re.0 . Note that for new features created from Release 14. ance place Sur- Geo. • Decompose Disjoint Geometry: This option allows you to decompose a disjoint solid/surface body into separate solid/surface bodies or to decompose disjoint faces into separate faces. Heal Clean Toler.NS_FixedSup- ports. ies ies Miss.Menus • Named Selection Key: This allows you to set the named selection processing prefix key.NS_BoltLoaded). All rights reserved. Topo. √ √ √ ric (formerly Pro/ENGIN- EER) GAMBIT IGES √ √ √ √ √1 √ √ Inventor √ √ √ JT Release 15. This field can have any number of prefixes with each prefix delimited by a semicolon (for example: NS_ForceFaces. . Spot welds are processed always.5 onwards. • Work Points: Both work points and spot welds are imported as Point features. Inc. Stitch plify plify Bod. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. By default the filter is set to NS. 63) for usage information. If the filter is set to an empty string all applicable entities will be imported as named selections. It is only shown if the option to Import Named Selections is set to Yes. . 63) for usage information. Bod.

Also note that if items pointed to by these sub-features do not exist after processing the Import External Geometry File (p. 56) and Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. the option to import a sub-feature type is changed to no. if during a Refresh. 51) feature itself. Inc. and a new sub-feature with the updated name will be created. That can only happen if no subsequent features depend on the Import External Geometry File (p.0 . Sim. File Menu Sim. they will be updated whenever the Import External Geometry File (p. You are free to change this name.© SAS IP. then they will not be included in the sub-feature. These enable importing “sub-features” within the Import and Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. All rights reserved. However. Named Selections. These imported sub-features cannot be directly edited. If you have modified the name of the sub-feature. and Work Points. 51) feature. 56) and Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. Attributes. there are options to import Coordinate Systems (Planes). then it might not get created at all. then a default the DesignModeler application name is used and a warning is posted on the feature. For example. with a warning. 51) features. 51) features or their sub-features. if a Named Selection sub-feature points at an edge. then the Named Selection feature will not include this edge. 56) and Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. 63 . other than their name and possibly an option or two. the original sub-feature in DesignModeler will remain. but that edge is eliminated because “Add Material” is used in the main feature and when joined with the existing model.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. then the existing sub-features of that type will remain (in the feature Tree Outline (p. Heal Clean Toler. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. but marked with a warning that it was not updated. Their names are derived from the CAD system name. Likewise. if there are characters in that name that are not valid in the DesignModeler application. 56) and Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. Once these sub-features get created. If this effects all items in a sub-feature. since they are directly dependent on the information coming from the CAD file/system. Re. If a sub-feature is no longer in the CAD system. and will be deleted automatically if the parent Import External Geometry File (p. Topo. 252) and graphics) and be marked with the not updated warning. Note If you change the name of one of the imported “sub-features” in the original CAD system and then Refresh. 51) feature is Refreshed. Displayed if Stitch Surfaces is on. Bod. ies ies Miss. it is retained. Stitch plify plify Bod. then it will remain deleted even when its parent feature Release 15. If a sub-feature is deleted. ance place Sur- Geo. the user assigned name will be retained. Imported Sub-features In the Import External Geometry File (p. 56) and Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. faces metry logy ing Geo- metry NX √ √ √ Parasolid √ √ √ Solid Edge √ √ √ SolidWorks √ √ √ STEP √ √ √ √ √1 √ √ 1. They can be deleted. 51) feature gets deleted. .

Example 1: Shaft text file Station ID Length Outer Diameter Inner Diameter 1 2. which must be less than the outer dia- meter.05 8 1. The format of the text file is as follows: • Each line of the file defines a single station.72 3.49 0.53 0 2 5. This value may be zero is the cross section has no inner diameter. • A ‘#’ symbol indicates a comment. Any text that appears on a line after the ‘#’ symbol is ignored. • Refresh: Set this property to Yes to force ANSYS DesignModeler to refresh the Import Shaft Geometry feature by re-reading the source text file. you will need to insert a new Import External Geometry File (p.27 0.Menus is refreshed. Bodies will be arranged starting at the base plane’s origin towards the +Z direction.75 2. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information 64 of ANSYS. 51) feature.97 2. .03 1. Inc.48 0 6 0. If you really need to get the sub-feature back. which must be positive – Inner Diameter: The inner diameter of the cross section.34 3. Each line body’s cross section dimensions are defined in the text file.34 3. By default it is assumed to be the same units as the ANSYS DesignModeler session.© SAS IP.77 Release 15. 56) and Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. Each segment of the shaft is referred to as a station. The line bodies themselves are arranged end to end starting from the origin of the selected base plane and extending out ward in its +Z direction. .21 0 5 2.98 0 3 4. Import Shaft Geometry The Import Shaft Geometry feature uses a text file to generate a collection of line bodies with circular or circular tube cross sections. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. and consists of a line body containing a single edge. All rights reserved.66 0 4 2. When creating the Import Shaft Geometry feature.75 2.48 0 7 1.34 1. • Model Units: Specifies the unit type of the text data to be imported. • Each line contain four fields to define the station: – Station ID: must be a unique positive integer – Length: must be positive – Outer Diameter: The outer diameter of the cross section. Several additional properties complete the definition of the Import Shaft Geometry feature: • Base Plane: The plane to use as the basis for the line bodies to be created from the text file. the current active plane will be chosen by default. There is no limit to the number of stations the user may define in their text file so long as the bodies fit in the model bounding box and each station uses a unique identifier.0 .

© SAS IP. edges. 65) • Run Script (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 51) • Import External Geometry File (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 75) Write Script: Sketch(es) of Active Plane This function will write out all sketches in the currently active plane to a script file that can later be read back in using “Run Script”. 49) • Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p.75 1. It outputs all points. 70) • Auto-save Now (p. 71) • Restore Auto-save File (p. . 70) • Print (p. 56) • Write Script: Sketch(es) of Active Plane (p. 74) • Recent Scripts (p. and constraints for sketches Release 15. dimensions.49 0 10 4. Inc.78 0 11 2. 65 . 73) • Recent Imports (p. Inc.0 . All rights reserved.27 1. 72) • Image Capture (p. 47) • Load DesignModeler Database (p.34 4. 75) • Close ANSYS DesignModeler (p. 46) • Start Over (p. File Menu 9 5. 48) • Save Project (p. 49) • Export (p.80 0 Produces the following geometry: Other file management options: • Refresh Input (p.

js Release 15. . 5. For example an Arc can be created via a number of methods. DEBUG) SV4 //Created via: "Write Script: Sketch(es) of Active Plane" // Written to: E:\SketchExample2. .Menus in the plane. 7. 5. 7. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Also.Sk1) { p. 6).Ln5 = Line(3. How the geometry was created does not effect the output. Also. 11. However. 4.Ln5 = p. or dimensions or constraints that reference boundary edges or their endpoints. p. p. the “with (p. Inc. 6) } Is the same as: p. For example: with (p. The output file contains a function definition where all of the sketch items are created and then a call to that function. //DesignModeler JScript. 8. 8. Inc.247. it is output via the Ar- cCtrEdge command. 4. However it does not output any plane boundary edges.0 (Sep 6 2005. Also note that geometry is written out in only one format.Ln6 = Line(9. All rights reserved. This format was chosen to make it easier for you to cut/paste to combine several files. including Fillet or even splitting or trimming a full circle. version: ANSYS DesignModeler 11.Sk1. no matter how the Arc is created. 6).Sk1.Contains proprietary and confidential information 66 of ANSYS.Line(9.plane)” blocks are used to avoid having to include that part of the identifier in function calls. will reflect the appropriate release number. 09:59:59. Sketch Instances are output as normal sketches.Ln6 = p. all edges and dimensions can be accessed via the returned value from the function call. Example of a fully dimensioned sketch: Below is an example script output for the above sketch.© SAS IP. while only making minor changes.Line(3. when performed in the current release of the ANSYS DesignModeler application.0 .1.2005.Sk1)” and “with (p. 6). Note The Write Script function.

6882).03138. 40.1133. 40. 33. Inc. you may have to re-name the function identifier.0425.6882.Plane.4491.2714.Sk1) { p. 41. p. 6.Sk1 = p.Cr11 = Circle(40. 20. 18. 31.0316. 44. 13. 35.Cr17 = Circle(21. 41.5).0314.03138.Name = "Sketch1". p.0314.449.0425.9686.Cr8 = ArcCtrEdge( 40. // however..8542).Plane = agb.9686. 20.03138.Pt16 = ConstructionPoint(21. 33.Pt16 = ConstructionPoint(21. 9.2714. 18.0314. p. p. with (p.Plane. 43.Ln7 = Line(13. p.0316. 6. 40. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 19. } with (p.Cr16. 39. Release 15.Plane) { p. 9. p. 13. 10:14:16 //Using: // agb .Pt17 = ConstructionPoint(9.6882..© SAS IP.GetXAxis().5.Sk1. 31. } p.GetYAxis().Ln14 = Line(9.1133).5.03139.0314. 20.0 .Cr16 = ArcCtrEdge( 21. p.449. 41. p.6882). 31.0314. p. .XAxis = p.Origin = p.03139.Center. 19. 13.0314. Inc.5425. 13. 41. 43. 21. dim = HorizontalDim(p. 3).Ln13 = Line(9.5425.9686.Pt18 = ConstructionPoint(33.Plane. //Edges with (p. 67 . p. // function planeSketchesOnly (p) { //Plane p.GetActivePlane(). File Menu // On: 09/06/05. p. 3).GetOrigin().8542.0367). p. //Sketch p.0425).Plane. 44.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. } with (p.8219).2714).Ln9 = Line(36. 33. p.4491.5).03138.0316.Cr10 = ArcCtrEdge( 10. 3).428.Ln15 = Line(33.0425).0316.Cr8. 39. 50.Origin. p. 36.Plane) { p.newSketch().YAxis = p. p. 0.2714).Cr12 = Circle(10.Plane) { p. } //Dimensions and/or constraints with (p.8219). p.Plane) { //Dimensions var dim. 13.8542). 35. p.DeleteCenter(). p. 40.Pt17 = ConstructionPoint(9.Pt18 = ConstructionPoint(33. 0. All rights reserved.8542). 20.9686. 31. pointer to batch interface //Note: // You may be able to re-use below JScript function via cut-and-paste.

40).8219. 35.6387. TangentCon(p.03138. 23.Base.Ln14.Center. CoincidentCon(p.Ln13.4721.5). 33.Center.1133.Cr8.4721).973).5.03139.0425). 44. dim = AngleDim(p. dim = AngleDim(p.Base. p.2712). 0. p.End. 9. 13. p. p.Base. 13. 13. 49.Center.Cr10. CoincidentCon(p. if(dim) dim. p. CoincidentCon(p. p. if(dim) dim. 14. 20.Ln9.Ln9.9686. 33.Cr8. TangentCon(p. 27.03139.8219. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 31.Yes. 36.5279). 9. p. 48. 40.03138.Origin.9686.0314.Name = "A8".Name = "R10". dim = DiameterDim(p. p.Cr16.Cr10.End. . 19. if(dim) { dim.0314. 18.03138. 20. p.4721).5.7176. 9.Name = "A9".9547). 9.End.03138.0314.9686.8542.Ln13.Cr11. 18.6882. p.0425.Cr10.4721.0425. 35.Pt17.Contains proprietary and confidential information 68 of ANSYS. 0.7385). 39. p. dim.Cr8. Release 15. 43. 14. 6. 5. p. 15.Cr12.Name = "H4".© SAS IP. 33. 9.0425. CoincidentCon(p. 4.5855. dim = VerticalDim(p. 13. if(dim) dim. dim = RadiusDim(p.Cr10. dim = AngleDim(p.449.8542. 17.Cr16. p.8038. 20. p. 43. 40.701.Ln9. 41.Origin. if(dim) dim.Ln13. 21.Cr11. 43. 13. 46.Ln7.0314. 43.03138.8542. 13.Ln9. 33.3564).0425.0314.0425.Name = "D2".8903.0314. CoincidentCon(p.6124. 18. 33.6882).6882. p. } //Constraints TangentCon(p.Pt18. 35.0314. 6.4491.Base.Cr16. Inc.0 .Ln15.0425.Ln15.Ln7.9686.52786). 35.Base.0238. 36. All rights reserved. 6. dim = DistanceDim(p. CoincidentCon(p. p.27234. 23. 14.Center. 10.Cr8.9831.5152. 9.03139.9382).Ln13.Pt17. CoincidentCon(p.5408).065.2306. 35. 43.Ln9.Ln15. TangentCon(p. Inc. 6. TangentCon(p.Ln7. 18. 44. if(dim) dim.Ln15. 25. p. CoincidentCon(p.9686.52786.Menus if(dim) dim.5.2907).Ln7. 5.0425). 0). 9. 40. 44.5425. 13. 0. 18. 44. p.Ln14. 0).Base. 5. 0.Ln7.0314.Cr8. 41. if(dim) dim. 20.9686.2712.Name = "V5". p.9686.Cr10.Ln14.5425).End. 44.43777. 45. 10.Pt17. 31. CoincidentCon(p.5279.Center. 13. 4. 20. 21. if(dim) dim. p. dim = HorizontalDim(p. CoincidentCon(p. CoincidentCon(p.Cr8. 10.6882.Ln14. 19.03139.9686.8542).Center.5425. 41.Name = "H6".5663.309).Pt18. 33. TangentCon(p. 0). 27.3889). 13. 40. if(dim) dim.8038.DimRefFlag = agc.Cr10. 36.4491. 10. 39.5. CoincidentCon(p.6882.0314.Base. 21. 35. 28.5). 41.0314. 35. 40.Name = "L3".1133. p.Ln7. 44. 46. p. 36. p.61012). 43. 36.5. 9.Ln13.Name = "A7".Cr8.End. .Name = "R1".5.449. 37. 33. dim = RadiusDim(p. 9.

75223.Ln7. ConcentricCon(p. 31. 64) • Run Script (p.Cr16). CoincidentCon(p. CoincidentCon(p.2712). 72) • Image Capture (p.4421). 31.Cr17. CoincidentCon(p. p.8219. p. 74) • Recent Scripts (p.Ln9.Cr17. 13. 39.0314. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. CoincidentCon(p.Ln13. p. 71) • Restore Auto-save File (p.1133). 9.Ln9.Cr8.EvalDimCons().Ln14. 73) • Recent Imports (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 49) • Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. 31.6882). 8. . 20.449.Ln13). //Final evaluate of all dimensions and constraints in plane return p.End.Base.End.0314. 39.Cr12. Inc.Center. 33.Cr17. 70) • Print (p. EqualRadiusCon(p. p. p. 21. p. 13. All rights reserved.End. p.Plane.Regen(). 33. p.03138. 51) • Import External Geometry File (p. 47) • Load DesignModeler Database (p. 46) • Start Over (p.Pt18.Ln13.Ln15. //Finish agb. 21.0316. EqualRadiusCon(p.1133.8219). 49) • Export (p. 31. 41. CoincidentCon(p.Ln13.8542. 41. p.0316. 21.4491.End.8542). 70) • Auto-save Now (p. File Menu p.Cr17. Inc.2714. } //End Plane JScript function: planeSketchesOnly //Call Plane JScript function var ps1 = planeSketchesOnly (new Object()).0314. 19. ParallelCon(p.Cr10).449.2714. 31. 33. p.Pt16.4491. p.0 . EqualLengthCon(p. 20. 21. 21. 19. //To insure model validity //End DM JScript Other file management options: • Refresh Input (p. CoincidentCon(p.© SAS IP.Center.Cr16.2714). 75) Release 15.Cr11). EqualRadiusCon(p.Base.2714. 33.0316.Cr11).0316. 69 . p.Cr16.Ln9). 56) • Import Shaft Geometry (p.Pt16. 48) • Save Project (p. } p.

AutoConstraintGlobal(agc. . 46) • Start Over (p. 71) • Restore Auto-save File (p. 75) Print Release 15. 64) • Write Script: Sketch(es) of Active Plane (p. Inc.© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information 70 of ANSYS. 47) • Load DesignModeler Database (p. 73) • Recent Imports (p. 65) • Print (p. 74) • Recent Scripts (p.0 .Menus • Close ANSYS DesignModeler (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 48) • Save Project (p. you can control the Auto Con- straint Global switch using the AutoConstraintGlobal command: • agb. If you are running scripts that create sketch edges. All rights reserved. 51) • Import External Geometry File (p. 56) • Import Shaft Geometry (p. For scripts written with the Write Script command.Yes). 49) • Export (p. Inc.AutoConstraintGlobal(agc. this is preferred as that command will put all the existing constraints in the script file. 72) • Image Capture (p. you should note that the Auto Constraint Global switch is turned off while running the script and then reset to its previous setting when the script finishes. //Turns auto constraints off Other file management options: • Refresh Input (p.No). //Turns auto constraints on • agb. 75) • Close ANSYS DesignModeler (p. Such scripts are intended to assist in creating many similar parts by making simple changes to the script file. 49) • Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. 70) • Auto-save Now (p. . 75) Run Script Use the Run Script option to start a script created with the instructions in Scripting API. If you are writing your own script.

Whenever you change this path. File Menu Use the Print option to print your model. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 74) • Recent Scripts (p. Other file management options: • Refresh Input (p. 70) • Auto-save Now (p. 71 . 51) • Import External Geometry File (p. 252) option is selected a specified number of times. 73) • Recent Imports (p. Auto-save Now forces an automatic save immediately.agdb-## (If the project is unsaved. A list of these backup files will then be available for you to resume from the File->Restore File Menu.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Proc-ID_system-name. . 49) • Export (p. 64) • Write Script: Sketch(es) of Active Plane (p.0 . Inc. Release 15. 75) Auto-save Now DesignModeler automatically saves backup files of the model after the Generate (p. 65) • Run Script (p. which resides in Workbench's temporary directory. or B. 47) • Load DesignModeler Database (p. 49) • Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. Project-name_system-name. 71) • Restore Auto-save File (p. 46) • Start Over (p. Auto-save files have the following special naming conventions: A. 136) mode. 72) • Image Capture (p. The option is only available when you are in Print Pre- view (p.© SAS IP. All rights reserved. 75) • Close ANSYS DesignModeler (p. a new temporary directory and Auto-save folder will be created and the old folder and Auto-save files will be deleted. 48) • Save Project (p. Auto-save files are saved to a folder named Auto-save.agdb-## (If the project is saved). where procID is the ANSYS Workbench process ID). 56) • Import Shaft Geometry (p. Inc.

All rights reserved.Menus Once the unsaved project is saved.0 . Note that the -00 Auto-save file will not be displayed in the list unless the Auto-save Frequency is greater than Every Generate and the model has not just been Auto-saved. 65) • Run Script (p. 64) • Write Script: Sketch(es) of Active Plane (p. 46) • Start Over (p.© SAS IP. 46) • Start Over (p. 70) • Restore Auto-save File (p. Inc. 73) • Recent Imports (p. Note that it is not recommended to have multiple DesignModeler sessions of the same model open. 75) Restore Auto-save File You can restore an Auto-save file by selecting a file using Restore Auto-save in the File Menu. . . 70) • Print (p. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 49) • Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. A list of all the Auto-save files for the model that is currently open is displayed. then all the AutoSave files will be re-named from unsaved (item B above) to saved (item A above) and ## starts at 00 (the most recent Auto-save file) and increases until the specified Auto-save File Limit has been reached (the highest ## is the oldest Auto-save file). as their Auto-save files will interfere. 51) • Import External Geometry File (p. 48) • Save Project (p. Other file management options: • Refresh Input (p. 47) • Load DesignModeler Database (p. 72) • Image Capture (p. 74) • Recent Scripts (p. 75) • Close ANSYS DesignModeler (p. Other file management options: • Refresh Input (p. 56) • Import Shaft Geometry (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 72 of ANSYS. 49) • Export (p. 47) Release 15.

png) The Aero display mode in the Windows 7 operating system is incompatible with the screen capture used in ANSYS Workbench. 47) • Load DesignModeler Database (p. 64) • Write Script: Sketch(es) of Active Plane (p.eps) Tagged Image File (. 70) • Auto-save Now (p. 75) Image Capture The Image Capture tool allows you to save the contents of the graphics view in a standard image file format. Inc.jpg) Encapsulated PostScript (. 75) • Close ANSYS DesignModeler (p.bmp) Joint Photographic Experts Group (.0 . 46) • Start Over (p. . The following file formats are supported: Windows Bitmap (. 70) • Print (p. 51) • Import External Geometry File (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 49) • Export (p. 56) • Import Shaft Geometry (p. All rights reserved. 74) • Recent Scripts (p. 51) Release 15. 49) • Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. 65) • Run Script (p. 49) • Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. 71) • Image Capture (p.© SAS IP. 48) • Save Project (p. turning off Aero mode will restore the capability. Inc. 48) • Save Project (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. File Menu • Load DesignModeler Database (p. If running Windows 7. 49) • Export (p. 73 . 73) • Recent Imports (p.tif ) Portable Network Graphics (. Other file management options: • Refresh Input (p.

Other file management options: • Refresh Input (p. 49) • Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. Inc. 71) • Restore Auto-save File (p. Note that previously exported files may also appear in this list. . 72) • Recent Imports (p. 75) Release 15. All rights reserved. 64) • Write Script: Sketch(es) of Active Plane (p. 48) • Save Project (p. 70) • Print (p. 65) • Run Script (p. 49) • Export (p. 56) feature will be added to the bottom of the feature list.© SAS IP. .0 . 71) • Restore Auto-save File (p. 64) • Write Script: Sketch(es) of Active Plane (p. 70) • Auto-save Now (p. 56) • Import Shaft Geometry (p. 74) • Recent Scripts (p. 75) Recent Imports From this menu you may choose a recent CAD file to Import. with the CAD file automatically chosen as the source.Menus • Import External Geometry File (p. 56) • Import Shaft Geometry (p. 70) • Auto-save Now (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 72) • Recent Imports (p. 75) • Close ANSYS DesignModeler (p. 65) • Run Script (p. 51) • Import External Geometry File (p. A new Import External Geometry File (p. 46) • Start Over (p. 74) • Recent Scripts (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 74 of ANSYS. 70) • Print (p. Inc. 47) • Load DesignModeler Database (p.

File Menu

• Close ANSYS DesignModeler (p. 75)

Recent Scripts
From this menu you may choose to run a script that was recently used.

Other file management options:

• Refresh Input (p. 46)

• Start Over (p. 47)

• Load DesignModeler Database (p. 48)

• Save Project (p. 49)

• Export (p. 49)

• Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. 51)

• Import External Geometry File (p. 56)

• Import Shaft Geometry (p. 64)

• Write Script: Sketch(es) of Active Plane (p. 65)

• Run Script (p. 70)

• Print (p. 70)

• Auto-save Now (p. 71)

• Restore Auto-save File (p. 72)

• Image Capture (p. 73)

• Recent Imports (p. 74)

• Close ANSYS DesignModeler (p. 75)

Close ANSYS DesignModeler
The Close DesignModeler option closes the application.

Other file management options:

• Refresh Input (p. 46)

• Start Over (p. 47)

• Load DesignModeler Database (p. 48)

• Save Project (p. 49)

• Export (p. 49)

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 75

Menus

• Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. 51)

• Import External Geometry File (p. 56)

• Import Shaft Geometry (p. 64)

• Write Script: Sketch(es) of Active Plane (p. 65)

• Run Script (p. 70)

• Print (p. 70)

• Auto-save Now (p. 71)

• Restore Auto-save File (p. 72)

• Image Capture (p. 73)

• Recent Imports (p. 74)

• Recent Scripts (p. 75)

Create Menu

The following feature options are available under the Create Menu. The 3D Features (p. 251) are:

• New Plane (p. 194)

• Extrude (p. 255)

• Revolve (p. 260)

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
76 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Create Menu

• Sweep (p. 261)

• Skin/Loft (p. 264)

• Thin/Surface (p. 268)

• Fixed Radius (p. 270)

• Variable Radius (p. 271)

• Vertex Blend (p. 271)

• Chamfer (p. 274)

• Pattern (p. 385)

• Body Operation (p. 388)

• Body Transformation (p. 395)

• Boolean (p. 399)

• Slice (p. 404)

• Delete (p. 413)

• Point (p. 275)

• Primitives (p. 289)

Other menus accessible via the "DesignModeler Menus" (p. 45) toolbar:

• File Menu (p. 45)

• Concept Menu (p. 78)

• Tools Menu (p. 79)

• Units Menu (p. 84)

• View Menu (p. 85)

• Help Menu (p. 86)

• Context Menus (p. 87)

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 77

Menus

Concept Menu

The following feature options are available under the Concept Menu:

• Lines From Points (p. 444)

• Lines From Sketches (p. 446)

• Lines From Edges (p. 447)

• 3D Curve (p. 450)

• Split Edges (p. 452)

• Surfaces From Edges (p. 455)

• Surfaces From Sketches (p. 457)

• Surfaces From Faces (p. 458)

• Cross Section (p. 461)

Other menus accessible via the "DesignModeler Menus" (p. 45) toolbar:

• File Menu (p. 45)

• Create Menu (p. 76)

• Tools Menu (p. 79)

• Units Menu (p. 84)

• View Menu (p. 85)

• Help Menu (p. 86)

• Context Menus (p. 87)

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
78 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Tools Menu

Tools Menu

The following feature options are available under the Tools Menu:

• Freeze (p. 298)

• Unfreeze (p. 300)

• Named Selection (p. 301)

• Attribute (p. 308)

• Mid-Surface (p. 310)

• Joint (p. 317)

• Enclosure (p. 322)

• Face Split (p. 327)

• Symmetry (p. 337)

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 79

Menus

• Fill (p. 340)

• Surface Extension (p. 344)

• Surface Patch

• Surface Flip

• Merge (p. 363)

• Connect (p. 368)

• Projection (p. 378)

• Conversion (p. 382)

Note that the Electronics menu is shown in the Tools Menu (p. 79) only if the DesignModeler option
Enable Electronics Options is set to Yes (default). The option is accessible via the Additional
DesignModeler Options category in the Geometry (p. 546) section of the Options dialog box. Select
No to deactivate the menu in the Tools menu.

Other specialized features and groups of tools accessible from the Tools Menu (p. 79):

• Repair Features (p. 81)

• Analysis Tools (p. 81)

• Form New Part (p. 82)

• Parameters (p. 82)

• Electronics (p. 82)

• Addins (p. 83)

• Options (p. 83)

Other menus accessible via the "DesignModeler Menus" (p. 45) toolbar:

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
80 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Tools Menu

• File Menu (p. 45)

• Create Menu (p. 76)

• Concept Menu (p. 78)

• Units Menu (p. 84)

• View Menu (p. 85)

• Help Menu (p. 86)

• Context Menus (p. 87)

Repair Features
Accessible from the Tools Menu (p. 79) and executable on frozen and active bodies, the Repair (p. 420)
features form a set of semiautomatic tools that allow you to easily search and easily fix unwanted
geometries or geometric errors, also referred to as faults, from the model.

Other specialized features and groups of tools accessible from the Tools Menu (p. 79):

• Analysis Tools (p. 81)

• Form New Part (p. 82)

• Parameters (p. 82)

• Electronics (p. 82)

• Addins (p. 83)

• Options (p. 83)

Analysis Tools
Accessible from the Tools Menu (p. 79), the Analysis Tools (p. 438) allow you to measure the distance
between any two entities, obtain model entity information, and detect model faults.

Other specialized features and groups of tools accessible from theTools Menu (p. 79):

• Repair Features (p. 81)

• Form New Part (p. 82)

• Parameters (p. 82)

• Electronics (p. 82)

• Addins (p. 83)

• Options (p. 83)

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 81

Menus

Form New Part
Accessible from the Tools Menu (p. 79), the Form New Part (p. 226) tool allows you to group bodies into
parts for transfer into the ANSYS Mechanical application as parts consisting of multiple bodies, with
shared topology.

Other specialized features and groups of tools accessible from the Tools Menu (p. 79):

• Repair Features (p. 81)

• Analysis Tools (p. 81)

• Parameters (p. 82)

• Electronics (p. 82)

• Addins (p. 83)

• Options (p. 83)

Parameters
Accessible from the Tools Menu (p. 79) and the 3D Features (p. 251) toolbar, selecting Parameters opens
the Parameter Manager view in the Project Schematic.

Other specialized features and groups of tools accessible from the Tools Menu (p. 79):

• Repair Features (p. 81)

• Analysis Tools (p. 81)

• Form New Part (p. 82)

• Electronics (p. 82)

• Addins (p. 83)

• Options (p. 83)

Electronics
Accessible from the Tools Menu (p. 79), selecting Electronics opens a menu that allows you to create
a model for thermal analysis using ANSYS Icepak.

Other specialized features and groups of tools accessible from the Tools Menu (p. 79):

• Repair Features (p. 81)

• Analysis Tools (p. 81)

• Form New Part (p. 82)

• Parameters (p. 82)

• Addins (p. 83)

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
82 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Tools Menu

• Options (p. 83)

Addins
Accessible from the Tools Menu (p. 79), selecting Addins opens a dialog box that allows you to load
and unload third-party addins.

Other specialized features and groups of tools accessible from the Tools Menu (p. 79):

• Repair Features (p. 81)

• Analysis Tools (p. 81)

• Form New Part (p. 82)

• Parameters (p. 82)

• Electronics (p. 82)

• Options (p. 83)

Options
Accessible from the Tools Menu (p. 79), selecting Options opens Geometry options in the dialog box
by default.

The following ANSYS DesignModeler options appear in the Options dialog box:

Geometry (p. 546)
Graphics (p. 549)
Miscellaneous (p. 551)
Toolbars (p. 555)
Units (p. 557)

Other specialized features and groups of tools accessible from the Tools Menu (p. 79):

• Repair Features (p. 81)

• Analysis Tools (p. 81)

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 83

Menus

• Form New Part (p. 82)

• Parameters (p. 82)

• Electronics (p. 82)

• Addins (p. 83)

Units Menu

The Units Menu can be used to change the current unit of the session. The menu consists of two types
of units; namely length-based units and angle-based units. Length-based units are broadly classified
based on model size into three types: Small, Medium, and Large.

• Small: Micrometer

• Medium: Meter, Centimeter, Millimeter, Foot, and Inch

• Large: Meter and Foot (with Large Model Support enabled)

Units cannot be changed across the above class types except in an empty DesignModeler session.

Also, note that session units cannot be changed if a parameter type of “Undefined” exists in the Para-
meter Manager.

Large Model Support: Large Model Support can be set On/Off only at the start of a new session when
the length unit is chosen as Meter or Foot.

Model Tolerance: Model Tolerance is the geometric tolerance value used by the geometry algorithms
of a feature during feature generation. It has three values, namely:

• Loose

• Normal

• Tight

It is recommended to use Model Tolerance as Tight for models of a smaller dimension and Loose for
models of a larger dimension.

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
84 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

View Menu

If Large Model Support is enabled, or if the DesignModeler session unit is Micrometer, the Model Toler-
ance will be set to Tight and cannot be changed. For databases created in versions prior to 15.0,
Model Tolerance is shown as Custom and cannot be changed.

As the tolerance values are used by all of the features, if you change the Model Tolerance, all of the
features will be required to be regenerated.

Other menus accessible via the "DesignModeler Menus" (p. 45) toolbar:

• File Menu (p. 45)

• Create Menu (p. 76)

• Concept Menu (p. 78)

• Tools Menu (p. 79)

• View Menu (p. 85)

• Help Menu (p. 86)

• Context Menus (p. 87)

View Menu

The View Menu consists a group of display controls that affect the appearance of your model in the
DesignModeler application and one group that restores the original window layout. The settings in the
View Menu are saved in the .agdb files themselves.

These options apply only to solids and surface bodies:

• Shaded Exterior and Edges (p. 107)

• Shaded Exterior (p. 108)

• Wireframe (p. 109)

• Frozen Body Transparency (p. 115)

• Edge Joints (p. 115)

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 85

78) • Tools Menu (p.© SAS IP. 45) toolbar: • File Menu (p.Menus The option applies to solids. 86) • Context Menus (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 109)> Edge Coloring (p. 109)> Face Coloring (p. 84) • Help Menu (p. 113) These options always effect display: • Ruler (p. 79) • Units Menu (p. 121) • Windows > Section Planes (p. 87) Help Menu This online documentation for the DesignModeler application is viewable via the ANSYS Help Viewer. surface bodies and line bodies: • Graphics Options (p. . 45) • Create Menu (p. 118) These options apply only to line bodies: • Cross Section Alignments (p. 76) • Concept Menu (p. 119) The option applies to surface bodies only: • Graphics Options (p. Release 15. Inc. 137) Other menus accessible via the "DesignModeler Menus" (p.0 . 117) • Display Vertices (p. Inc. 116) • Cross Section Solids (p. 121) The last group includes: • Outline Options (p. 110) • Display Edge Direction (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 86 of ANSYS. 131) • Windows > Reset Layout (p. . 120) • Triad (p. All rights reserved.

93) • Measure Selection (p. 89) • Expand/Shrink Face Selection (p. 90) • Feature Suppression (p. You can also access the online documentation by pressing the F1 hotkey. and service pack version information. Other menus accessible via the "DesignModeler Menus" (p. 88) • Delete right mouse button option in Feature Tree Outline (p. 91) • Go To Body (p. By default you are taken to the DesignModeler application section. Inc.© SAS IP. 78) • Tools Menu (p. 87 . 92) • Hide/Show Faces (p. 89) • Edit Selections (p. • Installation and Licensing Help: Click this button to access the ANSYS Workbench Installation and Licensing Help. where you can search by keywords. . Inc. 76) • Concept Menu (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 45) toolbar: • File Menu (p. • About ANSYS DesignModeler: Click this button to access copyright. 85) • Context Menus (p. Context Menus • ANSYS DesignModeler Help: Click this button to access the ANSYS Workbench Help. 88) • Edit Dimension Name/Value (p. 79) • Units Menu (p. 185) • Explode Part (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 45) • Create Menu (p. 91) • Form New Part (p. 94) Release 15. 91) • Go To Feature (p. 87) Context Menus Context menus are only accessible using the right mouse button. software build date and version.0 . All rights reserved. • Delete right mouse button option in Model and Details View (p. 84) • View Menu (p. 89) • Feature Insert (p.

99) • Sketch/Plane (p. 78) • Tools Menu (p. 95) • Select All (p. Delete right mouse button option in Feature Tree Outline The Delete function is also available in context menus (right mouse button) accessed in the feature Tree Outline (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 88 of ANSYS. . 104) Other menus accessible via the "DesignModeler Menus" (p. 45) • Create Menu (p. Release 15. 102) • Suppress/Hide Part and Body (p. 96) • Sketch Instances (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. 45) toolbar: • File Menu (p. 103) • Suppress/Hide Parts from Feature Tree Outline (p. 84) • View Menu (p. 79) • Units Menu (p.0 . 97) • Sketch Projection (p. 252). 94) • Quick Cut Copy Paste (p. 94) • Named Selection Suppress/Hide Body and Face (p. 94) • Named Selection from Model View Window (p. and choose Delete. 85) • Help Menu (p. you can select a constraint or edge from the Details View. Inc.Menus • Move Dimensions (p. All rights reserved. 96) • Show Dependencies (p. Inc. 96) • Show Problematic Geometry (p. 86) Delete right mouse button option in Model and Details View The Delete function is provided as a context menu option (right mouse button) whenever applicable within the Model View window and Details View. A feature or sketch may be deleted if it is not used to define any other feature. click the right mouse button. 95) • Rename right mouse button option (p. . For example. 76) • Concept Menu (p.

right click the part you want to eliminate in the feature Tree Outline (p. Context Menus Cross sections may be deleted if they are not assigned to any line bodies.© SAS IP. A pop-up window will appear where you may modify the dimension's name and value. 252) and choose Explode Part. Release 15. 248) via the feature's context menu. The Delete function can also be used to "Cancel" the creation of a new feature. 89 . Note that for reference dimensions. you may only modify the name. Explode Part The Explode Part operation will separate the bodies contained within a part. Inc. Edit Dimension Name/Value You can quickly edit a dimension's name and value by selecting the dimension.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Note that exploding a part will alter the Part IDs of bodies within the part. All rights reserved. changing them into single body parts. Inc. . no other feature in the model can be deleted. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. then clicking the right mouse button and choosing the Edit Name/Value option as shown below. See Part Persistence for more information. Edit Selections The DesignModeler application allows you to perform Edit Selections for Features and Apply/Can- cel (p. Note that while a new feature is being created.0 . To perform the operation.

All rights reserved. then choosing Explode Part in the context menu. Release 15. A feature menu item is only shown in the right mouse button submenu if the system supports inserting the corresponding feature at the selected position in the tree. Feature Insert The DesignModeler application allows you to insert a feature before a selected feature (branch in the feature Tree Outline (p. In- active features appear gray in the feature Tree Outline (p. Inc. this is necessary so that you can properly select model entities for the creation of the new feature (see ex- ample illustration below).Contains proprietary and confidential information 90 of ANSYS. Just as in Edit Selections. the features that appear after the selected one will become temporarily inactive until the model is regenerated. When inserting a feature or performing edit selections on a feature.© SAS IP. . Note that Insert Feature will roll back the model to its status before the selected feature (branch in the tree). 252)) via the right mouse button.Menus Result: The operation may also be performed by selecting all the bodies that belong to a part in the Model View window. Export Cross Sections to Script The DesignModeler application allows you to export Cross Sections to a file via the right mouse button on the Cross Section Tree Node. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. .0 . 252). Inc.

Release 15. There are four suppression options. see the Context Menu Options (p. that means it is ignored when the model is generated. Also it is possible that some PF Points may not belong to a body if they were read in from a coordinates file. Inc. 252). the Go To Body function is accessible via the right mouse button. 252). the Go To Body utility is applied to a selected face in a model. • Suppress & All Below: Suppresses the selected feature and all features below it in the feature Tree Outline (p. Inc. point feature points (PF points). When a feature is suppressed. The function allows you to locate the body in the feature Tree Outline (p. and all features that they depend on. Example 2: Selecting a face Here. The supported entities are faces. Form New Part For usage information. All rights reserved. 91 .0 . • Unsuppress: Unsuppresses the selected feature and all features that it depends on. • Suppress: Suppresses the selected feature and features that depend on it.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 226) feature description. Go To Body When a model entity is selected in the Model View window. you can suppress and unsuppress features. though only two of the four are available at a time. • Unsuppress & All Below: Unsuppresses the selected feature. Context Menus Feature Suppression Through the feature Tree Outline (p. 252) to which the selected entity belongs.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Note that the option is only available if a single entity is chosen. and bodies. vertices. 252). edges. all features below it in the feature Tree Outline (p. . 226) section of the Form New Part (p.

. the body to which the selected entity belongs is now selected.0 . Example 3: Selecting a face Here the Go To Feature is used to select a face from a model. point feature points (PF points (p. 252) is identified. . The supported entities are faces. 6). the Go To Feature function is ac- cessible via the right mouse button. All rights reserved. Inc. Go To Feature When you have a model entity selected in the Model View window. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. vertices.Menus After the Go To Body operation completes. this function will only show the first feature used to generate the body. and bodies. Inc. its node in the feature Tree Outline (p. 252).© SAS IP. The function allows you to find which feature generated the selected entity. Release 15.Contains proprietary and confidential information 92 of ANSYS. edges. 276)). When a body is selected. The corresponding feature will be selected in the feature Tree Outline (p. and its properties are seen in the Details View (p.

Note that the Hide/Show Faces options only apply to bodies that are not suppressed and not marked as hidden. Note that if you set Tools>Options>Graphics>Show Edges of Hidden Faces to Yes.© SAS IP. All rights reserved. except the selected faces. Also the search may fail for Slice when it is performed on surface or line bodies. Context Menus Note This operation may fail to identify the appropriate feature due to the extension of surfaces during feature generation. • Hide All Other Faces: When faces are selected in the Graphics area. It includes Body Operation and Surface Extension. Context Menu Options • Hide Face(s): When faces are selected in the Graphics area. then the edges will not be hidden. Likewise vertices with all their faces hidden cannot be selected. this will hide the selected faces.0 . and both the edges and vertices will be selectable. this will hide all faces in the model. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Hide/Show Faces The functionality to Hide Faces to see less detail or inside a body. Hidden faces/edges cannot be selected. Show Faces is used to restore their visibility. Also. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. Release 15. 93 . edges that are connected only to hidden faces will also become hidden. Inc.

Named Selection Suppress/Hide Body and Face The functionality to Suppress and Hide faces and bodies in Named Selections behaves exactly as in the Mechanical application. Measure Selection A setting in the Options dialog box defines a limit at which the DesignModeler application will stop automatically measuring a selection. This is intended to avoid doing CPU-intensive operations when the selection becomes complex.. For properties that appear in the Details View. then only hidden faces on the bodies of those selections are reset. if applicable. If any bodies. 462). you will see an ellipsis (. Move Dimensions To change a cross section dimension's location. faces.Menus • Show All Faces: Right clicking on Show All Faces resets the visibility of all faces in the model to visible. Inc.) instead of the calculated value when the object exceeds the automatic calculation limit defined in the Options dialog box. . will appear in the Details View context menu and in the feature Tree Outline (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . Inc. The Named Selection option is not available in the Sketching mode. you will be able to start a Named Selection feature through the context menu. • Options are filtered based upon availability • Multiple Named Selections may be modified at once • Named Selection modification is not available if different features are selected at once (for example. edges are selected prior to choosing this option. such as volumes and surface areas. as explained in the Editing Cross Sections (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 94 of ANSYS. The Measure Selection option. feature creation. Named Selection from Model View Window When you have model entities selected. You can always force the selection to be measured by right clicking on the property and choosing Measure Selection.0 . or Edit Selections mode. All rights reserved. use the right mouse button option. Named Selection and Extrude features) • All options are accessible by clicking on a Named Selection with the context menu (right mouse button) Release 15.© SAS IP. 252) context menu if a body or part is selected..

You can rename a tree node by selecting the name and then pressing the F2 key. Features.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Cut and Copy appear in the context menu. 252) and clicking Hide Bodies in Group will hide all bodies in the Selection. 252) and clicking Suppress Bodies in Group. If you choose one of these. at as many locations as you want. • Suppress Bodies in Group: All bodies in a Named Selection may be suppressed by right-clicking on the feature in the Tree Outline (p. and in the general selection state. it is just as though you changed to the Modify group (if necessary). 252) and the Details View (p. 252) and clicking Show Bodies in Group will show all bodies in the Selection. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Release 15. once you have selected any edges.0 . Inc. Inc. and then automatically taken to the Paste function to place the edges. 252) and clicking Unsuppress Bodies in Group. • Hide Face(s): Right-clicking on a Named Selection and selecting Hide Face(s) will hide all faces in the Named Selection. cross sections. Also. • Show Bodies in Group: Right-clicking on a Named Selection feature in the Tree Outline (p. along with the End option in the context menu. 252). with the preselected edges. Cut and Copy now appear here also providing shortcuts back to those functions. . Rename right mouse button option The Rename function is available as a context menu option (right mouse button) in the feature Tree Outline (p. in the Cut and Copy functions themselves. you can rename them in a single step with the help of context menu "Rename" option or pressing the F2 key. At that point you are asked to indicate the Paste Handle. and parts may be renamed. 95 . Context Menus Context Menu Options • Hide Bodies in Group: Right-clicking on a Named Selection feature in the Tree Outline (p. Renaming Multiple Bodies If all selected nodes are bodies (bodies can be from different parts) from feature Tree Outline (p. When you are finished with Paste. sketches. any of the End right mouse button options will take you automatically to the Paste function. Quick Cut Copy Paste When in Sketching Mode. 6). A Pop-up dialog will appear as shown below. • Unsuppress Bodies in Group: All bodies in a Named Selection may be unsuppressed by right-clicking on the feature in the Tree Outline (p. • Show Hidden Face(s): Right-clicking on a Named Selection and selecting Show Hidden Face(s) will show all hidden faces in the Named Selection. and selected either Cut or Copy in the toolbox.© SAS IP. bodies. All rights reserved.

it is only selectable for one feature at a time. where 'name' is provided by you.g. the bodies will be renamed along with ". . Related features that are suppressed will appear in a gray color.1". 252) receives its name as "name. Furthermore. The Show Problematic Geometry option can only be accessed from the context menu of features in the feature Tree Outline (p. A child is a feature that depends on the se- lected feature. then the problematic edge will not be available for viewing). 252). When a new feature is being created or a feature is being edited. Select All The Select All option will select all visible entities in the model. that geometry must exist in the final model to be identifiable (e. The second body receives its name as "name. Show Dependencies The Show Dependencies option will display the parent and child relationships of the selected feature. The number assigned will be in order from top to bottom as seen in the tree view. . The Show Problematic Geometry feature will point out the faulty topology by selecting it and displaying an annotation containing a description of the error. for the active selection filter you have chosen.2". and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. if a blend feature identifies an edge as problematic and a subsequent Extrude feature cuts material such that the edge disappears from the model.Contains proprietary and confidential information 96 of ANSYS.Menus For instance. Inc. Show Problematic Geometry The Show Problematic Geometry feature is available when faulty geometry associated with the error or undesired state can be determined for a feature. no other nodes in the model can be renamed. where '#' represents number assigned. A parent is a feature that the selected feature depends on. So the first body in the feature Tree Out- line (p. If a feature fails and contains problematic geometry. All rights reserved.0 .© SAS IP.#" extension. Only features in which additional error information is available can identify problematic geometry. It is important to note that this option is not available for all errors or all features. so on. Release 15. 252). Also note that the availability of problematic geometry may depend on the state of the model. The Show Dependencies option will not appear for features that have no parents or children. if 5 bodies are selected from feature Tree Outline (p.

97 . Inc. or deleted by normal sketch operations. Because you are not allowed to make a sketch instance 'active' while in Sketching mode. the Show Problematic Geometry option will point out the offensive geometry and highlight it. However. Sketch Instances Sketch Instances allow you to place copies of existing sketches in other planes. 252) is done. The basic steps to create a sketch instance are to first right click on the plane in the tree where you want to insert the Sketch Instance. it cannot be used as base sketches for Instances.0 . you cannot go into Sketching mode to edit/modify a Sketch Instance. Release 15. edited. Context Menus If selected. its instances will be automatically updated to match it when a Generate (p. Inc.© SAS IP. The edges in a sketch instance are fixed just like a plane boundary and cannot be moved. and since it is designed to be a copy of the base sketch. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The maximum number of problematic geometry that is shown on the screen at one time can be set in the Options control panel. When changes are made in a base sketch. then all of them will be highlighted and annotated. A sketch instance can be used just like normal sketches for creating other features. All rights reserved. If there are multiple faulty topologies available. they are not included in the drop down menu of sketches on the toolbar.

Note that a base sketch must be in a plane prior to the current plane in the tree. The boundary edges will be treated just like a base sketch. and scale of the sketch in- stance: • FD1. Another option for the base sketch is to select a plane in the tree that has boundary edges. or in the graphics area if it has been made visible.Menus Since a Sketch Instance must lie in a plane later in the tree than the base sketch (unless the base sketch is a plane boundary). Instance Y: See Instance X above. When you click on Apply. sets the location in the active plane where the Base X and Y of the Base Sketch will be positioned.Contains proprietary and confidential information 98 of ANSYS. angle. . Base Y: See Base X above.0. Select the base sketch property in the Details View and then select the base sketch. Note that the selected sketch must be from a plane that is earlier in the tree than the active plane. and for other planes. . Instance X: This. You can also modify the following properties to control the location. Base X: This. The other two fixed planes have the option Insert Sketch Instance. Scale: This allows scaling in relation to the Instance X and Instance Y location. This is because the location and definition of the instance depends on the base sketch.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. along with Instance Y. Inc. the Release 15. Sketch Instance is an option in the Insert portion accessible via the right mouse button. The Instance X and Y locations are also used as the central point for rotation and scale. you will see the new Sketch Instance in the active plane. • FD3. • FD6. the XYPlane does not have an option for creating a Sketch Instance. Inc. along with Base Y. These are planes made from planar faces. Rotate Angle: This allows rotation about the Instance X and Instance Y location.01 to 100. • FD2. A Base Sketch can be used for multiple Sketch Instances. either from the tree. If they were in the same plane. Scaling is limited to a range of 0. once you have used a sketch as a Base Sketch. Just selecting a single edge of the desired sketch is sufficient. • FD5.0 . you cannot delete it until you have deleted all of its Sketch Instances. • FD4. sets a reference location in the Base Sketch. All rights reserved. However.

99 . 99). adjacent faces are treated as a group and projected as though they were a separate surface body. In fact. when the base sketch is really a plane boundary (a plane is selected as the base sketch). note that since selected edges are processed individually. Inc. The edges in a sketch projection are fixed just like a plane boundary or sketch instance and cannot be moved. See examples below. or face sets that are normal to the plane may not be projected. a circular definition that must be avoided. For bodies and face sets. the projection will be the outline of the body. This would mean that B depends on A. 3D edges. can be shown. So if the 3D model is updated. If a face or faces of a surface body or collection of adjacent faces would project as a line connected to an outline. Once you create a sketch instance in a plane. then the projection will fail due to a non-manifold condition. just deleting the instance is not enough to allow the base sketch or its plane to be deleted. any edges that cannot be projected will be included in the problematic geometry display for the sketch. 99) are to first right click on the plane in the tree where you want to insert the Sketch Projection. Since a Sketch Projection must lie in a plane later in the tree than the 3D model items. that will prevent you from deleting the base sketch or the plane containing it as long as the Sketch Instance exists. A Sketch Projection can be used just like normal sketches for creating other features.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. For this reason. Suppressed Sketch Projections will be treated as though “Hide Sketch” were in effect for them. Sketch Projection Sketch Projection allows you to project 3D model items onto a plane. they are not included in the drop down menu of sketches on the toolbar. Also. For faces. and bodies to project. because you are not allowed to make a sketch projection 'active' while in Sketching mode. Note Generate is required to complete the sketch instances. However. Context Menus location and definition of the base sketch could be affected by constraints and dimensions to the fixed sketch instance. Sketch Projections can be suppressed like other features in the tree. While the DesignModeler application attempts to maintain associativity between the outline of the faces or bodies and sketch edges created. the fixed planes do not have the option for creating a Sketch Projection (p. You can select vertices. but A also depends on B.0 . faces. it cannot be used as a base sketch for Instances. unless selected separately. will not be projected. the associated sketch edges may change during a Generate (p. This is because you could still do an "Undo" to restore the instance. faces. Interior edges. and are non-manifold. Point feature points. edited. Single faces. this circular definition cannot occur since the plane boundary is fixed. that will free up the depend- ence between the base and instance because the Undo and Redo stacks for that plane are cleared. . because adjacent face sets (or bodies) are processed as a single item.. an instance of a plane boundary is allowed to be in the same plane as its base. Also note that selected edges. adjacent face set failures are not included in the prob- lematic geometry. The result will be fixed edges in a special sketch that remain associative with the selected topology. Unlike other Sketch types. If you delete the plane that contains the instance. there are cases where this is not possible. which are not part of face sets. 252). Release 15. it will not be possible to maintain proper associativity.© SAS IP. Like Sketch Instance. However. Another way to clear the dependence is to Save via the File menu since that clears the Undo and Redo stacks for all planes. no single face can be identified as the cause of failure when a non-manifold condition occurs. Because of this. Inc. as seen looking perpen- dicular (normal) from the plane. However. or deleted by normal sketch operations. The basic steps to create a Sketch Projection (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. If the topology of the pro- jection changes so that the number of sketch edges resulting from an edge or face in the outline changes. All rights reserved.

the endpoints will show up as blue instead of black.Contains proprietary and confidential information 100 of ANSYS. 99) in a plane. This can occur if a tiny part (smaller than a few mm) is imported into a part with meter units. Projected Items Normally. separate edges that share the same 3D vertex may not project to the same 2D location if the vertex was created as a “tolerant” vertex is tolerant. but only if there are existing 3D model items created prior to that plane in the tree. create a Lines From Sketches (p. when edges are projected. This will usually correct the problem. do not also select one of the edges which also end up being projected as a duplicate edge. If there are edges on a face selected to project. Tolerance Level When selecting items to project. 446). and select the plane used by the projection to get the Direction Vector for Extrude (p. Then. such as Extrude. 78). instead of using the sketch created by the projection directly for the Extrude. All rights reserved. edges. extremely tiny items may fall below a tolerance level and not be projected. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. and/or bodies where they create duplicate or overlapping edges. and get a warning about the profile and the result is a surface body when you expected a solid. This is because you could still do an “Undo” to restore the projection. Tolerance Differences In some cases due to tolerance differences or slight inaccuracies in the geo- metry. 252) is required to complete the Sketch Projection (p. you should avoid selecting a combination of faces. you will see the projected items displayed in black as they are “fixed” items that cannot be modified by you (other than modifying the items they are projected from). Another way to clear the dependence is to Save via the File menu since that clears the Undo and Redo stacks for all planes. 99) which can cause problems for subsequent opera- tions that use them. and is also more reliable in that it avoids the possibility of getting multiple edges from faces that are normal to the plane. selecting the sketch created by the Sketch Projection (p. 6) and then select the items to project. much faster. just deleting the projection is not enough to allow the base items to be deleted. . Under the Concept Menu (p. use the created Line Body. Notations: Selection Generate (p. Also. such that the resulting edge would be extremely tiny. then you will be much better off selecting the edges to project. there is a workaround available to get around the tiny gaps or overlaps. 99). When this occurs. Doing so creates duplicate or overlapping edges in the Sketch Projection (p. what appears as a closed profile from a sketch projection may have tiny gaps or overlaps. Sketch Projection is an option in the Insert portion accessible via the right mouse button. Select the Geometry property in the Details View (p. . This is much.Menus For other planes. For example if a single face is projected to a plane that is perpendicular to it.© SAS IP. Once you create a Sketch Projection (p. then it may not be present in the projection. If you try to use a sketch projection for a feature. If you delete the plane that contains the projection. In this case the ANSYS DesignModeler application will create a coincident constraint between the resulting two curve endpoints and allow its constraint engine to try to force them together. you cannot delete the base items as long as the Sketch Projection exists. 255). Release 15. Inc. In fact. 99). when projecting a face or body gives the same result as projecting just edges of that face or body. that will free up the dependence between the items and projection because the Undo and Redo stacks for that plane are cleared. In fact. Sometimes.0 . Inc.

you can see that the projection created sketch edges from both edges of the face as well as a silhouette on the right of the cylindrical face. Context Menus Example 4: Projection of a single face Here is a selected face and the plane to which it will be projected. Here is its projection onto the plane.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 101 . Looking straight at the plane. All rights reserved. Release 15. Inc. Inc.0 . .© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

. or all faces of a body that will cause a non-manifold error. Release 15. Applies only to sketches. Applies only to sketches. Context Menu Options • Always Show Sketch: Makes the selected sketch always visible. To make this work. Sketch/Plane Several options specific to sketches and planes appear in the context menu when right clicking on them in the feature Tree Outline (p. All rights reserved. and then unselect the faces of the two tabs that cause problems. you could select all the faces of the body. This will result in an error and no projection will be created. even when viewing another plane.Menus Example 5: A Non-Manifold Body Projection Case Here is a projection of a body.© SAS IP. However the other two tabs will cause a problem. . the one in the center does not cause a problem as it does not result in a line connecting to a region. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. In this view it is obvious that two of the tabs result in single lines connecting to the rest of the region.Contains proprietary and confidential information 102 of ANSYS. Inc. Here is the view looking directly at the plane. While it has three tabs that are perpendicular to the plane. The sketch will be visible if the plane it belongs to is visible. 252). This is the default visibility setting.0 . • Show Sketch: Returns the sketch to its normal viewing mode. Inc.

252). A solid green check mark icon will appear in the feature Tree Outline (p. 252) and the Model View window. While hidden. 252) when a body is suppressed. • Suppress means it is not visible and it is also not exported to the Mechanical application. A solid green check mark icon will appear in the feature Tree Outline (p. • Suppress implies Hide. Inc. • Hide All Other Bodies: Right clicking on Hide All Other Bodies functions as the name implies. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Suppress/Hide Part and Body The functionality to Suppress and Hide parts and bodies behaves exactly as in the ANSYS Mechanical application. Release 15. • Show Body: A body can be made visible by right clicking on the body in the feature Tree Outline (p. .© SAS IP. • Show All Bodies: Right clicking on Show All Other Bodies functions as the name implies.0 . • In the Model View window. 252) when a body is visible. 252) and clicking Unsuppress Body. suppression issued on a body (edge. • Suppress/Hide is possible from both the feature Tree Outline (p. 252) and clicking Suppress Body. face) applies to the body as a whole. While hidden. • Unsuppress: A body can be unsuppressed by right clicking on the body in the feature Tree Out- line (p. its edges will not be used for auto constraints or dimensions. it will only be displayed when it is selected in the feature Tree Outline (p. or is the active sketch while in sketching mode. unless it is the active sketch. All rights reserved. • Unsuppress All Bodies: Right clicking on Unsuppress All Bodies functions as the name implies. Context Menus • Hide Sketch: This allows you to turn off the display of a sketch. 252) and clicking Hide Body may hide the body. • Select All Bodies will select all visible bodies in the model. A light check mark icon will appear in the feature Tree Outline (p. • Hide means the body is not visible. • Look At: Orients the display so that it is centered on the selected sketch or plane. 103 . Applies only to sketches. 252) when a body is not suppressed. Inc. • Suppress Body: A body may be suppressed by right clicking on the body in the feature Tree Out- line (p. 252) when a body is hidden. Context Menu Options • Hide Body: Right clicking on a body in the feature Tree Outline (p. An "X" icon will appear in the feature Tree Outline (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 252) and clicking Show Body.

they will remain visible and the hidden bodies will become visible. 252) when a part is not suppressed (not all bodies are suppressed). 252) and clicking Suppress Surface Bodies. . • Suppress Surface Bodies: If exists. 252) and clicking Hide Part may hide a part. please see the Body Status (p. all suppressed Solid bodies in the Part can be unsuppressed by right clicking on the Part branch in the feature Tree Outline (p. All rights reserved. 252) when a part is visible (not all bodies are hidden). • Suppress Line Bodies: If exists. all Surface bodies in the Part can be suppressed by right clicking on the Part branch in the feature Tree Outline (p. A solid green check mark icon will appear in the feature Tree Outline (p.Menus • Invert Suppressed Body Set: Right clicking on Invert Suppressed Body Set functions as the name implies. 252) and clicking Unsuppress Solid Bodies. Release 15. If some bodies in the part are already hidden when the Hide Part command is clicked. • Show Part: A part can be made visible by right clicking on the Part branch in the feature Tree Out- line (p. Suppress/Hide Parts from Feature Tree Outline Context Menu Options • Suppress Part: A part may be suppressed by right clicking on the Part branch in the feature Tree Outline (p. • Suppress Solid Bodies: If exists. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. they will remain suppressed and the unsuppressed bodies will become suppressed. they will remain unsuppressed and the suppressed bodies will become unsuppressed. 252) if and only if the part contains only Solid and Line bodies. 252) and clicking Suppress Line Bodies. they will remain hidden and the visible bodies will become hidden. all Solid bodies in the Part can be suppressed by right clicking on the Part branch in the feature Tree Outline (p. A solid green check mark icon will appear in the feature Tree Outline (p. 252) and clicking Suppress Part. 252) when a part is suppressed (all bodies are suppressed). The Hide Part command hides all bodies that belong to the part. • Hide Part: Right clicking on the Part branch in the feature Tree Outline (p. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information 104 of ANSYS.0 . Inc. A solid green check mark icon will appear in the feature Tree Outline (p. If some bodies in the part are visible when the Show Part command is clicked. 213) section. 252) when a part is hidden (all bodies are hidden). A light check mark icon will appear in the feature Tree Outline (p.© SAS IP. If some bodies in the part are already suppressed when the suppress command is clicked. 252) and clicking Show Part. A solid green check mark icon will appear in the feature Tree Outline (p. If some bodies in the part are not suppressed when the Unsuppress Part command is clicked. An "X" icon will appear in the feature Tree Outline (p. . all Line bodies in the Part can be suppressed by right clicking on the Part branch in the feature Tree Outline (p. Bodies that are suppressed when Show Part is clicked will not be affected. 252) when the part contains Line bodies also. 252) and clicking Suppress Solid Bodies. Note For more information about body visibility and suppression. 252) and clicking Unsuppress Part. • Unsuppress Part: A part can be unsuppressed by right clicking on the Part branch in the feature Tree Outline (p. The Suppress Part command suppresses all bodies that belong to the part. • Unsuppress Solid Bodies: If exists.

© SAS IP. Inc. • Unsuppress Line Bodies: If exists. 252) and clicking Unsuppress Surface Bodies.0 . All rights reserved. all suppressed Surface bodies in the Part can be unsuppressed by right clicking on the Part branch in the feature Tree Outline (p. Inc. • Set Default as Shared Topology Method for all bodies: Shared Topology method can be set to Default for all bodies in the part by right clicking on the Part branch in the feature Tree Outline (p. 252) and clicking Unsuppress Line Bodies. Release 15. 252) and clicking Set Default as Shared Topology Method..Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Context Menus • Unsuppress Surface Bodies: If exists. all suppressed Line bodies in the Part can be unsuppressed by right clicking on the Part branch in the feature Tree Outline (p. . 105 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information 106 of ANSYS. . Inc. All rights reserved.0 . Release 15.

0 . 120) • Triad (p. 123) • Display Toolbar (p. . 122) • Graphics Options Toolbar (p. 115) • Edge Joints (p.DesignModeler Viewing Chapter topics: • Model Appearance Controls (p. 126) • Print Preview (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. Release 15. 109) • Graphics Options (p. 115) • Cross Section Alignments (p. 107 . 109) • Frozen Body Transparency (p. 124) • Rotation Modes Toolbar (p.© SAS IP. All rights reserved. Inc. 85): • Shaded Exterior and Edges (p. 116) • Display Edge Direction (p. 107) • Context Menu Viewing Options (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 118) • Cross Section Solids (p. 121) Shaded Exterior and Edges Model faces and model edges are drawn. 119) • Ruler (p. 117) • Display Vertices (p. 107) • Shaded Exterior (p. 136) Model Appearance Controls The following controls are accessible from the View Menu (p. 108) • Wireframe (p.

109) • Graphics Options (p. 107) • Wireframe (p. 119) • Ruler (p. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 115) • Cross Section Alignments (p. 115) Release 15. . 109) • Frozen Body Transparency (p. 118) • Cross Section Solids (p. in normal "shaded" mode. Inc. but not model edges. 109) • Frozen Body Transparency (p. 116) • Display Edge Direction (p. All rights reserved. Other Model Appearance Controls: • Shaded Exterior and Edges (p. 115) • Edge Joints (p. 109) • Graphics Options (p. 117) • Display Vertices (p. Inc. 120) • Triad (p.© SAS IP. 121) Shaded Exterior Model faces are drawn.Contains proprietary and confidential information 108 of ANSYS. 115) • Edge Joints (p. 108) • Wireframe (p.Viewing Other Model Appearance Controls: • Shaded Exterior (p.0 .

118) • Cross Section Solids (p. 117) • Display Vertices (p. 121) Graphics Options Clicking Graphics Options in the View Menu (p. 545) dialog. . but not model faces. 108) • Graphics Options (p. All rights reserved. Inc. 109) • Frozen Body Transparency (p. 119) • Ruler (p. 107) • Shaded Exterior (p. Other Model Appearance Controls: • Shaded Exterior and Edges (p. 115) • Cross Section Alignments (p. The edges are drawn in two colors. 115) • Edge Joints (p. The edge colors are determined by the "DesignModeler Application Op- tions" (p. 116) • Display Edge Direction (p. Inc. one for shared edges. 116) • Display Edge Direction (p. 109 . 113) Release 15. 117) • Display Vertices (p.0 . 119) • Ruler (p. 120) • Triad (p. 85) will display a fly-out menu that includes: Edge Coloring (p. 110) Face Coloring (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. 121) Wireframe Model edges are drawn.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. the other for unshared edges. Model Appearance Controls • Cross Section Alignments (p. 120) • Triad (p. 118) • Cross Section Solids (p.

In ANSYS DesignModeler application. 120) • Triad (p. Edge Coloring topics: Accessibility (p. Inc. 112) Accessibility The Accessibility option is available for shared exterior edges and for wireframe displays. Black: Turns off the edge/face connectivity display. 109) • Frozen Body Transparency (p. By Connection: Displays five different colors corresponding to five different categories of connectivity. 85) Release 15. The entire model is displayed in black. 121) Edge Coloring Use the Edge Coloring option to distinguish boundary edges: By Body Color (default): Displays body colors to represent boundary edges. single (red). 107) • Shaded Exterior (p. double (black). 123) is also accessible via Options in the Tools Menu (p. 119) • Ruler (p.0 . Select Appearance to adjust the Edge Thickness and Edge Colors. 117) • Display Vertices (p. 115) • Edge Joints (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Free means that the edge is not shared by any faces. 123) Other Model Appearance Controls: • Shaded Exterior and Edges (p. 115) • Cross Section Alignments (p. Inc. 79) of the Project Schematic. 111) Edge Display Control (p. 118) • Cross Section Solids (p. Single means that the edge is shared by one face and so on. the option is accessible from two locations: • View Menu (p. View Menu (p. . 108) • Wireframe (p. All rights reserved. triple (pink) and multiple (yellow). The categories are: free (blue).© SAS IP. 85) (see depiction of path below) • Graphics Options Toolbar (p. 123) The Graphics Options Toolbar (p. 110) Body Color (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 110 of ANSYS. . 111) Thicken Edge Display (p.Viewing Edge Types (p. 116) • Display Edge Direction (p.

double. • Free defines that the edge is not shared by any faces. Release 15. triple and multiple.© SAS IP. single.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . Model Appearance Controls Body Color The Body Color option allows the boundary edge color consistent with the body color. Each type of edge display can be turned on and off. Inc. All rights reserved. There are five types of edge connectivity: free. Edge Display Control This option group displays the boundary edges based on the edge connectivity. • Single means that the edge is shared by one face and so on.0 . 111 . Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Release 15. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. All rights reserved. . It helps to identify a special group of edges and distinguish them from the rest of the model.© SAS IP. .Contains proprietary and confidential information 112 of ANSYS. Inc.0 .Viewing Edge Default Edge Type Color Free Blue Single Red Double Black Triple Pink Multiple Yellow Thicken Edge Display The Thicken Edge Display option allows you to thicken a particular type of edge.

By Named Selection: Faces are displayed according to their assigned Named Selection colors. 85) (see depiction of path above) • Graphics Options Toolbar (p. .© SAS IP. Inc. DesignModeler format bodies are displayed in blue and Workbench format bodies are displayed in red. By Body Color (Default): Faces are displayed according to their owning body color.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 115) is displayed in this mode. Each Named Selection is represented by one randomly assigned color. 114) is displayed in this mode. The Named Selection Legend (p. 113 . Each Shared Topology Type is represented by one assigned color. 123) Display Legends There are three legends that you can modify. Face Coloring topics: Display Legends The option is available for shaded exterior edges and for shaded exterior displays. Model Appearance Controls Face Coloring The Face Coloring options allow the faces in the graphics view to provide additional context specific information. It is accessible from two locations: • View Menu (p. By Geometry Type: Faces are displayed according to their owning body type. By Shared Topology: Faces are displayed according to their assigned Shared Topology Type colors. All rights reserved. The Shared Topology Type Le- gend (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The Thickness Legend is displayed in this mode. By Thickness: Each assigned face thickness value is represented by one color. Release 15.0 . Inc.

the legend shows a range of nine thicknesses and the corresponding colors. 6).Contains proprietary and confidential information 114 of ANSYS.Viewing Thickness Legend The Thickness Legend allows up to eight unique thicknesses to be colored.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. The inclusion of the individual Named Selection in this legend can be controlled by the Include in Legend property found in the Named Selections Details View (p. If more than eight thicknesses exist. All rights reserved. Inc. .0 . . Named Selection Legend The Named Selection Legend allows for 20 unique colors for labeling sections. a set of arrows appears at the top of the legend to allow navigation between multiple pages. Release 15. When more than 16 named selections exist.

121) Edge Joints If checked. 120) • Triad (p. 115) • Cross Section Alignments (p. These edges will be transferred to the ANSYS Mechanical application with their topology shared. 109) • Graphics Options (p. All rights reserved. 109) • Edge Joints (p. 119) and Cross Section Alignments (p.0 . 107) • Shaded Exterior (p. • Red edges indicate joints that have improper grouping. otherwise they will appear opaque. Frozen Body Transparency If checked. The Frozen Body Transparency option is checked by default. Model Appearance Controls Shared Topology Type Legend The Shared Topology Type Legend displays the four shared topology types and the colors corresponding to each type.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 119) • Ruler (p. then the model's edge joints will be displayed. Release 15.© SAS IP. • Blue edges indicate joints which are correctly grouped into the same part. Inc. 108) • Wireframe (p. Note that line bodies will always be displayed in a transparent manner if the Cross Section Solids (p. 118) • Cross Section Solids (p. 116) options are both enabled. 117) • Display Vertices (p. . 116) • Display Edge Direction (p. Other Model Appearance Controls: • Shaded Exterior and Edges (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Edge joints are shown as thick lines in one of two colors: blue and red. 115 . Inc. frozen bodies will appear transparent.

118) • Cross Section Solids (p. Red edge joints will not share topology upon transfer to the Mechanical application. Release 15. Other Model Appearance Controls: • Shaded Exterior and Edges (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 116 of ANSYS. 107) • Shaded Exterior (p. 121) Cross Section Alignments Each line body edge shows its alignment triad. 120) • Triad (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Viewing To change the color of the joint from red to blue. the bodies that created the joint must be grouped into the same part.0 . 108) • Wireframe (p. Inc. 116) • Display Edge Direction (p. . 115) • Cross Section Alignments (p. Inc. . All rights reserved. 119) • Ruler (p. the lower shelf is not grouped into the same part as the other bodies.© SAS IP. In this example picture. 117) • Display Vertices (p. 109) • Graphics Options (p. 109) • Frozen Body Transparency (p.

108) • Wireframe (p.© SAS IP. Model Appearance Controls Other Model Appearance Controls: • Shaded Exterior and Edges (p. 107) • Shaded Exterior (p.0 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 115) • Display Edge Direction (p. 117 . All rights reserved. 121) Display Edge Direction Use the Display Edge Direction option to display model edges direction. Inc. Release 15. 115) • Edge Joints (p. 119) • Ruler (p. 117) • Display Vertices (p. Inc. 120) • Triad (p. The direction arrow appears at the midpoint of the edge. The size of the arrow is proportional to the edge length. 118) • Cross Section Solids (p. 109) • Frozen Body Transparency (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . 109) • Graphics Options (p.

© SAS IP. Inc. 116) • Display Edge Direction (p. 107) • Shaded Exterior (p. You can also use the option to ensure that edges are complete and not segmented unintentionally. 115) • Edge Joints (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 123).0 . 120) • Triad (p. Other Model Appearance Controls: Release 15.Contains proprietary and confidential information 118 of ANSYS. The option is especially useful when examining complex assemblies where vertices might normally be hidden from view. 108) • Wireframe (p.Viewing The option also can be accessed through the Graphics Options Toolbar (p. 115) • Cross Section Alignments (p. 119) • Ruler (p. 117) • Cross Section Solids (p. . . Inc. All rights reserved. 109) • Graphics Options (p. Other Model Appearance Controls: • Shaded Exterior and Edges (p. 109) • Frozen Body Transparency (p. 121) Display Vertices Enabling the Display Vertices option highlights all vertices on the model.

if one exists. In this case. Inc. 109) • Frozen Body Transparency (p. the edge is drawn without a solid facet representation. Shear Center and Centroid offsets are displayed the same. 115) • Cross Section Alignments (p. the line body edges and their solid representations are displayed by body color. The solid display for line body edges is done by sweeping the cross section along the edge. re- gardless of the edge display setting. All rights reserved. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The sweep may fail to be displayed properly if the cross section dimensions are so large that the sweep becomes self-intersecting. 116) • Display Edge Direction (p. 115) • Edge Joints (p. 120) • Triad (p. both alignment triad and solid facet representation will be shown together.0 . 119 . Other Model Appearance Controls: • Shaded Exterior and Edges (p. the solid facet representation will be drawn in a transparent color so that the alignment triads can be seen underneath it. 121) Cross Section Solids Line bodies are drawn using their cross section attribute. 107) • Shaded Exterior (p. Inc. In this case.© SAS IP. 117) • Cross Section Solids (p. 107) Release 15. 119) • Ruler (p. 109) • Graphics Options (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Model Appearance Controls • Shaded Exterior and Edges (p. 108) • Wireframe (p. When Cross Section Solids are visible. If the display line bodies with alignment option is on.

109) • Frozen Body Transparency (p. 121) Release 15. single-click the left mouse button on the Ruler button in the View Menu (p. 117) • Display Vertices (p. . . 109) • Graphics Options (p. shown at the bottom of the Graphics Window (p.© SAS IP. 115) • Edge Joints (p. You can use the ruler. 5). 109) • Frozen Body Transparency (p. 121) Ruler To toggle the ruler in the display screen. 115) • Cross Section Alignments (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.0 . 119) • Triad (p. 120) • Triad (p. All rights reserved. 108) • Wireframe (p. 117) • Display Vertices (p. 116) • Display Edge Direction (p.Viewing • Shaded Exterior (p. 118) • Cross Section Solids (p. 115) • Edge Joints (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 120 of ANSYS. Inc. 85). 107) • Shaded Exterior (p. 109) • Graphics Options (p. Other Model Appearance Controls: • Shaded Exterior and Edges (p. 115) • Cross Section Alignments (p. 118) • Ruler (p. to obtain a good estimate of the scale of the displayed geometry. 116) • Display Edge Direction (p. 108) • Wireframe (p. Inc.

and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 108) • Wireframe (p. 115) • Cross Section Alignments (p. 107) • Shaded Exterior (p. 117) • Display Vertices (p. 115) • Edge Joints (p. 118) • Cross Section Solids (p. 116) • Display Edge Direction (p. All rights reserved. Model Appearance Controls Triad To toggle the triad orientation symbol in the display screen at all times. 85). 120) Outline Options There are three Outline options: Release 15. Inc. Inc. The interactive Triad in the bottom right corner of the window contains viewing and informational controls. Z) and direction (+/-) of the arrow. • Red represents the x-axis • Green represents the y-axis • Blue represents the z-axis • Clicking any of the triad arrows orients the view normal to that arrow. Other Model Appearance Controls: • Shaded Exterior and Edges (p. .© SAS IP. Y. 119) • Ruler (p. • Mousing over any arrow identifies the axis (X. 121 . 109) • Graphics Options (p. • Clicking the Cyan "Iso" ball orients the model to isometric view. single-click the left mouse button on the Triad button in the View Menu (p. 109) • Frozen Body Transparency (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.0 .

click on the Right View button. Inc. • Left View: To view your part from the left. All rights reserved. 126) • Zoom (p. 127) • Box Zoom (p.0 . 127) View options: • Front View: To view your part from the front. click on the Back View button. 126) • Pan (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Contains proprietary and confidential information 122 of ANSYS. click on the Top View button. . click on the Front View button. Release 15.© SAS IP. • Top View: To view your part from the top. Inc. Cursor Mode options: • Rotate (p. • Right View: To view your part from the right. • Back View: To view your part from the back. • Bottom View: To view your part from the bottom. The following is displayed when you use the right mouse button in both the Sketching and Modeling modes. . click on the Left View button.Viewing • Expand All • Collapse Features • Collapse Parts and Bodies Context Menu Viewing Options You can access most of the viewing options and selection filters described below by clicking on the right mouse button while in the sketching or modeling mode. click on the Bottom View button.

117) Display Vertices (p. All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Graphics Options Toolbar • Isometric View: The Isometric View allows you to view in 3D any time.© SAS IP. 123 .0 . 110) Edge Types (p. The toolbar features. Inc. left to right: Face Coloring (p. Release 15. 123) Display Edge Direction (p. . 118) Edge Types The toolbar has five buttons to select the edge types: • 0 = Free • 1 = Single • 2 = Double • 3 = Triple • X = Multiple Within each edge type are three options: Hide: select to not display edge coloring Show: select to display edge coloring (default) Thick: select to increase the thickness of the edge coloring The following chart describes the function of the individual edge types. Graphics Options Toolbar Use the graphics options to display the model's faces and edges by color and to govern the thickness and direction of the edges. Inc. 113) Edge Coloring (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Contains proprietary and confidential information 124 of ANSYS. Thick Triple: Displays only edges that are shared by three faces at a different edge thickness compared to the rest of the model. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Display Toolbar Use the display buttons to manipulate how model entities are displayed in the Graphics Window (p. Thick Double: Displays only edges that are shared by two faces at a different edge thickness compared to the rest of the model. Show Single: Displays only edges that are shared by one face. 5).0 . Show or Thick) Free Hide Free: Hides only edges not shared by any faces. . Show Triple: Displays only edges that are shared by three faces. All rights reserved. Show Double: Displays only edges that are shared by two faces. Thick Multiple: Displays only edges that are shared by more than three faces at a different edge thickness compared to the rest of the model. The following topics are available: Display Plane Display Model Display Points Look at Face/Plane/Sketch Release 15. Inc.© SAS IP. Triple Hide Triple: Hides only edges that are shared by three faces. Thick Free: Displays only edges not shared by any faces at a different edge thickness compared to the rest of the model. Thick Single: Displays only edges that are shared by one face at a different edge thickness compared to the rest of the model.Viewing Edge Type Edge Type Options (Hide. Show Multiple: Displays only edges that are shared by more than three faces. Double Hide Double: Hides only edges that are shared by two faces. Inc. Show Free: Displays only edges not shared by any faces. Multiple Hide Multiple: Hides only edges that are shared by more than three faces. Single Hide Single: Hides only edges that are shared by one face.

If you turn off the 3D model. and boundary edges.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.0 . 125) Display Points The Display Points button allows you to toggle between displaying the Points generated by Point Feature in the model or not.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the currently active Plane. origin point. Other Display Toolbar topics: • Display Plane (p. 125) Release 15. If you turn off the axis vectors. and to toggle between displaying the axis vectors. Other Display Toolbar topics: • Display Model (p. or the currently active Sketch. origin point. 125) Display Model The Display Model button allows you to toggle between displaying the 3D model or not. the plane is turned on automatically. 125) • Look at Face/Plane/Sketch (p. Inc. Display Toolbar Display Plane The Display Plane button allows you to toggle between displaying the axis vectors and origin point (if there is not a 3D model). Inc. 125) • Display Points (p. 125) • Look at Face/Plane/Sketch (p. Other Display Toolbar topics: • Display Plane (p. All rights reserved. 125 . Other Display Toolbar topics: • Display Plane (p. 125) Look at Face/Plane/Sketch The Look at Face/Plane/Sketch button centers the display on the currently selected Face. 125) • Display Model (p. the 3D model is turned on automatically. . 125) • Look at Face/Plane/Sketch (p. 125) • Display Points (p. and boundary edges (if there is a 3D model).

and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 127) Box Zoom (p. 128) Magnifier Window (p. model. 127) Zoom to Fit (p. Other Rotation Modes Toolbar topics: Release 15. 125) Rotation Modes Toolbar Use the rotation modes to manipulate the position of items displayed in the Sketch/Model Window. Inc. 130) Section Planes (p. 126) Pan (p. 129) Isometric View (p. Other Rotation Modes Toolbar topics: • Pan (p. 126) • Zoom (p. 126) Zoom (p.© SAS IP. The toolbar options. 131) Rotate The Rotate tool allows you to rotate any sketch.0 . 130) Pan The Pan tool allows you to move the entire part about the display screen. 129) • Isometric View (p. left to right: Rotate (p. 128) Previous View (p. 127) • Zoom to Fit (p. . 129) • Next View (p. 127) • Box Zoom (p. or part.Contains proprietary and confidential information 126 of ANSYS. All rights reserved.Viewing • Display Model (p. Inc. . 125) • Display Points (p. 128) • Magnifier Window (p. 129) Next View (p. The cursor location and shape determine the rotation behavior. 128) • Previous View (p.

129) • Isometric View (p. Inc.© SAS IP. 127) • Zoom to Fit (p. 127 . 127) • Box Zoom (p. a graphics display limitation my be evident. 128) • Magnifier Window (p. 128) • Previous View (p. Other Rotation Modes Toolbar topics: • Rotate (p. 126) • Box Zoom (p. 126) • Zoom (p. When the size disparity of small entities exceeds a range of magnitude greater than three. 129) • Next View (p. 126) • Zoom (p. 127) • Zoom to Fit (p. Other Rotation Modes Toolbar topics: • Rotate (p.0 . Zooming into the small entities my display jagged surfaces and edges. Rotation Modes Toolbar • Rotate (p. 126) • Pan (p. 129) • Isometric View (p. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 126) • Pan (p. 128) • Magnifier Window (p. 130) Zoom The Zoom tool allows you to scale the part on the display screen. 130) Box Zoom The Box Zoom tool allows you to use the cursor to indicate opposite corners of the zoom window. . 128) • Previous View (p. 129) • Next View (p. All rights reserved. 127) Release 15.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.

.0 . All rights reserved. With the model in any state. 130) Zoom to Fit The Zoom to Fit tool allows you to show the part at full size in the display screen.Contains proprietary and confidential information 128 of ANSYS. Inc. 126) • Pan (p. Standard model zooming. Recenter the window by choosing Reset Magnifier. 129) • Isometric View (p. 130) Magnifier Window The Magnifier Window tool allows you to zoom in to portions of the model. • Recenter or resize the Magnifier Window using a right mouse button click and choosing an option from the context menu. 128) • Magnifier Window (p. 129) • Next View (p. and Dynamic Magnifier Size On/Off for gradual size control accomplished by adjusting the mouse wheel. 129) • Isometric View (p. 129) • Next View (p. you can display the Magnifier Window by clicking the button in order to: • Pan the Magnifier Window across the model by holding down the left mouse button and dragging the mouse. 126) • Zoom (p. and Large Magnifier for preset sizes. 126) Release 15. Inc. Other Rotation Modes Toolbar topics: • Rotate (p.Viewing • Zoom to Fit (p. and picking are disabled when you use the Magnifier Window. rotating. Resizing options are Small Magnifier. . Medium Magnifier. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 128) • Previous View (p. 127) • Box Zoom (p. 128) • Previous View (p.© SAS IP. • Increase the zoom of the Magnifier Window by adjusting the mouse wheel. 127) • Magnifier Window (p. or by holding down the middle mouse button and dragging the mouse upward. Other Rotation Modes Toolbar topics: • Rotate (p.

Inc. 130) Previous View To return to the last view displayed in the Graphics Window (p. 128) • Previous View (p. 128) • Magnifier Window (p. By continuously clicking you can see the previous views in consecutive order. click the Next View button on the toolbar to scroll forward to the original view. 129 . 129) • Isometric View (p. click the Previous View button on the toolbar. 129) • Next View (p. 127) • Box Zoom (p. Rotation Modes Toolbar • Pan (p. 126) • Zoom (p. 129) • Isometric View (p. 130) Next View After displaying previous views in the Graphics Window (p. 126) • Pan (p. Other Rotation Modes Toolbar topics: • Rotate (p. 127) • Zoom to Fit (p.0 . 126) • Pan (p. 128) Release 15. Other Rotation Modes Toolbar topics: • Rotate (p. 127) • Zoom to Fit (p. 126) • Zoom (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 128) • Next View (p.© SAS IP. 127) • Box Zoom (p. . Inc. 5). 127) • Zoom to Fit (p. 126) • Zoom (p. All rights reserved. 5). 127) • Box Zoom (p.

130) Isometric View Isometric View Button This Isometric View button allows you to set the isometric view. the view will rotate to the closest isometric view. Restore Default Button The Restore Default button resets the isometric view to its default state. Keyboard Support The same functionality is available via your keyboard.© SAS IP.0 . . 128) • Previous View (p. Inc. or define the "up" direction so that geo- metry appears normally oriented. 129) • Isometric View (p. The numbers correlate to the following function- ality: 0 = View Isometric 1 = +Z Front 2 = -Y Bottom 3 =+X Right 4 = Previous View 5 = Default Isometric 6 = Next View 7 = -X Left 8 = +Y Top 9 = -Z Back . . It is only available through the context menu.Viewing • Magnifier Window (p. When the button is pressed. Inc. You can define a custom isometric viewpoint based on the current viewpoint (arbitrary rotation). All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. (dot) = Set Isometric Release 15.Contains proprietary and confidential information 130 of ANSYS.

Inc. Results are shown on the right. 128) • Magnifier Window (p. Release 15. . 126) • Pan (p. Selecting the New Section Plane button ( ) in the Rotation Modes toolbar initiates the function and displays the Section Planes window illustrated below. All rights reserved. 129) Section Planes The Section Plane window gives you access to the functionality for creating a cut or slice on your model so that you can view internal geometry. consider the model shown below that is subjected to a horizontal and a vertical slice. the feature becomes disabled until less than six planes exist. Once this maximum is met. You can create as many as six section planes for a model. 126) • Zoom (p. The Section Planes window provides the following capabilities. 127) • Zoom to Fit (p. Icon Button Application-Level Command New Section Plane Edit Section Plane Delete Section Plane Example 6: Section Plane Example As an example.0 . 127) • Box Zoom (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 131 . Rotation Modes Toolbar Other Rotation Modes Toolbar topics: • Rotate (p. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 129) • Next View (p. 128) • Previous View (p.© SAS IP.

0 . . Note Dragging from Left-to-Right will clip everything above the line. In the Section Planes window. Release 15.Viewing For additional information about the use of the Section Plane feature. whereas dragging Right- to-Left will clip everything below the line. Drag the mouse pointer across the geometry where you want to create a section plane. GUI Navigation: to add a section plane To add a section plane: 1. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. click the New Section Plane button. Inc.© SAS IP. .Contains proprietary and confidential information 132 of ANSYS. All rights reserved. see the following topics. 2. Inc.

Inc. All rights reserved. 133 .© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. . Rotation Modes Toolbar Release 15.0 .

All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc.Viewing The new section plane is listed in the Section Planes window with a default name of “Section Plane #.Contains proprietary and confidential information 134 of ANSYS. .” The check mark next to the plane’s name indicates it as an active section plane. 3. You can construct up to six section planes by clicking the New Section Plane button and dragging ad- ditional lines across the model. .© SAS IP. Note Activating multiple planes displays multiple sections: Release 15. Inc.0 .

Click the Edit Section Plane button. • Unchecking a plane disables that plane. select the plane you want to edit. the cut is performed using a hardware clipping method. Rotation Modes Toolbar GUI Navigation: to use section planes • Maneuver between multiple planes by highlighting the plane names in the Section Planes window. This hardware clipping cuts away the model in a subtractive method. • When viewing geometry. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc.0 . 2. Release 15. In the Section Planes window. The section plane’s anchor appears. . GUI Navigation: to modify a section plane To modify a section plane: 1. All rights reserved. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 135 .© SAS IP. • Unchecking all the planes effectively turns the Section Plane feature off.

The anchor displays a solid line on the side where the exterior is being displayed. the system is in Model View.e. Clicking on the same side a second time toggles between solid line and dotted line. All rights reserved. The text for some of the fields is determined by the properties in the model branch.© SAS IP. select the plane you want to delete. To the right is the Print Preview tab. which is the first branch in the feature Tree Outline (p. In the Section Planes window. The lines at the top of the Print Preview page contain several fields describing the model.Contains proprietary and confidential information 136 of ANSYS. Clicking it allows you to print the current view of your model or save a screen shot. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. GUI Navigation: to delete a section plane To delete a section or capping plane: 1. Inc. 2. . . Print Preview A tab at the lower left corner of the Graphics Window (p. Click the Delete Section Plane button.Viewing 3. Inc. You can click on the line on either side of the anchor to view the exterior on that side of the plane.0 . 5) shows that. Release 15. i. exterior display back to section display. by default. 252). Drag the section plane anchor to change the position of the plane.

70) option in the File Menu (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. use the Print (p. Reset Layout (p. Release 15. 137) Reset Layout To restore the same window layout used as when you started the ANSYS DesignModeler application. All rights reserved. 45).0 . Window Layout To print the model. select the Reset Layout option from the Windows option in the View Menu (p. 137 . 85). .© SAS IP. Window Layout The window layout in the ANSYS Workbench environment implements a docking pane configuration that allows you to shift and size the individual panes to your liking.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. Inc.

Inc. .0 . .Contains proprietary and confidential information 138 of ANSYS. Release 15. All rights reserved.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc.

Undo Use the Undo command to rescind the last sketching action performed.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 143) Release 15. you can always exit whatever function you are in and go to the general Select mode. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Also note that while in Sketching mode. 2D Sketching topics include: • Sketches and Planes (p. Option 2. these options are listed after the operation's icon: Toolbox check/edit box : Option 1. 139 . it is important to note that. the system treats 2D edges as if they extend beyond their endpoints.© SAS IP. The sketching operations support Undo/Redo functionality. Some also have optional input via toolbox check/edit box options. To create a solid body from your sketch. drag. you will need to click somewhere back in the ANSYS DesignModeler application window before the Escape key (Esc) will be usable. 140) • Auto Constraints (p. Option 2. … Right Mouse Button context menu: Option 1. but note that each plane stores its own Undo/Redo stacks. Inc.DesignModeler 2D Sketching To use the sketcher efficiently. … The right mouse button Back option is very much like a “micro” undo during the sketching operation. release sequence Many sketching operations make heavy use of the right mouse button context menu for optional input. by pressing the Escape key (Esc). In the following. All rights reserved. Redo Use the Redo command to “redo” a sketching action previously undone. 142) • Details View in Sketching Mode (p. Note that if you have accessed a window external to the ANSYS DesignModeler application. Inc. . in the context of constraints and dimensions.0 . Most multiple-task operations are done by one of two input sequences: • Click (press and release). click sequence • Press (hold). all connected chains of edges must be closed. move.

173) • Sketch Projection • Sketch Instances Sketches and Planes A sketch is a collection of 2D edges. there are two special types of sketches: • Sketch Instances (accessible via the Context menus) allows you to place copies of existing sketches in other planes. Also note that even though a sketch is de- leted. 195) button to create a new sketch in the currently "active" plane. Whenever you create a 2D edge using one of the tools in the Draw Toolbox (p. In addition. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. and vertices into a special sketch in a plane. . Hence you may Undo (p. A plane can hold any number of sketches.Contains proprietary and confidential information 140 of ANSYS. Note that when you delete a sketch from its plane. its name is still checked when verifying the names of other items in the Tree Outline (p. points. • Sketch Projection (accessible via the Context menus) allows you to project 3D bodies.2D Sketching • Draw Toolbox (p. 147). Deleting Sketches Sketches may be deleted as long as they are not being used as input to subsequent features. 139) the sketch deletion if desired. Once created. Additionally. 153) • Dimensions Toolbox (p. a new sketch will be automatically created for you. All rights reserved. 147) • Modify Toolbox (p. You can click the New Sketch (p. The sketch will stay in the Undo list until the modeled is saved. Points are created automatically at the ends of 2D edges. 252) to ensure unique names. faces. sketches can be used for feature creation. 168) • Settings Toolbox (p. edges.© SAS IP. . Sketches and Planes topics: Construction Sketches Color Scheme Sketch Status Release 15. 147) to create a point at a screen location or at the intersection of 2D edges. or you can select an already existing sketch to make it the new active sketch. at which point the Undo/Redo records are cleared. it is added to the currently "active" sketch. 163) • Constraints Toolbox (p. and they can be modified at any time using the various sketching tools.0 . Planes Without Sketches If you begin drawing on a plane that has no sketches. there are options in the Draw Toolbox (p. The points can then be used for dimensions and constraints. Inc. the deletion operation is captured in the Undo/Redo records.

All rights reserved. There are five colors used to denote the status of a 2D entity: • Teal: Under-constrained • Blue: Well Defined • Black: Fixed • Red: Over-Constrained Release 15. but is geometry that you do not wish to be included in a feature. or rotate it. Inc. The colors will help you to identify sketch entities that may require constraints or are in error. 142) Color Scheme 2D entities are colored to indicate their constraint status. . Another simple example is if you want a series of circle centers to be linear. An easy way to deal with this is to create a construction sketch and then create a polygon in that con- struction sketch. you can simply create a line in a construction sketch and constrain all of the circle centers to be on that line. You can name this sketch "Construct" or something similar to remind you that it is for con- struction geometry. Inc. it can be difficult to constrain/dimension these so that they remain in the pattern you want. with each circle center coincident with one of the polygon vertices. Sketches and Planes Construction Sketches One very important use of having multiple sketches in a plane is to use one sketch just for construction geometry. the polygon is ignored. Then constrain/dimension the polygon so that the vertices are where you want the circle centers to be. go back to the sketch where you want real geometry created and create the circles.0 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. However. if you want to create a circular pattern of holes. and the circles will move with it. if you extrude the sketch with the circles. 141 . For example. Finally.© SAS IP. with the same number of sides/vertices that you want for the pattern of holes. Other Sketches and Planes topics: • Color Scheme (p. This sketch can be used for geometry that is useful for the construction or constraints on other geometry. 141) • Sketch Status (p. especially if you want the option of later modifying the radius of the pattern. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Now you can modify the radius of the polygon.

if the Auto Constraints Cursor mode is on.© SAS IP.0 . All rights reserved. Inc. . 141) • Color Scheme (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. depicted by the perpendicular symbol: ⊥ Release 15. depicted by the parallel symbol: // • Tangent. depicted by the letter T • Perpendicular. Inc. This is the default visibility setting. depicted by the letter H • Vertical. depicted by the letter P • Horizontal. • Normal Visibility: Will be visible if its base plane is visible. or is the active sketch while in sketching mode. Other Sketches and Planes topics: • Construction Sketches (p. unless it is the active sketch. symbols are displayed confirming snapping to either of: • Coincident. depicted by the letter V • Parallel. 141) Auto Constraints During drawing input. . 141) • Sketch Status (p. 142) or dimensions. • For a Sketch Projection. Other Sketches and Planes topics: • Construction Sketches (p. its edges will not be used for Auto Constraints (p. Along with the basic icon there is also a status symbol that appears with it to indicate its visibility mode. While hidden. 252).Contains proprietary and confidential information 142 of ANSYS. 142) Sketch Status There are three basic types of sketch icons: • For a normal sketch. • For a Sketch Instance.2D Sketching • Gray: Inconsistent or Unknown Note that fixed plane edges are drawn as dotted black lines. depicted by the letter C • Coincident Point. • Hidden: Only displayed when it is selected in the Tree Outline (p. even when viewing another plane. • Always Visible: Sketch is always visible.

Details View in Sketching Mode While in Sketching mode. • Show Sketch: The sketch will be visible if the plane it belongs to is visible. 252).0 . Here you can set the sketch to: • Always Show Sketch: Makes the selected sketch always visible. • Hide Sketch: While hidden. If your supplied name does not end in a numeric and is not unique. Sketch Details Details of Sketch The first item under the Details of Sketch group. Release 15. 142) on the Constraints menu). even when viewing another plane. 145) • Dimension Details (p. unless it is the active sketch. 146) All the detail views are broken into groups. All names and labels that you create must be unique. listed in boldface and proceeded by a [-]. lists the sketch name in a value field that can be edited. depicted by the letter R Note that Cursor and Global Auto Constraint modes can add noticeable time to sketch operations on very complex sketches. and MySketch5 becomes MySketch6. start with a letter. The second item in this group is the Sketch Visibility property. 143 . All rights reserved. the Details View (p. if the item is read-only. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. This is the default visibility setting. and cannot be edited. Details View in Sketching Mode • Equal Radius. Inc. This allows you to change the name of a sketch. Spaces and hyphens are not recog- nized.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. followed by the information that pertains to that group. Items within a group have a title on the left followed by a value on the right. The value column may be grayed-out. Inc.© SAS IP. 143) • Edge Details (p. and contain only letters. its edges will not be used for Auto Constraints (p. 142) or dimensions. or with multiple sketches in a plane. While hidden. . it will only be displayed when it is selected in the Tree Outline (p. MyPlane becomes MyPlane2. so you can control whether or not you want them on (see Auto Constraints (p. 6) can contain three types of information: • Sketch Details (p. or is the active sketch while in sketching mode. digits and underscores. a numeric will be added at the end. For example.

The format of this group is strongly affected by the setting of the "Show Constraints" switch above. and then any constraints on its start. not the highlighted edges. Edges: n The "Edges: n" group. then the title field is preceded with a check box (provided the model has been saved to a file and has a valid model name) which. if the dimension is not a Reference dimension. If a dimension's value field is not read-only. Inc. once checked. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. lists the edges contained in the sketch. though these cannot be seen. Open Spline. end. The sketch(es) on this plane will then be updated to reflect this change.© SAS IP. then you can select it and change the value. where 'n' is the number of edges in the sketch. all of the edges are selected. The items in this group (if any) are the constraints on the edge itself. Otherwise. Their appearance depends on whether or not they are Reference dimensions. 'Edge Type Name.' and its setting can be Yes or No.2D Sketching These correspond to the Sketch Visibility options available when you right click on a sketch in the tree. then each of the edges is listed as an element of this group. will be marked with a "D" indic- ating that the dimension is driven by a Design Parameter. its value field becomes read-only. its name is displayed enclosed in parenthesis in the title area. If the switch is set to No. Dimensions: n The 'Dimensions: n' group lists the dimension. This group will not appear if there are no dimensions as part of the sketch. then each of the edges is listed as its own group. Elliptical Arc. If you select one of the constraints. Clicking the 'Details of' group selects the sketch and highlights all the edges in the sketch. Edge Type Name If the Show Constraints switch is set to Yes you will get one of these groups for each edge and con- struction point that has been created in this sketch. The next item in this group is 'Show Constraints. all the dimensions in the sketch are selected and highlighted. . If you select the "Dimensions: n" group. If you select the "Edges: n" group. 6). and its value the name of the edge. Changing this setting has a major effect on how the rest of the Sketch Detail View will look. If the switch is set to Yes. If it is a Reference dimension. as will be explained below. where 'n' is the number of dimensions created with this active sketch. You can then click Generate to have this change reflected in your 3D model. with its type as the title. Ellipse. Closed Spline. and highlights the edges involved in the constraint. The constraint will be named and in the value field will be shown the other edge that is named in the constraint. Release 15. Selecting the group will select the edge. In general. All rights reserved. Circular Arc. . they will be listed item by item.' containing a list with constraints that are applied to that edge. the constraint is deleted. Selecting one of the constraints actually selects the constraint. Edge types can be Line. Once a dimension is driven by a Design Parameter. or Point.Contains proprietary and confidential information 144 of ANSYS. If there are dimensions. Circle. or center point if they exist and have constraints. and then hit Delete. Inc. you can select any dimension by selecting it in the Model View area. and its value is displayed in a read-only background value field.0 . or by selecting it in the Details View (p.

it will be modified to find a unique name. you will see this group show up. When this happens. and 50. Under-Constrained. or Unknown. but if you have more than one sketch in your plane and put a dimension between an edge in one sketch and an edge in another sketch. the Edge Details appears. .0 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the edge type. The first group is the Details of Edge Type Name group. these construction points are listed in the 'Points: n' group. Details View in Sketching Mode Points: n If the "Show Constraints" switch above is set toNo and you have created construction points while this sketch was active. This is not possible and would lead to an Inconsistent constraint status on one or more of the edges. Note that edge names must be unique. then changed their values such that they were 10. in the value field. 20. and a value such as Fixed. Inconsistent.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. where 'n' denotes their number. 145 . selecting the group itself has no effect. The origin point and axis lines for the plane are not listed here. If the constraint switch is set to Yes then they are created as "Point Name" groups and appear identical to the "Edge Type Name" groups above. However. An example of Inconsistent would be if you created a triangle and dimensioned the lengths of the sides. you may see the Un- Release 15. References: n The 'References: n' group lists points and edges in other sketches that are directly connected to points or edges in this sketch via constraints or dimensions. there will be an item with the title “Constraint Status”. Next. the status of other edges sometimes cannot be determined. As the first item it lists. and is not unique. Over-Constrained. again.© SAS IP. Inc. Inc. The next few items in this group provide specific information about the edge you have selected. If your supplied name does not end in a numeric. All rights reserved. Well Defined. When you have one or more edges with an Inconsistent or Over-Constrained status. and its name. a numeric will be added at the end. which can be edited. Edge Details Details of Edge Type Name When you select an edge in the Model View area. and if the name you supply ends with a numeric. You can select items in this group and they will be highlighted and selected.

Shown here are the Fillet trim mode options. there is a switch that allows you to prevent the position of this dimension from automatically being updated when its associated geometry moves. or Escape key (Esc) can be used to clear the selections and go back to the Sketch Details. . you are returned to the Sketch Details. If your supplied name does not end in a numeric and is not unique. These will show the X and Y position of the point. The first item in this group identifies the dimension type. which can be edited. You can also return there by clicking the New Selection icon.0 . or a combination of these depending how the item can still change based on its current constraints. where NAME is the name of the selected dimension. When you create something new. you will not be able to change its value and its name will be shown enclosed in parentheses. The next item lists the Value. To go back to the Sketch Details. then a numeric will be added at the end. Equal Distance constraint. . and center points. or general Dimension features. Note that Full Circle here implies no trimming.Contains proprietary and confidential information 146 of ANSYS.2D Sketching known status appear. Dimension Details Details of NAME When you select a dimension in the Model View area. After the constraint status item. Release 15. its constraint status. Radius. Inc. and the constraints on the point. Clicking Generate will then propagate that change through the 3D model. and its value can change as the sketch is changed. and if the name you supply ends with a numeric. You can select items in the Edge Details similar to selecting from the Sketch Details. If the value field is not read-only. Right mouse button option items with (icon) check marks When using the Fillet. the dimension details appear. end. you can click the right mouse button to display by check mark (depressed icon) the current mode for the option shown. Chamfer.© SAS IP. Following this there are Point Name groups for each of the edge's base. The following items identify the points or edges associated with this dimension. Note that dimension names must be unique. Note that if you have accessed a window external to the ANSYS DesignModeler application. an additional item will appear with the title “Constraints Needed” and a value of Position. you will need to click somewhere in the ANSYS DesignModeler application window before the Escape key (Esc) will be usable. when appropriate. you can select the Active Sketch Drop Down menu on the toolbar. Angle. If an edge has a status of Under-Constrained. with the related edge in the value field. The next item allows you to state whether or not this is a Reference Only dimension. each constraint on the edge is listed. If it is. it will be modified to find a unique name. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The first group in the dimension details is always Details of NAME. then you can modify it. Finally. and lists the dimension's name in the value field. Split. All rights reserved. Inc.

147 . Use the tools to draw 2D edges and apply dimensions and constraints.0 . Release 15.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. Inc. Draw Toolbox Draw Toolbox The Draw toolbox is displayed by default when you enter the Sketching mode. . Inc.

The rubber band line will not stay under the cursor. .2D Sketching Note that sometimes not all of the toolbox items can be displayed at once. Inc. . select its endpoint. Click on an existing edge or endpoint to start the line. Inc. The Draw toolbox includes: Line Tangent Line Line by 2 Tangents Polyline Polygon Rectangle Rectangle by 3 Points Oval Circle Circle by 3 Tangents Arc by Tangent Arc by 3 Points Arc by Center Ellipse Spline Construction Point Construction Point at Intersection Line Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Back Use the cursor to indicate a start and end for the line. Line by 2 Tangents Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Back To create a line tangent to two edges (or points). while its start and direction are controlled by the selected edge. use the Line by 2 Tangents tool. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Tangent Line Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Back To maintain tangency between a line and an edge. not the actual edge. use the Tangent Line tool. To ensure that you are tangent to the end of an edge. but instead. Use the up and down arrow buttons to the right of the toolbox categories to scroll up and down though the available toolbox items.0 .© SAS IP. All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information 148 of ANSYS. Polyline Release 15. It will rubber band as tangent to the selected edge and you can then in- dicate the length of the line. Select two edges or points near the desired tangent location on each edge. its length will be based on the cursor location. The defined line will start and end at the tangency location on each selection.

If you select one of the edges.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Also shown are some Line and Point entries in the Sketch detail view. with con- straints shown. The one at the lower left has had three lines deleted from it. Open End or Closed End. When making copies of a polygon with Cut/Copy/Paste/Move/Replicate. This center point is important to the polygon. as a special type of internal constraint is created to maintain the polygon's shape. The main difference is that this internal constraint makes sure the polygon retains its shape. However. or the center point. along with a center point. If you select a center point of a polygon. use the Polyline tool. the internal constraint is deleted and the polygon may no longer maintain its shape when changes are made to it. The polygon is then created. You set the number of sides via an edit box on the toolbox item. to finish your input and actually define the lines. 149 . You need to use one of the right mouse button options. when a polygon line is deleted. copies will not have the internal constraint that maintains the polygon shape. Back To draw a closed or open polygon. Then you enter a center location and the location of one of the vertices. Inc. the adjacent lines remain in the correct location and angle. even when you rotate or resize the polygon. it lists 'Polygon Edge' as one of its con- straints and shows the center point of the polygon to the right. You can delete lines from the polygon and it will still maintain its shape. Rectangle Toolbox check/edit box: Auto-Fillet Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Back Release 15. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. with the number of sides for the full polygon show to the right. Polygon Toolbox check/edit box: n= Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Back The Polygon tool allows you to draw regular polygons with n = 3-36 sides. as long as the center point and at least three edge lines remain. you need to either select all of the lines of the polygon. Draw Toolbox Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Open End. The edges of the Polygon are lines. If you do not select all the lines.0 . Closed End. or Polyline. All rights reserved. . The screen shot below shows some sample polygons. Inc. but the neighboring endpoints can be either trimmed back or extended without violating the polygon shape. just like those you could create with the basic Line function. If you delete the central point. The Polyline tool allows you to draw a series of connected lines. or the center point (in which case all lines will be processed as though they were selected). you will see in its detail view that it lists 'Polygon Center'.© SAS IP.

Your first two-cursor indications define the length and direction of one side of the rectangle. Your third indication determines the length of the sides perpendicular to the initial side. by indicating opposite corners. use the Circle tool.Contains proprietary and confidential information 150 of ANSYS. It allows you to draw a horizontal and vertical oriented rectangle (defined by four edges).2D Sketching To proportionately draw a rectangle with a horizontal/vertical orientation. If your radius indication is too large for all four corners. Circle by 3 Tangents Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Back To draw a circle using three tangents. Inc. use the Circle by 3 Tangents tool. Circle Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Back To draw a circle. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Indicate the center of the two circular end caps. A circle will be created that is tangent to the selected edges. . Back Release 15. Indicate the center and then the radius. All rights reserved. allows you to indicate one more location to provide the radius for corner arcs. use the Oval (four edges) tool.© SAS IP. or passing through the selected points. Arc by Tangent Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Reverse.0 . use the Rectangle tool. The Auto-Fillet option. Rectangle by 3 Points Toolbox check/edit box: Auto-Fillet Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Back To draw a rectangle at an angle by specifying three of the four corners. Inc. The Auto-Fillet option. allows you to indicate one more location to provide the radius for corner arcs. the narrow ends of the rectangle will be replaced with 180° arcs. It allows you to draw a rectangle (defined by four edges) at any angle. if checked. if checked. . use the Rectangle by 3 Points. Oval Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Back To draw an oval. and then indicate their radius. If your radius is too large for all four of the corners. Select three points or edges near where you want a tangent circle created. the narrow ends of the rectangle will be replaced with 180° arcs.

172) Cursor turned on. An arc is then rubber banded. 171) constraint with them. that locks in the direction from the second location. Ellipse Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Back To draw an ellipse from a center point. however. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. and then make the ellipse tangent to each of the sides. the Arc can be created in either direction from your second location. Indicate the start and end of an arc. 153). Ellipses and elliptical arcs (trimmed/partial ellipses) can be difficult to properly constrain and dimension. If you do not want the line in your sketch.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. tangent constraints are also useful. Arc by 3 Points Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Back To draw an arc using three points. Indicate the center and then the end of one axis of the ellipse to determine the angle of the ellipse. Also. once the Arc being rubberbanded exceeds 90°. Arc by Center Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Back To draw an arc from a center point. when se- lecting the second curve. That way. you can put it in a separate 'construction' sketch. This will set the major axis parallel to a line or another ellipse. 151 . Finally. Indicate a center and then drag the cursor to indicate the radius. Inc. Select an edge or endpoint to start a tangent arc. Release 15. After that. then the final indication controls the side and radius of the arc. You can use the right mouse button Reverse option to reverse the initial direction of the arc. a 180° arc will be created. use the Arc by Center tool. dimensioning or constraining the center point and using the min and max radius dimensions are useful techniques for ellipses. be sure to select its endpoint instead of the edge itself. Inc. just as though you were creating a full circle. which side of that line your cursor is on effects the direction the arc curves. One very important thing to remember regarding this is that you can use the Parallel (p.0 . allowing you to continue moving the cursor to create Arcs greater than 180° if desired. . if you have the Auto Constraints (p. However. if you want the second end of the arc to be tangent to another curve. use the Ellipse tool. Also. Use the third indication to determine the length of the other axis of the ellipse. and a third indication gives the end angle. make the ellipse parallel to a long side of the rectangle. use the Arc by 3 Points tool. and not getting the direction you want. You control the radius and angular extent of the arc with the cursor. use the Arc by Tangent tool. Auto- Constraints should still snap the arc to the edge endpoint. then instead select the edge as close as possible to its end. If you select a center point. Note that if you are selecting a point where there is more than one possible endpoint. Draw Toolbox To draw an arc by tangent. Which way the arc curves from your initial selection depends on your cursor position. watch for the 'T' to be displayed. If you want it to be tangent to the end of an edge. Construction Point (p. All rights reserved. When moving the cursor for the third location. or nothing at all. If you imagine a tangent line extending out from this first location. You can even create a rectangle (by 3 points so it can be at an angle) in a 'construction' sketch. use the radius indication as the start angle of the arc.

. those points remain at fixed locations along the curve. if you create a “Closed Splines. Note that if you create a spline 'with Fit Points'.” it will be set to non-flexible. Release 15. The control points.© SAS IP. Also. Closed End. The Edge Details (p. Before dragging the endpoint of a flexible Spline. Note that currently. click on the toolbox check/edit box beside the Spline feature. Back To draw a closed or open spline. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. or flexible (if you check the box).Contains proprietary and confidential information 152 of ANSYS. A rigid spline can be moved or rotated. both or without Points. Open End with Control Points. dimensioned or dragged with the Drag or Spline Edit functions to modify the shape of the curve. The with Points options will create points at the locations associated with the spline. 145) for a spline contains a line that allows you to change whether or not you want a spline to be flexible. like the center points of circles. Open End with Fit Points. with Fit Points or Control Points. though not directly “on” the spline. The fit points have a special form of coincident constraint to the spline that prevents them from sliding along the spline. but its actual shape will not change (unless you later change it to flexible). tangent lines at its endpoints). Open End with Fit and Control Points. the Control Points are only available for Open splines. 145). no matter what the setting of the Flexible option is and cannot be changed in the Edge Details (p. All rights reserved. Inc. A flexible spline exhibits the characteristics similar to a “flexible ruler” as illustrated. tangent curves. dimensions. Create the spline by indicating a series of locations and then use the right mouse button to finish the spline either Open End or Closed End. Flexible Splines To create a flexible spline. can be constrained. You can change the shape of a flexible spline by assigning constraints (for example.2D Sketching Spline Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Open End. or by using the Drag or Spline Edit functions to move defining points. Inc. or other edges that are related to the spline via constraints or dimensions. Closed End with Fit Points. These and Control Points are very useful for dragging to modify the shape of the spline. use the Spline tool. The 'Flexible' check box can be used to decide whether you want the spline you create to be rigid (default).0 .

160) give you much more extensive control over the shape of a spline. All rights reserved. Construction Point at Intersection This option will place a point at the intersection of two selected edges. Construction Point Points are automatically constructed during edge creation at edge end points and/or center. . may or may not lie on edges.0 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. this extended intersection will be found.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. This may lead to unexpected bulges or loops in the spline. That and other options under Spline Edit (p. The Modify toolbox includes: Release 15. Inc. or the standard Drag function can introduce "strain" into a spline.© SAS IP. your selection locations will determine which is created. Inc. This option allows the cursor input of additional points. Modify Toolbox Use the Modify toolbox to edit your sketches. If the edges do not intersect. Modify Toolbox After dragging the endpoint of a flexible Spline. Note Changing the shape of a flexible spline via constraints. 153 . The Re-Fit Spline (p. 162) option in Spline Edit tool may be used to help correct this. dimensions. but their extensions would. Note that if the curves intersect at more than one location. which.

The length specified is the distance from the intersection location of the edges to each of the endpoints of the chamfer line. or two edges or points to place a tangent arc of the specified radius between them. then axis lines will be ignored when determining the trim extent.© SAS IP. or edges to create a chamfer line “breaking” the corner between them. . Inc. Select an endpoint connecting two edges. Trim Select an edge in an area where you want it to be trimmed. Corner Select two edges to trim or extend as needed to their intersection location. The selection locations are used to determine both where to place the tangent arc. and which end of the selected edges to trim (or extend) to the tangency location. If the Ignore Axis box is checked. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Note that preselected edges are ignored. Trim 2nd. Trim 2nd. Chamfer Toolbox check/edit box: Length Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Trim Both. Where you select the edges determines which end of the edge is modified.0 . Inc. All rights reserved. it will be deleted. Trim 1st. axis line. . Select an endpoint connecting two edges. If the edge does not intersect anything. or to optionally create a full circle with no trimming.2D Sketching Fillet Chamfer Corner Trim Extend Split Drag Cut Copy Paste Move Replicate Duplicate Offset Spline Edit Fillet Toolbox check/edit box: Radius Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Trim Both. Full Circle You can draw a fillet for intersecting and non-intersecting edges. You can use the right mouse button options to control the trimming of the selected edges. Trim None. Release 15. The portion of the edge up to its intersection with other edge.Contains proprietary and confidential information 154 of ANSYS. Trim None You can draw a chamfer for intersecting and non-intersecting edges. Trim 1st. or point will be removed.

the n= number edit box only appears when the Split Edge into n Equal Segments option has been selected. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. unless the selected edge is a full circle or ellipse. Split Edge at All Points. Note that a value up to 100 is allowed for n. Preselected edges are ignored. which pass through the selected point. Inc. then axis lines will be ignored when determining extensions. and all edges. Variable Text The Split toolbox has variable text. Drag Select a point or an edge to “drag” using the cursor. Split Edge at All Points: Select an edge and it is split at all points that it passes through and that have a coincident constraint to it. both start and end endpoints are created at the selection location. . Extend can be used on it. Moreover. 155 . are split there. Split Toolbox check/edit box: n Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Split Edge at Selection.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. If it is a full circle or ellipse.© SAS IP. depending on which Split right mouse button option you select. Split Edges at Point: Select a point. it cannot extend a spline beyond the ends of its original definition. and existing constraints and dimensions on the model. All rights reserved. How the model will change depends on both what you select. Split Edges at Point. Split Edge at Selection: Set as the default option.0 . If the Ignore Axis box is checked. so be sure to choose which you want before selecting an edge. Inc. You can drag a group of edges by Release 15. it splits an edge into two pieces at the selection location. Modify Toolbox Extend Select an edge near the end of the edge that you want extended to its intersection with another edge. However. Split Edge into n Equal Segments There are several distinct right mouse button options to this function. axis line. If you attempt to set the value to more than 100 the pre- vously-set value is retained. or point. Split Edge into n Equal Segments: Set the value n in the edit box and then select the edge which you want to Split. If you have previously trimmed a spline.

and its subsidiaries and affiliates. This lets you select a set of items to copy to an internal clipboard. Release 15. At any other rotation angle. a. End / Use Default Paste Handle Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Clear Selection. the right mouse button is the same as after End / Select Paste Handle is chosen: (Clear Selection. 157) Copy Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Clear Selection. b. origin point. See Copy (p. or unselected items will not be processed. 0. Note When using this function with a large number of items it is recommended that you first turn off Auto Constraints (p.2D Sketching preselecting them before choosing this tool.0 .© SAS IP.0. Select the edges (and/or points) to be cut/copied. . Paste (p. End / Use Plane Origin as Handle. End / Set Paste Handle. the 0. For finer editing of the shape of the spline. Use Plane Origin as Handle Cut/Copy requires the selection of a paste handle relative to which the Paste will be performed. 2. Cut This lets you select a set of items to copy to an internal clipboard. All rights reserved. .Contains proprietary and confidential information 156 of ANSYS. a default will be used. If Cut/Copy are used with preselection. Inc. 142) : Global. and then deletes the originals from the sketch. the start of the first curve selected will be used as the handle. Choose the one of the following right mouse button options. these dimensions and constraints will not be pasted. Note that Horizontal/Vertical dimensions and constraints are converted to the opposite in a 90° rotation at Paste time. Inc. you may want to use the “spline Edit” function instead. Dimensions to axis lines. Use Plane Origin as Paste Handle) If Cut or Copy is exited without selecting a paste handle. The paste handle is the location to which the cursor is attached while you are moving the image into position to paste. End / Use Default Paste Handle. End / Set Paste Handle. An attempt will also be made to preserve as many constraints on the selected items as possible. The basic sequence is: 1.0 location of the plane will be used as the paste handle. and leaves the originals in the sketch. c. 156). This will both significantly speed up the function as well as avoid the creation of unwanted constraints that could alter the results. and specify the paste handle. End / Use Plane Origin as Handle.

Note that Horizontal/Vertical dimensions and constraints are converted to the opposite in a 90° rotation at Paste time. Use Plane Origin as Handle Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Rotate by r Degrees. At any other rotation angle. End / Set Paste Handle. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. that location will now be used as the paste handle (location that is attached to the cursor). Scale by Factor f. Inc. Flip Vertically. Change Paste Handle. 157 . Flip Horizontally. The Change Paste Handle option displays symbols at each of the selected curves endpoints and/or center plus a symbol that represents the plane origin relative to where the curves were when they were Cut or Copied. f Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Rotate by r Degrees. Inc. Release 15. The symbol nearest the cursor is displayed different than the others. Scale by Factor 1/f. End This lets you take items placed on the clipboard by Cut or Copy and place them into the current (on new) sketch. Whatever you place on an internal clipboard by Cut or Copy. or unselected items will NOT be processed. An attempt will also be made to preserve as many constraints on the selected items as possible.0 . 142) : Global. Rotate by -r Degrees. End / Use Plane Origin as Handle. End / Use Default Paste Handle Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Clear Selection. Once you click to select the nearest symbol. relative to the previously selected paste handle. Modify Toolbox Paste Toolbox check/edit box: r. even if it is on a different plane. End The Move command functions the same as the Replicate command with the exception that your original selection is moved to a new location instead of being copied. Scale by Factor 1/f. Paste at Plane Origin. 142) : Global. This will both significantly speed up the function as well as avoid the creation of unwanted constraints that could alter the results. Rotate by -r Degrees. All rights reserved. the edges to be pasted can be rotated or scaled. Note When using this function with a large number of items it is recommended that you first turn off Auto Constraints (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Change Paste Handle.© SAS IP. You can paste multiple times. f Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Clear Selection. Paste at Plane Origin. The edges are dragged. Flip Vertically. Note When using this function with a large number of items it is recommended that you first turn off Auto Constraints (p. Flip Horizontally. you can place either in the same plane or on another plane. Scale by Factor f. This will both significantly speed up the function as well as avoid the creation of unwanted constraints that could alter the results. Dimensions to axis lines. . and then using the right mouse button options. these dimensions and constraints will not be pasted. Move Toolbox check/edit box: r. origin point. By changing r and f.

followed by a Paste. End / Use Default Paste Handle Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Clear Selection. including endpoints of edges you are not duplicating. there is no need to select its endpoints as they will automatically get duplicated. use the RMB Duplicate Selection option to create the new copies. Rotate by -r Degrees. Sketch Instances. but not the current sketch to duplicate. or Sketch Pro- jections into a new sketch where they can be modified and used as profiles for other features. This function is especially useful for copying portions of plane boundaries. Use Plane Origin as Paste Handle) If Move/replicate is exited without selecting a paste origin. Scale by Factor 1/f. the right mouse button changes to the Paste right mouse button. The duplicated items and endpoints will have coincident constraints automatically created with the original items. Use Plane Origin as Handle Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Rotate by r Degrees. End / Set Paste Handle. Then go into the function and select point and edges that are in the plane. you can select existing points. Dimensions to axis lines. At any other rotation angle. This will both significantly speed up the function as well as avoid the creation of unwanted constraints that could alter the results. into the current sketch. If Move/Replicate are used with preselection. or the plane boundary. . Change Paste Handle. Also. Note that if you select items that are already in the current sketch. However. the right mouse button is the same as after End / Select Paste Handle is chosen: (Clear Selection. Paste at Plane Origin. to process. End The Replicate command is equivalent to the Copy command. Finally. . Duplicate This is a function designed to allow you to easily duplicate items from another sketch in the current plane. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Note When using this function with a large number of items it is recommended that you first turn off Auto Constraints (p. Flip Vertically. or make sure the sketch you want the items to be created in is active. f Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Clear Selection. a default will be used.2D Sketching Replicate Toolbox check/edit box: r. they will not be used. While the same functionality can be obtained by using the Copy and Paste functions. or unselected items will NOT be processed. either create a new sketch. To use the function. Inc. All rights reserved. using this function streamlines the process. Note that Horizontal/Vertical dimensions and constraints are converted to the opposite in a 90° rotation at Paste time. if you are duplicating an edge. Offset Release 15. origin point.0 . Flip Horizontally. An attempt will also be made to preserve as many constraints on the selected items as possible. Scale by Factor f. these dimensions and constraints will not be pasted. After one of the End / options is selected. End / Use Plane Origin as Handle.Contains proprietary and confidential information 158 of ANSYS.© SAS IP. 142) : Global. Inc.

If you show the constraints in the Sketch detail view. you will see that all the curves have been offset and trimmed appropriately. In the second outside offset. Inc. these edges have a fixed constraint and appear as black. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. remember that if the offset does not give you exactly what you want. its location is used to determine three things: • Offset distance • Offset side • Offset area The first two are fairly clear. click the mouse when you are satisfied with what is displayed. The original set of lines and arcs must be connected in a simple end-to-end fashion and can form either an open or closed profile. you should find that this method of allowing you to select the desired offset area allows for the offset of many very complex shapes. Once you have created a set of offset curves. the cursor location determines which area of offset curves is kept.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc.© SAS IP. . you cannot change the offset distance via a dimension to any value that would cause more curves to collapse out (for example. or select them within the function and then choose the right mouse button option "End selection / Place offset" when finished with the selection process. on the third inside offset. The cursor location determines that this is the result. by placing the cursor in desired areas. With large offset distances and collapsed areas. you will notice that the line on the upper left of the original profile has been eliminated as it has collapsed out. or use the right mouse button to clear the selection or exit the function. Sketching pencil symbols are shown where the cursor was placed for each offset. some unique results will occur if the cursor is placed in areas that should be removed. Now. you can easily use the Trim and Extend functions to make minor changes later. you will see a single triangular shape (with an arc for one side) as at this distance. you will see that the arc has been extended to its intersections with the top line offsets. End Selection / Place offset The Offset function allows you to create a set of lines and arcs that are offset by an equal distance from an existing set of “straight” lines and “circular” arcs. Modify Toolbox Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Clear Selection. the lines would no longer intersect the arc.0 . On the first inside offset. looking at the first outside offset. but the third is also very important. To create the new curves. For this illustration. It has been offset three times to the outside and three times to the inside. However. 159 . Offset Examples The first image below contains a simple rectangle with a circular cutout on the top. On the next inside offset. You can either preselect the edges. so Release 15. All rights reserved. splitting the result into two possible areas. a radius that becomes zero or negative). If portions of your selected curves would collapse out or cross over one another given the current offset side and distance. Now. You can then create additional offsets. offsetting the bottom line and the top arc intersect. Also. you will see that multiple Equal Distance constraints have been created between the curves. a single distance dimension between an original curve and its offset will control the spacing of all curves in the offset. Finally. This is what maintains the spacing. closest to the profile. At this point. as you move the cursor around.

162) Drag Fit Point (p. Insert Fit Point. Via the right mouse button you can choose to: Select New Spline (p. on the third outside offset. The second image below shows a line with a simple rectangular notch. Delete New Fit Points. and under constrained). so it is eliminated. the strain introduced into the curve caused a loop to form. You must first select a valid spline to edit (flexible. the cursor was placed in the area being collapsed out. Delete Fit Point This function contains special tools for modifying flexible Splines. . it has been offset such that the notch has been collapsed out.0 . As a result. Create Missing Control Points. . 162) Delete New Fit Points (p. you can use the Undo icon at the top of the screen to back out the changes. Create Missing Fit Points.© SAS IP. Inc. In the upper part of the image. Inc. All rights reserved. Drag Fit Point. you can see how a single dimension makes the entire offset profile fully constrained. Re-Fit Spline. Drag Control Point. Finally. Release 15. 162) Drag Control Point (p. Also again. 162) Create Missing Fit Points (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 161) Re-Fit Spline (p. the radius of the arc has collapsed to zero or less. 163) Delete Fit Point (p. 163) Example 7: Spline Edit Usage Examples Below is an example of a spline that was modified using the standard “Drag” function. repeated three times. If you derive a result that you do not want during one of the edit modes. sketching pencil symbols are shown where the cursor was placed for each offset. Spline Edit Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Select New Spline. and again in each case the original curves are fixed so they show up as black.Contains proprietary and confidential information 160 of ANSYS. In the center part of the image. 162) Create Missing Control Points (p. One fit point was dragged much closer to another fit point.2D Sketching the arc is 'extended' with tangent lines from its ends. This is to illustrate the importance of where you place the cursor! In the lower area. 162) Insert Fit Point (p. in current plane.

161 . you will be asked if you want to change it to be flexible. Here you can see the result of dragging the indicated control point location up to the top. Inc. All rights reserved. this internal strain can be removed. a polyline is displayed with the control locations indicated. Modify Toolbox By using the “Spline Edit: Re-Fit option. Another new useful functionality is to be able to edit the control point locations of a spline. flexible.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Select New Spline Spline must be in the current plane. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. If it is not flexible. . Inc. When you select the “Drag Control Point” option. indicating that this is the one that will drag if you press the cursor in that area. This will then automatically take you into the “Drag Release 15. and in an under constrained status. The location nearest your cursor is displayed with a circle around it. removing the dip in the spline.© SAS IP.0 .

0 . . Release 15. Inc. This option allows you to create them. This option can be used for finer control of the curve than direct movement of the fit locations. This also continuously does a re-fit as you are dragging to avoid internal strain on the spline. Re-fitting the spline will generally change one or more of its control point positions. a Control Point “location” is also added. Drag Control Point This option will display the control point locations for the spline with a polyline connecting them. other nearby fit and control locations may move as well. These are points that can be used to control the shape of the spline. An ad- vantage of having fit points while editing the spline is that you can “fix” the location of existing points while doing a re-fit. Any time you insert a Fit Point. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. You can use the right mouse button to change to a different mode as needed. Delete New Fit Points This option will delete any new fit points created by the option above if used prior to exiting the function or selecting a new spline to edit. and the point if it is defined there. but this option is needed if you want an actual point created at that location.2D Sketching Fit Point” mode by default. you can use the next option to remove them before you exit this function or select a new spline to edit. If you do not want to keep the fit points created by this function. as well as parameters related to all other constraints and dimensions to the spline. it can introduce a strain in the spline that may lead to bulges or even loops. Create Missing Fit Points When you first create a spline there are options to create it with or without actual “Fit Points”. All rights reserved. or any that may be missing due to deletions or insertions of Fit Points since the original spline definition. while dragging a fit point with the “Drag Fit Point” option. modifying the parameters on the spline where they are located. Also. or via other dimensions and constraints that change the relative position of its fit points. avoiding the bulges and loops caused by internal strain. .© SAS IP. 163) option. while keeping the location of all other fit locations fixed. the fit points are constrained to their current parametric locations on the spline. Inc. Create Missing Control Points When you first create a spline there are options to create it with or without the “Control Points”. 162) in this function without having the Control Points actually defined. When the control points are moved.Contains proprietary and confidential information 162 of ANSYS. and in the normal Drag function. While you can use Drag Control Point (p. it will remove a fit point location. This relieves the internal strain on the spline and allows for a smoother curve. but the spline will not be re-fit through the fit points in this option. having them enables you to use them in Dimensions. Re-Fit Spline If you have modified a spline via the Modify->Drag function. Also note that when you use the Delete Fit Point (p. Drag Fit Point This option will allow you to drag the nearest fit location (whether there is a fit point there or not). This option will re-fit the spline through the current locations of the fit points. Constraints. you “fix” all other existing fit points during the drag operation. You can select and drag these control locations similar to the fit points above. As you drag a control location.

Once the location’s order is determined. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. not the value. H1 and V2 in many different planes. This will pop up a dialog box that allows you to change the name and/or value before indicating the location for the dimension. Note that you cannot reduce the number of fit locations below 3.Because the numbers for dimension names begin at 1 for each plane. Dimensions Toolbox Note that if you have manually applied “Fixed” constraints to all or most of the Fit Points. then remove some of the constraints before trying again. You can also access the dialog box via the right mouse button when you select a dimension from the general select mode. Inc.© SAS IP. Dimensions Toolbox Use the Dimensions toolbox to define your sketch. They remain unique as the name is associated with the plane to which they belong. in some cases this option will behave unpredictably. . and you cannot delete the end locations. Insert Fit Point For this option. there can be. 166). Release 15. All rights reserved. For Reference dimensions. 163 . the location you indicate will be projected onto the spline to determine its order in re- lation to the existing fit locations. the spline will be re-fitted. change whether or not a dimension automatically changes position when its associated geometry changes. including the new fit location. Inc. Delete Fit Point Here you can select a fit location to be removed from the spline. When creating dimensions.0 . you can click the right mouse button to Cancel (delete the current dimen- sion). or dimensions being created with Semi-Automatic (p. If so. you can use “Undo” to back out the change. The location cannot be the same as an existing fit location. while placing the dimension on the plane.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. for example. or if there are a large number of constraints and dimensions on the spline which severely restrict changes to the shape of the spline. or select Edit Name/Value. and cannot be beyond the original start or end location of the spline. you can only modify the name.

2D Sketching Note Angle dimensions values are always displayed showing two places after the decimal point and all other dimensions are displayed showing three places after the decimal point. Vertical. . . The right mouse button changes after the first selection: Release 15. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information 164 of ANSYS. Length/Distance. Diameter. or Length/Distance dimensions. Vertical.0 . The Dimensions toolbox includes: General Horizontal Vertical Length/Distance Radius Diameter Angle Semi-Automatic Edit Move Animate Display Name/Value General Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Horizontal. Angle Allows creation of any of the dimension types. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the dimensions do maintain the full accuracy of the actual distance. When you use a single edge for Horizontal. Radius. depending on what edge(s) and right mouse button options are selected. Internally however.© SAS IP. the dimension is actually to its endpoints. All rights reserved.

Angle. Splines are not selectable for this function. You can choose lines for the dimension. Any horizontal distance is ignored. You can choose lines for the dimension. Splines are not selectable for this function. Length/Distance. the endpoint nearest to your selection is used.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Dimensions Toolbox After Horizontal. Diameter. then choose a position for the dimension text. Vertical. Vertical. the endpoint nearest your selection is used. either its major or minor radius will be dimensioned. Release 15. . Select Pair. Vertical Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Cancel Select two points or edges to create a vertical dimension between them. Cancel) After Angle. Note that the Dimension measures only the distance in the vertical (y-axis) direction. Splines are not selectable for this function. selected: (Horizontal. Diameter. All rights reserved. but they are not actually used. If you select an ellipse or elliptical arc. Select Pair. The selection location determines which side of a circle or ellipse (or its arc) is used. Cancel) After Sketch (straight) line selected: (Horizontal. but their endpoints can be used. Length/Distance.© SAS IP. but their endpoints can be used. Vertical. Angle. then choose a position for the dimension text. Select Pair. Instead. Radius Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Cancel Select a circle or ellipse. The selection location determines which side of a circle or ellipse (or its arc) is used. or a sketch point selected: (Horizontal. 165 . Length/Distance. Any vertical distance is ignored. The selection location determines which side of a circle or ellipse (or its arc) is used. but their endpoints can be used. Length/Distance Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Cancel The Length/Distance dimension measures the true distance between two selected points or edges. Instead. Vertical. Inc. and whether another dimension already exists. or a sketch circle or ellipse selected: (Radius. Cancel) Horizontal Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Cancel Select two points or edges to create a horizontal dimension between them. or their arcs for this tool.0 . but they are not actually used. depending on the selection location. Length/Distance. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Note that the Dimension measures only the distance in the horizontal (x-axis) direction. Inc. Cancel) After Radius.

0 . If you set it to be a Reference dimension.2D Sketching Diameter Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Cancel You can select a circle or circular arc. Inc. The dimension value can also be edited in the Sketch Details (p. Note that Reference dimensions are displayed inside parentheses. 146). Go on to the next possible dimension. The Alternate Angle right mouse button option allows you to switch to any of the four possible angles by repeatedly selecting this option.© SAS IP. • Continue: Ignore the right mouse button and continue to allow this dimension to be dragged into position. Finally. obtuse. Continue The Semi-Automatic tool will present a series of dimensions for you to place to help fully dimension your model. or change its Reference dimension flag. you have the option of placing it where you want it. For each dimension presented. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. though this is usually used on full circles. unless that sketch is the active sketch. Note that edges of sketches that are hidden will be ignored. By varying the selection order and location. All rights reserved. You may then position the text of the dimension where you want it. Imagine the intersection of the two lines as the center of a clock. Inc. Instead changes to the model will change the value of a Reference or driven dimension. Angle Right Mouse Button Context Menu:: Cancel. . the dimension will measure the angle counter clockwise from the first selected line to the second. . See Dimension Details (p. 143). Alternate Angle Select two lines to create an angle dimension between them. • Exit: Delete this dimension and exit the tool without offering any more dimensions to place.Contains proprietary and confidential information 166 of ANSYS. The selection process gives you the flexibility to create any kind of angle dimension you may want. or 360° minus the acute or obtuse angle. you cannot change its value to change the model. you can control whether you are dimensioning the acute. or using the right mouse button options: • Skip: Delete this dimension and do not place it on the sketch. Then the end of the lines that you select nearest will be the direction of the hands on the clock. Edit Allows you to edit the name and value of a dimension. Semi-Automatic Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Skip. Release 15. Exit.

0 . Slow. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Simply select a dimension to move. You can set a minimum and maximum scale in the Options dialog box to apply to the dimension. The right mouse button speed selections determine how many intermediate steps are calculated and displayed. All rights reserved. The speed will also be effected by the com- plexity of the sketches in the current plane. Normal. Very Slow. Fast.© SAS IP. The sketch will return to its original state when finished. Animate Toolbox check/edit box: Cycles Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Fastest. Dimensions Toolbox Move The Move tool allows you to reposition an existing dimension. or both. values. Inc. Slowest The Animate tool allows you to see the effect that changing a dimension through a range of values would have on the sketch. The system will run through several cycles (set in toolbox edit box) of modifying the selected dimension between its value times the minimum factor and its value times the maximum factor. thus effecting the speed of the animation. then click again to define its new location. Release 15. . 167 . Inc. Very Fast. Display Name/Value The Display Name/Value command allows you to decide whether to display dimension names.

and its subsidiaries and affiliates. .Contains proprietary and confidential information 168 of ANSYS. Release 15. Inc. All rights reserved.0 . Inc.2D Sketching Constraints Toolbox Use the Constraints toolbox to define relationships between sketch elements and reference planes.© SAS IP. .

The Horizontal constraint forces a selected line to a position parallel to the X-axis. Inc. or elliptical arc is selected. its major axis will be forced parallel to the X-axis. 169 . For an edge. When a point is selected to make it Fixed. all points coincident to it are also made Fixed. They can still move along the curve.© SAS IP. this does not fix the locations of its endpoints unless "Fix Endpoints" is checked. All rights reserved. Inc. If an ellipse. . Release 15. Horizontal Select a straight line. Endpoints may also be selected to apply a Fixed constraint to them after which they can no longer move.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.0 . Constraints Toolbox The Constraints toolbox includes: Fixed Horizontal Vertical Perpendicular Tangent Coincident Midpoint Symmetry Parallel Concentric Equal Radius Equal Length Equal Distance Auto Constraints Fixed Select a 2D edge or point to prevent it from moving. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

If you split.0 . or a point and an edge as near as possible to the location you want them to be coincident. or one of them must be a point. Perpendicular Select two edges as close as possible to the location where they. Coincident Select two points. or their extensions. a line can be made tangent to a circle that is far from it. . In cases like this. The Vertical constraint forces a selected line to a position parallel to the Y-axis. their tangents) are at 90° to each other. If you select an ellipse. or near the same location and you want to assign them as all coincident. you can select an edge and a series of other edges to be coincident to the first edge before selecting this function. the constraint will be removed. then try using a tangent constraint instead as tangent constraints are more reliable when working on splines. Inc.2D Sketching Vertical Select a straight line. Release 15. Using preselect. The Perpendicular constraint ensures that. or elliptical arc. two edges. likewise make sure the spline is “Flexible”. The selected edges must be of the same type. Tangent Select two edges as close as possible to the location where they are to be tangent. Midpoint Select a point and a line. If these steps do not help.Contains proprietary and confidential information 170 of ANSYS. For Perpendicular constrains on Splines. look to see if there are extra. . a good way to do it is to preselect using box selection with only points allowed for selec- tion. Also. unneeded constraints on the spline or its endpoints and remove those if needed. You can preselect a series of point-line pairs before selecting this function. The coincident location can be outside the displayed portion of either edge.© SAS IP. For ex- ample. its major axis will be forced parallel to the Y-axis. the curves need to be very close to perpendicular prior to the constraint or the constraint “may not be processed. Then go to Coincident and constraints will be created to make them all coincident. Inc. If you have two or more points that are at. trim. they (or if curves. you can select an edge and a series of other edges to be tangent to the first edge before selecting this function. or may give unexpected results”. where the two edges cross. the tangency can occur outside of the displayed portion of a curve. You cannot make two splines coincident. or extend a line that has a midpoint constraint. All rights reserved. you can select an edge and a series of other edges to be perpen- dicular to the first edge before selecting this function. you can make a point coincident with a line even though the point does not lie on the displayed line segment. Using preselect. Using preselect. The selection location controls which side of a circle the Tangent constraint applies. would cross. For example. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The Midpoint constraint forces the point to be on the line an equal distance from the line endpoints.

Select multiple. The right mouse button option. Select new symmetry axis when you want to select a new axis. All rights reserved. a constraint is created and then the second edge you selected is used as the first edge for the next pair. Concentric Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Select pairs. or elliptical arcs. circular arcs. after you have selected two edges. Select multiple. and Release 15. The Equal Radius constraint will ensure that circles or circular arcs have the same radius. Select pairs. For circles. circles. Select pairs. The right mouse button option. or centers to be at the same location. or elliptical arcs. such as lines. by placing a radius or diameter dimension on one of the arcs or circles. ellipses. The right mouse button option. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. allows you to select a continuing series of lines or ellipses. allows you to select a continuing series of points. New multiple select The default right mouse button option. circles. allows you to select two circles or circular arcs. Select pairs. This continues until you either use the right mouse button to start a new series or return to standard pairs selection. a constraint is created and then the second edge you selected is used as the first edge for the next pair. allows you to select a pair of 2D straight edges. after you have selected two edges. This continues until you either use the right mouse button to start a new series or return to standard pairs selection. . The Parallel constraint forces the selected lines or major axes for ellipses and elliptical arcs to be parallel.© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. A series of these may be preselected before selecting the function and they are treated like a series selected in 'Select multiple' mode. ellipses. circular arcs. Select multiple. you need to add symmetry constraints to them as well. New multiple select The default right mouse button option. Select multiple.0 . Use the right mouse button option. In the series. they do not need to have an actual center point. allows you to select two points. 171 . Equal Radius Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Select pairs. Axis and pairs of points or edges (of the same type) may also be preselected before entering the function. Inc. Then. then a pair of points or edges (of the same type) to be symmetric about the axis. or elliptical arcs. Parallel Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Select pairs. You may continue to select pairs of points or edges (of the same type) to be symmetric about the axis you already have selected. circular arcs. ellipses. Select multiple. allows you to select a continuing series of circles. The Concentric constraint will force selected points. New multiple select The default right mouse button option. A series of these may be preselected before selecting the function and they are treated like a series selected in 'Select multiple' mode. Constraints Toolbox Symmetry Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Select new symmetry axis First select a line to be the symmetry axis. Select multiple. In the series. If you want the endpoints of the curves to also be symmetric. you can control the radius of all of them. Inc.

Note that the constraint requires four edges (points or lines). Inc.0 . and then select a series of points and/or lines. The right mouse button option. after you have selected two lines. D. and perpendicular constraints between the edge you are creating Release 15. The two pairs do not have to be the same. Equal Length Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Select pairs. they must be. Select pairs. However. Equal Distance Right Mouse Button Context Menu: Select 2 pairs. This continues until you either use the right mouse button to start a new series or return to standard pairs selection. Select multiple. The result is a series of five equally-spaced lines. The last ensures that C-D is the same as D-E. this setting of automatic constraints is detrimental to the drawing process. allows you to select a continuing series of lines. The constraint ensures that the distance between the edges in the first pair is the same as the distance between the edges in the second pair. or a point and a line. lines. Select multiple. you can also use the right mouse button option.© SAS IP. . Select multiple. the ANSYS DesignModeler application will attempt to detect constraints. allows you to select a pair of lines. Note that edges of sketches that are hidden will be ignored. You can preselect a series of edges before selecting the function. The Equal Length constraint ensures that the selected lines are the same in length. a constraint is created and then the second edge you selected is used as the first edge for the next pair. New multiple select Use the Equal Distance constraint to select two pairs of edges. You can preselect a series of circles and circular arcs before selecting the function and they are treated like a series selected in 'Select multiple' mode.Contains proprietary and confidential information 172 of ANSYS. Select multiple. in some models. not just the current sketch. This continues until you either use the right mouse button to start a new series or return to standard pairs selection. Inc. Each pair can be points. after you have selected two edges. and E--three constraints are created. This option allows you to control the automatic constraint detection. and will be forced to be parallel if they are not already. Also note that both forms of Auto Constraints are based off all edges in a plane. While in the function. one of which may be shared. you can use the right mouse button options to use the second selection "twice. In the series. a constraint is created and then the second line you selected is used as the first line for the next pair. In the series. The first ensures that the distance A-B is the same as B-C.2D Sketching circular arcs. For example. horizontal and vertical lines. Just as preselected edges." This allows you to select three edges and make them all equally spaced. . The next ensures B-C is the same as C-D. New multiple select The default right mouse button option. All rights reserved. You can preselect a series of lines before selecting the tool and they are treated like a series selected in 'Select multiple' mode. While in the function. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Auto Constraint Cursor only looks for coincident. These constraints include point coincidence. If two lines are selected as a pair. C. curve tangency. tangent. they will all become equally spaced. In very complex sketches. either or both of these constraint modes can add noticeable time to the input or modification of sketches. unless that sketch is the active sketch Cursor on/off decides whether local constraint snapping is performed or not. etc. B. if you select five lines--A. or with multiple sketches in a plane. Auto Constraints While drawing. and they will all become equally spaced.

The grid appears fixed as a rectangular XY pattern in the current plane.© SAS IP. they can also sometimes lead to problems. 174) • Minor-Steps per Major (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. If you are creating new edges near other edges. Snap on/off. The minimum range of the grid is determined by the Minimum Axes Length setting in the Grid Defaults section of the Options dialog box. Inc. this constraint would make the model over constrained. Global on/off determines the automatic constraint detection with respect to all the entities in the active plane. and then turn off Auto Constraints before creating the new edges. constraints may get created that you do not want or expect and could lead to changing the new or existing edges in unexpected ways. In these cases the ANSYS DesignModeler application will. . 147) will snap to this rectangular grid if the Grid Snap option is checked. 173 . Settings Toolbox • Grid (p. The grid is not required to enable snapping. It can also shrink back to its minimum range if items are deleted. Any input for 2D-edge creation using the Draw Tool- box (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. avoid creating auto constraints that would over constrain the model. Auto Constraint Global is not processed until you actually create an edge.0 . there are situations where Auto Constraint Cursor mode will detect a potential constraint such as Horizontal. The grid guides you as you create your sketch. If this is a problem. 174) Grid This gives access to the grid options: grid visibility. as well as snap behavior. and then it is examined in its relation to all other edges and points in the plane. use Undo. Show in 2D on/off. Release 15. At start-up a grid appears (depending on defaults in the Options dialog box). but when the constraints actually get applied. Settings Toolbox and other edges that are under the cursor (or a short extension would put them under the cursor). It will expand as needed if items are drawn outside the current grid area. Occasionally. The grid is optional and you may sketch without it. 173) • Major Grid Spacing (p. when possible. Note that while these can be very useful in finding and assigning constraints. All rights reserved. Inc. 174) • Snaps per Minor (p.

. the distance between two major grid lines. while still snapping to a tighter grid.36 or 5. minor grid lines are displayed every 2 mm. Inc.357895846483938474 or 5. but snapping is still to every millimeter. and the Grid Snaps per Minor to 2. Snaps per Minor Grid Snaps per Minor allows you to specify intermediate snap locations between minor grid lines (1- 1000).27 instead of 8. You can set the spacing in terms of the Major Grid Line Distance.Contains proprietary and confidential information 174 of ANSYS. that is. This way. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. but it actually is and the coordinates of your sketching are being snapped to 1/100th or 1/1000th of your minor grid line spacing. For example. Another way to use this function is to set this to a value like 100 or 1000. You can use this to reduce the density of the grid display. in millimeters if the Major Grid Spacing is set to 10. The spacing for minor grid line display and/or snapping is equal to the Major Grid Spacing divided by the value you set for the Minor-Steps per Major. This way. For example.2D Sketching Major Grid Spacing This option specifies the spacing for the grid.© SAS IP. when sketching a point its coordinates will end up as numbers such as 8. . sketching does not appear to be snapping to a grid. that is. Release 15. Minor-Steps per Major You can set the spacing for display and/or snapping in terms of the Major Grid Line Distance. if the minor grid lines are every inch and the Grid Snaps per Minor are set to 100. the distance between two major grid lines. you can set the Minor-Steps per Major to 5. All rights reserved.27123934933421 with no grid snapping at all.0 . Inc.

Inc. 180) Release 15. 175 . . All rights reserved.© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.0 . The Selection Filter options include: • Selection Filter: Points (p. not when you are drawing. if the edge does not belong to a loop. This works for 2D and 3D edges. it will select the entire loop of edges or. The context menu lists Select Loops/Chains when you are selecting.DesignModeler Selection Sketching Mode The following is displayed when you use the right mouse button in the Sketching mode. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 179) • Selection Filter: Edges (p. the entire edge chain. Instead of selecting a single edge. Inc.

and its subsidiaries and affiliates. chain. In the Modeling mode you may use two unique features: • Select Loops/Chains: This works for 2D and 3D edges of Solid or Surface bodies. Instead of selecting a single edge.Contains proprietary and confidential information 176 of ANSYS. All rights reserved. The following image depicts (left to right) a loop. the entire edge chain. Inc. Because the selection filter buttons on the toolbar can represent more than one type of filter. no jagged intersections allowed). Inc.Selection Modeling Mode The following is displayed when you use the right mouse button in the Modeling mode.0 . . • Select Smooth Chains: This works only for 3D edges and works the same as Select Loops/Chains except that the chain is defined by edges that are tangent to each other at their endpoints (that is. the status of the detailed filters can be checked through the right mouse button context menu. it will select the entire loop of edges or. the following image shows that both Vertex and PF Point filters are on. and smooth chain. . For example when you are in the modeling mode. if the edge does not belong to a loop. Release 15.© SAS IP.

Inc. or bodies. The Selection Toolbar includes: New Selection Select Mode Selection Filter: Points Selection Filter: Edges Selection Filter: Faces Selection Filter: Bodies Release 15. Selection Toolbar The Selection Filter options include: • Selection Filter: Points (p. 180) • Selection Filter: Faces (p. 181) • Selection Filter: Bodies (p. 181) Selection topics: Selection Toolbar Graphical Selection Selection Toolbar Use the Select tool to perform these tasks: • Preselect entities for sketching and modeling functions. .© SAS IP. 177 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. • Extend the current selection. Inc. • Select model vertices. To select multiple entities. • Select sketch entities (curves. faces. points. hold the Control key (Crtl) down while selecting additional entities when in the modeling mode. edges.0 . and dimensions). 179) • Selection Filter: Edges (p. All rights reserved.

All rights reserved.Selection Extend Selection Expand/Shrink Face Selection New Selection Use the New Selection button to clear the current selection. items completely enclosed in the box are selected. • Box Select: Selects all filtered items by dragging a selection box. This also ends the current sketching state. . and start a new selection. When the dragging is from the right to the left. Note the difference in the hash marks along the edges of the box to help you determine which box selection type will be performed. 185) Select Mode The Select Mode toolbar button allows you to select items designated by the Selection Filters through the Single Select or Box Select drop down menu options. Other Selection Toolbar choices: • Select Mode (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 178 of ANSYS. When the dragging is from left to right. 179) • Selection Filter: Edges (p. There are two types of selections based on the dragging direction. 178) • Selection Filter: Points (p. 180) • Selection Filter: Faces (p.0 . 182) • Expand/Shrink Face Selection (p. 181) • Selection Filter: Bodies (p. . items completely and partially enclosed in the box are selected. 181) • Extend Selection (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. • Single Select (default): Click an item to select it. Drag a selection box from the left to the right The edges fully inside the box are selected Release 15. Inc. Inc.© SAS IP. if any.

182) • Expand/Shrink Face Selection (p. . the point filter button is latched. 185) Selection Filter: Points The Points filter can be divided into 2D Point. In Single Select mode. and Point Feature Point. Vertex.© SAS IP. entities can be deselected by pressing the Control key (Crtl) while selecting them again. 178) • Selection Filter: Edges (p. Selection Toolbar Drag a selection box from the right to the The edges inside the box and the edges touching left the box are selected You can use the Control key (Crtl) for multiple selections in both modes. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Use the right mouse button to select a specific point filter. 180) Release 15. To switch selection mode quickly. In Box Select mode. All rights reserved. If one or more types of point filters are on. entities cannot be deselected. Selection Filter: Points topics include: Selection Filter: Sketch Points (2D) Selection Filter: Model Vertices (3D) Selection Filter: PF Points (Point Feature Points. 3D) Other Selection Toolbar choices: • New Selection (p. 179) • Selection Filter: Edges (p. 178) • Select Mode (p. 179 . 180) • Selection Filter: Faces (p. Inc. 178) • Selection Filter: Points (p.0 . Switching the select mode from Single Select to Box Select or vice versa does not affect the current selection. Use the Select Points button to turn the current point selection on/off. Other Selection Toolbar choices: • New Selection (p. press and hold the right mouse button while the left button in pressed. 181) • Extend Selection (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. 181) • Selection Filter: Bodies (p.

See the Point feature for more information about PF Points. the edge filter button is latched. Inc. . 179) • Selection Filter: Faces (p. Inc. . 181) • Extend Selection (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 180 of ANSYS.Selection • Selection Filter: Faces (p.© SAS IP. 182) • Expand/Shrink Face Selection (p. 3D) Use the Select PF Points button to turn the selection of 3D point feature points on/off. 185) Selection Filter: Sketch Edges (2D) Release 15. All rights reserved. Use the Select Edges button to turn the current edge selection on/off. 178) • Select Mode (p. 181) • Extend Selection (p. Use the right mouse button to select a specific edge filter. 181) • Selection Filter: Bodies (p. Selection Filter: Edges The Edges filter can be divided into 2D Edge.0 . 181) • Selection Filter: Bodies (p. Selection Filter: PF Points (Point Feature Points. Selection Filter: Model Vertices (3D) Use the Select Model Vertices (3D) button to turn the selection of 3D model vertices on/off. 3D Edge. 185) Selection Filter: Sketch Points (2D) Use the Select Sketch Points (2D) button to turn the selection of 2D points on/off in sketching mode. 178) • Selection Filter: Points (p. and Line Edge. 182) • Expand/Shrink Face Selection (p. If one or more types of edge filters are on. Selection Filter: Edges topics include: Selection Filter: Sketch Edges (2D) Selection Filter: Model Edges (3D) Selection Filter: Line Edges (3D) Other Selection Toolbar choices: • New Selection (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

181) • Extend Selection (p. Selection Toolbar Use the Select Sketch Edges (2D) button to turn the selection of 2D edges on/off in sketching mode. Inc. 185) Selection Filter: Bodies The Bodies filter can be divided into Solid Body. 179) • Selection Filter: Edges (p. Selection Filter: Model Edges (3D) Use the Select Model Edges (3D) button to turn the selection of 3D model edges on/off. 178) • Selection Filter: Points (p. Selection Filter: Line Edges (3D) Use the Select Line Edges button to turn the selection of 3D model line edges on/off. 180) Release 15. Use the right mouse button to select a specific body filter. Selection Filter: Bodies topics include: Selection Filter: Solid Bodies (3D) Selection Filter: Line Bodies (3D) Selection Filter: Surface Bodies (3D) Other Selection Toolbar choices: • New Selection (p.0 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . 181 . and Line Body. 178) • Select Mode (p. 182) • Expand/Shrink Face Selection (p. 178) • Selection Filter: Points (p. Other Selection Toolbar choices: • New Selection (p. Surface Body. 178) • Select Mode (p. the body filter button is latched.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 179) • Selection Filter: Edges (p. All rights reserved. If one or more types of body filters are on. Selection Filter: Faces Use the Select Faces button to turn the selection of 3D model faces on/off. Use the Select Bodies button to turn the current body selection on/off. 180) • Selection Filter: Bodies (p. Inc.© SAS IP.

Inc. . 181) Release 15. 182) • Expand/Shrink Face Selection (p. 180) • Selection Filter: Faces (p. 183) Flood Blends (p. 185) Selection Filter: Solid Bodies (3D) Use the Select Bodies button to turn the selection of solid bodies on/off. Selection Filter: Line Bodies (3D) Use the Select Line Bodies button to turn the selection of 3D model line bodies on/off. . 178) • Selection Filter: Points (p. 185) Other Selection Toolbar choices: • New Selection (p. 184) Flood Area (p. 184) Extend to Instances (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 182 of ANSYS. 181) • Selection Filter: Bodies (p. Selection Filter: Surface Bodies (3D) Use the Select Surface Bodies button to turn the selection of 3D model surface bodies on/off. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Selection • Selection Filter: Faces (p. 181) • Extend Selection (p. Inc.© SAS IP. Extend Selection Use the Extend Selection button to access the following options: Extend to Adjacent (p. 183) Extend to Limits (p. 179) • Selection Filter: Edges (p. 178) • Select Mode (p.0 . All rights reserved.

After Extend to Limits. until the selection can no longer grow.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Here.© SAS IP. The current face selection is extended with its adjacent faces. Inc. Each click of Extend to Adjacent expands the selection by one adjacent (and smooth) edge/face. corner (non-smooth) adjacencies do not count. .0 . one face is selected: After Extend to Adjacent. adjacent and separated by a seam edge -- i.. All rights reserved. faces that are adjacent and smooth to the selected one have been added to the selection set: Extend to Limits Use the Extend to Limits button to gain the same result as clicking the Extend to Adjacent button multiple times. 183 . "adjacent" means.e. Inc. the selection set is expanded until all tangent faces have been added: Release 15. Selection Toolbar • Expand/Shrink Face Selection (p. Faces are considered smooth if the angle between them is less than the limit defined in the Extend Selection Angle Limit description in the Graphics Interaction section of the ANSYS Workbench help. 185) Extend to Adjacent Use the Extend to Adjacent button to expand the selected 3D edges and 3D faces to include any ad- jacent edges/faces that form a "smooth" angle with the original selection set. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Before Extend to Adjacent.

Contains proprietary and confidential information 184 of ANSYS. Before Flood Blends.© SAS IP.Selection Flood Blends Use the Flood Blends button to expand your currently selected blend faces to include all of its adjacent blend faces. Inc.0 . Note For some cases of blends of constant or variable radius. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. All rights reserved. Flood Chamfer is not supported. faces may not be correctly identified. . these six blend faces are selected: After Flood Blends. the selection set has expanded to include all the blend faces: Flood Area Release 15. . The DesignModeler application is not guaranteed to find the same set of blend faces if the geometry is of type DesignModeler or Workbench.

Multiple. Face selection can also be expanded by selecting an edge. All rights reserved.0 . Before Flood Area.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. with one face selected in each region: After Flood Area. The connectivity between the adjacent faces need not be smooth. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. You can independently select: Expand Face Selection Shrink Face Selection Release 15.© SAS IP. Selection Toolbar Use the Flood Area button to expand the face selection to include all faces within the area contained by the selected edges. 185 . disconnected seed and respective boundary conditions are supported. 237) for usage information. 231) and Instancing Support (p. the two regions are flooded up to the bounding edges: Extend to Instances See Viewing Instance Data (p. Flood Area extends the face selection by flooding the bounded area. . Given a seed face selection and a selection of boundary edges (the current face selection is interpreted as the seed selection. the current edge selection is interpreted as the "boundary" selection). Then each such area would be defined by one seed face and its respective boundary. For more information in general about Instancing. Inc. then the flood will extend to the whole of the respective body. Now the selection can be expanded to the adjacent faces or the selection can be shrunk. Expand/Shrink Face Selection Select few faces from a model and hide all the other faces. If the selec- tion of the boundary edges is incomplete or not closed. The face flood covers the case of flooding multiple (disconnected) areas. Inc. see ANSYS DesignModeler Instancing (p. 231). two regions have been bounded by edges.

Selection Expand Face Selection Use the Expand Face Selection button to add adjacent 3D faces into the current selection. visibility is turned on for these faces and added into the selection.© SAS IP. Inc. If adjacent faces were hidden. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. Release 15. Example 8: Consider the body shown below. Repeated use of this button will eventually reveal all the body faces and put them into selection. All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information 186 of ANSYS. After hiding all the other faces of the body. . the selection is shown below.0 .

0 . Selection Toolbar When Expand Face Selection button is pressed once.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. Shrink Face Selection Use the Shrink Face Selection button to deselect 3D faces from the selection. then.© SAS IP. the adjacent faces will be put into the selec- tion as shown in the figure. 187 . . The outer most faces will be removed from the selection and hidden from workspace (graphics window). it is not possible to shrink the selections at all Example 9: Consider the model below whose unselected faces are hidden. In case of connected multi-body parts. then. All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. at least one face will be visible per multi-body part. Inc. if all the other body faces are hidden. Release 15. If the neighboring face of at least one edge of a selected face is not selected or does not exist. Limitations If all the body faces are selected and the body is closed. Note that at least one face will be always visible per body. that face is a candidate for removal when a Shrink is attempted.

All rights reserved. the outer faces from the selection will be removed from the selection as shown below. . Inc. Release 15. the next level of outer faces will be deselected and hidden as shown below.0 . When Shrink Face Selection button is pressed again.Selection When Shrink Face Selection button is pressed once.Contains proprietary and confidential information 188 of ANSYS. Inc. .© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

189 . • To rotate about a specific point in the model. click the Rotate button. Graphical Selection topics include: Highlighting Picking Painting Depth Picking Release 15. hold the Control key (Crtl) and click the surfaces you wish to select. • You may customize the mouse operations in the Workbench Options. . All rights reserved. Inc. • To select more than one surface. • You can zoom in or out by holding the Shift key and dragging with the middle mouse button. then hold down the left mouse button outside of the model as shown. • You can zoom in or out by scrolling the mouse wheel.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. • Click the interactive triad to quickly change the Model View window. Graphical Selection Graphical Selection Tips for working with graphics • You can rotate the view while selecting geometry by dragging your middle mouse button. Inc. • To roll the model.© SAS IP.0 . switch to Rotate mode and click the model to select a rotation point. • You can pan the view by using the arrow keys or holding the Control key (Crtl) and dragging with the middle mouse button.

The stack of rectangles is an alternative graphical display for the selectable geometry. you can add unselected items to the selection and selected items can be removed from the selection. All rights reserved. painting will append all appropriate geometry touched by the pointer to the current selection. Other Graphical Selection choices: • Highlighting (p. Inc. 190) • Depth Picking (p. The rectangles are stacked in appearance. A pick becomes the current selection.0 . .© SAS IP. The surface edges are highlighted in colored dots. 190) • Painting (p. 190) Painting Painting means dragging the mouse on visible geometry to select more than one entity. front to back. with the topmost rectangle representing the visible (selected) geometry and subsequent rectangles representing geometry hit by a ray normal to the screen passing through the pointer. 190) • Painting (p. over a particular surface). replacing previous se- lections. Release 15. By holding the Control key (Ctrl) down. By holding the Control key (Crtl) down. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. select surfaces) and location of the pointer (for example. the graphics window displays a stack of rectangles in the lower left corner. A pick is a trivial case of painting. A pick in empty space clears the current selection in the modeling mode. 190) • Depth Picking (p. 190) Picking A pick means a click on visible geometry. Other Graphical Selection choices: • Highlighting (p. 190) • Depth Picking (p. . Other Graphical Selection choices: • Picking (p. 190) Depth Picking Depth Picking allows you to pick obscured entities through the Z-order. 190) • Picking (p. Whenever more than one entity lies under the pointer.Selection Highlighting Highlighting provides visual feedback about the current pointer behavior (for example.Contains proprietary and confidential information 190 of ANSYS.

Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Holding the Control key (Crtl) while clicking rectangles picks or unpicks associated geometry. The Control key (Crtl) and painting behaviors are also identical for the stack.0 . 190) • Painting (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. 190) • Picking (p. Dragging the mouse (painting) along the rectangles picks geometry front-to-back or back-to- front. 190) Release 15. Inc.© SAS IP. Other Graphical Selection choices: • Highlighting (p. Moving the pointer over a rectangle highlights both the rectangle and its geometry. . 191 . while preserving the rest of the current selection. Graphical Selection Highlighting and picking behaviors are identical and synchronized for geometry and its associated rectangle. All rights reserved.

.© SAS IP. . All rights reserved. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information 192 of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.0 . Inc. Release 15.

and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. To do this. Planar vs. you have access to inserting a Sketch Pro- jection (p. Inc. 99) or Sketch Instances (p. 97) (although restrictions apply for three base planes). select a face. By selecting the sketching tab. You can also use it to switch the active plane or active sketch while in the sketching mode. The Active Plane/Sketch Toolbar includes: Release 15. 194) • Active Sketch Drop Down • New Sketch • Terminology • Reference Geometry • Plane Properties • Tangent Plane • Plane Preview • From-Face Plane.© SAS IP.DesignModeler Planes and Sketches Plane and sketch topics include: • Active Plane/Sketch Toolbar • Active Plane Drop Down (p. 193 .) Note A very useful shortcut exists that allows you to create a new plane and new sketch in a single operation. 252). the plane and sketch will be created automatically. while in the modeling mode. (While in the modeling mode. Inc. Curved-Surfaces Faces Behavior • Apply/Cancel in Plane Note Via the Context Menus (p.0 . 194) • New Plane (p. . this is usually done via selection in the feature Tree Outline (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Active Plane/Sketch Toolbar Use the Active Plane/Sketch Toolbar to create a new plane or a new sketch. 87) (RMB) on a plane.

6) to display the drop down menu that lists the different types of plane construction: • From Plane: new plane is based on another existing plane. • From Centroid: new plane is defined by the centroid of the selected geometry. Click on Type in the Details View (p.Planes and Sketches Active Plane Drop Down New Plane Active Sketch Drop Down New Sketch Active Plane Drop Down Use the Active Plane Drop Down to select the plane in which you want to work. The z axis is normal to the circle or ellipse. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. You can also select a point to use its coordinates for the origin. . Also. If you select a point. or you change any of the coordinates. • From Point and Edge: new plane is defined by a point and a 2D line or 3D edge.© SAS IP. This lists all the planes present in the model. You can select a plane to make it the active plane. then the point and plane origin will not be at the same location. • From Face: new plane is based on a face. If the point later moves. The origin is the center of the circle or ellipse. XYPlane is the default.0 . Inc. The plane goes through the point and the two ends of the selected edge. . the x axis is aligned to the major axis of the ellipse. by default. via a Point Feature (construction) point and the base face normal. the x axis is aligned to the global x axis. These three locations cannot be colinear. New Plane Use the New Plane tool to create a new plane. If you have all three coordinates "Driven" then the option to select a point will not be displayed. Release 15. • From Three Points: new plane is defined by three points. All rights reserved. If a circular edge is selected. Note that a Plane type cannot be modified after the first generation of the feature. • From Circle/Ellipse: new plane is based on a circular or elliptical 2D or 3D edge. • From Coordinates: new plane is defined by typing in the coordinates of the origin and normal. Alternatively. there is the option to create a parameterized and persistent tangent plane. including arcs. Inc. is in the direction from the first point to the second point. If multiple geometry types are selected the highest order type is used. • From Point and Normal: new plane is defined by a point and a normal direction. then that coordinate will not be changed by the selected point. its coordinates are used as the initial origin coordinates.Contains proprietary and confidential information 194 of ANSYS. Only geometry of the same type is used in the calculation of the centroid. If an elliptical edge is selected. The new plane lies in the XY plane and its origin is set to the calculated centroid value. if you have "Driven" a coordinate by promoting it to a Design Parameter. The plane origin is placed at the first point and the x axis. Selection sets consisting of bodies must all have the same body type.

the "normal" is referred to as the Z-Axis. Note New sketches cannot be added to planes that are suppressed or in error. and Reference edge for Rotation can be defined by selecting a face*. the ANSYS Mechanical application uses a coordinate system terminology. Reference Geometry Active Sketch Drop Down Use the Active Sketch Drop Down to select in which sketch of the active plane you want to work. a 3D edge. 195 . Inc. Reference Geometry Several features in the DesignModeler application. 193). or three points. select the plane that the sketch is to be attached to. Terminology In the DesignModeler application. Spot Welds) Direction Reference Normal direction.© SAS IP. Reference Geometry topics include: Point Reference Direction Reference Point Reference Generally speaking. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the plane terminology considers a "plane" to be a 2D object (X. the DesignModeler application accepts three forms of "point" input: • 2D (Sketch) Points • 3D (Model) Vertices • Point Feature Points (Construction Points. two points. accept point and direction reference inputs. X-Axis line. Inc. To attach a new sketch to a plane. a 2D line. All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The direction reference for the Plane feature and other the DesignModeler application features accepts the following "directional" input: • Plane (its normal is used) Release 15. including Plane. and then click on the New Sketch icon in the Active Plane/Sketch Toolbar (p. . New Sketch Click the New Sketch icon to create a new empty sketch in the active plane. In contrast.0 . There.and Y-Axis) with an orientation (determined by the plane normal vector). Point Loads.

. after a direction reference is defined the toggle window will show up displaying the red arrow pointing to the left. indicating that the direction points in its normal direction.© SAS IP. All rights reserved.0 . Inc. Its behavior is illustrated in the images below. The red arrow will point to the right. Release 15. To reverse the direction.Planes and Sketches • 3D (Model) Face (its normal is used) • 2D (Sketch) Line • 3D (Model) edge • Two points (any of the above "point" input is accepted) • Three points (the normal of plane spanning the three points is used) * Direction reference from face will be the central axis of the surface if the underlying surface is cylindrical. . the DesignModeler application displays a toggle window that allows the user to flip the direction by 180°.Contains proprietary and confidential information 196 of ANSYS. swept or spun and will the normal to the face at its mid u-v point if the underlying surface is of any other kind. Initially. the default direction from face provided will be the face-normal irrespective of the underlying surface type. Direction Reference topics include: Direction Reference Toggle Window Direction Reference Toggle Window Every time a direction reference is defined by one of the above directional inputs. Inc. The y-axis line has been chosen as a direction. indicating that the direction has been reversed. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. toroidal.0 and earlier using face as direction reference. simply click anywhere on the toggle window. The direction reference selected from a face can be switched between surface-axis and face-normal through context menu items “Switch to Axis” and “Switch to Face-normal” if a face is capable of providing both type of direction. conical. For features created in ANSYS release 14.

Plane Properties

With the toggle window arrow reversed, the direction now points the opposite way.

Plane Properties
When constructing a plane, some plane types allow you to use the Details View (p. 6) to add an offset
to the plane. Also, some types allow you to use the Details View (p. 6) to reverse the plane normal
direction. When adding from another plane or a planar face, you can specify a rotation axis and angle.
In this case, rotation takes precedence to offset.

Overall, there are eight plane properties:

1. Subtype: This property is only available if the plane type is From-Face. Then if the selected face is,
at creation time, a planar face, the options for the Subtype are either:

• Outline: The plane's origin is placed at one of the selected face's vertices. This option is only
available for planar faces.

• Tangent Plane: The plane's origin is placed at the location where you clicked. This is the only
option allowed for curved faces.

2. X-Axis Line: This allows you to select a direction (see above) with which you want the plane's X-
Axis to be aligned. If not specified, the system will align the plane's axes with the axes of the global
coordinate system. Applies to Release 7.1 and earlier.

3. Z-Axis Rotation: This allows you to specify the degrees in which the X-axis can be rotated around
the normal vector. 0° means no rotation; take X-axis as is. Applies to Release 7.1 and earlier.

4. Reverse Normal/Z-Axis: Reverses/flips/inverts the plane normal (or Z-Axis; Blue triad arrow).

5. Flip XY-Axis: Reverses/flips/inverts both the X- and Y-axis of the plane.

6. Use Arc Centers for Origin: This property is only available for From Face planes. If Yes, then when
a planar face is selected and an arc or elliptical arc edge is nearest to the selection, then the center
of the circle/ellipse will be used for the origin. When this is set to No, then arc and elliptical arc
edges are treated just like other edges and the nearest end point is used for the origin. The default
is Yes for all new Plane features and No for planes created prior to Release 8.1.

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 197

Planes and Sketches

7. Export Coordinate System: Exports the plane as a coordinate system into the ANSYS Mechanical
application. The default is No. Planes that are used as symmetry planes in the Enclosure and Symmetry
features will automatically force this property to Yes.

Note

ANSYS Workbench Products 7.1 is only processing exported coordinate systems at
the time of the initial attach of the active CAD model. This means, in particular, the
Updates are not supported for exported coordinate systems.

Plane Transforms
Planes defined prior to Release 8.0 will maintain their current definition form, and editing them will
remain as it was in the past. For Release 8.0, definitions of Planes have been made more general and
much more flexible. While each plane type has its own set of required information, the transform logic
and prompts are now identical for all plane types. Now after the detail information for the specific plane
type, the following lines are always displayed:

• Transform 1 (RMB): None

• Reverse Normal/Z-Axis? No

• Flip XY-Axes? No

• Export Coordinate System? No

After the Transform 1 line, a 'Transform 1 Axis' appears for transform types that require an axis selection.
Also, an 'FD1, Value 1' line will appear for any transform that requires a value. Likewise for additional
transforms if they are used.

Clicking on the down arrow in the right column of Transform 1 generates a drop down menu of choices
for the type of transform you want. Clicking on Transform 1 in the left column, produces the same
categorized list.

A detailed explanation of each choice follows:

• None: No change

• Reverse Normal/Z-Axis: Reverses the Normal/Z-Axis, as well as the X-Axis

• Flip XY-Axes: Reverse the X-Axis and Y-Axis

• Offset X: Offsets the plane's origin in its X direction by the amount in its matching “value.”

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
198 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Plane Transforms

• Offset Y: Offsets the plane's origin in its Y direction by the amount in its matching “value.”

• Offset Z: fsets the plane's origin in its Z direction by the amount in its matching “value.”

• Rotate about X: Rotates the plane about its X-Axis by the degrees in its matching “value.”

• Rotate about Y: Rotates the plane about its Y-Axis by the degrees in its matching “value.”

• Rotate about Z: Rotates the plane about its Z-Axis by the degrees in its matching “value.”

• Rotate about Edge: For this option, an additional line appears, “Transform n Axis,” where "n" is the
current transform number, and allows selection of an Edge. The plane is then rotated about this Edge
by the degrees in its matching “value.”

• Align X-Axis with Base: Certain plane types inherit a base direction from what is used in their
definition. This is true for Plane From Plane, Plane from Planar Face, and Three Point Plane. This option
will attempt to align the X-Axis with the base data. Note, that by default the X-Axis is aligned with
this data prior to any transforms. For all other plane types, this option acts the same as 'Align X-Axis
with Global'.

• Align X-Axis with Global: Aligns the X-Axis of the plane with the Global X-Axis, unless it is normal
to it.

• Align X-Axis with Edge: For this option, an additional line appears, 'Transform n Axis', where 'n' is
the current transform number, and allows selection of an Edge. The X-Axis is then aligned with this
Edge.

• Offset Global X: Offsets the plane's origin in the global X direction by the amount in its matching
“value.”

• Offset Global Y: Offsets the plane's origin in the global Y direction by the amount in its matching
“value.”

• Offset Global Z: Offsets the plane's origin in the global Z direction by the amount in its matching
“value.”

• Rotate about Global X: Rotates the plane about the global X-Axis by the degrees in its matching
“value.”

• Rotate about Global Y: Rotates the plane about the global Y-Axis by the degrees in its matching
“value.”

• Rotate about Global Z: Rotates the plane about the global Z-Axis by the degrees in its matching
“value.”

• Move Transform Up: This exchanges the position of this transform and the one previous to it in the
list and thereby the order of processing it. If this is the first transform in the list, it becomes the last.
Note that this changes the 'FDn' parameters that refer to the transforms that change position in the
list. If there is only one transform, this does nothing.

• Move Transform Down: This exchanges the position of this transform and the one after it in the list
and thereby the order of processing it. If this is the last transform in the list, it becomes the first. Note
that this changes the 'FDn' parameters that refer to the transforms that change position in the list.
If there is only one transform, this does nothing.

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 199

Planes and Sketches

• Remove Transform: This deletes the current transform, and those following it are moved down one.
Note that this changes the 'FDn' parameters that refer to the transforms that change position in the
list.

The 'FD1, Value 1' is the value that is associated with this transform, if needed, giving you the ability
to place and orient the new plane just the way you want. In addition to the up to 9 user-specified
transforms, which are processed in the order you specify, you can also specify a final 'Reverse Normal/Z-
Axis', which is the same as a 180° rotation about the plane's Y-Axis, and a 'Flip XY-Axes', which is the
same as a 180° rotation about the plane's Z-Axis.

Notations:
• For plane types (Align X-Axis with Base) that do not have an X-axis direction inherited from their base
data, an Align X-Axis with Global is automatically performed before any of the specified transforms.

• The ‘Align X-Axis’ transforms will spin the plane about its Z-Axis such that the X-Axis is in alignment with
the projection of the chosen direction onto the plane.

Context Menu Options

An alternative way to assign the transform type is through the right mouse button context menu. Right
click on Transform 1 (RMB) to bring up the menu, where you can choose the transform list manually.
The right mouse button context menu is available for all 9 of the user-defined plane transforms.

Tangent Plane
If you create a From-Face plane from a curved-surface face, then the preview will give you the "tangent
plane" with regards to the point selected—the subtype will conveniently default to Tangent Plane. This
plane is specially marked as "dead" and will never be regenerated after creation. This is AGP Release 6.1
behavior and is maintained in the DesignModeler application Release 8.1 for backward compatibility.
However, the correct way to create a tangent plane at a given point is to:

1. Place a controlled/persistent/parameterized Construction Point onto the face, via the Point Feature;
and

2. Use this point feature points (PF points (p. 276)) for the tangent plane creation with the From-Point-
and-Normal plane type.

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
200 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Plane Preview

Plane Preview
The plane preview shows all three axes. When creating a new plane, you will see the X (red), Y (green),
and Z (blue) direction arrows for the new plane.

When creating a From-Face plane, there are two cases:

• curved-surface base face (like the above picture)

• and planar base face (i.e. a flat surface—see below).

For a curved-surface base face, the plane's subtype is set to Tangent Plane and remains as such (no
other option for curved-surface base faces). In this case, the origin is determined by the location where
you click on the face. Once generated, such created tangent planes remain fixed - i.e., they are "dead"
and will not be regenerated.

For planar base faces, you also have the option to set the subtype to Tangent Plane. However, since it
is probably more useful, it will default to Outline. In this case the origin is determined like this:

• The DesignModeler application finds the edge on the face closest to where you clicked.

• From that edge, the DesignModeler application chooses the vertex closest to where you clicked. If
the face contains only a ring edge (such as a circle, ellipse, or spline), then it places the origin at the
center.

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 201

Planes and Sketches

For the case where the origin is placed at a vertex, the X-Axis (red arrow) is aligned such that it is tangent
to the closest edge. For ring edges, the X-Axis is determined by the type of ring. For example, the ellipse
above aligned the X-Axis with its major axis.

Also for planar faces (whether ring or not), you have the option to reverse the direction of the axes.

When editing a plane definition, at times you will see two sets of axes and arrows. One set, for the
current plane definition is drawn with dotted black axis lines. The other set, which is for your current
changes, uses light gray lines. While these can be a little confusing when you do a simple reversal of
axes, they are very useful when you are adding or changing transforms to the plane definition. Also, if
desired, you can turn off the preview of the current plane definition by turning off the Display Plane
icon.

Plane Preview topics include:
Rotation Axis Rules

Rotation Axis Rules
When you are rotating about an edge, Fleming's Rule (right-hand rule) dictates which direction the
plane should rotate. Positive rotations are counterclockwise. As example, open your right hand and
stick out your thumb. Your thumb represents the rotation axis from start to end. Curl your fingers around
the axis to illustrate the direction that the plane will rotate. The curl direction is a positive rotation.

Planar vs. Curved-Surfaces Base Faces Behavior
• If the plane has been created with a curved-surface base face, then the plane defaults to and remains
as a "Tangent Plane" for the life of the feature, independently of whether the base face changes geometry
or not. Refer to the subtype property which, in this case, becomes read-only.

• If the plane has been created with a planar base face, and with the Subtype property specifically set to
that of "Tangent Plane" then, as above, the plane will remain so for the life of the feature.

• If the plane has been created with a planar base face, and with subtype Outline (which happens to be
the default in this case), then the plane will be created as a face-boundary (instead of axes) and the origin
snapped to the closest vertex. The plane subtype will remain "Outline" for the life of the feature—however,
it will properly regenerate whenever the face outline changes.

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
202 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Apply/Cancel in Plane

• If the plane has been created with a planar base face, but there is no vertex suitable for snapping (in
case of a ring edge), then the plane will be created as with a face boundary, and the origin will be set at
the center of the face.

In addition:

• If a plane cannot be regenerated, because it has been created as a "face-boundary outline plane" and the
base face somehow changed from planar to curved-surface (unlikely, but possible), then the plane will
not regenerate (i.e., fall back to the last successful generation, the appropriate boundary edges) and a
warning will be issued (yellow check mark).

Apply/Cancel in Plane
Because of the many options available in Plane, changes to properties that require selections are im-
mediately shown in the preview of the plane. Until you pressApply for a property, or Generate for the
plane itself, you have the option of using Cancel in that property to backup to the previous selection
(if any). Once you press Generate, all current selections are considered "applied."

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 203

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
204 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

DesignModeler Geometry Representations
Starting from DesignModeler 14.5, you can import geometry from CAD models into DesignModeler in
one of two geometry types or representations:

• Workbench Geometry: This is a form of geometry representation that is used by various applications
within ANSYS Workbench, including Workbench Mechanical and Workbench Meshing.

• DesignModeler Geometry: This geometry representation is used only by the DesignModeler applic-
ation. Almost all geometry editing operations are performed in this geometry representation. Geometry
in versions of DesignModeler prior to DesignModeler 14.5 are entirely in this form.

Geometry Transfer from CAD to DesignModeler
The following diagrams illustrate how geometry information is transferred from the CAD file or session
into Workbench applications.

In DesignModeler 14.0 and earlier versions, the CAD geometry is first converted to the Workbench
representation and then always converted to the DesignModeler geometry representation before being
made available for model editing.

Starting from DesignModeler 14.5, the CAD geometry can be imported as either the Workbench geometry
type or the DesignModeler geometry type. When the Workbench format is chosen, the model can still
be edited using any of DesignModeler’s features. A conversion from the Workbench geometry type to
DesignModeler geometry will be automatically performed when required.

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 205

Geometry Representations

While conversion from Workbench format to DesignModeler format will occur automatically as needed,
the extent of the conversion may vary. In some instances, DesignModeler will convert entire bodies into
the DesignModeler type while in others, only specific local entities will be converted. For example, if
you choose to apply a blend to an edge of a Workbench geometry using the Blend feature, the entire
body will be converted automatically to DesignModeler geometry and then the blend operation will
be executed on it. If you choose an edge of a line body in Workbench representation and choose to
extrude it to create a surface or solid body, then only the selected edges will be internally converted
to DesignModeler type with which the extrude operation will be executed.

Instancing information among imported bodies will be lost on conversion from Workbench geometry
type to DesignModeler type.

When Conversions Fail
All DesignModeler features will automatically convert the geometry to DesignModeler type before
performing the particular feature operation. However, sometimes the conversion step can fail in which
case the feature will also fail. This happens for several reasons:

• The conversion of a Workbench type body that is disjoint might have produced multiple DesignModeler
type bodies;

• A failure to convert specific faces of the Workbench body may cause the resultant DesignModeler
body to be of a different type, e.g. a surface body instead of solid body;

• A non-manifold configuration of the Workbench geometry may fail to construct an equivalent
DesignModeler representation, in which case the result may not yield the same body type.

Examples
Conversion failure due to disjoint bodies:

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
206 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

When Conversions Fail

Shows part imported from a CAD system as Shows two bodies when the same body in
one body of Workbench type. previous figure is converted to the
DesignModeler format.

The first picture shows a CAD model imported as Workbench geometry. The result is a single body even
though the cylindrical geometry at the hub is not connected to the rest of the wheel. When this body
is converted to DesignModeler type, the result is two bodies.

Conversion failure due to incomplete conversion:

Figure shows a CAD model of a crank shaft Figure shows the same CAD model imported
imported as a Solid body in Workbench as a Surface body in DesignModeler format.
Geometry format Notice the missing face.

The first picture shows the CAD model imported as Workbench geometry. When converted to Design-
Modeler geometry, one of the faces could not be converted and this results in the body being a Surface
body in the DesignModeler format.

When a conversion failure occurs, users can apply the Conversion feature to convert the geometry to
DesignModeler type and use additional features to further cleanup the converted bodies before pro-
ceeding. For more detailed information on the use of this operation, see Conversion feature.

• Add Conversion Feature Before Selected Feature: You can use this context menu item to automat-
ically insert a Conversion feature with the failed bodies as its input just before the feature that failed.

• Add Conversion Feature After Attach Feature: You can use this context menu item to automatically
insert a Conversion feature after the Attach feature that imported the bodies used.

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 207

. and Parasolid files are always imported as DesignModeler geometry. In such cases it is recommended to perform conversion using Conversion feature before the particular feature operation. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . since one less conversion step is required. MCNP. The feature operation can sometimes fail even when the automatic Conversion succeeds with an error message that entities are not valid. Inc. Inc. STEP. All other CAD models and files may be imported in either geometry representation.Contains proprietary and confidential information 208 of ANSYS. All rights reserved. This workflow can be particularly useful when modifications to only a few bodies in the CAD model are ne- cessary before transferring them to a downstream application for meshing and analysis. This can occur when the input geometric entities to the feature do not exist in the converted model (DesignModeler Geometry) due to simplify or cleaning or healing methods applied during con- version.0 . Release 15. Benefits of Workbench Geometry Importing a CAD model as Workbench geometry will be faster than as DesignModeler geometry.© SAS IP. Bodies will automatically convert to the DesignModeler type as they are undergo operations. Unmodified bodies in the Workbench geometry representation can be passed on to downstream applications without converting to the DesignModeler representation.Geometry Representations Geometry Representations Limitations Other Feature Failures DesignModeler features will automatically convert any required geometry to DesignModeler type before performing the particular feature operation. Note IGES.

All rights reserved.0 . 420) • Analysis Tools (p. the sums of the volumes and surface areas of bodies contained within the part are displayed. 297) • Repair (p. 251) • Primitives (p.) instead of a numer- Release 15. In the Details View (p. or Line (p. 242) • Types of Operations (p. 212). A body is a single component in the model. 209) • Details View in Modeling Mode (p.© SAS IP. . 246) • Edit Selections for Features and Apply/Cancel (p. Inc. 209 . Surface (p. A part is a collection of bodies grouped together. 438) • Concept Menu (p. 246) • Profiles (p. 483) Bodies and Parts The very last branch of the Tree Outline (p. If you see an ellipsis (. 443) • Legacy Features (p. Inc. either a Solid (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.. 248) • 3D Features (p. 289) • Advanced Features and Tools (p. For parts.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 212). 212) body. 238) • Boolean Operations (p. 252) contains the bodies and parts of the model.DesignModeler 3D Modeling • Bodies and Parts (p. Volumes and surface areas are measured automatically up to the limit specified by the Measure Selection Limit setting in the Options dialog.. 6) for each body or part are statistics: The statistics list the number of entities contained in the body or part as well as the volume and surface area of the body.

Imprints. the volume and surface area of the entity will be reported as “Unknown. Line bodies do not possess this property.3D Modeling ical value.Contains proprietary and confidential information 210 of ANSYS. 212) bodies may have a Fluid/Solid property. when refreshing all data in the Mechanical application. This property will automatically be set to Fluid for bodies created by either the Enclosure (p. For new bodies belonging to a multi-body part. 322) or Fill (p.” Details View Examples Details View of body from single body Details View of with Shared Topology Method shown part for body belonging to a multi-body part To compute the total surface area of a Solid (p. Fluid/Solid Property Parts. . You may use the Measure Selection (p. Otherwise. 212) body containing interior faces. When the ANSYS Mechanical application is first attached to an ANSYS DesignModeler application.© SAS IP. Automatic. the area of the in- terior face is counted twice representing both the exposed sides of the faces. If a solid or surface body has this property modified then the corresponding multibody part. 340) features. Shared Topology Method Property All bodies will have a Shared Topology Method property. Release 15. The choices available for this property are as follows: • Solid Bodies: Default. if it exists. If a part consists of one or more solid and/or surface bodies. will have its property modified as may be appropriate. All rights reserved. Conversely. When this occurs. it is possible to set the Fluid/Solid property for a part and modify the Fluid/Solid property of all solid or surface bodies that compose that part. In some rare cases. the Fluid/Solid property associated with all the ANSYS DesignModeler application solid bodies will be transferred to a Material Assignment property for all associated Solid (p. None. However. that means the geometry is too complex to be automatically measured. 212) bodies. Also you can select either multiple Solid or Surface bodies and change Fluid/Solid property of all selected bodies at the same time. it will be set to Default. . the default value will be Solid. Solid (p. which means it will inherit its Shared Topology setting from the owning Part. and Surface (p. then the part will also have a Fluid/Solid property. the ANSYS DesignModeler application may not be able to complete the measurement. Inc. 94) Context Menus (p.0 . 212) bodies in the Mechanical application. 87) option to force the volume and surface area calculation at any time. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. following an initial attach to the ANSYS DesignModeler application. the Mechanical application’s Material Assignment property for solid bodies will not be updated further.

or line. Frozen bodies are displayed in white in the Tree Outline (p. Edge Joints. 252). Edge Joints. 211) • Body Types (p. All rights reserved. Surface (p. 215) Body States There are two states for bodies in the ANSYS DesignModeler application: • Active: The body can be modified by normal modeling operations. 212). select the body and use the Unfreeze (p. The body's icon in the Tree Outline (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 300) feature. 212). 252) is dependent on its type: Solid (p. 215) Body Types There are five types of bodies that the ANSYS DesignModeler application supports: • Solid (p. • Frozen: The body is immune to all modeling operations except slicing (Hidden and suppressed bodies are not immune unless frozen).0 . see: • Bodies (p. . 216) • Instancing Support (p. For more information on bodies and parts.© SAS IP. Other Body topics: • Body Types (p. Bodies and Parts • Surface Bodies: Default. To move a body from the Frozen state to the Active state. 252) is dependent on its type . 212) • Surface (p. Automatic. • Line Bodies: Default. 298) feature. None. use the Freeze (p. None. Active bodies can be sliced and the resulting bodies are frozen automatically. 212) Release 15. 213) • Body Inheritance (p. or line. 212). 213) • Body Inheritance (p. To move all active bodies to the Frozen state. Active bodies are displayed in blue in the Tree Outline (p. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 211 . 212) • Line (p. 231) Bodies • Body States (p.Solid (p. 252). 211) • Body Status (p. 211) • Parts (p. The body's icon in the Tree Outline (p. 212). 211) • Body Status (p. Imprints. Surface (p. Inc.

0 . You can select multiple surface bodies and change the thickness of all at the same time. if the last surface/face selected has the desired thickness for all the rest. the line that displays Thickness Mode will change from Refresh on Update to Manual. Inc. its thickness will be calculated and adjusted as needed. ANSYS Mechanical and Meshing). Line The body. 213) • Winding (p.© SAS IP. you assigned thickness will remain. Release 15. 213) Solid The body has both a surface area and volume.3D Modeling • Planar (p. Here is what the Detail View looks like when you have selected and modified the thickness of a single surface body: You can also override the thickness value of individual faces within a surface body. Surface bodies also have a thickness value. and pass the value on to other applications (for example. You can reset it to again “Use Body Thickness” by assigning it a value of zero. Inc. even if the feature is generated again. When you change a thickness. You can reset it to Refresh on Update by setting the thickness to 0. it will change the “Thickness Mode” to “Manual”. • Manual: indicates that you have manually modified the thickness and then. • Refresh on Update: means that when the feature gets generated again.0. if you select multiple faces. however. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. you can assign them a custom thickness all at the same time. However. you will see the following: If you change the value of the “Face Thickness”. This is not visible in the graphic in the ANSYS DesignModeler application. and then assign the value to be used for all the surfaces/faces. All rights reserved. if you select a face from a surface body. it is used when the body is meshed. first assign a different temporary value. As with surface bodies. but no volume. consisting entirely of edges. Thickness values are computed and assigned in the feature that creates the surface body. does not have a surface area or volume. Note When changing the thickness of multiple surface or faces at once. When you are not in a feature creation. Surface The body has a surface area. when the file is transferred. when not in a feature creation.Contains proprietary and confidential information 212 of ANSYS. . . you can select a surface body and modify its thickness.

252). 483). These bodies are available to use for 2D analysis. 213) • Body Inheritance (p.© SAS IP. A 2D planar body is defined as a flat surface body that lies entirely in the XYPlane. Winding The body. Inc. A 2D planar body behaves in exactly the same way as any other surface body regarding feature operations and selection.0. 485) for Winding bodies from the Winding Tool (p. and its values are determined by the Winding Table (p. a normal Line body can be converted to a Winding body or back if desired. any previous cross section assignments to them are cleared. and therefore should be avoided. You may right click on a converted Winding body in the tree and reverse the alignments of all edges in that converted Winding body. prior to Release 12. These converted Winding bodies still allow you to control the alignment whereas those created by the Winding Tool (p.0 upon loading the database. 485) for those created by the Winding Tool (p. . 483) do not. Converting Line Bodies that contain edge types other than Line or Arc/Circle to Winding bodies will cause errors in the Mechanical application. Winding bodies created by the Winding Tool (p. 252). and its subsidiaries and affiliates. In the ANSYS DesignModeler application. it must be based on only line and arc edges and form a closed loop. To create a valid Winding body from a Line body.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. the conversion process will reverse alignments on edges as necessary to assure a consistent orientation. Turns comes from the Winding Table (p. Winding bodies are special forms of Line bodies that are intended to model coils of wire. meaning they will be sent to the Mechanical application when you have chosen 2D analysis from the simulation options in the Project Schematic. a special element type (SOURC36) is used to mesh winding body edges with a single element. the only difference between 2D planar bodies and other surface bodies is the icon that appears in the Tree Outline (p. In fact. Bodies and Parts The ANSYS DesignModeler application suppresses and hides line bodies without cross sections that were created prior to release 11. 211) • Body Status (p. when Winding bodies were passed to the Mechan- ical application and the ANSYS environment. cannot be converted to normal Line bodies. Other Body topics: • Body States (p. 213 . 483). If the Alignment direction is not consistent when it is converted. For Winding bodies that are converted from Line bodies. Although no longer available.0 . 483). does not have a surface area or volume. 483). Instead of having a standard Cross Section assigned to them. 457) feature to create the surface bodies. Inc. The other way Winding bodies can be created is via the legacy feature Winding Tool (p. and you can manually enter length and width values for the cross section. then use the Surfaces From Sketches (p. 215) Body Status The status of a body is indicated by the small check mark or x next to the body icon in the Tree Out- line (p. All rights reserved. they will be identified as planar bodies. Winding bodies currently only allow a rectangular cross section. The easiest way to create planar bodies in the ANSYS DesignModeler application is to create sketches on the XYPlane. consisting entirely of edges. Since they are flat and they lie in the XYPlane. The status of a body can be one of the following types: Release 15. Likewise you can modify the Number of Turns property for a converted Winding body. Planar A special case of surface body is the 2D planar body.

Winding body is not a closed path. It is denoted by a light green check mark. You can select the edges (Selection Filter: Line Edge) and choose Reverse Orientation to reverse the direction on an edge. 464) for more information about line edge alignment. . While hidden or suppressed bodies are not displayed. the directions must be consistent throughout the winding body. It is denoted by a green check mark. 1. Invalid alignment (as above for Line Body). • Error: This error can occur for a number of reasons as shown below.Contains proprietary and confidential information 214 of ANSYS. 2. All rights reserved. See Cross Section Alignment (p. nor are they included in the model when exporting to a format other than . 253) feature the new bodies are always seen as unsuppressed bodies. The winding body must form a simple loop. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. .agdb. • Error: This error appears when the Shared Topology method for a solid or sheet body is not valid with respect to other bodies in the Part. 253) feature is marked for regeneration. Note Suppressing bodies in such a way that it results in adding or deleting parts to or from the ANSYS DesignModeler application. the Share Topology (p. so each vertex must connect to exactly two edges. On gen- eration of the Share Topology (p. it is best to leave all bodies unsup- pressed in the CAD program. Winding body contains edges other than Line or Arc/Circle. suppressed bodies are included in the statistics of its owning part and/or overall model statistics. In the Tree Out- line (p. 3. Unlike the behavior in the Mechanical ap- plication. a blue x is shown next to suppressed bodies.3D Modeling • Visible: The body is visible on screen. The bodies created by the Share Topology operation cannot be suppressed. 252). while the model is attached as an active CAD model in the Mechanical application. Three or more edges meet at one vertex. If this body gets transferred to the Mechanical application. If you mark such bodies for suppression. You can see edge alignments using View: Show Cross Section Alignments. • Error: This error appears when a line body contains edges that have invalid alignment and/or the Shared Topology method set for body is not valid with respect to other bodies in the Part. it cannot be properly meshed. Hint: To suppress bodies when attaching to a plug-in. Because the edge directions define the current flow. • Hidden: The body is not visible on screen. may result in lost associativities on the part level. then suppress them in the ANSYS DesignModeler application. Inc. This means that a cross section cannot be oriented on an edge because the edge's alignment vector is parallel to the edge's direction. 5.0 . they will still be processed by Booleans and other operations in the ANSYS Design- Modeler application. • Suppressed: Suppressed bodies do not get sent to the Mechanical application for analysis. The body's edge directions are invalid. unless they are set to “frozen”.© SAS IP. 4. Release 15.

All rights reserved. • Thickness: The source body's thickness.0 . 211) • Body Types (p. • Material: The material of source body. when a warning or error is indicated on a body. 216) Other Body topics: • Body States (p. if a new body is derived from another body in the model and that source body belongs to a multibody part.© SAS IP. • Visibility or suppression status: Defined using the options menu for a selected part or body. Also. then the new body will automatically be grouped into the same part. New bodies are usually added to the model as a separate part. when a new body is created in the model that is derived from another existing body. then the new body is added to the model as a separate part. it will inherit several key properties: • Name: The name of the source body. 252). Release 15. 211) • Body Types (p. meaning they are not grouped in a multibody part. if defined. then it will inherit several properties of the original body. are unnamed and appear as visible bodies in the Tree Outline (p. If the source body does not belong to a multibody part. 215) Bodies Imported from CAD (p. 215 . Inc. . However. 211) • Body Status (p. 252) and choose Show Errors to get more information. Additionally. bodies showing an error icon will NOT be transferred to the Mechanical application. • Shared Topology method: Shared Topology method of the source body. 213) Bodies Created by the ANSYS DesignModeler Application When a new body is derived from an existing body. This property applies only to solid bodies. if it is a surface body. you can now right click on it in the Tree Outline (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. However. 211) • Body Inheritance (p. by default. 215) Body Inheritance New bodies. bodies imported from a CAD system may inherit certain properties as well. Bodies and Parts Similar to features. Other Body topics: • Body States (p. Inc. • Fluid/Solid: Whether the body is a solid or fluid region. • Cross section: If the source body is a line body and has a cross section defined. Body Inheritance includes: Bodies Created by the ANSYS DesignModeler Application (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.

1" means phase "A". the modified name will persist. Winding Bodies created by the legacy feature. All rights reserved. 388) (Mirror. Some properties will continue to be inherited during subsequent model updates. for Mid-Surface (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 216 of ANSYS. The properties that can be inherited for these bodies are: • Name • Material • Thickness Not all CAD systems support the transfer of these properties. Inc. Rotate. For specific information on which CAD systems support these properties. There is one legacy feature in the ANSYS DesignModeler application that names new bodies on its own. These bodies share topology in the region where Release 15. This is just a default name. a body name of "A. coil number 1. so if is changed.0 . such as visibility and suppression. see the Import External Geometry File (p. Translate. and Mid-Surface (p. Body Operation (p. 228) • Part Status (p. 310). if multiple surface bodies are created from a single original solid body. The bodies on the right have been grouped into a part in the ANSYS DesignModeler application. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The connection between them must be defined by a contact region in the Mechanical application. 483) are automatically named using the phase name and coil number from the Winding Table. Once modified. With Name and Thickness properties. 51). meshed independently. The models shown in both pictures are identical. Scale. . .3D Modeling However. and Copy). Inc. 226) • Explode Part (p. 310). The bodies on the left are two separate bodies. 216) • Form New Part (p. 228) • Part Persistence (p. 229) Shared Topology Shared Topology occurs when bodies are grouped into multibody parts. For example. but others will not. Examples of operations that produce derived bodies include Slice. It allows for a continuous mesh across common regions where bodies touch. Consider the example below.© SAS IP. Note that the property inheritance and grouping rules may apply only when the derived bodies are first created. Parts • Shared Topology (p. 56) and Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. they will no longer inherit names or thicknesses from the CAD system. then those surface bodies are grouped into a multibody part. they will inherit their values from the CAD system or file until you manually change them in the ANSYS DesignModeler application. instead of having to define Contact Regions in the Mech- anical application. Boolean. Winding Tool (p. Bodies Imported from CAD Imported bodies can also inherit properties from their source CAD system or CAD file.

Bodies and Parts

they are in contact, so the mesh is continuous across the part. It is often, but not always, more desirable
for the analysis to have a continuous mesh across the parts than to use contact.

Note

In the case of a Solid-Surface mixed part, the full or portion of the surface body outside the
solid body will be pruned while performing the generalized Boolean operation.

It is important to understand how shared topology works in the ANSYS DesignModeler application so
you can have better success with multibody parts. There are several key elements to shared topology.

First, the bodies you see in the ANSYS DesignModeler application do not immediately share topology.
Each body in the part is treated as its own separate entity with respect to modeling operations. Common
regions among the bodies in the part are not combined until the model is transferred out of the ANSYS
DesignModeler application or a Share Topology (p. 253) feature is added to a model with the Share To-
pology toggle button on the 3D Features (p. 251) Toolbar. Therefore, to see the shared topology, either
you must transfer the model to the Mechanical application or turn on the Share Topology toggle in the
ANSYS DesignModeler application.

Second, the method in which shared topology is created varies depending on the types of bodies that
make up your part and the type of analysis you wish to perform. The methods that the ANSYS Design-
Modeler application can apply to a part include:

• Edge Joints

Edge Joints are essentially coincident edge pairs that are tracked in the ANSYS DesignModeler applic-
ation. They are created automatically by several features, such as the Surfaces From Edges and Lines
From Edges (p. 447) features. Edge joints can also be created by the Joint feature, where you choose
a set of bodies to join together. Edges that are paired in an edge joint must belong to bodies that
reside in the same part to share topology. During transfer of the model out of the ANSYS Design-
Modeler application, each edge joint will combine its coincident source edges into a single edge.
The edge joint method cannot be applied to Solid (p. 212) bodies.

Advantages: You can specifically choose which bodies join together in case they do not want topology
shared among all regions of contact. Also, edge joints can be seen when the Show Edge Joints display
option is enabled.

Disadvantages: More time consuming than the automatic method. Also edge joints can sometimes
expire due to tolerance failures. Additionally, edge joint creation may depend on how your model is
built.

• Automatic

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 217

3D Modeling

This method shares topology automatically for all bodies in the part using a generalized Boolean
operation. All common regions among the bodies in the part will be shared during transfer of the
model out of the ANSYS DesignModeler application. When using the automatic method, any edge
joints that reference edges in the part are ignored. The automatic method cannot be applied to line
bodies.

Advantages: Easy to use and faster than using edge joints. Also, it is not affected by the tolerance
issues that can invalidate edge joints.

Disadvantages: There is no display of where the shared topology will be until after the Share Topo-
logy (p. 253) feature is applied. Sometimes you do not want topology shared throughout the entire
part.

• Imprints

This method does not actually share topology, but rather imprints the bodies in the part with each
other. It is often used when well-defined contact regions are desired among the bodies. The imprint
method cannot be applied to line bodies.

Advantages: Allows for better contact regions in the Mechanical application. It is much easier to
apply than manually imprinting bodies using other features.

Disadvantages: The mesh will not be continuous across the bodies in the part. Sometimes you do
not want all bodies to be imprinted throughout the entire part.

• None

The None method serves as a grouping mechanism. It does not share topology, nor imprint bodies.
It allows you to group bodies together for either organizational purposes, or so that mesh controls
may be applied to bodies within the part in the Mechanical application. This method may not be
applied to line bodies.

Advantages: Lets you group bodies together for easier viewing or so that mesh controls can be applied
among bodies in the part.

Disadvantages: The method does not share any topology among the bodies, nor will it imprint them.

Bodies with Shared Topology set to Automatic will take part in Automatic and Imprint Shared Topology.
Bodies with Shared Topology set to Imprint Shared Topology will ignore the Part Shared Topology
setting. Edge Joint will be executed only if both owner bodies Shared Topology is set Edge Joints.

Table 1: Part Type versus Shared Topology Method

PART TYPE SHARED TOPOLOGY METHOD
Line Bodies only Edge Joints
Line Bodies and Surface Bod- Edge Joints
ies
Surface Bodies only Edge Joints, Automatic, Imprints,
None
Solid Bodies only Automatic, Imprints, None
Surface Bodies and Solid Bod- Automatic, Imprints, None
ies

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
218 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Bodies and Parts

The types of bodies in the multibody part often dictate how the part will share topology. See the chart
above to see how the ANSYS DesignModeler application chooses which method to employ.

In some cases, you cannot choose how the bodies within the part are shared. The method being used
by the part is displayed in the Shared Topology Method property in the Details View in Modeling
Mode (p. 238).

Consider the example below.

Example 10: Shared Topology Method

In this example, the Shared Topology Method property is set to:

• Automatic for top level part,

• Imprint for bottom center body,

• None for bottom right body, and

• Default for all other bodies.

In the image ,elow the edge coloring shows the connectivity information. The bodies set to Default or
Automatic took part in Automatic and Imprint Shared Topology. The body with Imprint as the Shared
Topology took part in only Imprint. The body with None did not take part in any Shared Topology.

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 219

3D Modeling

Note that some features applied after Shared Topology can create new bodies, for example Slice. In
these cases if a user changes the shared topology type on a body that was created after Shared Topology,
then DesignModeler will disregard the change.

For more information, see Examples (p. 220) of a clip, crankshaft, table, and vise.

Also see Shared Topology Limitations (p. 226).

Examples
Example 11: Clip

This is an example of a simple clip used to keep snack bags closed, which uses the Edge Joints method
to share topology. The file is available at:

• Windows platform: ...\Program Files\ANSYS Inc\v150\AISOL\Samples\Design-
Modeler\clip

• Linux platform: .../ansys_inc/v150/aisol/Samples/DesignModeler/clip

It is composed of three surface bodies: two plates on the top and bottom, and an elliptical spring
between them. The top and bottom bodies touch each other, but should not share topology in the
region so the clip can open. Shared topology is desired between the spring and the two plates.

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
220 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Bodies and Parts

To join this model properly, a Joint feature is applied between the top plate and the spring. Then a
second Joint feature is applied between the bottom plate and the spring. By performing two Joint op-
erations, it prevents the top and bottom plates from being joined together. Note the blue edge joints
displayed in the above picture. There are joints between the spring and plates, but not between the
two plates themselves.

Once in the Mechanical application, forces are applied to the handle and a fixed support at the center
of one side of the spring.

After solving, the result shows that the clip can be opened once adequate forces are applied to the
handles. This type of model cannot be used with the Automatic shared topology method, since it would
automatically create shared topology where the two plates of the clip touch.

Example 12: Crankshaft

In this example, a crankshaft is sliced to show how it can improve mesh quality by forming sweepable
bodies. Since the model is composed of Solid (p. 212) bodies, the Automatic shared topology method
is used. The file is available at:

• Windows platform: ...\Program Files\ANSYS Inc\v150\AISOL\Samples\Design-
Modeler\crankshaft

• Linux platform: .../ansys_inc/v150/aisol/Samples/DesignModeler/crankshaft

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 221

3D Modeling

The initial model is one Solid (p. 212) body. It can be meshed, though it produces tetrahedral elements.

By slicing the model in the ANSYS DesignModeler application, you can decompose it into pieces that
can be swept meshed. After slicing, you must group the 13 resultant bodies into a multibody part.

Then in the Mechanical application the model will be sweep meshable, which produces hex elements.

Example 13: Table (Correct)

This third example shows two ways of constructing a simple table model. In this first case, 3A, the table
is built correctly, so that shared topology is achieved between Surface (p. 212) body edges and line

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
222 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Bodies and Parts

body edges. The second case, 3B, shows how building the model incorrectly can cause topology not
to be shared. The file for this example is available at:

• Windows platform: ...\Program Files\ANSYS Inc\v150\AISOL\Samples\DesignModel-
er\table_correct

• Linux platform: .../ansys_inc/v150/aisol/Samples/DesignModeler/table_correct

The model is composed of three bodies: two surface bodies which represent the table top, and a line
body that represents the table’s frame. A fourth Solid (p. 212) body used to help build the model is
suppressed. Note that since the multibody part contains a line body, only the Edge Joints method is
used for sharing topology.

It is important to understand how to build the model so that edge joints are formed correctly. The most
important steps of this model are the two Surfaces From Edges features, Surf1 and Surf2. In each of
these two features, four line body edges have been selected. When the surface body is formed, four
edge joints are automatically created to mark the coincidence of the surface body’s edges to their cor-
responding source edges from the line body. Remember that an edge joint tracks the relationship
between a source model edge and a resultant model edge.

Once the three bodies are combined into a multibody part, the edge joints will cause the edges to
combine into a single edge when the model is transferred out of the ANSYS DesignModeler application
to the Mechanical application. The analysis performed below shows that the table is in fact connected
properly.

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 223

3D Modeling

Example 14: Table (Incorrect)

This example shows the same table model from example 3A, but in this case, the model is built incor-
rectly. The file for this example is available at:

• Windows platform: ...\Program Files\ANSYS Inc\v150\AISOL\Samples\Design-
Modeler\table_incorrect

• Linux platform: .../ansys_inc/v150/aisol/Samples/DesignModeler/table_incor-
rect

The model is composed of two bodies: one surface body which defines the table top, and a line body
that represents the table’s frame. A third Solid (p. 212) body used to help build the model is suppressed.
Note that since the multibody part contains a line body, only the Edge Joints method is used for sharing
topology.

There is one fatal flaw in this model that causes topology not to be shared. The Surfaces From Sketches
feature, SurfaceSk1, creates the surface body for the table top, but it does not create any edge joints.
An edge joint is a relationship between a source model edge and a resultant model edge. Since the
source edge in this case is from a sketch, no edge joint is created. Therefore, the surface body remains
disconnected from the line body.

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
224 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Bodies and Parts

When the same loads are applied to this table model in the Mechanical application that were defined
in example 3A above, the table top is in fact not connected to the frame, as shown below.

Example 15: Vise

In this example, a user wishes to establish better contact between the components of this vise model.
For this case, the model consists of Solid (p. 212) bodies and the Imprints method will be applied. The
file is available at:

• Windows platform: ...\Program Files\ANSYS Inc\v150\AISOL\Samples\DesignModel-
er\vise.agdb

• Linux platform: .../ansys_inc/v150/aisol/Samples/DesignModeler/vise.agdb

The model is a collection of 12 Solid (p. 212) bodies. If the bodies are kept separate, contact regions
are detected upon transfer to the Mechanical application, though they do not necessarily match up
well, as shown in this contact region between the base and sliding jaw.

If you group the 12 bodies into a multibody part and apply the Imprint shared topology method, then
the bodies are imprinted with each other during execution of the Share Topology (p. 253) feature. The
following image shows the contact region between the base and sliding jaw in the Mechanical applic-
ation using the Imprint shared topology method. Note how the faces identified in the contact regions
exactly match the true contact between the bodies.

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 225

3D Modeling

Shared Topology Limitations
Whenever more than one body is selected, the Shared Topology Method and Fluid/Solid Property (p. 210)
of the last selected body is shown in the Details View (p. 6).

Form New Part

You can group bodies into parts using the Form New Part tool. These parts will be transferred to the
Mechanical application as parts consisting of multiple bodies, with shared topology. To form a new
part, select one or more bodies from the graphics screen and use the context menu (right mouse button)
option Form New Part. The Form New Part option is available only when bodies are selected and you
are not in a feature creation or feature edit state. Parts can also be created by selecting one or more
bodies from the Tree Outline (p. 252) and clicking Form New Part in the Tools Menu (p. 79).

When you change the part-body grouping using “Form New Part,” the Share Topology (p. 253) feature
is marked for regeneration, if it is present in the model.

Context Menu Options
The Form New Part option forms a multibody part from a selection of bodies. By grouping bodies into
a multibody part, it enables the use of Shared Topology among the bodies. The tool is available only
if bodies are selected and all of those bodies do not already belong to the same part. Additionally, the
tool is not available while performing an operation that creates or edits model features.

When forming new parts, you should be aware that some bodies will change their Part ID. See the Part
Persistence section for more information on Part IDs and tips on how best to manage the parts in your
models. The Form New Part operation will choose a Part ID that minimizes the number of bodies that
must switch their Part ID. Sometimes it will use an existing part, while at other times it creates a new
part. When a new part is created, the ANSYS DesignModeler application will place it at the bottom of
the feature Tree Outline (p. 252).

Additionally, for each new part created, the ANSYS DesignModeler application will number them se-
quentially, beginning with “Part”, then “Part 2”, “Part 3”, etc.

Below are some examples of how the Form New Part operation will group the selected bodies.

You have bodies A, B, and C grouped into a part. You wish to add body D to the group.

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
226 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Bodies and Parts

BEFORE AFTER

The ANSYS DesignModeler application moves body D to the existing part that contains bodies A, B,
and C. Body D’s Part ID changes.

You have bodies A and B in a part, while bodies C, D, E, and F are in Part 2. You wish to combine all
six bodies into a single part.

AFTER
BEFORE

The ANSYS DesignModeler application moves bodies A and B to Part 2. Part 2 survived the operation
because it had more bodies in it than the first part. Bodies A and B change their Part IDs.

You have all six bodies in a single part. You wish to move bodies A, B, E, and F into their own separate
part.

BEFORE
AFTER

The ANSYS DesignModeler application moves bodies C and D out of the first part and into Part 2. In
this case, the unselected bodies were moved to a new part because there were four selected bodies
and only two unselected. Therefore only bodies C and D must change their Part ID.

Other Part topics:

• Shared Topology (p. 216)

• Explode Part (p. 228)

• Part Status (p. 228)

Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 227

252). 216) • Form New Part (p. 216) • Form New Part (p. 229) Release 15. 212) and Line bodies. All rights reserved. See Explode Part (p. 228) • Part Persistence (p. 226) • Part Status (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 228 of ANSYS. It is denoted by a blue x. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 228) • Part Persistence (p. 212) bodies with Shared Topology method selected other than Automatic. Select a part in the Tree Outline (p. • Suppressed: All bodies in the part are suppressed. Other Part topics: • Shared Topology (p. . 89) in the Context Menus (p. 212) and Surface (p. 45) chapter. Inc. Part contains Solid (p.© SAS IP. Other Part topics: • Shared Topology (p. the Share Topology (p. When you change the part-body grouping using Explode Part. then use the right mouse button option Explode Part to break the part into individual bodies. • Error: This error can occur for one of the following reasons: 1. 226) • Explode Part (p. It is denoted by a light green check mark. It is denoted by a green check mark. 229) Explode Part Parts can be deconstructed. 229) Part Status The status of a part is indicated by one the following types: • Visible: Some bodies in the part are visible on screen. .3D Modeling • Part Persistence (p. Part contains Solid (p. Inc. • Hidden: All bodies in the part are hidden.0 . 2. 87) section of the "DesignModeler Menus" (p. 253) feature is marked for regeneration if it is present in the model.

at least prior to any part modification in the DesignModeler application. you should know how persistence works with respect to parts. such parts will be transferred to ANSYS DesignModeler application when Design- Modeler is initialized with this geometric data. Bodies and Parts Part Persistence A part maintains persistence when its loads and boundary conditions remain intact when the source geometry is updated. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Example 16: ANSYS Mechanical model containing multibody parts: Release 15. All rights reserved. Thus. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. To help maintain persistence in your models. the Mechanical application uses an internal ‘Part ID’ to track all topology within the part. as has been supported in previous releases.0 . . Part Persistence topics: Multibody Part Transfer from CAD to ANSYS DesignModeler ANSYS DesignModeler Part Manipulation Multibody Part Transfer from CAD to ANSYS DesignModeler When multibody parts are present in CAD data. To uniquely identify model entities. 229 .© SAS IP. part data in the DesignModeler application should be transferred to ANSYS Mechanical. Similarly. as may be visualized when imported directly into the Mechanical add-in. parts that appear in Mechanical should appear identical to parts in the DesignModeler application. Inc.

persistence for it will break because its Part ID will change.0 . However. All rights reserved. When destructing a part using the Explode Part operation. it will choose the Part ID that minimizes the number of bodies that must switch their Part IDs.Contains proprietary and confidential information 230 of ANSYS. • If you need to perform slicing in your model. This is because Named Selections from the DesignModeler application are refreshed during each geometry update and can adapt to part changes in its selection.© SAS IP. the DesignModeler application will automat- ically group the new sliced bodies into the same part as their source bodies so that their Part ID is maintained. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. For example. When forming new parts in the DesignModeler application using the Form New Part operation. For the resultant part. However.3D Modeling Example 17: ANSYS DesignModeler multibody parts: ANSYS DesignModeler Part Manipulation If a body is moved from one part to another in the ANSYS DesignModeler application. single-body parts. nearly all the bodies involved in the operation will change their Part ID. Inc. To avoid loss of persistence in the Mechanical application. 301) that was defined in the DesignModeler application. Below are some suggestions you can use to help avoid loss of persistence for your loads and boundary conditions in the Mechanical application when working with multibody part models: • Form your parts in the DesignModeler application before assigning loads and boundary conditions in the Mechanical application. . since they will now belong to separate. it is better to do it before assigning loads and boundary conditions in the Mechanical application. . Inc. it will remain persistent even if a body’s Part ID has changed. it is better to select only those bodies and perform a Form New Part operation on Release 15. the DesignModeler application will attempt to preserve Part IDs as best it can. you may need to redefine selections in the Mechanical application if your ori- ginal selection was in a region that got sliced. it is inevitable that when forming new parts some bodies will have their Part ID changed. if you wish to remove a small number of bodies from a large part. • If you scope a load or boundary condition in the Mechanical application to a Named Selection (p. it is a good idea to either use the parts obtained from CAD import and/or form new parts in the DesignModeler application before assigning loads and boundary conditions in the Mechanical application. • Avoid exploding parts unnecessarily. Doing so will reduce the likelihood that you will need to redefine them later. When slicing.

Instancing Support topics: ANSYS DesignModeler Instancing ANSYS DesignModeler Part Instance Transfer to ANSYS Mechanical ANSYS DesignModeler Instancing Body instance data is created in the ANSYS DesignModeler application by the Import External Geometry File (p. Transfer of instance data from the ANSYS DesignModeler application to the ANSYS Mechanical application will depend on additional considerations discussed in ANSYS DesignModeler Instancing (p. 385) or Body Operation (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 51) features when instance data exists in the CAD data or by using the ANSYS DesignModeler application Pattern (p.0 . If geometry is attached into either the ANSYS Mechanical application or the ANSYS DesignModeler applic- ation. Instancing Support A set of bodies may be considered body instances if they can be considered duplicates with the only difference being their locations and orientations. STEP. it leaves the original large part intact. ANSYS DesignModeler Instancing topics: Transfer from CAD Creation of Instances by the Pattern Feature Creation of Body Instances by the Body Transformation Feature Feature Modeling's Effect on Instance Data Viewing Instance Data Transfer from CAD Import or Attach features. instance data will be transferred if the Import Using Instances property of the Geometry cell in the Project Schematic view is set. Thus. NX. 42)). used to import CAD geometric data in the ANSYS DesignModeler application will preserve body instance data in the CAD system. 237). . All rights reserved. STEP. By extension. Location and orientation changes may be referred to as transformations. Inc. While assembly/instance data has been supported in the ANSYS Mechanical and ANSYS Meshing applic- ations for previous releases. Part instances may sometimes be referred to as assemblies. which you can then explode. Creo Parametric. Either single body or multibody part instance data may be transferred to the ANSYS DesignModeler application as parts (viewable in the DesignModeler application feature tree (p. IGES. This will pull out the bodies into their own separate part.© SAS IP. its support in the ANSYS DesignModeler application began with R13. a set of part instances only differ in their locations and orient- ations. Inc. 231 . 388) features. Bodies and Parts them. and Solid Edge. 56) and Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. Release 15. Instance data transfer into ANSYS Workbench is presently supported for IGES. and Parasolid instance data transfer is only supported for import directly into the ANSYS Mechanical application. Body instances are tracked internally and may be observed by selecting a body or a set of bodies and expanding the selection using Extend to Instances in Viewing Instance Data (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 231). Parasolid. More importantly. parts consisting of one or more bodies may be considered part instances if each part in- stance contains the same number of bodies and if all bodies in each part are instances of corresponding bodies in the other part instances.

It may be noted that an implicit Share Topology feature will be created. if one doesn’t yet exist. For parts to be instances of each other. then this remaining body will no longer be considered an instance. Note that no observable modifications will be made in the ANSYS DesignModeler application geometric data other than the body instance data being modified. If a Spot Weld or Point Load is present on any instanced body. Feature Modeling's Effect on Instance Data If an ANSYS DesignModeler application feature modifies an instanced body. Generally. If the Preserve Bodies (p. The creation of part instances in the ANSYS Mechanical application will be as previously described. then the body will no longer be considered an instance. If there is only a single remaining body instance following the removal of the modified body instance data. new instances will be added to the existing body instance data. Note Instanced body import will generally be more efficient due to more efficient Parasolid body construction. All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. When a selected body is already an instance. it is required that corresponding bodies have the same Shared Topology Method property.© SAS IP. 398) and Translate (p. Release 15. the newly created bodies will be created as instances of the selected bodies. Rotate (p.0 . If the Preserve Bodies (p. Some exceptions are now noted: Parts with Share Topology method Automatic or Imprint will be retained as instances after the execution of the Share Topology feature only for databases created from version 15. 385) feature is used for creating transformed copies of a set of bodies. 388) feature also create/modify body instance data. new body instances will be created. Inc. Scale (p. 397) operations of the Body Opera- tion (p. The Share Topology feature will determine how part instances are formed for the purpose of transferring geometry to ANSYS Mechanical application. during transfer of geometry from ANSYS DesignModeler application to the ANSYS Mechanical application. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information 232 of ANSYS. Creation of Body Instances by the Body Transformation Feature The Move (p. 397). 395). a feature may be destructive of pre-existing body instance data (existing before the feature is generated). then any associated part instance data will be ignored during geometry transfer to the ANSYS Mechanical application. A part which has at least one body with “Edge-Joints” Share Topology type will be de-instanced by the Share Topology feature. consider the following examples of the ANSYS DesignModeler application feature modeling and transfer of part instance data to the ANSYS Mechanical application. 312) property is set to “Yes”.3D Modeling Instanced body import should be significantly faster when the Clean Bodies property is set to Yes. 312) property is set to “No” and the selected bodies are already instances. . .0 onward. For a better understanding. due to body cleaning only being performed one time for multiple body instances. Creation of Instances by the Pattern Feature If the Pattern (p. they will be updated with new transformations.

. Bodies and Parts Example 18: Scenario 1 (p. even though the ANSYS DesignModeler application feature tree (p. 236) The following icons represent the bodies: For clarity. 3. the following shapes denote body states: Circle: non-instanced imported body or natively created body Box: a body involved in an instanced relationship Diamond: a body involved in an instanced relationship that has since been modified Example 18: Scenario 1 User creates a native model in the ANSYS DesignModeler application of a simple multibody part: Part 1: User patterns to create bodies as singletons: Part 1: Part 2: Part 3: Part 4: When transferring this data to the ANSYS Mechanical application. 4 will be instances. Part 1 will be un-instanced. 233 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 42) does not show the part node for single-body parts. 235) Example 21: Scenario 4 (p. 233) Example 19: Scenario 2 (p.0 . When displaying body lists. while Parts 2.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. the part node for singleton parts are shown in the examples below.© SAS IP. you explode Part 1: Release 15. Inc. Inc. All rights reserved. In the ANSYS DesignModeler application. 234) Example 20: Scenario 3 (p.

and are copies of . The Parts/Bodies feature tree (p. Bodies . The Part 4: Part 4: multibody part { } will Part 5: Part 5: not be an instanced part. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Body grouping ANSYS Part instancing in AN. Inc. . { }. All rights reserved. such that . Part 2: Part 2: { }. Part 6: Part 6: Part 7: Part 7: Release 15. 3. { }. 5 will be instances. { } and { } will be Part 3: Part 3: instanced parts.© SAS IP. and are copies of . Inc. . 4. This is because there would be no conflict between ANSYS DesignModeler application parts and body instance data. Example 19: Scenario 2 User creates a native model in the ANSYS DesignModeler application of a simple multibody part: Part 1: User patterns both bodies and to create three copies of each.0 .Contains proprietary and confidential information 234 of ANSYS. Explanation DesignModeler by user SYS Mechanical 1 In the ANSYS Mechanical ap- Part 1: Part 1: plication { }.3D Modeling Part 1: Part 2: Part 3: Part 4: Part 5: When transferring this data to the ANSYS Mechanical application. while Parts 2. 42) list looks like this initially: Part 1: Part 2: Part 3: Part 4: Part 5: Part 6: Part 7: The following table illustrates various part layouts in the ANSYS DesignModeler application and results of geometry transfer to the ANSYS Mechanical application. Part 1 would remain un-instanced.

. Inc. Bodies and Parts 2 When Share Topology types Part 1: Part 1: of all four parts are the same Part 2: Part 2: in the ANSYS DesignModeler application.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. All rights reserved. Part 5: print} Part 5: {Im- print} 4 In the ANSYS Mechanical ap- Part 1: Part 1: plication Part 1 and Part 2 are {Automatic} instances of each other.© SAS IP. as Part 2: Part 2: will be Part 4 and Part 5. 235 . then the model Part 4: Part 4: is transferred as four in- stanced parts to the ANSYS Part 5: Part 5: Mechanical application. 3 In the ANSYS Mechanical ap- Part 1: Part 1: plication Part 1 and Part 2 are {None} instances of each other. five instanced singleton parts are expected: Release 15. Part Part 2: Part 2: 4 and Part 5 will be unin- Part 4: stanced. {Automatic} Part 5: Part 4: {None} Part 5: {Im- print} Example 20: Scenario 3 User imports a CAD model into the ANSYS DesignModeler application with two singleton part in- stances: Part 1: Part 2: User patterns to create bodies as singletons: Part 1: Part 2: Part 3: Part 4: Part 5: When transferring this data to the ANSYS Mechanical application. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. {None} Part 4: Part 4: {Im.0 .

3. Body list now looks like this: Part 1: Part 2: Part 3: Part 4: Part 5: When transferring this data to the ANSYS Mechanical application. 4. and 4 will be instances. .© SAS IP. When transferring this data to the ANSYS Mechanical application. Part 1 will be uninstanced. Example 21: Scenario 4 User creates multibody part in the ANSYS DesignModeler application.0 . 3.3D Modeling Now go back to the ANSYS DesignModeler application and modify . . . .Contains proprietary and confidential information 236 of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. and an uninstanced singleton part are expected. user patterns Part1 ( ) to create bodies in the ANSYS DesignModeler application: Part 1: Release 15. Part 1: User patterns to create bodies as singletons: Part 1: Part 2: Part 3: Part 4: The ANSYS DesignModeler application will consider bodies 2. while Parts 2. 5 to be instances (without regard to ANSYS DesignModeler application part data). All rights reserved. four instanced singleton parts . Inc. This is due to body 2 having been modified and therefore removed from the ANSYS DesignModeler application instance data. Inc. Next.

Viewing Instance Data Viewing instance data is done by using Extend to Instances from Extend Selection. As an example. . ). and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . First select one of the bodies Then choose Extend to Instances. as another set. . as one set of instanced bodies and bodies .0 . and bodies ( .© SAS IP. If instances are transferred to the ANSYS Mechanical application. ANSYS DesignModeler Part Instance Transfer to ANSYS Mechanical Part instances (including single-body part instances) present in the ANSYS DesignModeler application will be transferred to the ANSYS Mechanical application by default.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. consider the model that contains four instanced bodies. All rights reserved. When transferring this data to the ANSYS Mechanical application. significant savings in time to transfer Release 15. . ). ( . bodies . . This is optional and can be turned off using the ‘Import Using Instances’ property of the Geometry cell in the Project Schematic view. The remaining three instances are highlighted. would all be single-body part instances. ( . ) would all be multibody part instances. . there would be no conflict between the ANSYS DesignModeler application parts and body instance data. . 237 . Inc. Bodies and Parts Part 2: Part 3: Part 4: Part 5: Part 6: The ANSYS DesignModeler application will consider bodies . Inc. Thus.

suppress or unsuppress features in the feature tree (p. 56) options may result in the addition of body instance data. Note Modifying a model in the ANSYS DesignModeler application may affect the instance data by body instances being added or removed. 239) • Information (p. 242) When resuming an . 239) • Units (p. For more information. if an operation results in an instanced body being deleted or modified then the body will no longer be instanced. 252)) is selected. use of the Body Operation (p.0. 231). 240) • Graphics (p. delete. the First Saved date signifies the date that the file was originally created assuming it has not been transferred between drives or machines. Inc. 385) features and/or use of the Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. Use of other modeling operations (for example. .Contains proprietary and confidential information 238 of ANSYS. When the model branch (the first branch in the Tree Outline (p. Release 15. Details View in Modeling Mode While in Modeling mode. If during an operation the remaining body instance data (after removing modified or deleted instanced bodies) contains single instances (no other instances). 388) and Pattern (p.0 . the Details View (p.3D Modeling the model to the ANSYS Mechanical application can be observed. add. In general. Inc. 42)) may result in removal of body instance data.agdb file created prior to ANSYS release 11. edit. then these body instances will also be removed. 252). 6) can contain different types of information depending on the object selected in the Tree Outline (p. 51) and Import External Geometry File (p. All rights reserved. 240) • Optimizations (p. For example.© SAS IP. In the incidence of transfer the First Saved and Last Saved dates will be the same. see ANSYS DesignModeler Instancing (p. The time taken for meshing the model also will be less. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. insert. . the Details View contains four types of information: • Details (p.

Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. • Subject • Author • Prepared For Information from these properties appear at the top of the report page when you select the Print Pre- view (p. 239) • Information (p. Any text changes made to the information on the report page is not concurrently made in the Details section of the Details View (p. . 239 . 242) Units The Units section includes four fields. 136) tab in the lower left corner of the Graphics Window (p. 5). • Length Unit • Angle Unit • Large Model Support Release 15. They can be modified via the Details View. Details View in Modeling Mode Details The Details section includes three fields. Inc.0 .© SAS IP. Other Details View in Modeling Mode topics: • Units (p. 240) • Graphics (p. Inc. All rights reserved. 6). 240) • Optimizations (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

• First Saved: Displays the date that the model was first saved. 84) section for more unit-related information. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.3D Modeling • Model Tolerance Based on the Model status.Contains proprietary and confidential information 240 of ANSYS. For files created using an old version of the DesignModeler application. In some cases it is possible for a file’s timestamp to indicate a creation date that is later than the last saved date. you have the option to enable an optimized generate method that increases the speed of the generate process and improves entity persistence in the model. otherwise.agdb files created prior to release 12.© SAS IP. 239) • Information (p. • Optimized Generate (p. every field contains a list of the probable values you can switch to.0. . Release 15. • Product Version: Displays the ANSYS DesignModeler application version in which the agdb file was last saved. All rights reserved. The information in the fields can not be manually changed. it will be made read-only. In most cases. When this occurs. this optimization can be turned on for older models without any regression in behavior. 241) Optimized Generate For . 240) • Graphics (p. 239) • Units (p. 252) is selected. 239) • Optimizations (p. 242) Optimizations The Optimizations section includes two fields that can be modified. these statistics are determined from the file’s timestamp. 240) • Optimizations (p. 242) Information The Information section includes three fields that are automatically generated when the model branch in the Tree Outline (p. Refer to the Units Menu (p.0 . 240) • Saved Feature Data (p. 240) • Graphics (p. the DesignModeler application will report the creation date to be the same as the last saved date. Inc. • Last Saved: Displays the date that the model was most recently saved. Other Details View in Modeling Mode topics: • Details (p. . Other Details View in Modeling Mode topics: • Details (p. Inc.

241 .0. 241) • Full (p. This will result in the largest database size of the four options. Minimal This option will save extra data only for the last feature.0. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the Tree Outline (p. Choosing No will cancel the property change. • None (p. Choosing Yes will generate the model to produce the required feature data. but at a cost of more disk space. If insufficient feature data currently exists. However. Release 15.0 on- wards. First. Also.© SAS IP. it could cause some features that previously succeeded to fail. Full Feature data for all features are saved. Note that for very large databases. 252). The size of the agdb file is the smallest of the four options. By default this option is set to off for models created prior to release 12. The initial value for this property will be inherited from the Options Dialog. it is recommended to set this property to Minimal. but has the benefit that no additional feature regeneration is required for any subsequent action on the feature list upon resume of the model. the higher the setting. 241) None No extra data is saved to the database. Second. It does not require a full generate when the model is resumed. With this option. The ANSYS DesignModeler application offers four choices for Saved Feature Data. Partial This option provides a good balance between performance and disk space. Inc. the more efficient the generate process will be. if any existing feature is modified. For models created in release 12. It will selectively save some but not all feature data once the feature list surpasses 25 features.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. This allows for two significant performance improvements when resuming models. 241) • Minimal (p. Details View in Modeling Mode though in some rare cases. All rights reserved. 241) • Partial (p. This allows the model to be resumed without requiring that the model be regenerated and allows you to append features as well without requiring a full generate. it will prompt you to generate the model. File size is moderately increased with this option. editing an existing feature will not require you to regenerate the entire Tree Out- line (p. You must re- generate the entire feature list upon resuming the model.0 . 252) will not need to be regenerated upon opening the model. Generally. Saved Feature Data The ANSYS DesignModeler application can save extra data for each feature that records the state of the model after the features has executed. Inc. . but rather only a small subset of features. When the Saved Feature Data setting is increased from a lower level to a higher one. the ANSYS DesignModeler application will check if internal feature data is present to satisfy the selected option. similar to behavior prior to Release 12. the size of the database is increased minimally. then a full generate of the entire feature list will be required once. the optimization is always on and hence the property will not be editable. it allows you to modify an existing feature without needing to regenerate the entire feature list.

0 . Note The Facet quality setting is applicable only to bodies in the DesignModeler representation and will not have any effect on bodies in the Workbench representation. 242) Graphics The Graphics section includes one field that can be modified. see the Graphics (p. 245) Material Types Typically. although it will take longer to generate facets and will require more memory.3D Modeling Other Details View in Modeling Mode topics: • Details (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Release 15. 242) • Model Size Box (p. 239) • Units (p. 239) • Information (p. and (b) Merge the feature bodies with the model via Boolean operations. 240) • Optimizations (p. 239) • Units (p. 239) • Information (p. Inc. Other Details View in Modeling Mode topics: • Details (p. 549) menu of the "DesignModeler Application Options" (p. Inc. though you can set it to any value between 1 and 10 for each individual model. 244) • Manifold Geometry (p. 240) • Graphics (p. All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information 242 of ANSYS. . One aspect where facet quality does impact your analysis is during contact detection in the ANSYS Mechanical application. • Facet Quality: This setting will determine the display tolerances for visualization. . 545) panel. For more information about controlling the quality of model facets in the ANSYS DesignModeler applic- ation. Facet quality has no impact on the success of the ANSYS DesignModeler application’s features. the generation of a 3D feature consists of two steps: (a) Generate the feature bodies. The initial value of this property is inherited from the Options Dialog. it is purely for visualiz- ation. Higher settings will result in a higher quality display. 240) Boolean Operations • Material Types (p.© SAS IP.

This option is always available. Imprint Faces Similar to Slice. Cut Material Removes material from the active bodies in the model. It is available whenever active bodies are present. All rights reserved. It is available whenever active bodies are present. 243) • Add Frozen (p. . Boolean Operations You can apply five different Boolean operations to the 3D Features (p. This option is available when at least one body is present in the model.© SAS IP. Slice Material Slices bodies into multiple pieces. 243) • Imprint Faces (p. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Imprint Faces imprints curves onto the faces of active bodies in the model. Active bodies in the Slice operation will be automat- ically frozen. 243 . 251): • Add Material (p. Inc. 243) • Cut Material (p. 244) Add Material Creates material and merges it with the active bodies in the model.0 . Release 15. The bodies themselves are not split into multiple pieces. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 243) • Slice Material (p.

This option is always available. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. or 500 millimeters in any direction from the world origin.3D Modeling Add Frozen Creates material. and Slice operations. 244) • Manifold Geometry (p. Release 15. For micrometers. All rights reserved. . When large model support is enabled. . This could result in merging points inadvertently. This allows you.© SAS IP. Inc. to import a model as a set of frozen bodies without the need to manually apply the Freeze feature afterwards. points are not considered coincident unless they are less than 10e-8 meter units -8 apart. That is. centered about the world origin. Disabled When large model support is disabled. Any geometry created that extends beyond this size box may generate an error. the box limit changes to 1000 cubic kilometers. Inc.0 . the precision of the ANSYS DesignModeler application is 10e meters. Note Line bodies are immune to Cut. Imprint. the size box limit is one cubic meter. without merging them with other bodies in the model. Other Boolean Operations: • Model Size Box (p. Enabled When large model support is enabled. the precision of the ANSYS DesignModeler application is loosened to 10e-5 meters. 245) Model Size Box The ANSYS DesignModeler application's geometry engine has a one cubic kilometer size box limit.Contains proprietary and confidential information 244 of ANSYS. for example. but adds it to the model as frozen bodies. This means that all geometry must be reside within 500 meters of the world origin.

each edge connects to exactly two faces. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Release 15. If you wish to share topology between bodies that form a 'T' intersection. When split into two bodies. Bodies that are oriented in this manner should be kept separate by leaving one or both bodies frozen. . Below are some examples of valid (manifold) and invalid (non-manifold) geometry: This solid is invalid because the top edge con. 322) operations. non-manifold solids can occur during Enclosure (p.© SAS IP. 317) feature. Inc. 212) bodies. Inc. For Surface (p. Most often. 242) • Manifold Geometry (p. becomes manifold.0 . this geometry nects to four faces instead of two.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. consider using the Joint (p. All rights reserved. each interior edge connects to two faces. 245 . any type of 'T' intersection is considered non-manifold and is not permitted in Boolean operations. Line bodies do not have any such restrictions. where bodies touch at an edge or vertex. Boolean Operations Other Boolean Operations: • Material Types (p. 212) bodies. 245) Manifold Geometry All solid and surface geometry created in the ANSYS DesignModeler application must be manifold. 212) bodies. This means that for Solid (p. For Surface (p. and each boundary edge connects to exactly one face.

212) body to another. 242) • Model Size Box (p. Inc. . two bodies remain "T" intersection. 242) will be applied. Revolve. sometimes features offer a Target Bodies property. • From-Face Planes: In the case of From-Face planes as base objects. three faces. then any attempt to merge the two bodies together in a subsequent operation would fail. which allows you to choose specific bodies in the model on which the Boolean Opera- tions (p. Even though these types of features do not perform Boolean Operations (p. Some features can have a drastic effect on the model. Sweep. 242). and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Chamfer.Contains proprietary and confidential information 246 of ANSYS. • Reference Operations: Some features do not modify the model at all. and Named Selections.0 . 242). Other Boolean Operations: • Material Types (p. Examples of these features are Plane.3D Modeling This surface body is invalid because it contains a When kept separate. • Local Operations: These operations modify specific topology in the model and do not attempt Boolean Operations (p. 255) feature to add material to the model. while other features have almost no effect at all. For example. Inc. but rather create objects that reference model entities. 242) between bodies. and Skin/Loft (p. To limit the effect of these global operations. . The features can be categorized into one of three basic types: • Global Operations: Operations of this type can affect the entire model. Usually this happens when creating features that perform Boolean Operations (p. Release 15. which may result in one or more bodies combining together. Point. 251) that create bodies support the following base objects: • Sketches: In the more common case of sketches as base objects. If the two bodies meet in a T-intersection.© SAS IP. you should be careful not to create non-manifold topology or else subsequent global operations may fail. The middle edge is connected to manifold. 344) which extends one Surface (p. An example of this could be a Surface Extension (p. Examples of these types of operations are Blend. Ex- trude (p. All rights reserved. 244) Types of Operations Features in the ANSYS DesignModeler application can alter the model in several ways. 264) are all examples of features that apply global operations. and Surface Extension (p. the feature interprets the (face) boundary edges of such planes as quasi "sketches" and uses the boundary loops for feature creation. when you create an Ex- trude (p. See Manifold Geometry for more information. 255). Profiles The 3D Features (p. 344). that new material is merged with the active bodies present in the model.

an individual Point (Vertex or point feature points—PF points (p. In this example. and Named Selections consist of one or more profiles. A closed profile is one in which the edges in the chain form a loop. 261) • Skin/Loft (p. 264) Profiles are either open or closed. Profiles • Named Selections: Faces. The As Thin/Surface property allows you to define a thickness to create thin solids or set it to zero to create surfaces. Line Bodies (their edges are used).0 . 255) • Revolve (p. then the closed profiles will be used and the open profiles will be ignored. 264). an open profile. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. As Thin/Surface must be set to Yes. 247 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. An open profile is a sketch chain that is open at both ends. Each profile is a chain of non- intersecting sketch edges that are used in the four basic modeling features: • Extrude (p. closed profiles take precedence over open profiles. from left to right. When using open profiles. Profile. 276)) stored in Named Selections can be used as the Base Object. otherwise a warning will be issued. Sketches. or Path. . Release 15. Surface Bodies (their faces are used).© SAS IP. Inc. If a sketch contains both closed and open profiles. two open profiles are extruded to create two Surface (p. Inc. faces. All rights reserved. 3D Edges. one closed profile takes precedence over the other open profiles in this Revolve feature. then it is invalid. If a profile intersects itself. and for Skin/Loft (p. Below. 260) • Sweep (p. 212) bodies. and an invalid self-intersecting profile. By default. are three examples of profiles: a closed profile. In this example.

the rotation axis. Inc. All rights reserved. but also. when using intersecting profiles. the base object. the thickness must be non-zero.© SAS IP. . Additionally. if the base sketch contains only open profiles and one of its edges is used as the axis of revolution. or 3D model . 255) feature) • Feature Selections (that is.Contains proprietary and confidential information 248 of ANSYS. of an Extrude (p. of a Revolve feature. say. the depth of an Extrude (p.3D Modeling Both open and closed profiles are not allowed to intersect each other except when As Thin/Surface is set to Yes. 2D sketches. selections referencing entities of the construction history.0 . Edit Selections for Features and Apply/Cancel A feature's definition consists of: • Feature Dimensions (for example. 2D or 3D edge. The following two examples show the cases when profiles are permitted to intersect each other. the edges and faces to be blended in the Fixed-Radius Blend feature) Release 15. then the profile to which the edge belongs will be ignored (it is already used as an "axis"). and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . An example is shown below. for example . Inc. 255) feature) • Feature Options (for example. where the middle profile contains an edge chosen as the rotation axis. the operation or type of an Extrude (p. sketch or plane. For the Revolve feature. 255) feature.

you can also preselect the axis line before clicking the Revolve button. The Sweep (p. you can "activate" the Apply/Cancel buttons by either double-clicking the corresponding property name (left column of Details View (p. 6). 6) and then selecting the desired sketch or plane in the Tree Out- line (p. Inc. 252) and clicking Apply. Feature Selections are read-only. enabling you to edit the Feature Selections.0 . and select Fixed-Radius Blend. Release 15. however. This functionality is provided by the means of the Apply/Cancel buttons in the Details View (p. 6)) or by single- clicking the corresponding property value fields (right column). Use the Blend drop down menu from the toolbar. At feature creation (before initial generation) 2. In the Body Operation (p. which must be a straight 2D or 3D edge. 252). The Plane feature and the Revolve feature use a rotation axis selection. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. By default. you define the sweep path by selecting the Sweep Path row in the Details View (p. By selecting the axis row in the Details View (p. the sweep profile.© SAS IP. 6) and then selecting the desired sketch or plane in the Tree Outline (p. Similarly. For the Revolve feature. 261) feature takes a profile sketch. Edit Selections for Features and Apply/Cancel You can change certain Feature Selections where applicable. Feature Selections Behavior • Pre-select (Note: this applies for feature creation only!) Select geometry Click feature button RESULT: Selection is loaded into the object • Post-select (Note: this is the most typical usage!) Click feature button (at feature creation) or use the Edit Selections right mouse button option Bring up the Apply/Cancel buttons for the desired property Select geometry Click Apply/Cancel RESULT: Selection is loaded into the object (in case of Apply) Example Illustrated here is an example of using post-select to create a fixed-radius blend. 388) feature. editing Feature Selections is possible under two circumstances: 1. you can define the rotation axis. 87) for the appropriate feature will effectively roll the model back to its state prior to the feature being generated. and sweeps it along a path sketch. 252). and finally clicking Apply to lock in your selection. . and again click Apply to lock in your selection. 6). All rights reserved. 249 . You define the sweep profile by selecting the Sweep Profile row in the Details View (p. the planes are chosen by following the status bar instructions or by highlighting the source or destination plane property. then choosing a plane from the Tree Out- line (p. the sweep path. Choosing Edit Selections from the right mouse button Context Menus (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Once editing of Feature Selections is enabled.

If a feature was suppressed when Edit Selections is selected. and then Generate (p.0 . the model will roll back to the state it was in when the feature was created. Now. Upon selecting the Edit Selections option. Inc. . features that are inactive are shown in gray. thus bringing up the Apply/Cancel buttons. and start edge selection by double-clicking the Geometry property. the feature and any of its parent features will become unsuppressed.3D Modeling Specify the blend radius as desired. 87) over the Blend feature… …and select the Edit Selections option. and perform your edge selection: Click Apply. assume more modeling has been done. During selection editing. Release 15. . Inc.© SAS IP. All rights reserved. 252) to create the Blend feature. Use the right mouse button Context Menus (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 250 of ANSYS. you want to go back and edit the above edge selection. This will "roll back" the model to the state before the Blend feature. to accept your selection. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. and after some other features have been created.

5). add another edge to the selection by holding down the Ctrl key: Click Apply to accept your changes. Additionally. . thus. Once applied to a model. 3D Features At this point. positioned to the left of the Graphics Window (p. 252) Release 15. 76). the Feature toolbar is displayed in sets of four or less features. 252) to update the model. the features are represented by name in the Tree Outline (p. again. nor is it allowed during feature creation. you may edit.© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. say. and click Generate (p. The Edit Selections option is available for all features except Freeze. Inc. 252). and perform your edge selection: The current geometry selection of the feature is selected on screen.0 . By default. the Blend feature's edge selection by double-clicking the Geometry property. bringing up the Apply/Cancel buttons. The 3D features are also accessible via the Create Menu (p. Inc. Edit Selections may not be performed on any of the three absolute planes. 3D Features Use the options displayed in the Feature toolbar to create and revise models. say. The one toolbar groups: • Generate (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 251 . All rights reserved. Now.

.© SAS IP. Inc. Additionally. Denoted by a green check mark. • Feature has been updated since the last generate. Tree Outline As illustrated in the image above. 253) • "DesignModeler Parameters" (p.0 . • Feature has generated. 261) • Skin/Loft (p. next to each feature's icon in the Tree Outline is a symbol representing the state of the feature. it means the feature is inactive. 268) • Blend (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 252 of ANSYS. All rights reserved. • Feature is suppressed and has no effect on the model. Denoted by a yellow check mark. This can occur whenever you are performing a Feature Insert (p. the Feature toolbar is customizable via the Toolbars (p. if the feature appears in gray. Denoted by a red exclamation symbol. Generate Hotkey: F5 Release 15. 260) • Sweep (p. Denoted by a blue x. 274) • Point (p. There are five states a feature can have: • Feature succeeded. Inc. 248). 264) And another toolbar includes: • Thin/Surface (p. 252). • Feature failed to generate. Share Topology and Parameters. 275) Note With the exception of Generate (p. 491) Another toolbar displays: • Extrude (p. 545) panel. 255) • Revolve (p. Denoted by a yellow lightning bolt.3D Modeling • Share Topology (p. 555) menu of the "DesignModeler Application Op- tions" (p. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. but some warnings exist. 270) • Chamfer (p. 90) or Edit Selections for Features and Apply/Cancel (p.

255) • Revolve (p. You will not see the results of the Edge Joints method in DesignModeler. 268) • Blend (p. Inc. Other 3D features: • Share Topology (p. you will see the same model in the DesignModeler application that you will see after transferring the model to the ANSYS Mechanical application. 275) • Advanced Feature Properties (p. 3D Features Click the Generate button to update the model after any number of changes in the model's feature or sketch/plane dimensions. 252). 252) and the model is restored to the state that reflects the features shown in the Tree Outline (p. This gives you a chance to make modific- ations to the model in DesignModeler before transferring it to the ANSYS Mechanical application. 270) • Chamfer (p. or changes in design parameters. 253) • Extrude (p. 252). Release 15. It is not possible to insert the Share Topology feature at any desired location. Turning on the toggle button will bring back the Share Topology feature and all other features created after it. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. When the Share Topology button is on you will see the Share Topology feature in the Tree Outline (p. 253 . The Edge Joints operation is applied only on transferring the model to the ANSYS Mechanical application. When the Share Topology is turned off the Share Topology feature and any features you may have created after it are not shown in the Tree Outline (p. 285) Share Topology Use the Share Topology button to add or remove the Share Topology feature from the model. 260) • Sweep (p. Inc. 264) • Thin/Surface (p.0 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 216). You should also click on the Generate button to see the results of the Share Topology feature and any features you may have created after it. When the Share Topology toggle is turned on. the Share Topology feature is added after any features that exist in the current model. With this feature. 252). All rights reserved. For a better understanding of the concept. see Shared Topology (p. An exception to this is when the Part’s Share Topology Method is set to Edge Joints. . When the Share Topology button is off you will not see the Share Topology feature and any features you may have created after the Share Topology feature in the Tree Outline (p. This feature performs the “Share Topology” operation in the ANSYS DesignModeler application that is similar to the topology sharing operation done during the transfer to the ANSYS Mechanical application. 261) • Skin/Loft (p. 274) • Point (p.© SAS IP.

260) • Sweep (p. depending on state of model .© SAS IP. 87). Features after the Share Topology feature The following features can be added after the Share Topology feature in the Tree Outline (p. for databases created before Release 15. you can insert other features before the Share Topology feature in Tree Outline (p. 6) of the Share Topology feature lists the parts and for each part. its name and the Share Topology Method. persistence of loads and boundary conditions. prior to Share Topology can improve speed and robustness of the feature. However. the Share Topology feature cannot be suppressed. All rights reserved. Share Topology is a global feature (works on all the Parts of the model) and there can be at most one instance of the feature in the model. or features after Share Topology. Inc.0 . 252) • Extrude (p. For detailed information on shared topology refer “Shared Topology” section of Bodies and Parts documentation. may require re-scoping selections. another option appears in the Details View (p. 268) • Blend (p. via the Body Operation feature. . Once added. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 252) using the “insert” Context Menus (p. 87). however. Other 3D features: • Generate (p. if there is no other feature that depends on it. Inc.0. 6) of the Share Topology feature. 255) • Revolve (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 254 of ANSYS. You can delete the feature from the model using the right mouse button Context Menus (p. . In addition. 270) Release 15. Simplifying or cleaning the model. • Attribute • Connect • Named Selection • Planes • Point • Slice The menu buttons for all other features are grayed out once Share Topology feature is present in model because most features cannot be added after the Share Topology feature. a performance improvement may be seen during the execution of Share Topology. 252). 6) called “Optimizations” which can be toggled On or Off (Default).3D Modeling The Details View (p. The name of the part and the Share Topology Method can also be modified from the Details View (p. 264) • Thin/Surface (p. By enabling this option. 261) • Skin/Loft (p.

Asymmetric: Applies feature in both directions. Both . The direction you choose must not be par- allel to the base object or the Extrude may fail to generate. 252) completes the feature creation and updates the model. However. or Add Frozen). Imprint. One set of extents and depths will apply to both directions. line bodies (treated like edges) as input geometric entities as well as from named selections. If there are no closed sets of edges and/or faces. Extent Types There are five Extent Types that you use to define the extrusion: Release 15. surface bodies (treated like faces). The Details View (p. 275) • Advanced Feature Properties (p. 301). You can select either a sketch or a plane or combination of number of named selection features. If the input geometry contains closed sets of edges and/or faces.© SAS IP. All rights reserved. Geometric entities such as faces. direction vector. Inc. 285) Extrude Use the Extrude button to create an extruded feature. vertices or point feature points can also be selected as input for the Extrusion feature. 6) is used to set the Extrude depth. you can define a custom Direction Vector by selecting a Direction Reference (p. 274) • Point (p. Cut.0 . Point feature points and vertices can also be selected as input geometry. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Each direction has its own extent and depth properties. only the closed sets of edges and/or faces will be used for extrusion. and will be used for extruding all entities specified. direction type and modeling operation (Add. Both . Clicking Generate (p. edges.Symmetric: Applies feature in both directions. 301) features of Point features in the Tree Outline (p. . Direction Vector for Extrude The default Direction Vector is normal to the plane the sketch lies in. point features and/or geometry entities as input geometry. Direction Property for Extrude You can access two directions via a combination box with four options: Normal: Extrudes in positive Z direction of base object. Inc. Slice. 3D Features • Chamfer (p. a plane from face (boundary used) or Named Selection (p. Extrude can use faces (its edges are actually used). then only open sets of edges will be used for extrusion. then a Direction Vector must be defined. 244) options are available. Vertices and point feature points will be used when nothing else is selected for extrusion. If the input geometry is other than sketch or plane. When point profiles are to be extruded only the Add Material (p. direction. Reversed: Extrudes in negative Z direction of base object. The active sketch is the default input but can be changed by selecting the desired sketch. 252).Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 255 . 243) and Add Frozen (p. The Direction Vector is required if the base object is a Named Selection (p. edges. 195).

285) Fixed Type Fixed extents will extrude the profiles the exact distance specified by the Depth property.0 . 261) • Skin/Loft (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 256 of ANSYS. 257) To Faces Type (p. 257) To Next Type (p. the feature would produce an error.3D Modeling Fixed Type (p. 259) . Inc. . Inc. 260) • Sweep (p. 268) • Blend (p. or To Faces. 264) • Thin/Surface (p. 256) Through All Type (p.© SAS IP. 257) To Next Type (p. 259) Note When the extent type is set to Through All. 257) To Faces Type (p. 252) • Share Topology (p. 274) • Point (p. Other 3D features: • Generate (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . The feature preview shows an exact representation of how the feature will be created: Other Extent Types: Through All Type (p. the extrusion of one set of connected edges or each face in the face selection must result in one body. otherwise. All rights reserved. 275) • Advanced Feature Properties (p. 253) • Revolve (p. 270) • Chamfer (p. 259) To Surface Type (p. Release 15. 259) To Surface Type (p. To Next.

the extended profile must fully intersect the model. Although the preview will show the direction in which the profile gets extruded. all active bodies in the model are considered when determining the To Next extent if the operation type is Add Frozen (p. If the Target Bodies property is set to All Bodies. Although the preview will show the direction in which the profile gets extruded. 243). Imprint Faces (p. If Target Bodies are selected. 3D Features Through All Type Through All will extend the profile through the entire model. the extent will go up to and through the first surface or volume it encounters. When adding material with this option. then. 257) To Faces Type (p. 259) . Add Materi- al (p. or Cut Material (p. 243). Add Material (p. 259) To Surface Type (p. 243). 257 . All rights reserved. Inc. 243). then the ANSYS DesignModeler application will only consider those bodies when determining the To Next extent. all Release 15. then. all active bodies in the model are considered when determining the Through All extent if the operation type is Add Frozen (p. 243). Imprint Faces (p. the actual extent will not be determined until the feature is generated. 243). the actual extent will not be determined until the feature is generated.0 . 244). then. To Next Type To Next will extend the profile up to the first surface it encounters when adding material. then. then the ANSYS DesignModeler application will only consider those bodies when determining the Through All extent. If the Target Bodies property is set to All Bodies. When per- forming Cut and Slice operations.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. If the Target Bodies property is set to All Bodies. If Target Bodies are selected. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. 244). Inc. all bodies in the model are considered when determining the Through All extent if the operation type is Slice Material (p. 243). 256) To Next Type (p. . or Cut Material (p. Other Extent Types: Fixed Type (p. If the Target Bodies property is set to All Bodies.

Inc. the application will imprint that face only and skip extruding the profile up to the next surface. When performing the Add Frozen (p.3D Modeling bodies in the model are considered when determining the To Next extent if the operation type is Slice Material (p. Example 22: Add Frozen Consider two active bodies are present in the ANSYS DesignModeler application. as shown below. Inc. 244) operation. only active bodies that partially intersect with the extrusion will be removed until it encounters the first active body surface or volume completely bounding the extrusion. the To Next extent may in fact not be extruded if the application determines that the profile is already coincident to a face.© SAS IP. 244) operation. 243). . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . The To Next extent for the selected profile creates an extruded body with cut out portions of partially intersecting active bodies as shown below. In this case. Other Extent Types: Release 15.Contains proprietary and confidential information 258 of ANSYS. Note When using the Imprint operation type.0 . All rights reserved. The face from the surfaced body is selected as the extrusion profile with the Add Frozen (p.

. 259) . All rights reserved. Inc. Otherwise. 3D Features Fixed Type (p. If you have multiple profiles in your Base Object. Inc." Another noteworthy aspect of the To Faces option is that it can also be used with respect to faces of frozen bodies. 257) To Faces Type (p. The extent calculation is the same for all material types. an extent error will result. This is easiest when you have only one profile in the base sketch. Also. You can say that To Next does not mean "to the next face. 255) feature up to a boundary formed by one or more faces.© SAS IP. In this case a single target face is selected and its underlying (and possibly unbounded) surface is used as the extent. Other Extent Types: Fixed Type (p. note that some Non-Uniform Rational B-Splines (NURBS) target faces cannot be extended. but the actual extent calculation is not performed until the feature is generated. 212)). 344) feature may fail if the extension is not fully bounded by the selected target face's surface. 259) To Surface Type (p. Although the preview will show the direction in which the profile gets extruded. 212) or Surface (p. Select the face or faces to which you want to extend the Ex- trude (p. the actual extent will not be calculated until the feature is generated. To Surface Type The To Surface extent is an advanced option which allows you to define the extent through a surface. To Faces Type The To Faces is an advanced option which allows you to extend the Extrude (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 257) To Next Type (p. The extent calculation is the same for all material types." but rather "through the next chunk of the body ( Solid (p. 256) Through All Type (p. The underlying surface must fully intersect the extruded profile or an error will result. The preview will show the direction of the ex- trusion. 259 . 257) To Surface Type (p. To Faces option is quite different from To Next. you have to make sure that each profile has at least one face in- tersecting its extent. the Surface Extension (p. In those cases. 259) .0 . 255) feature. Release 15. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 256) Through All Type (p.

Further. vertices or point feature points can also be selected as input for the Revolve feature.Contains proprietary and confidential information 260 of ANSYS. Clicking Generate (p. 212) bodies (treated like faces). Revolve Use the Revolve button to create a revolved feature. For creating a Surface (p. Inc.3D Modeling Other Extent Types: Fixed Type (p. 301) features or Point Features in the Tree Outline (p. Geometric entities such as faces. All rights reserved. The active sketch is the default but can be changed using the Tree Outline (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The axis of revolution can be a Direction Reference (p. Imprint. 301) features. 243) and Add Frozen (p. 252). 256) Through All Type (p. Vertices and point feature points will be used when nothing else is selected. You can select either a sketch or a plane or combination of Named Selection (p. and modeling operation: Add. Solids. only the closed sets of edges and/or faces will be used for revolution. surfaces. When point profiles are to be revolved only the Add Material (p. 259) . or Add Frozen. edges. Release 15. If the input geometry contains closed sets of edges and/or faces. 195) selected from a plane. Surface (p. the Details View (p. a plane from face (boundary used) or Named Selection (p. 2D sketch edge. . 252) completes the feature creation and updates the model. it is chosen as the default axis of revolution. edges. Direction Property for Revolve You can access two directions via a combination box with four options: Normal: Revolves in positive Z direction of base object.0 . the feature direction. 3D model edge. . 212) body. Inc. 252).© SAS IP. The Revolve feature can use faces (its edges are actually used). 244) options are available. and thin-walled features can be created by using this feature. point features and/or geometry entities as input geometry. by selecting the desired sketch. face or two points. If there are no closed sets of edges and/or faces. Cut. If there is a disjoint line in the sketch. line bodies (treated like edges) as input geometric entities as well as entities from named selections. Reversed: Revolves in negative Z direction of base object. 257) To Faces Type (p. 257) To Next Type (p. Slice. Point feature points and vertices can also be selected as input geometry. 6) can be used to change the angle of revolution. the inner and outer thickness values should be kept equal to zero. then only open sets of edges will be used for revolution.

vertices and point feature. 270) • Chamfer (p. Add Material (p. 252) completes the feature creation and updates the model. 261 . you may use a point feature point. Surface (p. and thin-walled features can be created by using this feature. One set of angles will apply to both dir- ections. Inc. 243). 285) Sweep The Details View (p. While creating line bodies. then the endpoint of the path that lies closest to the profile(s) is chosen as the start vertex for the Sweep oper- ation. Solid (p. If the sweep path is an open chain. 261) • Skin/Loft (p. For creating a surface body. Alignment There are two options for the alignment property: Release 15. 212).Asymmetric: Applies feature in both directions. and geometry entries such as faces. 252) • Share Topology (p. plane or a combination of Named Selection (p. Similarly points are swept only if there are no open or closed chains in the profile.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. edges. Open chains are swept only if there are no closed chains. 275) • Advanced Feature Properties (p. For either the Sweep profile or the Sweep path. or Add Frozen) and the alignment of the sweep. 255) • Sweep (p. For Sweep profile. the inner and outer thickness values should be kept equal to zero. 212). Other 3D features: • Generate (p. Inc. you can select either a sketch. The sweep path may be either an open or a closed chain. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. or both. Imprint. line bodies. 253) • Extrude (p. Slice. Clicking Generate (p. The Sweep profile may consist of a single or multiple chains. and Add Frozen (p. Also note that if neither end of an open Sweep path or if no vertex of a closed Sweep path lies in the plane of the Sweep profile. 244) are the only operations available. 3D Features Both . 6) can be used to change the modeling operations (Add. 264) • Thin/Surface (p. 268) • Blend (p. . This is especially true if Path Tangent is being used for Alignment. and they may be either open or closed. 274) • Point (p. 301) features.© SAS IP. but there may only be one path.Symmetric: Applies feature in both directions. Profile can also contain points.0 . then the resulting Sweep may appear strange. Each direction has its own angle property. Cut. surface bodies or line bodies as input. Both .

. Inc. consider these two sweeps that use identical path and profile sketches.© SAS IP. As an example. Example 23: Path Tangent alignment Global Axes: The profile's orientation remains constant as it is swept along the path. Release 15.3D Modeling Path Tangent: Reorients the profile as it is swept along the path to keep the profile's orientation with respect to the path consistent. . as illustrated. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. regardless of the path's shape.Contains proprietary and confidential information 262 of ANSYS.0 . while the picture on the right uses Global Axes alignment. Example 24: Global Axes alignment Scaling and Twisting Use the Scale and Turns/Pitch properties of the Sweep feature to create helical sweeps. The picture on the left uses Path Tangent alignment. All rights reserved.

0 and 10. These properties are designed for creating helical sweeps. 253) • Extrude (p. 260) • Skin/Loft (p. Additionally. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1. 263 . All rights reserved. the default Pitch value will be computed from the Turns entered. The default values for Scale . then Turns must be an integer.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.© SAS IP.0 . Inc. To create helical sweeps. +Turns and Pitch: Rotates counterclockwise. If the sweep path is a closed chain and if Pitch is used as the twist specification. Inc. The Twist Specification by default is No Twist. Use the Turns field to specify the number of rotations about the path. Similarly if Twist Specification is changed from Pitch to Turns. The value for Scale determines the size of the end of the sweep relative to the original profile.0. the Pitch entered must correspond to full integer turns. When Twist Specification is changed from Turns to Pitch. although there are some restrictions: Scale: The sweep path must be an open chain AND smooth.0 units respectively. 264) • Thin/Surface (p. if the sweep path is a closed loop. Use the Pitch field to specify twist. Other 3D features: • Generate (p. through pitch length. A negative value for Turns or Pitch will make the profile rotate about the path in the opposite direction. 3D Features Use Scale to taper or expand the profile along the path of the sweep. 252) • Share Topology (p. change the option to Turns or Pitch. The scale value must not be zero. Turns/Pitch: The sweep path must be smooth. the default Turns value will be computed from the Pitch specified. . Turns and Pitch values must not be zero. -Turns and Pitch: Rotates clockwise. 255) • Revolve (p. 268) Release 15.Turns and Pitch are 1.

closed and acorn chain obtained from geometric entities will go to an individual profile group. When you are in the “Select Individual Profile” method. 301) feature and each open. Slice. 301) or geometric entities such as faces. 6). Cut. . A profile is a sketch with one closed or open loop or a plane from a face or a Named Selection (p. All profiles must have the same number of edges. 6) can be used to change the modeling operations (Add. or by clicking on the sketch or plane branch in the Tree Outline (p. Cut.© SAS IP. Additionally. a preview will appear which shows the selected profiles and the guide line only if they have the same number of edges and they are not mixed profiles. When you are in the “Select All Profiles” method you can select the profiles using “Profiles” property. Slice. All profiles for the Skin/Loft feature must be of the same type. you can edit each individual profile group. or Add Frozen). For creating a surface body. Inc. 252) completes the feature creation and updates the model.Contains proprietary and confidential information 264 of ANSYS. the “Profiles” property will not be visible. the inner and outer thickness values should be kept equal to zero. When you select a group in the Details View (p. 212). Inc. open and closed profiles cannot be mixed.0 . Sur- face (p. Upon selecting an adequate number of profiles. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Instead. 212). Named Selection (p. “Select All Profiles” and “Select Individual Profile”. vertices. Clicking Generate (p. The Details View (p.3D Modeling • Blend (p. The Profile Selection Method property has two options. depending on the chosen "material type") a solid or surface fitting through them. Release 15. You can add/insert new profile groups and delete existing profile groups as illustrated below. 275) • Advanced Feature Properties (p. the entities present in that group will be shown in cyan and entities of other groups will be shown in magenta. All rights reserved. 270) • Chamfer (p. Imprint. or Add Frozen. edges. etc. . Imprint. 285) Skin/Loft Takes a series of profiles from different planes to (Add. Solid (p. 274) • Point (p. Sketches and planes can be selected by clicking on their edges or points in the graphics area. You must select two or more profiles for the Skin/Loft feature. and thin-walled features can be created by using this feature. 252). Each Sketch.

For open profiles. select the vertices such that the guide line flows smoothly from one profile to the next. Example 25: Guide line with consistent alignment Guide line with consistent alignment through the profiles and the resulting smooth Skin/Loft. the guide line must pass through the profiles at their endpoints. The Skin/Loft feature can fail if the parameterization of the two curves causes the result to Release 15. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. • Continue Sketch Selection: Leaves the alignment state to continue profile selection for the Skin/Loft feature. Example 26: Guide line with twisted alignment Guide line with twisted alignment through the profiles and the resulting twisted Skin/Loft. the starting point of the selected edges will be used to show the guide line alignment. 3D Features Skin/Loft Context Menu Options There is a right mouse button Context Menus (p. Below is an example of straight and twisted guide lines and their corresponding result. When the guide line twists from one profile to the next.© SAS IP. When you select 2D Edge on the outline planes. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. For point profiles. 265 . there is no need to adjust the guide line through them as they only contain a single point. Inc. Clicking the right mouse button context menu will present two options: • Fix Guide Line: The guide line is a gray polyline that defines how the vertices of the profiles line up with each other throughout the Skin/Loft. 87) to assist in creating the Skin/Loft feature. Selecting this option will place you in an alignment mode where you can click on vertices in the graphics area to change the guide line’s path through the profiles. Note The “Fix Guide Line” option will not be available when you are editing entries present in the profile group. All rights reserved. Full circles or ellipses can present problems if they are defined on planes facing roughly in opposite directions. Outline planes (represented by gray lines) can be aligned by setting the Selection Filter (accessible via the right mouse button) to 2D Edge. it will result in a twisted Skin/Loft that may not generate. Generally.0 .

. or split the profile at a single location. 87) appears which allows you to reorder that profile's position in the list. When a profile has no endpoints. If two profiles are facing each other.3D Modeling become twisted. 6). and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. which will introduce a single vertex on the resultant profile. a context menu Context Menus (p. you can split the edge into several pieces using this feature before using it in the Skin/Loft operation. The vertex is placed at the start point of the edge’s underlying curve. which will cause the Skin/Loft to fail due to a self intersection.© SAS IP. A workaround for this is to introduce a vertex on the profiles so they can be used to align the feature’s guide line. Example 27: Skin/Loft feature between opposite full circles Skin Profile Ordering Profiles are reordered through the Details View (p.0 . Inc. This can be done in several ways: • Splitting the sketch edge: Use the Split sketching tool to split the profiles into two or more segments. • Split Edges feature: If using Named Selections as profiles. Release 15. as illustrated below. . All rights reserved. If you select a profile and then click the right mouse button. 6) will list the selected profiles in order. the feature will internally imprint a vertex on the edge.Contains proprietary and confidential information 266 of ANSYS. The Skin/Loft feature's Details View (p. the imprinted points can often end up on opposite sides of the profiles.

Sketch3 is a point profile: You do not need to be concerned about how the guide rail lines up with a point profile.© SAS IP. Release 15. 301) with a single vertex or 3D Point (from Point (p. You can tell which profiles in the Details View (p.0 . Inc. If both the start and end profiles are point profiles. 6) are point profiles by the asterisk (*) that is placed after them. All rights reserved. which will remove the selected profile from the list alto- gether. Point profiles may not be placed in the middle of the profile list. After generating the files): Skin/Loft: Note When performing Skin/Loft operations with point profiles at the end and circular or elliptical profiles throughout the middle. DesignModeler may not be able to generate a walled feature due to a geometry singularity at the tip of the resultant body. since there is only a single point for the Skin/Loft to which to converge. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 267 . In the following picture. then at least three profiles are necessary for the Skin/Loft feature instead of the usual two and the third profile must be a non-point profile kept in the middle of the sequence. Point profiles are restricted to either the first and/or last profile in the profile list. Shown here are some examples: Profiles for a boat's hull (closed After generating the profiles): Skin/Loft: Profiles for a surface (open pro. 3D Features There are four reordering options plus Delete. A point profile is defined as a sketch that contains exactly one construction point and nothing else or a Named Selection (p. but not both. Point Profiles The Skin/Loft feature can accept profiles consisting of a single point. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . 275) feature). The other profiles in your profile list may be either open or closed.

The Thin/Surface feature supports thickness > 0 if the selected faces are part of Surface (p. 274) • Point (p. . • Faces to Keep: selected faces will be kept. 275) • Advanced Feature Properties (p.0 .3D Modeling Other 3D features: • Generate (p. 268) • Blend (p. The feature can operate on both active and frozen bodies. All rights reserved. 285) Thin/Surface The Thin/Surface feature has two distinct applications: • Create thin solids • Simplified shelling The three selection tools are: • Faces to Remove: selected faces will be removed from their bodies. Inc. 270) • Chamfer (p. This allows for the "thickening" of an imported surface. you will select the faces to remove. . This applies for a thickness of zero (=0). 212) bodies. The Thin/Surface feature allows you to convert solids into thin solids or surfaces. while unselected faces are removed.Contains proprietary and confidential information 268 of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 253) • Extrude (p. 260) • Sweep (p.© SAS IP. Typically. 261) • Thin/Surface (p. You can make a model's thickness in one of three directions of offset: • Inward • Outward • Mid-Plane The simplified shelling application allows you to convert from thin solid models to surface models. • Bodies Only: the operation will be performed on the selected bodies without removing any faces. Example: Release 15. 252) • Share Topology (p. and then specify a face offset that is greater than or equal to zero (>=0). Inc. 255) • Revolve (p.

shown below left is a body before hollowing and to the right. 252) • Share Topology (p. Face Offset only appears when the thickness is zero. Outward. and Midplane. Inc. Midplane applies half of the given thickness to both sides. 255) • Revolve (p. All rights reserved. . 264) Release 15. The Direction property specifies the direction in which the surface is thickened (or the solid is hollowed). Midplane allows for consistent thickness to approx- imate the mid-surface. set the Preserve Bodies option to No. you can also specify a Face Offset.0 . If the original body is not required. You can choose to keep the original body by setting the Preserve Bodies option to Yes. 3D Features When you create a surface. the body after midplane hollowing. 261) • Skin/Loft (p. This does not mean midplane extraction. Inc. The Midplane direction can be applied to Surface (p. so that surfaces are thickened equally on both sides. 260) • Sweep (p. The directions are Inward. 212) bodies as well. Other 3D features: • Generate (p. 253) • Extrude (p. such that the inner and outer walls of the bodies are offset equal distances from the original faces. It means that the bodies will be hollowed. For example. 269 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP.

271) Vertex Blend (p. 270) • Chamfer (p.0. 253) • Extrude (p. 275) • Advanced Feature Properties (p. 255) • Revolve (p. .Contains proprietary and confidential information 270 of ANSYS. 274) • Point (p. This feature can be executed on both frozen and active bodies beginning in version 11.0. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 260) • Sweep (p. 261) • Skin/Loft (p. Inc. Preselection allows additional options from a right mouse button context menu for face edge loop selection and smooth 3D edge chain selection from the model. All rights reserved. 275) • Advanced Feature Properties (p. 268) • Chamfer (p. 271) Note Selection Rules for Blends and Chamfers (p.© SAS IP. this feature would only operate on active bodies. You can preselect 3D edges and/or faces for blending.3D Modeling • Blend (p. 274) • Point (p. . You can edit the blend radius Release 15. all the edges from that face are blended. and select 3D edges and/or faces while in the blend creation itself.0 . Inc. 285) Blend The Blend feature allows you to create blends in three forms: Fixed Radius (p. 272) Other 3D features: • Generate (p. If you select a face. 252) • Share Topology (p. 270) Variable Radius (p. 285) Fixed Radius The Fixed-Radius feature allows you to create blends on model edges. 264) • Thin/Surface (p. Prior to version 11.

272) Variable Radius The Variable-Radius feature allows you to blend features on model edges. Inc. 271 . 3D Features in the Details View (p. This feature can be executed on both frozen and active bodies beginning in version 11. Preselection allows additional options from a right mouse button context menu for face edge loop selection and smooth 3D edge chain selection from the model. Clicking Generate (p. 271) Note Selection Rules for Blends and Chamfers (p. You can pre-select model vertices or use the Apply/Cancel property to make your selections. 212) or line bodies. 272) Vertex Blend The Vertex Blend feature allows you to create blends at vertices on Solid (p.0. All rights reserved. 6) to change the start and end blend radius for each edge. This feature can be executed on both frozen and active bodies. Also.0 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Surface (p. 6). Other Blend forms: Variable Radius (p. To blend a vertex. Prior to version 11. 271) Note Selection Rules for Blends and Chamfers (p. 6) can set the transition between blends to smooth or linear. 270) Vertex Blend (p. 252) completes the feature creation and updates the model. 212). Clicking Generate (p. this feature would only operate on active bodies. Note Selection rules prevail. 252) com- pletes the feature creation and updates the model. Note Selection rules prevail. the Details View (p. Use the Details View (p. Inc. 271) Vertex Blend (p. You can preselect 3D edges for blending and/or you can select 3D edges while in the blend creation itself.0. . Other Blend forms: Fixed Radius (p. it must satisfy the following conditions: Release 15.© SAS IP.

270) Variable Radius (p. Try using the Simplify option in the Body Operation (p. if there is one. 388) feature to simplify the model geometry. . Inc. the underlying curves and surfaces might be defined using Non-Uniform Rational B-Splines (NURBS) geometry instead of analytic geometry. but only in the case of imprinted edges on a planar surface. it can cause problems if you do not select the tangent edge as well. 272) Selection Rules for Blends and Chamfers NOTE 1: When selecting edges to blend/chamfer. which can sometimes produce an unexpected result or may fail. NOTE 2: With Blend (as well as Chamfer). In these case. When the results from blending (or chamfering) these separate groups of edges overlap. here is a simple example using a block and a cylinder. Sometimes a vertex may fail to blend even though its geometry looks to be planar. Other Blend forms: Fixed Radius (p. the result will be much more reliable if the tangent edge is also selected. Vertex Blend Limitations Usage with a solid body The Vertex Blend feature is permitted on a solid body. Doing so may convert the underlying curves and surfaces to an analytic definition which can be blended.Contains proprietary and confidential information 272 of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.3D Modeling • The vertex must connect to exactly two edges. If the blend/chamfer would fail without the extra edge selected. must also be planar. In these cases. ded. The block has 12 edges and the cylinder has two edges: Release 15. . if an edge you select ends where another edge is tangent to it. processing is done on each connected set of edges separately. it can sometimes cause problems and results may vary depending on the order that edges are selected. Example 28: Blending Vertices Select two vertices for blending the corners of the frame Afterwards the sharp corners are now blen- where they will rest on a person's ears. All rights reserved.0 . • The geometry surrounding the vertex must be planar. Inc. the algorithm will sometimes continue with the blend/chamfer along the unselected edge in an attempt to cap the blend. This means the two adjacent edges must be co-planar and the adjacent face. For example.© SAS IP. 271) Note Selection Rules for Blends and Chamfers (p.

Each circular edge of the cylinder will be processed separately as they to not connect with any other edges. Here is the result of selecting the cylindrical edges first: Notice that the edges of the block are not blended. in this order. the edges of the block are selected first. . the different selection order has a significant change.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. However. here is the result: Here notice that the block is blended. when it attempted to blend the bottom of the cylinder it again ran into an overlap situation. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. a second Blend feature can be created that selects the remaining circular edge. Inc. which provides the fol- lowing result: Release 15. This is because the algorithm failed when trying to blend the two block edges that are closest to the cylinder.0 . 273 . In this case since there is part of the base of the cylinder that is still not blended. starting with the cylinder first and then the block. after blending all of the block edges.© SAS IP. 3D Features If all the edges are selected. Overall. Inc. as well as the top of the cylinder. due to the overlapping blends. If instead. In this case. but the results at the base of the cylinder are a little strange. then all 12 edges of the block will be processed as a single group as they all connect. the edges will be processed in three groups. All rights reserved. the algorithm was able to produce a partial blend of the edge.

Inc. 271) Vertex Blend (p. Prior to version 11.3D Modeling Even with overlaps. Inc. Every edge on a face has a direction.0. all the edges from that face are chamfered. This direction defines a right and left side. This is also true for Chamfer features. The type of chamfer is defined in the Details View (p. 6) along with the distances and angle. and/or you can select 3D edges and/or faces while in the chamfer creation itself. 252) completes the feature creation and updates the model.0. a complete blend is possible. this feature would only operate on active bodies. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. If a face is selected. Preselection allows additional options from a right mouse button context menu for face edge loop se- lection and smooth 3D edge chain selection from the model. .© SAS IP. 270) Variable Radius (p. Note Selection rules prevail.0 . 271) Chamfer The Chamfer feature allows you to create planar transitions (or chamfer faces) across model edges. This feature can be executed on both frozen and active bodies beginning in version 11. or by a distance (left or right) and an angle. You can preselect 3D edges and/or faces for chamfering. Blend forms: Fixed Radius (p. Release 15. Clicking Generate (p. but order is important.Contains proprietary and confidential information 274 of ANSYS. Chamfer is defined either by two distances from the edge for the planar transition (chamfer face). .

The intersection curve of these offset surfaces is projected on the corresponding faces. the left and right sides of the edge are determined based on the edge orientation. 275) • Advanced Feature Properties (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Such a projection of the intersection curve onto the right and left faces determines the extent to which the body will be chamfered. 268) • Blend (p. . 260) • Sweep (p. 264) • Thin/Surface (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. angle.© SAS IP. 255) • Revolve (p. Inc. 252) • Share Topology (p. All rights reserved. Other 3D features: • Generate (p.0 . 275 . 261) • Skin/Loft (p. 285) Point Release 15. Inc. 3D Features Calculating the Chamfer Location When specifying the left and right lengths. Example 29: The effect of Left and Right length Chamfer of an edge of faces meeting at an Chamfer of an edge of non-planar face. 253) • Extrude (p. 270) • Point (p. The face on the right side of the edge is offset by the right length and the face on the left side is offset by the left length.

Point loads on multibody parts are permitted. Delta Sequence By N Sigma. • Point Load: Used for "hard points" in the analysis. 276) • Definitions (p. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information 276 of ANSYS. 280) • Coordinates File (p. Next. and for each of these certain placement definitions may be specified: Table 2: Point Definition Options POINT DEFINITION AVAILABLE PLACEMENT DEFINITIONS Single Sigma and Offset Sequence By Delta Sigma. 281) • Point Load and Spot Weld from Coordinate File Notations (p. These points are referred to as point feature points. • Construction Point: No points of this type are passed to the ANSYS Mechanical application. You begin by selecting the set of base faces and edges. All points that successfully generate are passed to the ANSYS Mechanical application as vertices. 279) • Face Offset Property (p. Offset.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Offset.3D Modeling The Point feature allows for controlled and fully dimensioned placement of points relative to selected model faces and edges. Only those points that successfully generate mates are passed as Spot Welds to the ANSYS Mechanical application. choose from up to five possible Point Definition options. 277) • Point Placement (p. or only line body guide edges. 282) Usage The feature can operate on both active and frozen bodies. . Then. 282) section below) The Point placement is defined by distances on the chain of guide edges and by distances along the chain of guide edges as follows: Release 15.0 . select the type: • Spot Weld: Used for "welding" together otherwise disjointed bodies. Omega From Coordinates File (See Coordinates File section below) Manual Input (Construction Point only) (See Manual Input (p. Inc. Point topics: • Usage (p. the ANSYS Mechanical application will ignore points that do not lie on any body. . 282) • Manual Input (p. 281) • Special Notes for PF Points in Regions of Shared Topology (p. 278) • Point Mate Search Procedure (p. However. All rights reserved. or PF points. N.

measured on the guide edges. for the Sequence By Delta option. • Guiding Edges: Used as a reference to create the points. and the points are added depending on whether the mating face is above the points on the base face. Release 15." – Non-line body guide edges: These faces may be on either side of the Base Faces within the given range. in arc length between two consecutive points. Omega: The distance between the end of the chain of guide edges and the placement of the last spot. 277 . in case of the Se- quence By N option. when contact is only desired between certain bodies. Illustrated below is an example when points will not have mating points on the Mating Face. Delta: The distance. – Line body guide edges: The Mating face may be in any direction to the guide edge within the given range. or below the points on the base face.© SAS IP. If the edge offset is zero (that is. Base Faces are not ap- plicable to create points on line body edges. and no Mating Faces are found on either side of the Base Face). 3D Features Sigma: The distance between the beginning of the chain of guide edges and the placement of the first point. Measurement is taken on the chain of the Guide Edges in arc length.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. • Mating Targets: What body is to be used for finding contact points. N: The number of points to be placed. Used for models with multiple bodies. Base Face ω Edge Offset δ σ Mating Face Guiding Edge Definitions • Base Faces: Where points are to be added (only for non-line body guide edges). and its subsidiaries and affiliates. if the points lie on the Guide Edges. relative to the chain of guide edges. . Edge Offset: The approximate distance between the guide edges and the placement of the spots on the set of base faces (not applicable to line body guide edges). for the Sequence By N option. Inc. Measurement is taken on the chain of the first Guide Edge selected. Inc. • Mating Faces: What DesignModeler detects as the faces on which mating points are to be created when creating the "Spot Welds.” This can be used to approximate “Seam Welds. All rights reserved. then an attempt is made to find Mating Faces in the tangent direction of the Base Face.0 . The mating face is detected automatically. in arc length.

for each point placed on the base faces/guide edges. Similarly. In this case. it will then place a point at the "mate" position as well (the original point and its mate will be interpreted as a "weld" by the ANSYS Release 15. as illustrated below. Base Face Point Placement For edge offsets that are nonzero. All rights reserved. Surface Normal 1 Edge Edge Tangent Offset 2 Surface Normal 3 Location on Guiding Edge.0 . In this case. Inc.© SAS IP. points always will be placed on the selected line bodies. as illustrated below. 212) body). Points that fall outside their base faces will not be placed. relative to the Guiding Edge. the point at the other end will be at the end of the last edge of the chain of guide edges. Edge Offset Note The Edge Offset is not applicable to line body edges. the point is placed on a Base Face. If Sigma is zero. then the sequence of the points will begin from the beginning of the first edge of the chain of guide edges. If successful. For the Spot Weld analysis type. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Point (1) is offset in direction perpendicular to Surface Normal and Edge Tangent. Point (2) is projected back onto the face at the point on the surface closest to point (2). Inc. .Contains proprietary and confidential information 278 of ANSYS. 6).3D Modeling Mating Face Guiding Edge These points will not have mates. For planar faces. no projection is needed since point (2) will already lie on the face. the system will attempt to find a suitable "mate" on another face (typically on another Surface (p. if Omega is zero. there is a "Range" property in the Details View (p.

The Range specifies the maximum distance for each original point to probe for its mate. then direction 3 is searched. The Surface Normal 2. The opposite direction of the Surface Normal 3. Point Mate Search Procedure 1 Surface Normal 3 Edge Tangent 2 Points on Faces For points on faces.© SAS IP. For a Spot Weld from Coordinates File. 5)). The closest mate found from these two directions is chosen. Note that each point's ray may be different. Inc. Also note that the placement of the mate may fail if the candidate face is tangential to the ray direction. only directions 1 and 2 are searched. Mate placement is defined by the ray originating from the original point in one of the three directions described above. If no mate is found. as illustrated below. 279 . The direction perpendicular to both the Surface Normal and Edge Tangent Direction 1 and 2 are always searched. No circle will be drawn if Range provided is 0.0 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 3D Features Mechanical application). mates are found by searching up to three directions: 1. This enables you to visualize the range in the model workspace (Graphics Window (p. Note that in Edit Selections mode the mouse cursor is enclosed by a circle of diameter equal to the “Range” provided for the Spot Weld analysis type. Inc. All rights reserved. Release 15. The image shows the cursor change when range value provided is 2 millimeter. . The distance between the point and its mate must be less than or equal to the Range parameter.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. since the ray depends on the shape of the base face.

This means that. The face offset may be either positive or negative. the distance between the point and its mate must be less than or equal to the Range parameter.0 . in the normal direction to the guide edge at that point as shown in the figure below.0) do not support isolated points. The Face Offset property is available for Point Load and Construction Point types. cur- Release 15. The offset direction is determined by the surface normal as shown here. An example is shown here.Contains proprietary and confidential information 280 of ANSYS. The closest mate found from the point will be chosen to create the mate point.3D Modeling Mates Original Points Points on Line Body For points on line body. The Face Offset Property is not supported for points created on line bodies as they are not attached with any faces. Inc.© SAS IP. Current versions of the ANSYS Mechanical application (up to and including 9. be it inside or outside a solid. that is. . . and may even result in the point being placed inside a body. All rights reserved. However. mates are found by searching around the point (360 degrees). points that are placed off a surface. where the base face and guide edge are highlighted. but not for Spot Welds. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. Face Offset Property This option allows you to place points offset from the surface of the base face.

Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.5678 Point Load and Spot Weld from Coordinate File Notations For Point Load and Spot Weld. Number of points is limited to the value set in the Options dialog box (see the Point Feature Limit setting under the ANSYS DesignModeler application's Miscellaneous settings in the Options dialog box).6666 17. Before generation. with nothing after the Z value. 3D Features rently.2468 30. it is not recommended to use Face Offsets > 0 for any other purpose than for creating construction points.3456 .1515 2 2 -22.2021 7. All rights reserved.1357 35. separated by spaces and/or tabs: a. internal to the ANSYS DesignModeler model. 3. Inc. integer ID. Group number (integer): must be >0 b. Id number (integer): must be >0 c. or delete or add points.7777 #Group 2 2 1 50. 281 . Empty lines are ignored. # List of Point Coordinates # Format is integer Group. Z coordinate 4.9876 2 3 21. # Group 1 1 1 20.0 . Coordinates File This option allows you to specify a text file from which to read coordinates. mate faces are also determined. this allows you to modify coordinates.1928 1 3 15.0101 100. A data line with the same Group and Id numbers as a previous data line is an error. 2.8765 -. then X Y Z all # delimited by spaces. a base face or base edge in case the edge belongs to line body is searched for at each point. After a pound sign '#. . The current session unit and the last plane selected will be used by default. Y coordinate e. X coordinate d. The Refresh property for this option allows you to update your text file and have the system read it again. all on one line. 275) feature. a unit for the coordinates and a base plane must be selected.5555 16. Because the mate faces Release 15. 5. These coordinates are used exactly as specified and are not projected onto any face or edge. The file itself must be a simple text file formatted according to the following rules: 1.4321 30.© SAS IP.' everything else on that line is considered a comment and is ignored.1234 22. Data consists of 5 fields. and for Spot Weld. A sample coordinates file is shown below.1234 25.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Since the Group number and Id number fields uniquely identify each point generated for this Point (p.4321 23.5678 1 2 25.

you must delete the underlying body instead of suppressing it. To ensure the PF Point makes it into the ANSYS Mechanical application. If a PF Point is placed in a region where topology between bodies will be shared. For Point Load and Spot Weld. a very tight tolerance is used when checking that a point is actually on a face or edge when the edge belongs to line body. 286) in the Point (p. see item five in Coordinates File (p. The reason for this is that PF points reference specific face and edge geometry. For locations read from coordinate files.Contains proprietary and confidential information 282 of ANSYS. sometimes edges and faces can disappear due to merging. 252) Release 15. All rights reserved. You can create as many point groups as you want in one Point feature.0 . but not the underlying body. they will still need to be within 5. For points edges (not associated with line body). note that the ANSYS Mechanical application will ignore Point Load points that are not on a face. the point will also be suppressed. Spot Weld will try each of these possible faces until it finds one for which it can also find a mate face.© SAS IP. 283) Other 3D features: • Generate (p. you should not put locations of mate points in the file. When neighboring bodies are combined in a multibody part. there is a good chance the point will not appear in the ANSYS Mechanical application when the model is transferred. Also. Manual Input topics: Point Group Properties (p. this tolerance is loosened to make the points easier to specify. points are created for each coordinate in the file (up to the limit. . This tolerance is mapped to the unit setting you are using. If you wish to transfer points to the ANSYS Mechanical application. but you should be careful when placing them in a region of Shared Topology. if a point lies on an edge or vertex. 281)). You have some control of this by selecting the Target Bodies (p. Manual Input This option allows you to create any number of Construction Points from a single Point feature by manually entering the coordinate values for each point. 275) feature. then the PF point will not transfer to the ANSYS Mechanical application. If its face or edge gets merged away in the final part due to shared topology.3D Modeling are automatically detected. and therefore will not be transferred to the ANSYS Mechanical application. . Doing so may result in the creation of duplicate spot welds. the point is internally marked as "expired" and does not display or transfer to the ANSYS Mechanical application. then any of the adjacent faces could be used for Point Load. Inc. for Spot Welds. However.0e -7 meters of the face. so for example it is equivalent to 5.0e-4 millimeters.0e-5 inches. Inc. Note If a point is in contact with a suppressed body. it is advisable to place PF Points on both sides of the shared region. 283) Point Group User Interface and Behavior (p. Each point group represents one point in ANSYS DesignModeler. or about 2. Special Notes for PF Points in Regions of Shared Topology ANSYS DesignModeler allows the placement of PF Points on multibody parts. if no base face is found. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Normally. However.

There are three properties that define the Point Group: X Coordinate Y Coordinate Z Coordinate Point Group User Interface and Behavior Starting with release 12. 268) • Blend (p. 285) Point Group Properties Point Group itself is a property of the Point feature. 274) • Advanced Feature Properties (p. 284) • Expand All Groups (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 284) • Select a Group (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. All rights reserved. This essentially minimizes the number of point features that need to be created for multiple construction points. Clicking on the top most header (or any list view item belonging to the top most header) will deselect an already selected group. 260) • Sweep (p. The user interface allows you to: • Select a Group (p. Inc. 3D Features • Share Topology (p. 253) • Extrude (p.1. .0 . the Point feature’s property has a new user interface for point definition as Manual Input. Henceforth a group header or any of the property be- longing to that group will be collectively referred to as “group”. 284) • Post Selection Color (p. 255) • Revolve (p. Inc.© SAS IP. Release 15. 283 . 264) • Thin/Surface (p. 284) • Collapse All Groups (p. 261) • Skin/Loft (p. 283) • Point Group Control via Context Menu (p. 283) Select a Group A point group is selected by clicking (right or left) on the group header or any of list view items contained in that group header. Each group creates one construction point. Notice that the top feature header or any of the property belonging to the top header and the empty space in the list view is not a “group”. 270) • Chamfer (p. Each Point feature now hosts a list of Point Groups.

Release 15. The generate status for the feature is determined by the following rules. Only the group headers are visible. All rights reserved. Warning (yellow tick mark): If at least one group succeeds partially and if not all groups suc- ceed completely. Add New Point Group: Always add a new point group at the end of the group list. So. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Delete Point Group: Deletes the selected point group. The point feature. Inc. . The text “error” indicates that the group failed completely whereas the text “warning” indicates partial success.© SAS IP.0 . the delete option is shown only if the total number of groups is more than one. Error (red bolt): If all the point groups fail completely. The context menu is dynamic. Expand All Groups Expands all the groups. The context menu has the following options. Generate Status The failure status for each group is indicated with the text message “error” or “warning” in the group header. Most of the options are shown only if you right click on a group except for “Add New Point Group” which is always shown. . Shows properties belonging to all groups.3D Modeling Point Group Control via Context Menu A context menu is displayed on right-clicking in the list view. Post Selection Color All point locked in for the current selected Point feature will be shown in the default post selection (cyan) color. with definition as Manual Input must have at least one point group. Collapse All Groups Collapses all the groups. Note The add /delete options are available only during the feature edit state. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information 284 of ANSYS. Success (green tick mark): If all groups succeed completely. Hides properties belonging to all groups.

© SAS IP. Inc. • Target Bodies (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Merge Topo- ies logy Basic 3D Features Extrude Yes Yes Revolve Yes Yes Sweep Yes Yes Skin/Loft Yes Yes Thin/Surface Blend (fixed) Blend (variable) Chamfer Point Yes* Advanced Tools Freeze Unfreeze Named Selection Mid-Surface Joint Enclosure Yes* Symmetry Yes Fill Surface Extension Body Operation Boolean Slice Yes Face Delete Concept Modeler Lines from Points Lines from Sketches Lines from Edges Split Line Body Surfaces From Edges Release 15. 286) • Merge Topology (p. 3D Features Advanced Feature Properties The options described in this section apply selectively to the 3D Features (p. . 285 . Charted below are the Advanced Properties and the 3D Features to which they apply. All rights reserved. 288) Advanced Properties Target Bod. 251).0 . Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the bodies that you select will be the ones subjected to the Boolean operation. or Slice operation. 264) • Thin/Surface (p. All rights reserved.0 . 260) • Sweep (p. Inc. you can select bodies through another Apply/Cancel property called Bodies. Release 15. but for only some of the blocks. 274) • Point (p. For example. suppose you wish to cut circular holes into the blocks of this model. 252) • Share Topology (p. . By switching the value of the Target Bodies property from All Bodies to Selected Bodies. 261) • Skin/Loft (p. Imprint.© SAS IP. Merge Topo- ies logy Surfaces From Sketches Others Import Yes Attach Yes * The Target Bodies property for Enclosure and Point have a slightly different meaning. . 322) or Point feature for details. 253) • Extrude (p. 275) Target Bodies The Target Bodies property allows you to specify which bodies are operated on during a Cut.Contains proprietary and confidential information 286 of ANSYS. 255) • Revolve (p. Here.3D Modeling Advanced Properties Target Bod. Other 3D features: • Generate (p. 268) • Blend (p. 270) • Chamfer (p. Inc. See the Enclos- ure (p.

Note here that for clarity. Here the imprinted faces are highlighted for clarity. Inc. 252).0 . 287 . The following picture is the result if the operation were changed to Imprint Faces (p. After clicking Generate (p. The same functionality applies to Imprint and Slice operations as well. Inc. Here three bodies are chosen. By changing its value to Selected Bodies. frozen body transparency has been turned off. . the Target Bodies property will appear. 3D Features After changing the Material Type to Cut Material (p. Release 15. three of the five bodies have holes.© SAS IP. 243). and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. 243). Performing the Slice operation by selecting the same three bodies would yield this result.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. the bodies you wish to be cut may be chosen. Only the bodies selected as targets were used in the Boolean operation.

Each edge is split into several pieces: Here the profile is extruded with Merge Topology set to Yes: Here the profile is extruded with Merge Topology set to No: Release 15. Inc. . Setting the property to Yes will optimize the topology of feature bodies. Revolve. This property is a Yes/No combination box that gives you more control over feature topology. while setting it to no will leave the topology of feature bodies unaltered. 261).© SAS IP. • Sweep: The default is No.Contains proprietary and confidential information 288 of ANSYS.0 . • Revolve: The default is Yes. Sweep (p. consider a rectangular profile with a circular hole in it. The default setting for Merge Topology differs depending on the 3D feature you are using: • Extrude: The default is Yes. For example. All rights reserved.3D Modeling Merge Topology Extrude. and Skin each have a property called Merge Topology. . • Skin/Loft: The default is No. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

you should be cautious when changing the value of the Merge Topology property because after initial creation. 296) Sphere The Sphere feature creates a primitive sphere from an origin and radius. Primitives Setting the value to Yes optimizes all topology of the feature body. 391). Release 15. once other features depend on this. 292) • Cone (p. Inc. 294) • Torus (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 293) • Prism (p.0 . or by selecting geometry on the screen. 290) • Parallelepiped (p. Primitives ANSYS DesignModeler allows you to create models quickly by defining primitive shapes that do not require sketches. There are nine Primitive features in DesignModeler: • Sphere (p. 289) • Box (p. All the primitive features require several point and/or direction inputs. 291) • Cylinder (p. All rights reserved. 393) body operations with any of the Primitives. Inc. 289 . or Slice Material (p. 293) • Pyramid (p. 261) features to best represent the true charac- teristics of the profiles. It is however. Imprint Faces (p. 6). 295) • Bend (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the Target Bodies property is active in the Details View (p. . recommended to leave this setting as No for the Skin/Loft and Sweep (p. When using the Cut Material (p. Also. These inputs may be defined by either specifically typing in the coordinates or components. 392). faces and edges may appear or disappear and cause failures and invalid selections for subsequent features. Additionally.© SAS IP. each primitive contains a base plane which identifies the coordinate system in which the primitive is defined.

294) • Torus (p. 290) • Parallelepiped (p. All rights reserved. .© SAS IP. 292) • Cone (p. Inc. 293) • Prism (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 290 of ANSYS.3D Modeling Inputs • Origin: The center of the sphere. Release 15. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 293) • Pyramid (p. • Radius: The radius of the sphere. It can be defined in two ways: • From One Point and Diagonal: The box is defined by one point and a diagonal vector which defines the box's opposite corner. 295) • Bend (p. 291) • Cylinder (p.0 . . Inc. 296) Box The Box feature creates a primitive box. • From Two Points: The box is defined by two points that represent opposite corners of the box. Other Primitives: • Box (p.

295) • Bend (p. • Axis 2: The vector defining the second side of the parallelepiped. 294) • Torus (p. 291) • Cylinder (p. No coordinate of Point 2 may match its corresponding coordinate of Point 1. No two axis vectors may be parallel. • Diagonal: The vector spanning from the first point to its opposite point. 293) • Prism (p. • Axis 1: The vector defining the first side of the parallelepiped. • Axis 3: The vector defining the third side of the parallelepiped. 289) • Parallelepiped (p. 291 . Primitives Inputs • Point 1: The first corner of the box.0 . • Point 2: The second corner of the box. Other Primitives: • Sphere (p.© SAS IP. Release 15.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 296) Parallelepiped The Parallelepiped feature creates a parallelepiped from an origin and three axis vectors. All rights reserved. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inputs • Origin: The starting corner of the parallelepiped. Inc. The Diagonal vector must have non-zero inputs for all three of its components. . 293) • Pyramid (p. 292) • Cone (p.

289) • Box (p. 294) • Torus (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 292 of ANSYS. 293) • Prism (p. Inc. 292) • Cone (p. • Radius: The radius of the cylinder. 290) • Cylinder (p. 293) • Pyramid (p.0 . • Axis: The central axis of the cylinder. . Other Primitives: • Sphere (p. All rights reserved. axis.© SAS IP. 295) Release 15. 296) Cylinder The Cylinder feature creates a primitive cylinder from an origin. 293) • Prism (p. 290) • Parallelepiped (p. . 295) • Bend (p. 293) • Pyramid (p. A vector defining the central axis of the cylinder. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 291) • Cone (p. 294) • Torus (p. Inputs • Origin: The center of the cylinder at its base. Inc. and radius. 289) • Box (p.3D Modeling Other Primitives: • Sphere (p.

0 . Inc. Primitives • Bend (p. and two radii. 293) • Pyramid (p. . 289) • Box (p. All rights reserved. Note Either the Top Radius or the Base Radius may be zero.© SAS IP. 296) Cone The Cone feature creates a primitive cone from an origin. • Top Radius: The radius of the cone at its top. A vector defining the central axis of the cone. 295) • Bend (p. Other Primitives: • Sphere (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 293 . The prism's size can be defined in two ways: Release 15. 296) Prism The Prism feature creates a primitive prism. Inc. 294) • Torus (p. 290) • Parallelepiped (p. • Base Radius: The radius of the cone at its base. • Axis: The central axis of the cone. Inputs • Origin: The center of the cone at its base. axis. 291) • Cylinder (p. 292) • Prism (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. but not both.

© SAS IP. All rights reserved. • Sides: The number of prism sides. 291) • Cylinder (p. 289) • Box (p. be parallel. Inc. • By Side Length: The length of each side of the prism.0 . . A vector defining the central axis of the prism. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 292) • Cone (p. • Side Length: The length of each prism side. • Radius: The radius of the prism. . 293) • Pyramid (p. Inc. 290) • Parallelepiped (p. 294) • Torus (p. Note The Axis and Base vectors are not required to be perpendicular. Inputs • Origin: The center of the prism. • Base: The vector defining the direction to the first vertex of the prism. 296) Pyramid Release 15.3D Modeling • By Radius: A radius from the origin to an outer vertex. Other Primitives: • Sphere (p. 295) • Bend (p. • Axis: The central axis of the prism. They may not however.Contains proprietary and confidential information 294 of ANSYS.

• Base: The vector defining the pyramid base's alignment. Inputs • Origin: The center of the pyramid's base. Release 15. They may not however. A vector defining the central axis of the pyramid. • Pyramid Height: The height of the pyramid. Inc. • Base Width: The width of the pyramid base. • Axis: The central axis of the pyramid.0 . 295) • Bend (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. A value of zero implies a pyramid of full height. 293) • Torus (p.© SAS IP. Primitives The Pyramid feature creates a primitive pyramid. 289) • Box (p. Inc. 291) • Cylinder (p. All rights reserved. 290) • Parallelepiped (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 293) • Prism (p. . be parallel. Note The Axis and Base vectors are not required to be perpendicular. 295 . • Base Length: The length of the pyramid base. Other Primitives: • Sphere (p. 292) • Cone (p. 296) Torus The Torus feature creates a primitive torus.

be parallel. 296) Bend The Bend feature creates a rectangular bend.Contains proprietary and confidential information 296 of ANSYS. • Inner Radius: The distance from the axis to the inside of the torus. • Axis: The central axis of the torus. . They may not however. Inc. 293) • Pyramid (p. Other Primitives: • Sphere (p. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Release 15. 293) • Prism (p.© SAS IP. 289) • Box (p. • Outer Radius: The distance from the axis to the outside of the torus.0 . 291) • Cylinder (p. All rights reserved. 290) • Parallelepiped (p. The Axis and Base vectors are not required to be perpendicular. . • Base: The vector defining the alignment of the torus with respect to its axis.3D Modeling Inputs • Origin: The center of the torus. 292) • Cone (p. • Angle: The angle of rotation about the axis. Note The direction of rotation about the axis follows the right hand rule. 294) • Bend (p.

The Advanced Tools are: Release 15. Other Primitives: • Sphere (p. • Base Width: The width of the bend's profile.0 . Note The direction of rotation about the axis follows the right hand rule. • Base Length: The length of the bend's profile. • Base: The vector defining the alignment of the bend with respect to its axis. 293) • Prism (p. The Axis and Base vectors are not required to be perpendicular. • Angle: The angle of rotation about the axis. . 79). All rights reserved. • Axis: The central axis of the bend. 297 . 294) • Torus (p. They may not however. 290) • Parallelepiped (p. Advanced Features and Tools Inputs • Origin: The center of the bend. 292) • Cone (p. be parallel. • Radius: The distance from the axis to the center of the bend profile.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. 295) Advanced Features and Tools The Advanced Tools toolbar can be customized through the Options dialog box accessible under the Tools Menu (p. 289) • Box (p. 293) • Pyramid (p. 291) • Cylinder (p.

414) • Edge Delete (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 298 of ANSYS. Normally. 79). 388) • Boolean (p.3D Modeling • Freeze (p. 322) • Face Split (p. a 3D solid feature operates like this: Release 15. 378) • Conversion (p. 368) • Projection (p. 337) • Fill (p. sweepable volumes for hex meshing). 363) • Connect (p. 301) • Attribute (p. 310) • Joint (p. Freeze has two applications: it allows for an alternative method for assembly modeling with multiple body parts. Inc. .0 .© SAS IP. 361) • Merge (p. 298) • Unfreeze (p. 317) • Enclosure (p. 399) • Slice (p. All rights reserved. 382) • Pattern (p. and it allows you to slice a given part into several sub-volumes (for example. 357) • Surface Flip (p. 327) • Symmetry (p. 419) Freeze The Freeze feature is an advanced modeling tool available from the Tools Menu (p. . 340) • Surface Extension (p. 308) • Mid-Surface (p. 385) • Body Operation (p. 300) • Named Selection (p. 344) • Surface Patch (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 404) • Face Delete (p. Inc.

310) • Joint (p. 344) • Surface Patch (p. 327) • Symmetry (p. the body or bodies of an Extrude (p. Inc. 301) • Attribute (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 317) • Enclosure (p. 243) The Freeze feature allows you to control the second step.© SAS IP. 357) • Surface Flip (p. or Imprint Material operation of any features following the Freeze. The solid features offer an additional Boolean operation: • Slice Material (p. 337) • Fill (p. 252). All frozen bodies will be ignored when it comes to the Add. 243) Active bodies in the Slice operation will be frozen automatically in the case of Slice Material (p. Frozen bodies are denoted by the ice cube icon next to a body under the Bodies branch of the Tree Outline (p. the Freeze separator does not hide bodies from the Boolean operation. 340) • Surface Extension (p. 361) • Merge (p. 382) Release 15. All rights reserved. It acts as a separator in the construction history as displayed in the Tree Outline (p. 300) • Named Selection (p. 363) • Connect (p. 378) • Conversion (p.0 . Create the bodies of the 3D feature (for example. 242): • Add Material (p. Inc. 243) • Cut Material (p. . Advanced Features and Tools 1. Any bodies created for features before a Freeze will become frozen.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 252). 308) • Mid-Surface (p. Merge the feature bodies with the existing model via Boolean Operations (p. 368) • Projection (p. 2. Cut. 255) feature). 243) • Imprint Faces (p. Other Advanced Tools: • Unfreeze (p. 322) • Face Split (p. 243). 299 .

If you immediately Freeze the model after importing an assembly or import an assembly using the Add Frozen (p. 298) • Named Selection (p. 399) • Slice (p. 301) • Attribute (p. By default. with the Freeze and the Unfreeze tools. However. 404) • Face Delete (p. For this.Contains proprietary and confidential information 300 of ANSYS. 317) • Enclosure (p. All rights reserved. this is a different approach to assembly modeling and allows actually more (or other) functionality (for example. 388) • Boolean (p. 385) • Body Operation (p. Inc. because applying any form of a 3D modeling operation would simply merge any touching bodies into one. 252). ANSYS DesignModeler is not an assembly modeler. your bodies will be shielded from the merge. 310) • Joint (p. or a group of frozen bodies. all unselected bodies will become frozen. . at that point. certain modeling capabilities for (imported) assemblies do exist. You can. 327) Release 15. DesignModeler can now operate on the newly unfrozen bodies as it would on any other active bodies. Other Advanced Tools: • Freeze (p. You do not have to first Freeze immediately followed by an Unfreeze. the modeling capabilities of DesignModeler are limited. slicing). and merges them with the active bodies in the model if applicable. this can be circumvented with the Freeze and Unfreeze tools.3D Modeling • Pattern (p. while selected bodies will become active. Inc.0 . However. 419) Unfreeze The Unfreeze feature activates a selected body. On the one hand. you can use Unfreeze to select bodies to become "active. add new bodies. however. 244) operation. 414) • Edge Delete (p. you cannot modify any of the existing frozen bodies.© SAS IP. . if you import an assembly from a CAD package. rather it is an "extended" part modeler that can deal with multiple bodies. Freeze Others If set to Yes." (Active bodies are depicted as shaded blue blocks in the Tree Outline (p. 322) • Face Split (p. but on the other hand. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. this may seem a limitation. 308) • Mid-Surface (p.

Advanced Features and Tools • Symmetry (p. 344) • Surface Patch (p. Inc. 361) • Merge (p. 276)).0 . 6) of ANSYS DesignModeler. 385) • Body Operation (p. 388) • Boolean (p. See Propagate Selection for more information. 368) • Projection (p. This property is set to Yes by default. Propagate Selection Property — allows tracking of entities even after applying modeling operations. 404) • Face Delete (p. 419) Named Selection The Named Selection feature allows you to create named selections that can be transferred to the ANSYS Mechanical application. Only Named Selections which have the Export Selec- tion property set to Yes will be transferred to any downstream applications. Selections are performed through an Apply/Cancel property called Geometry in the Details View (p. See Face Coloring for more information. including point feature points (PF points (p. Inc. or used in the creation of some features. The Geometry property shows an updated entity count after the modeling operations. 382) • Pattern (p. . You can select any combination of 3D entities. 399) • Slice (p. All rights reserved. If the geometry file set in the Geometry cell is of type “agdb” then the Named Selection option will not be available in the Properties section of the Geometry cell in the ANSYS Workbench environment Project Schematic. 363) • Connect (p. 340) • Surface Extension (p. 378) • Conversion (p. Include In Legend Property — allows control of whether the Named Selection will appear in the graphical legend when the Face Coloring > by Name Selection graphics option is enabled. 301 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 337) • Fill (p. 357) • Surface Flip (p. This property is set to Yes by default.© SAS IP. This property is set to Yes by default. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 414) • Edge Delete (p. Export Selection Property — allows control of the transfer of Named Selections to downstream applic- ations such as the ANSYS Mechanical application. Release 15.

. CAD Specifics The Autodesk Inventor plug-in does support Named Selections beginning with numeric characters or containing spaces. Inc.3D Modeling The Details View (p. 252). and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. The SolidWorks reader and associative geometry interface do not import named selections defined in sub-assemblies. 317) • Enclosure (p. 6) of a Named Selection is shown below. . 340) Release 15. 308) • Mid-Surface (p. it is recommended that you create your Named Selection features last or Generate Named Selection features with Propagate Selection property set to Yes. 300) • Attribute (p. 322) • Face Split (p. Information pertaining to Named Selections in ANSYS DesignModeler can be categorized in four ways: Multiple Selection Types Named Selection Propagation Named Selection after Share Topology Named Selection in Regions of Shared Topology (Propagate Selection “No”) Other Advanced Tools: • Freeze (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 302 of ANSYS. 327) • Symmetry (p. For details. 231). The Export Selection and Include In Legend can be modified as a group if multiple Named Selection features in the Tree Outline (p. see Transfer from CAD (p.0 . 298) • Unfreeze (p. 337) • Fill (p. All rights reserved. 310) • Joint (p. To ensure your selections remain persistent in the ANSYS Mechanical application.© SAS IP.

it is highly recommended that you restrict them to a single type to avoid any persistence issues that may be caused by this. Inc. Inc. when the selected entity is split. you should avoid this practice. 307) Named Selection Propagation When the Propagation property is set to Yes. If you choose more than one entity type for a Named Selection feature in ANSYS DesignModeler. All rights reserved. 419) Multiple Selection Types The ANSYS Mechanical application does not support multiple selection types for its named selections. It is recommended that you do not delete or rename a Named Selection feature after the model has been transferred to the ANSYS Mechanical application. Other Named Selection topics: • Named Selection Propagation (p. 414) • Edge Delete (p. .0 . Also. For instance. as the model changes in DesignModeler. 344) • Surface Patch (p. If you try to use a Named Selection feature as a base object for a feature within DesignModeler. 388) • Boolean (p. if could affect how these are split when going to Mechanical. the Named selection feature will be updated Release 15. 385) • Body Operation (p. 363) • Connect (p. 382) • Pattern (p. while DesignModeler allows you to place multiple selection types into a Named Selection feature. you will get an error if it contains more than one entity type. However. If you are taking Named Selection to Mechanical. 404) • Face Delete (p. note that the ANSYS Mechanical application will retain the previous Named Selection features. 303 . it will be split into two or more named selections in the ANSYS Mechanical application. 368) • Projection (p. 361) • Merge (p. 303) • Named Selection after Share Topology (p. 399) • Slice (p. Advanced Features and Tools • Surface Extension (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. To avoid confusion. 357) • Surface Flip (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 306) • Named Selection in Regions of Shared Topology (Propagate Selection “No”) (p. the selected entities of a Named Selection are tracked through all modeling operations and the Named Selection feature is updated to reflect the modeling changes. one for each entity type.© SAS IP. 378) • Conversion (p.

Named Selection B retains remaining portion of the cylindrical face after Boolean unite operation. Case 2 After Boolean subtract with box as the target body. The results are shown below. Named Selection A contains the face which are created by splitting of parent face.3D Modeling to contain the new split entities. . 2 and 3. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Named Selection A is created for the upper box face and Named Selection B for the cylindrical face. Inc.© SAS IP. Case 1 After Boolean Unite between box and the cylinder.0 . Inc. Release 15. Named Selection B tracks the newly created cylindrical face after Boolean subtract operation which is derived from original cylindrical tool body. Consider the following three scenarios: Scenario 1: Named Selection Propagation with Boolean and Slice operation Scenario 2: Named Selection Propagation after Pattern or Body Operation Scenario 3: Named Selection Propagation after Merge operation Named Selection Propagation Limitations Scenario 1: Named Selection Propagation with Boolean and Slice operation Consider two frozen bodies as shown below for Cases 1. Named Selection A contains the face entities which are created by splitting of parent face. . All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information 304 of ANSYS. Some examples shown below explain the propagation behavior for different modeling operations.

All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Named Selection B will have two cylindrical faces tracked as shown in the figure below. Named Selection propagates to copied bodies. Release 15. Inc. 305 . Scenario 3: Named Selection Propagation after Merge operation Named Selection A is created for the middle upper face of the box (left).0 . Inc. Advanced Features and Tools Case 3 After slicing both box and cylinder with the upper face surface of the box. Named Selection A will have the entire top face of the box.© SAS IP. Named selection A will have three faces getting tracked. . Scenario 2: Named Selection Propagation after Pattern or Body Operation Named Selection A is created for upper box face (left side). If box is copied using Pattern or Body Oper- ation (p. which are created by splitting the parent face. When the upper middle face of the box is merged with the two adjacent faces. 388) feature. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

After Share Topology. Two boxes are present in a single part as frozen bodies as shown below. Inc. 307) Named Selection after Share Topology When you group bodies together into a multibody part. . Named Selection A tracks the small shared face as well as the larger face. they combine to form the multibody part. 506) ("DesignModeler Electronics" (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. you work with them in ANSYS DesignModeler as if they are independent bodies.0 . Release 15. A simple example is demon- strated below. When the shared topology is merged. . 303) • Named Selection after Share Topology (p. Named Selection A is created for a single face of the larger box. Inc. 505)-related) • Slice (when Slice Off Edges option is selected) Named Selection Propagation is not supported for Line Bodies in ANSYS DesignModeler.Contains proprietary and confidential information 306 of ANSYS.© SAS IP. which are derived or created from the larger selected parent face. All rights reserved. Other Named Selection topics: • Multiple Selection Types (p.3D Modeling Named Selection Propagation Limitations Usage with features Named Selection Propagation is not be available for the following ANSYS DesignModeler features: • Mid-Surface • Simplify (p. When the model is transferred from DesignModeler to another ap- plication. Named Selections will be retained. 306) • Named Selection in Regions of Shared Topology (Propagate Selection “No”) (p.

Inc. usually one of the original entities survives and the others are discarded. they combine to form the multibody part. 307) Named Selection in Regions of Shared Topology (Propagate Selection “No”) A named selection may become lost if you select a region in which topology is shared. Though solid and sheet bodies can be tracked through Named Selection propagation. If you create the named se- lection without first adding the Share Topology (p. you should add the Share Topology (p. Inc. Other Named Selection topics: • Multiple Selection Types (p. Not doing so could result in touching entities merging or splitting which may break named selection features created in previous steps. To properly preserve named selections placed on entities that are subject to modification in the share topology step during transfer to another application. When the model is transferred from DesignModeler to another application.© SAS IP. the named selection may transfer to the circular face in the ANSYS Mechanical application as shown in the right-hand illus- Release 15. 253) feature is generated. When the shared topology is merged. Note Named Selection will automatically set Propagate Selection property to No while generating older databases. the part will have three bodies. . 307 . When you group bodies together into a multibody part. 303) • Named Selection Propagation (p. Named Selection A will contain two bodies which includes the newly created body due to Share Topology feature.0 . Example 30: Adding Named Selection Suppose you want to create a named selection for the top face of a cube. 253) feature in DesignModeler. wire bodies cannot be tracked by Named Selection feature. Models render the same in DesignModeler as in other applications after selecting the Share Topology feature. you still work with them in ANSYS DesignModeler as if they are independent bodies. Two Frozen bodies are present in a single part. 253) feature in the model before creating named selections. 303) • Named Selection in Regions of Shared Topology (Propagate Selection “No”) (p. which helps in preserving named selections. Advanced Features and Tools An example of Named Selection propagation for bodies after share topology is given below. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. When a Named Selection A created for the selected body and Share Topology (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.

the names selection will be transferred appropriately to other applet as shown in the right-hand illustration. 303) • Named Selection after Share Topology (p. where each group can have its own “Attribute Data Type”. Other Named Selection topics: • Multiple Selection Types (p. The “Attribute Data Type” can be None. Attributes are transferred to the ANSYS Mechanical application by first selecting the Attributes option in the Default Geometry Options section of the ANSYS Workbench Project Schematic. After you select and Apply geometry for the attribute. Along with the Attribute Name. 253) feature in DesignModeler. Inc. Many more characters. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Integer. or Text. . Release 15. 303) • Named Selection Propagation (p. and vertices. the attribute can also have a value associated with it. Double. If named selection is added after selecting the Share Topology (p. You can select any combination of 3D edges. Selections are performed through an Apply/Cancel property called “Geometry” in the Details View in Modeling Mode (p. the “Attribute Name” property is much less re- strictive.© SAS IP. Note that selecting all the entities in the shared topology may not help to preserve the named selection appropriately in the ANSYS Mechanical application. Unlike feature names which have numerous restrictions on what characters are allowed. bodies.3D Modeling tration. including “[“ and “]” are allowed. Boolean.Contains proprietary and confidential information 308 of ANSYS. and value. This is the actual name that is transferred to the ANSYS Mechanical application. 306) Attribute The Attribute feature allows you to associate names/values that can be tied to selection groups and transferred to the ANSYS Mechanical application. 238) of ANSYS DesignModeler. All rights reserved. you can also use the right mouse button to choose to add additional groups of selections.0 . faces. not the feature name. Inc. .

414) Release 15. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. 310) • Joint (p. Other Advanced Tools: • Freeze (p. 337) • Fill (p. 300) • Named Selection (p. 301) • Mid-Surface (p.0 .DS. 378) • Conversion (p. 388) • Boolean (p. Advanced Features and Tools There you must provide a key string that is used to choose which attributes you wish to transfer.DDM. 385) • Body Operation (p. Inc. 361) • Merge (p. This field can have any number of prefixes with each prefix delimited by a semicolon (for example: DM. An Attribute feature will be transferred to the ANSYS Mechanical application if the key string given in the ANSYS Workbench environment is found in the feature's name. 317) • Enclosure (p. If the key is set to an empty string. 309 . 357) • Surface Flip (p. 363) • Connect (p. then you will get a “Previous Attribute overwritten” warning. 340) • Surface Extension (p.© SAS IP. 298) • Unfreeze (p. 327) • Symmetry (p. 382) • Pattern (p. 344) • Surface Patch (p. 368) • Projection (p. By default the filter is set to SD- FEA.WB). 399) • Slice (p. Note If a subsequent Attribute feature defines an attribute of the same name on an item that already has an attribute with that name. all applicable attributes will be used. 322) • Face Split (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. 404) • Face Delete (p. .

Since the “suggested” value is determined via a quick binary search. with the eventual normal pointing outward from the purple face. For planar faces this is expli- citly tested for and if they do not point away from each other. a warning message will be displayed and the pair will not be used. and four additional properties for automatic detection. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. The selected faces must be of the same type and be defined such that one is essentially offset from the other by a fixed distance. then they will be automatically computed from your current selections. and the extent to which they are not perfect offsets is greater than the Selection Tolerance (p. and the second lavender (hot pink). or set up additional properties so that matching faces can be automatically detected. • Selection Method: Here you can decide whether to manually select faces. 310) Automatic Detection Properties (p. For other face types. You must select a face and its matching face in the order you prefer. All rights reserved. if they are offsets. Release 15. Inc.3D Modeling • Edge Delete (p. especially the first pair of a given thickness. 212) bodies that are midway between existing Solid (p. If you have face pairs already selected when you select Automatic mode and you have not yet set min/max threshold values. 312) Mid-Surface Context Menu Options (p. if you select a pair of faces that are not exact offsets of one another. 419) Mid-Surface The Mid-Surface feature allows the creation of Surface (p. Along with the basic name property. If possible. . If they are valid. The resulting surface body/bodies have a Thickness property which defines the "thickness" that surface body represents. a warning will be displayed and they will not be used. 311). • Face Pairs: An Apply/Cancel property that facilitates the selection of the matching faces. The mid-surface will be generated attempting to have the normal such that it points from the second (lavender / hot pink) face towards the first (purple) face. Starting in release 12.1. 311) that would allow the face pair to be used. the feature will assume you are selecting a face and immediately its matching face. they will be used but the results may not be correct. 313) Basic Properties The basic properties that define the Mid-Surface feature: • Mid-Surface: This property allows you to assign your own name to the Mid-Surface feature. Inc. In general. Mid-Surface topics: Basic Properties (p. If you try to select two or more faces on one side before se- lecting the other side. 212) body faces.0 . or in the same direction. Also. The faces can be manually selected. you typically can use a value slightly smaller than what is suggested. . or an automatic mode allows you to set a thickness range and then automatically detect matching face pairs. The order of the selected faces is important. there are six properties for defining a Mid-Surface via manual selection. the first face will be colored purple. but the normals point toward each other. the output bodies are grouped into parts based on the original bodies they came from. the warning message will include a “suggested” Selection Tolerance (p. the normals from the two faces should point away from each other. thus leading to errors. 312) Usage (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 310 of ANSYS.

If the actual thickness of a resulting surface body is less than half of the Thickness Tolerance.0 . The thickness of resulting surface bodies is also rounded to the nearest multiple of the Thickness Tolerance. along with those that are within the thickness tolerance of that distance. Also. it will try to suggest a looser value. This value cannot be smaller than the Selection Tolerance (p. 311 . Inc. there are sometimes small gaps between these individual surfaces. Release 15. However. a tolerance can be very helpful. Note that using too large of a sewing tolerance can lead to slots or openings getting filled when they should not. a warning will be displayed that this can affect both speed and reliability of the result. you can set the allowable deviation from a “perfect offset” that is allowed during face pair selection. can be grouped to- gether. 212) body. that you manually select several face pairs before first going to Automatic mode. The feature will attempt to combine resulting surface bodies which touch one another and have the same thickness into a single Surface (p. Inc. 311) above. it is useful to be able to trim surface bodies that have trimming errors to the original body. be aware that this means its thickness will be set to zero. You also have options to delete surface bodies with trimming errors. If you set it to a smaller value. • Extra Trimming: As with the Sewing Tolerance (p. This helps to insure that you automatic selection range includes what is needed. 311) to other than zero. Note that if you use the "Delete Untrimmed" option and there are trimming problems. However. 311) below. This is because internally when there is a Selection Tolerance. or that if expected pairs are not getting selected that you manually select one of these pairs and then use the right mouse button context menu option to Adjust Min/Max Thresholds. If you set it to a larger value. 311) is set larger than half of the Minimum Threshold. • Sewing Tolerance: During the creation of the Mid-Surface. Very large tolerances can result in strange results and should be avoided. then the Selection Tolerance will automatically be updated to the smaller value. you will not be able to use "Show Problematic Geometry" as the problem geometry will have been deleted. or to keep them with no additional trimming. For example you could get face pairs being selected by Automatic selection that are not really wanted. Like the Sewing Tolerance (p. This value cannot be larger than the Thickness Toler- ance (p. the final Mid-Surface itself allows for a tolerance of twice this amount for the overall surface. A good approach is to try to use a small selection tolerance and if some face pairs cannot be selected automatically. especially if you use a non-zero Selection Tolerance (p. • Thickness Tolerance: This property provides a tolerance so that face pairs that are the same distance apart. this may be increased to a point where the gap gets closed. If the Selection Tolerance is too tight. . Normally it is not necessary to change this tolerance. If trimming to the original body would result in a non-manifold surface body. When using Automatic Selection and you set the Selection Tolerance (p. 311). These are then trimmed to other surfaces and then sewn together with other sur- faces of the same thickness to attempt to form as few surface bodies as possible. it can take significantly longer to do the Automatic Selection. could result in some face pairs being off in one direction and others being off in the opposite direction.© SAS IP. but too loose of a tolerance can also lead to problems. Because allowing face pairs to be slightly off by this tolerance amount. • Selection Tolerance: Here. then try manual selection. many offsets/orientations are attempted in testing to see if a face pair is usable. then the Thickness Tolerance will automatically be updated to the larger value. there are situations that the internal trimming algorithms cannot completely handle. or at times to trim all surface bodies to the original body for cases where no error was detected even though the trimming was not correct. All rights reserved. internally surfaces are created from each face pair selected. 311).Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. This tolerance specifies the maximum gap that can be closed by the sewing process. Advanced Features and Tools It is suggested. then the surface body will remain untrimmed. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. if the Selection Tolerance (p. In these cases. if you find there are small gaps in the resulting body. 311).

5)). If you choose Selected Bodies an additional Bodies property is displayed that allows you to select the bodies to process. only values greater than zero are allowed. then that value is set equal to the Maximum Threshold. If it is set larger than the Maximum Threshold. If there are no problems then this option is the same as the No option. this allows you to select a single face and all face pairs that contain that face are removed. • Minimum Threshold: This sets the minimum distance allowed between face pairs during automatic detection. Also. 311). • Find Face Pairs Now: This property will always display a No as its value. Replace Face Pairs Note that this option will not be available if these are zero. then that value is set equal to the Minimum Threshold.0 . Automatic Detection Properties If you choose the Automatic Selection method. the following four additional properties are shown: • Bodies to Search: Here you choose which bodies to search. With this option. the options shown for this are – No – Yes. . as well as the Thickness Tolerance (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. If it is set less than the Minimum Threshold. All rights reserved. The other choices are All Bodies. then the surface bodies created by those pairs will be inside the preserved Solid (p. and Selected Bodies. then that body will be preserved.3D Modeling • Preserve Bodies: Here you can decide whether the bodies whose faces you are selecting are kept or not after the Mid-Surface feature is generated. Note that in Edit Selections mode the mouse cursor is enclosed by a pair of concentric circles whose diameters are equal to the Minimum and Maximum Threshold provided. When you set it to Yes. 212) body. detection is done at that time. The default value is No. If some face pairs for that body are successful. if one or more of the selected face pairs in a body cannot be properly processed. Also. When the Face Pairs property is active. Inc. only values greater than zero are allowed. Inc. • Maximum Threshold: This sets the maximum distance allowed between face pairs during automatic detection. This enables you to visualize the threshold provided in the model workspace (Graphics Window (p. several Mid-Surface specific options are presented: • Add Face Pairs: This is the default mode for selecting face pairs. Along with the Yes and No options there is also an option to Preserve body if error. The default is Visible Bodies. • Remove Face Pairs: When the Face Pairs property is active. this allows you to add additional face pairs. using the settings you have provided for the Threshold and Bodies.© SAS IP. When it is finished processing. If you have previously selected face pairs.Contains proprietary and confidential information 312 of ANSYS. this value is automatically set back to No. The image shows the cursor change when Minimum and Maximum Threshold provided are 1 and 2 millimeters respectively. Mid-Surface Context Menu Options If you select the right mouse button while the cursor is in the graphics area. Release 15. . Add to Face Pairs – Yes.

• Adjust Min/Max Thresholds: This uses the distance between all currently selected face pairs to set the Minimum and Maximum Threshold properties. • Another reason to use small threshold ranges is to avoid selection of valid. All rights reserved. Also. it is better to set identical minimum and maximum threshold ranges and use a fairly tight tolerance to avoid a mismatch of faces. this allows you to select a single face and all face pairs that contain that face are reversed. the resulting mid-surface may not be correct. However. For example. 311) of greater than zero. Planar faces will not be accepted if the normals do not point in the correct directions. Inc. • Sewing Tolerance (p. • If your model has small faces. Usage There are several important concepts to understand to ensure successful use of the Mid-Surface feature. Close is not good enough. • Selecting face pairs that do not make sense will likely lead to errors. For other face types it is up to you to choose properly. These cannot be properly trimmed and lead to trimming errors. Starting in release 12. This means you can set both thresholds to the same value and then only get faces that are within the tolerance range of that thickness. the Automatic Face Pair detection logic does a much better job of avoiding selection of face pairs that would result in intersection surface bodies. 311) can be used to close small gaps. Advanced Features and Tools • Reverse Face Pairs: When the Face Pairs property is active. Inc. • Selected face pairs must be an equal distance apart at all locations. For example if you have a rectangular block 2 x 4 x 8 and you use a threshold range from 1 to 5.0 . • Resultant surface body names come from their original bodies. • You may right click on the Mid-Surface feature in the tree if it has errors or warnings and look at either the error/warnings.© SAS IP. If faces are selected that do not follow this rule. 311). you will get the face pair that is 2 units apart and the face pair that is 4 units apart. unless you have a Selection Tolerance (p. • You are free to mix manual selections and automatic detections (for example with different thresholds). 212) bodies rather than a single mid-surface surface body to represent the block. So for this part a range of 1 to 3 would work much better. or even better would be 2 to 2 so that you get used to using just exactly what is wanted.1. with solid material between them. otherwise they must be exact offsets of each other. but using very large values can lead to invalid results. The result would be two intersecting mid-surface surface bodies. • You can control the normal direction of automatically detected faces by selecting an initial pair manually. but unwanted face pairs. This is automatically checked for planar pairs. A range of 1 to 9 would result in three intersecting surface bodies. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. all face pairs that are dependent on the selected face via adjacent face connections that have matching orientation are also reversed. selecting more than a single face pair on a simple block solid leads to multiple intersecting Surface (p. Additionally. Release 15. • Clear Existing Face Pair Selections: This clears all current face pairs. or at the geometry causing the problem. you should still avoid using too large of a gap between the minimum and maximum threshold. • The minimum and maximum threshold ranges are actually expanded by half of the Thickness Toler- ance (p. 313 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. the normals to the selected pairs should point away from each other. .

but does not always force it to the side you may want. However. The overall time is significantly effected by the number of faces in a body. – Reduce complexity of your model as much as possible ahead of time. – First use the Automatic Selection method with zero Selection Tolerance. If you interactively change the Selection Tolerance (p. then when you interactively try to change the other and it would cause the parameterized value to need to change. – Use as small of a Selection tolerance as possible (manually select a number of the face pairs that are not perfect offsets to get an idea of what tolerance is needed). 311) to a value larger than the Thickness Tolerance (p. There is no control as to which side will be used for the offset. Similarly. be wary of using too large of a Selection Tolerance (p. the created surface between those faces will actually be offset from one side or the other. then the Selection Tolerance will be set to the same value. For example. 51) features to import CAD geometric data into DesignModeler. using Yes. Or use Face Delete to remove faces for holes if they are not needed. in one example of a complex body that took over 10 and a half minutes to do auto selection (with no selection tolerance). but the “Check” tab will show an “Invalid” for the offending assignment and the change will not be used. just splitting it in two. there is a relationship between them. or are internally cor- rected but subsequent operations before the feature completes generation. Release 15. . 311). then the Thickness Tolerance will be updated to the same value. After that finishes. Inc.0 . The selection order of the face pair can influence this. you should try to use as small of a Selection Tolerance as may be needed. at times these “possible” errors are either not truly an error. 56) and Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. if you set the Thickness Tolerance to a value smaller than the Selection Tolerance. To avoid problems. • When the low level functions detect a possible error in trimming. you should strongly consider setting the Simplify Geometry option to Yes. the feature is marked with a warning. There are several things you can do to improve this: – Try to keep your Minimum and Maximum Thresholds as close as possible.3D Modeling • Like the Sewing Tolerance (p. Inc. it can be very slow. The process time to work on multiple bodies created by slicing a complex one will be much faster than dealing with the single complex one. planar faces go much faster that curved ones). – When using the Import External Geometry File (p. another approach is to just not use that face pair and instead use the Surface Patch feature to fill the hole in the resulting surface body.© SAS IP. use Face Delete ahead of time to remove these from the model. • In some cases with a very difficult to handle face pair. a warning will be displayed and your change will not be accepted. For example if small blends are not needed for your ana- lysis. In these cases the feature will still be marked with the warning. 311) as that can lead to potential errors as well. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. • As noted above in the description of Selection and Thickness Tolerances. especially with a non-zero selection tolerance. – Slice can be used to break a large complex body down into smaller ones.Contains proprietary and confidential information 314 of ANSYS. If one of these is made into a parameter. If this situation occurs during execution of parameters. All rights reserved. However. Add to Face Pairs. provided it can be done within tolerance. but it actually okay. 311). • When using the Automatic Selection method on large complex bodies. . • When using a Selection Tolerance (p. do it again with the Selection Tolerance. the warning will not show. allowed auto selection to process both in about 5 and a half minutes. 311) for selecting face pairs that are not truly offsets of one an- other. and the complexity of those faces (for example.

0 . 388) option on the bodies to be used for Mid-Surface prior to using them with the Automatic Selection Method basic property. . This can make a major difference on the performance. then before using Mid-Surface feature. go to the Automatic Selection mode. These pairs represent the two thicknesses of this model. Inc.. 315 . Next. it automatically calculates a range based on the current selections.. This can also be done via the right mouse button context menu at any time. for Find Face Pairs Now. • Linux platform: ... load the part. Auto Selection went from 20 minutes to 3 seconds! Example 31: Step-by-Step Usage The following example should help to demonstrate some of the functionality described above. In the first figure. Advanced Features and Tools – If not done elsewhere. chose the Mid-Surface feature.© SAS IP./ansys_inc/v150/aisol/Samples/DesignModeler/MidSurfaceB- racket. All rights reserved. Since some face pairs are already se- lected. In one example. Inc. after selecting Apply. and the minimum and maximum thresholds have not yet been set. even though it touches the main bracket is a separate body. select Yes. Release 15. insert the Body Operation's Simpli- fy (p. Add to Face Pairs. Browse to one of the following: • Windows platform: .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The Demo_Bracket part is imported and is actually two separate solids. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Now. or the thresholds can be set manually. as you might have in an assembly part. and select two face pairs (using the stacked rectangles in the lower left to choose hidden faces). The front brace.\Program Files\ANSYS Inc\v150\AISOL\Samples\DesignModel- er\MidSurfaceBracket.

the front brace was a separate body. instead of two Solid (p. Other Advanced Tools: • Freeze (p. Inc. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information 316 of ANSYS.0 . in the final figure below. .3D Modeling Now you are ready to Apply. Also. you will see that the resulting surface bodies for the back brace are automatically extended/trimmed to meet the main part of the bracket. 298) • Unfreeze (p. Now. as these were all part of one Solid (p. so it is not automatically extended. They cannot be combined into a single body because the "T" intersections would cause it to be non-manifold. and then Generate. 212) body originally. . 212) bodies. Here is the result of the Generate. 300) Release 15. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Note that the Surface Extension feature can be used to extend the front brace so it does meet the main bracket.© SAS IP. However. there are four surface bodies. All rights reserved.

385) • Body Operation (p.© SAS IP. Selected geometry will be imprinted on each other as per requirement. 212) body) as input. two coincident edges will still exist in ANSYS DesignModeler as separate edges. 404) • Face Delete (p. Inc. 327) • Symmetry (p. then edges will be imprinted Release 15. set the Shared Topology option to Yes. 419) Joint The Joint feature is a tool used to create joints between different geometries of different bodies to- gether so that their contact regions will be treated as shared topology when meshed in the ANSYS Mechanical application. both active and frozen body selections are permitted. but when the model is attached to the Mechanical applic- ation.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 322) • Face Split (p. 337) • Fill (p. That is. Inc. 361) • Merge (p.0 . 378) • Conversion (p. Advanced Features and Tools • Named Selection (p. 344) • Surface Patch (p. 308) • Joint (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 363) • Connect (p. 317) • Enclosure (p. 382) • Pattern (p. Imprinted edges will display an edge joint where the coincident edges are to signify that their edges will be shared. the edges are merged into one. All rights reserved. 414) • Edge Delete (p. 317 . The Share Topology property allows you to control the behavior of the feature: • Share Topology: To treat the imprinted edges as shared topology in the Mechanical application. 399) • Slice (p. 368) • Projection (p. The feature takes two or more geometries (at least one should belong to a Surface (p. 301) • Attribute (p. . There is no restriction on the states of the bodies you select. If Share Topology is set to No. 388) • Boolean (p. 340) • Surface Extension (p. 357) • Surface Flip (p.

For example. . but no shared topology information is kept.3D Modeling on both surface bodies. Two more properties list the results of the Joint operation: • Edge joints generated: This tells you the number of edge joints that the Joint feature created. For this reason. . Release 15. See the Shared Topology section for more information. since they created non-manifold geometry.0 . ANSYS DesignModeler would normally not allow these two bodies to be merged. it is recommended that you apply Joint features after you are done building your model. Notice that the shared edges are shown as thick blue lines. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. The value of this property will always be zero if Share Topology is set to No. 212) bodies. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information 318 of ANSYS. Additionally. After generating the Joint feature.© SAS IP. then the edge joint will become expired and no longer appear when viewing the edge joints. • Expired edge joints: This will inform you of any edge joints that have expired due to model changes. edges are imprinted onto all three bodies. The default setting is Yes. All rights reserved. Using the Joint feature. you can imprint the bodies and form shared topology between them. suppose you wish to join the following two Surface (p. and topology sharing in- formation is created. If any edges in an edge joint are modified in any way. the three bodies are grouped under the same part. This property is not displayed if there are no expired edge joints for a Joint feature.

Advanced Features and Tools The Joint feature limits selection to the required geometries from the bodies rather than the selection of a sheet or line body as a whole. For more information on viewing edge joints.0 . Overlapping line bodies The Joint feature cannot be used to create a joint when the line bodies overlap or touch one another on a Surface (p. see Show Edge Joints. All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Release 15. Joint Limitations Usage with line bodies The Joint feature cannot be used to create an edge joint between two line bodies or imprint lines on one another. Illustrated below is an example of such selection and the resulting Edge Joint.© SAS IP. 319 . . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 212) body. Inc. Inc.

Contains proprietary and confidential information 320 of ANSYS. Even if the joint feature is partially successful. the Joint Feature will be partially successful and will imprint both the edges on each other and thereby splitting the edges at the point of intersection as shown in the figure (II). Release 15. . All rights reserved. In this case the Joint Feature will be partially successful and results in splitting of the edge of the face at the intersection.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. In the following figure (I). two edges of different wire bodies were given as the input for the Joint Feature. . one face of the sheet body and one edge of a line body were given as the input of the Joint Feature. In this case. The selection in the fol- lowing figure for a Joint feature is invalid as both the faces are from the same sheet body.0 . it may split the edges in selected geometries.3D Modeling The Joint feature will not create joints between geometries of the same body. Figure 1: I In the following case. Inc. Inc.

.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 298) • Unfreeze (p. 414) • Edge Delete (p. 300) • Named Selection (p.0 . 382) • Pattern (p. 363) • Connect (p.© SAS IP. Inc. 340) • Surface Extension (p. 327) • Symmetry (p. 378) • Conversion (p. 357) • Surface Flip (p. 385) • Body Operation (p. 388) • Boolean (p. All rights reserved. Inc. Advanced Features and Tools Figure 2: II Other Advanced Tools: • Freeze (p. 404) • Face Delete (p. 321 . 310) • Enclosure (p. 308) • Mid-Surface (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 361) • Merge (p. 322) • Face Split (p. 301) • Attribute (p. 337) • Fill (p. 399) • Slice (p. 419) Release 15. 344) • Surface Patch (p. 368) • Projection (p.

Contains proprietary and confidential information 322 of ANSYS. 6) when this body is selected) set to Fluid. Release 15. 210) (as seen in the Details View (p.0 . 210) for more information about editing the property.3D Modeling Enclosure The Enclosure feature is a tool used to enclose the bodies of a model so that the material enclosing the bodies can be assigned to something such as a gas or fluid in the ANSYS Mechanical application. Inc. the Enclosure feature with symmetry planes forms two types of named selections if the Enclosure and Symmetry Processing option is enabled on the Project Schematic: • Open Domain: All exterior enclosure surfaces that are not coincident to any symmetry planes are grouped in an Open Domain named selection. If a full model is used. no shared topology will be gen- erated between surface bodies and their enclosures upon application of the Share Topo- logy (p. You can choose either full or partial models to be included in the enclosure. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All types of bodies will be enclosed but only Solid (p. 212) bodies will be cut out of the enclosure. All rights reserved. symmetry planes will slice off the Enclos- ure feature and only a portion of the enclosure will be retained. See Fluid/Solid Property (p. Inc. A symmetry model may contain up to three symmetry planes.© SAS IP. 253) feature or transfer of the model into the Mechanical application. Therefore. This operation will not delete any bodies currently in the model. their faces will not be cut from the enclosure body because it would violate the rules of Manifold Geometry. . Example 32: Full model with one symmetry plane During the model transfer from ANSYS DesignModeler to the Mechanical application. The Enclosure feature supports symmetry models when the shape of enclosures is a box or a cylinder. The frozen enclosure body will have a Fluid/Solid Property (p. and then cuts the bodies out of the enclosure. creates a frozen enclosure body around those bodies. . The feature takes either all the bodies or selected bodies of the model as input. Note When working with surface bodies.

Example 33: Partial model with two symmetry planes These additional properties allow you to control the behavior of the feature: • Shape: This property specifies the shape of the enclosure. Advanced Features and Tools • Symmetry Plane: For each symmetry plane. There are four different alignments the cylinder can have: Automatic (default) X-Axis Y-Axis Release 15. This will happen regardless of the Import Coordinate Systems setting in the Project Schematic. . It is an Apply/Cancel property that facilitates selection of the user defined enclosure body. A similar note (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. from both the enclosure and the model.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. • Cylinder Alignment: If cylinder is selected for the Shape property then this property becomes available. The body selected for this property may not be included in the list of target bodies. Inc. all faces. Inc.© SAS IP. 323 . Additionally. Additionally. All rights reserved. The Mechanical application will not delete the previous symmetry planes during updating. There are four different shapes available: Box (default) Sphere Cylinder User Defined • User Defined Body: If User Defined is selected for the Shape property. only one user-defined body can be selected. It is recommended that you do not change the symmetry plane selection after a model has been transferred to the Mechanical application. each symmetry plane chosen in the Enclosure feature will be transferred to the Mechanical application as a coordinate system. This specifies the cylinder axis of the bounding cylinder surrounding the target bodies. 303) applies when using the Named Selection feature. then this property becomes available.0 . that are coincident to the symmetry plane are grouped into a named selection.

– Symmetry Plane1 : first symmetry plane selection – Symmetry Plane2: second symmetry plane selection – Symmetry Plane3: third symmetry plane selection – Model Type: This property specify either Full Model or Partial Model as input for the en- closure with symmetry planes: Full Model: ANSYS DesignModeler will use the chosen symmetry planes to cut the full model. While the computed bounding box is usually very close to the minimum-bounding box. . Partial Model: Since the model has already been reduced to its symmetrical por- tion.3D Modeling Z-Axis Automatic alignment will align the cylinder axis in the largest direction (X. material on the positive side of the plane (that is. the distance specified by the cushion property has increased from 500m to 500Km when the large model support option is enabled. Note At ANSYS release 12. DesignModeler will automatically determine on which side of the symmetry planes the material lies. or Z) of the bounding box surrounding the target bodies. Release 15.© SAS IP. For two symmetry planes. All rights reserved. and then the cushion value is applied to make the enclosure larger. Inc. For the enclosure with symmetry planes. the intersection of the first two symmetry planes is used. The bounding box calculation for the model used in the Enclosure feature is guaranteed to contain the model (or selected bodies). the +Z direction) is kept.0 . Cushion values for Box or Cylinder type enclosures can be either Uniform or Non-Uniform. • Cushion: The cushion property specifies the distance between the model and the outside of the en- closure body. 2. For three symmetry planes.1. Similarly Cylinder Enclosure takes the cushion values for radius. Y. while material on the negative side is cut away. it is not guaranteed. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. This property may also be set as a design parameter. the largest dimension of the bounding box for the target bodies is used. positive and negative reference directions. Non- Uniform type accepts different values for X. This property is available for all enclosure shapes except User Defined. The enclosure is initially calculated to be just big enough to fit the model. 3. the intersection of the two symmetry planes is used. The default value is 0. The cushion is set to a default value and must be greater than zero. Inc. – Number of Planes: This property defines how many symmetry planes are used in the en- closure. For each symmetry plane. For one symmetry plane. the following rules are applied for automatic alignment: 1. Y and Z directions for the Box dimension. leaving only the symmetrical portion. .Contains proprietary and confidential information 324 of ANSYS.

the enclosure body (or bodies) and all target bodies will be merged into a single part.© SAS IP. All rights reserved. 212) bodies will not be merged. Advanced Features and Tools • Target Bodies: This property specifies whether all of the bodies or only selected bodies of the model will be enclosed. Inc. It is an Ap- ply/Cancel button property that facilitates selection of the target bodies that you wish to be enclosed. and will automatically be set to no after each Merge Parts operation. None of the bodies selected for this property can also be selected as the user-defined body. Sphere Enclosure Release 15.0 . Only Solid (p. If Yes. • Merge Parts: This property specifies whether or not the enclosure and its target bodies will be merged together to form a part. . 212) bodies are considered when merging parts . then no attempt is made to group the bodies into the same part. It is only available during feature creation or while performing Edit Selections. • Bodies: If Target Bodies is set to Selected Bodies then this property becomes available. Inc. If the property is set to no. nor is any attempt made to undo any groupings previously performed. Shown below is the creation of each enclosure shape: Box Enclosure of heat sink model. The default is All Bodies. 325 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.line and Surface (p. The Merge Parts property is set to no by default.

Other Advanced Tools: • Freeze (p.0 . Inc. All rights reserved.3D Modeling Cylinder Enclosure with Y-Axis alignment Shown below is the creation process of a User Defined Enclosure: First Freeze the body or bodies that you will build your enclosure around. 300) Release 15. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information 326 of ANSYS. . Then create the User Defined Enclosure over the selected bodies.© SAS IP. . 298) • Unfreeze (p.

0 . The default option is “By Point and Edges”. Face Split Types: This property is used to define the type of face split. Inc. 301) • Attribute (p. 344) • Surface Patch (p. Advanced Features and Tools • Named Selection (p. 308) • Mid-Surface (p. sketch edges. Tool Geometry: When the face split type is “By Point and Edges” you can select sketch point pairs. 317) • Face Split (p. spot pairs. 3D edges or different combinations of point pairs and edges. A face used in one Face Split Group can not be used for other Face Split Groups. 385) • Body Operation (p. 388) • Boolean (p. 399) • Slice (p. The face selected for the operation can come from either active or frozen bodies. vertex pairs. All rights reserved. 378) • Conversion (p. 357) • Surface Flip (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 361) • Merge (p. 414) • Edge Delete (p. 337) • Fill (p. 382) • Pattern (p. 404) • Face Delete (p.© SAS IP. 327) • Symmetry (p. You can choose either “By Point and Edges” or “By Location”. 327 . 419) Face Split You can use the Face Split feature to split a face into any number of faces. When the face split type is “By Location” you can create split locations on the target face and/or boundary Release 15. . It projects the selected edges or point pairs or split locations in a direction that is closest to target face. Target Face: This property facilitates the selection of the face to be split. 368) • Projection (p. 363) • Connect (p. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 340) • Surface Extension (p. 310) • Joint (p.

Release 15. Inc. provided these points lie on the face being split. Inc. You can also select split locations which do not belong to the current Face Split Group but lie on the boundary edges of the target face of the current group. It has three options. All rights reserved. Vertices. . “By Parametric Spline”. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Contains proprietary and confidential information 328 of ANSYS. The default option is “By Straight Line”. Connect Locations: This property is applicable only when the face split type is “By Location”. and “By 3D Spline”.0 . The default option is Yes.” When the merge edges option is Yes it merges an allowable set of edges on the target face. and Spots can be selected by hit location. 2D sketch points. Example 34: Graphics View of Connect Locations By Straight Line By Parametric Spline By 3D Spline Merge Edges: This property is available only when the connect locations type is “By Straight Line. The “By 3D Spline” option uses a 3D curve from the selected points and splits the face straight across instead of following the parameterization of the faces as in the case of the “By Parametric Spline” option.© SAS IP. “By Straight Line”. .3D Modeling edges of the target face by clicking on the graphics view.

Type: This property is visible only when face split type is “By Location” and the number of tool geometries is more than one. Y Coordinate. This property defines two types of parameterization. Face Split topics: Split Location Group Control via Context Menu (p. The default option is “By Fraction”.0 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 6). All rights reserved. 337) Release 15. “By Fraction” and “By Coordinates”. the corresponding split location will be highlighted in the graphics view. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. Advanced Features and Tools Select A Group: Clicking on the group header will highlight the corresponding target face. this property can be edited. These properties define the location of the split in the global coordinate system. . Fraction/Parameter: When the property “Type” selected is “By Fraction”. Clicking a property of the split location in the Details View (p. Z Coordinate: When the property “Type” selected is “By Coordinates”.© SAS IP. X Coordinate. Inc. 329 . 336) Errors/Warnings Status of Face Split Group (p. these properties can be edited. 334) Graphics Context Menu Options (p. This property defines the location of the split location.

Release 15. 8. if needed. pick the face to be split. .0 . select the Face Split feature. Inc. . select the Depth property to enter a number greater than zero. Click Extrude (p. Use Rectangle from the Draw toolbox of the Sketching tab to draw a rectangle in the Graphics Win- dow (p. 5. The Target Face property is highlighted in the Details View (p. Click Generate. The Target Face field in the Details View (p. 6).3D Modeling GUI Navigation: to split a face Initial view 1. Single click the yellow field in the Target Face field of the Details View (p. 6). With the Single Select cursor. 79). From the Tools Menu (p. All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 6). In the Details View (p. 6). Press Apply in the Details View (p. Select the Sketching tab. 9. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information 330 of ANSYS. 3.© SAS IP. 255). 4. 7. 2. 6. 6) displays the number of faces. Create sketch/construction points. on the desired face to be split. 5).

Select the down arrow to choose “By Location. 6).” 17. 11. 6) will display the number of line segments. 12.© SAS IP. 6) to Add New Face Split Group (Face Split Group 2). 331 . points. Single click Face Split Type (of the new group) to activate the drop-down menu. Release 15. After selecting sketch points and ver- tices. Inc. Repeat selection of the Target Face property to pick another face to be split. Advanced Features and Tools After selecting Target Face 10. 16. and vertices where you desire the face to be split.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The Tool Geometry field in the Details View (p. 6). Press Apply in the Details View (p. 6). Right-click in the Details View (p. 15. 14. 13. Single click the yellow field in the Tool Geometry field of the Details View (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. Inc. Select the Tool Geometry property in the Details View (p.0 . Select sketch points. .

6). Select the option Remove Last Segment. . Now select the option Clear All Segments. Select Tool Geometry property in the Details View (p. It will remove all the remaining segments in Face Split Group 1. 20. Select any vertex or sketch point. 24. . Click the selected face of the current group and/or edges of the face.Contains proprietary and confidential information 332 of ANSYS. After selecting Target Face After creating split locations. 21.© SAS IP. New Split Locations will be created at the click points. Select Face Split Group 2 Release 15. Press Apply. It will add a new segment for Face Split Group 1. Click Generate. 22. 19. b. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. All rights reserved. It will remove the last segment created in Face Split Group 1.0 . Edit the Face Split feature.3D Modeling 18. Inc. 23. Select Face Split Group 1 a. Right click on Graphics view.

Select the option Insert Location>Before. 298) • Unfreeze (p. It will create a new split location before the selected split location. It will delete the selected split location. 317) • Enclosure (p. Make sure the point selection filter is on. You can remove all split location from Details View (p. Note The Split Location can be Inserted and deleted from the Details View (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 300) • Named Selection (p. Result with inclusion of interior lected points Other Advanced Tools: • Freeze (p. c. Advanced Features and Tools a. 310) • Joint (p. Result with few points se. Select a split location and then right click. Select the option Delete Location. 6) context menu. All rights reserved. you may not get expected results if you select very few points. 308) • Mid-Surface (p. 301) • Attribute (p. d. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.0 . 6) context menu or from Graphics context menu. . Including interior locations will produce the desired result in such cases. You can choose the option Insert Location>After if you want to insert a new split location after the selected Split Location. 333 . and drag it over the face corresponding to Face Split Group 2 to a new desired location.© SAS IP. 337) • Fill (p. Example 35: Splitting a Highly Curved Face If the face to be split is highly curved as shown below. Inc. Select any split location. b. Select another split location and then right click. Inc. 322) • Symmetry (p. 340) Release 15. Note that you can drag the Split Location when you are in “Tool Geo- metry ” property.

Contains proprietary and confidential information 334 of ANSYS. 414) • Edge Delete (p. 419) Split Location Group Control via Context Menu A context menu is displayed when you right click in the list view. Inc. . 385) • Body Operation (p. .0 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc.3D Modeling • Surface Extension (p. 363) • Connect (p. 388) • Boolean (p. All rights reserved. 357) • Surface Flip (p. 368) • Projection (p. 361) • Merge (p. 344) • Surface Patch (p. 404) • Face Delete (p. The context menu has the following options: Release 15. 382) • Pattern (p. 378) • Conversion (p. 399) • Slice (p.© SAS IP.

Insert New Face Split Group: Inserts a new Face Split Group just above the currently selected group. • Up: Moves the selected group up by one position. Only the group headers are visible. Inc. 335 . Expand All Groups: Expands all the groups. Move Face Split Group: The feature is generated sequentially starting from the first face split group to the last one. It deletes the current split location. Advanced Features and Tools Add New Face Split Group: Add a new Face Split Group at the bottom. You can insert split location before/after the current split location. It has the following options: • To Top: This will move the current selected group to the very top. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Delete Face Split Group: Deletes the selected face split group. Delete Location: This option is available only while context menu is displayed by clicking on a split location property. Other Face Split topics: Graphics Context Menu Options (p. • To Bottom: Moves the selected group to the very bottom. 336) Errors/Warnings Status of Face Split Group (p. Shows properties belonging to all groups. It clears all the split locations of the current face split group. So. Insert Location: This option is available only while context menu is displayed by clicking on a split location property. All rights reserved. The face split feature must have at least one group.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 337) Release 15. Hides properties belonging to all groups. Therefore the results could change if the order of groups is changed. Clear All Locations: This option is available only when face split type is “By Location” and number of tool geometry is more than one.0 .© SAS IP. Inc. • Down: Moves the selected group down by one position. the delete option is available only if the total number of groups is more than one. Collapse All Groups: Collapses all the groups. .

0 .Contains proprietary and confidential information 336 of ANSYS. . Release 15. When face split type of the current face split group is “By Location” following options are available in graphics context menu: • Clear All Locations: Allows you to clear all the split locations. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. • Clear All Segment: Allows you to clear all the segments. the options is available only when the number of the tool geometry is at least one in the current face split group. • Remove Last Segment: Allows you to remove latest segment created. . Inc. All rights reserved. the options is available only when number of tool geometry is more than one in the current face split group. • Point Chain: Allows you chained selection of points.3D Modeling Graphics Context Menu Options When face split type of the current face split group is “By Point and Edges” following options are available in graphics context menu: • Point Pairs: Allows you to select pairs of points.

Inc. The text “error” indicates that the group failed completely whereas the text “warning” indicates partial success. • Delete Location: Allows you to delete selected split locations. You can choose either full or partial models to work with. Inc. Properties in the group corresponding to the split location will be changed according to the coordinate of the new location. It is recommended that you do not change the symmetry plane selection after a model has been transferred to the Mechanical application. The valid body types for this feature are surface and solid. During the model transfer from ANSYS DesignModeler to the Mechanical application. . Advanced Features and Tools • Insert Location: Allows you to insert split location before/after a selected split location. Warning (yellow tick mark): If at least one group succeeds partially and if not all groups succeed completely. If the complete selection set does not produce any results then you will get an error message. 301) feature. Success (green tick mark): If all groups succeed completely. 337) Errors/Warnings Status of Face Split Group If some of the selection sets do not produce any result after generating the Face Split feature. 334) Graphics Context Menu Options (p. The Mechanical application will not delete the previous symmetry planes during updating. This option is available only when at least one split location is selected. 334) Errors/Warnings Status of Face Split Group (p.© SAS IP. All rights reserved. the selected symmetry planes will slice off the model and only a portion of the model will be retained. Dragging Split Location: A split location can be dragged to a new location while the “Tool Geometry” property is not active.0 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. each symmetry plane chosen in the Symmetry feature will be transferred to the Mechanical application as a coordinate system. 337 . then you can get a warning message. Additional Face Split topics: Split Location Group Control via Context Menu (p. Other Face Split topics: Split Location Group Control via Context Menu (p. The generate status for the feature is de- termined by the following rules. If a full model is used. Additionally. Generate Status: The failure status for each group is indicated with the text message “error” or “warning” in the group header. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. This will happen regardless of the Import Coordinate Systems setting in the Project Schematic. The feature takes either all the bodies or selected bodies of the model as input and accepts up to three symmetry planes. the faces and edges coincident to the symmetry planes are grouped into a named selection if the Enclosure and Symmetry Processing option is enabled on the Project Schematic. Error (red bolt): If all the face split groups fail completely. This option is available only when one split location is selected. The following properties allow you to control the behavior of the feature: Release 15. A similar note applies when using the Named Selection (p. 336) Symmetry The Symmetry feature is a tool used to define a symmetry model.

• Target Bodies: This property specifies whether all of the bodies or only selected bodies of the model will be enclosed.3D Modeling • Number of Planes: This property defines how many symmetry planes are used in the feature.Contains proprietary and confidential information 338 of ANSYS. Example 36: Full model with one and two symmetry planes A full model before creating Symmetry features: A full model after creating a Symmetry feature with one symmetry plane: Release 15.© SAS IP. • Model Type: This property specifies either Full Model or Partial Model as input. For each symmetry plane. . the +Z direction) is kept. • Symmetry Plane2: Second symmetry plane selection. while material on the negative side is cut away. • Symmetry Plane1: First symmetry plane selection. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. then this property becomes available. The default is All Bodies. the faces and edges coincident with the symmetry planes will be identified automatically and put into a named selection. It is an Ap- ply/Cancel button property that facilitates selection of the target bodies. All rights reserved. leaving only the symmetrical portion. However when the model is transferred from ANSYS DesignModeler to the Mechanical application.0 . Inc. Inc. Partial Model: Since the model has already been reduced to its symmetrical portion. • Symmetry Plane3: Third symmetry plane selection. • Bodies:: If Target Bodies is set to Selected Bodies. material on the positive side of the plane (that is. Full Model: ANSYS DesignModeler will use the chosen symmetry planes to cut the full model. . there is no model change after the Symmetry feature is generated.

300) • Named Selection (p. . 322) • Face Split (p. 298) • Unfreeze (p. 310) • Joint (p. 317) • Enclosure (p. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.0 . Advanced Features and Tools A full model after creating a Symmetry feature with two symmetry planes: Other Advanced Tools: • Freeze (p. All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 308) • Mid-Surface (p. 339 . Inc.© SAS IP. 327) • Fill (p. 340) Release 15. 301) • Attribute (p.

368) • Projection (p. The created frozen bodies will have a Fluid/Solid Property (p. . Other Advanced Tools: • Freeze (p. 298) • Unfreeze (p. 212) bodies. Inc. 210) (as seen in the Details View (p. 210) for more information about editing the property. Inc.3D Modeling • Surface Extension (p. 388) • Boolean (p.© SAS IP. 419) Fill The Fill feature is located in the Tools Menu (p. See Fluid/Solid Property (p. 399) • Slice (p.0 . and is available when the model consists of active and/or frozen bodies. 363) • Connect (p. All rights reserved. 344) • Surface Patch (p. 382) • Pattern (p. 6) when this body is selected) set to Fluid.Contains proprietary and confidential information 340 of ANSYS. 300) • Named Selection (p. 385) • Body Operation (p. 414) • Edge Delete (p. 79). 310) • Joint (p. . • By Caps: Create the void region by picking bodies that enclose the void region or regions. The feature will create frozen bodies that fill the void regions. 378) • Conversion (p. 301) • Attribute (p. 404) • Face Delete (p. 322) Release 15. 308) • Mid-Surface (p. You can select one of two extraction types: • By Cavity: Create the void region by picking faces that enclose the cavity. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 357) • Surface Flip (p. 317) • Enclosure (p. The Fill feature is used to extract inverse volume or volumes enclosed within a body or a set of bodies. You can pick solid as well as Surface (p. 361) • Merge (p.

385) • Body Operation (p. . The faces are then selected for the area that is to be filled: Release 15. 363) • Connect (p. 337) • Surface Extension (p. All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 414) • Edge Delete (p. Click on the Extraction Type property and select the By Cavity option. Inc. 378) • Conversion (p. Advanced Features and Tools • Face Split (p. 368) • Projection (p.© SAS IP. 382) • Pattern (p. Inc. 327) • Symmetry (p. 404) • Face Delete (p. 399) • Slice (p. 357) • Surface Flip (p. 361) • Merge (p. 388) • Boolean (p. 79). and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 344) • Surface Patch (p.0 . 419) Fill Using By Cavity Method Create a Fill feature from the Tools Menu (p. 341 .

. the feature is generated and the frozen body that fills the selected depressions is created: When Filling a cavity. Inc.0 . to Fill a cylindrical cavity. five faces must be selected: the base face. .© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Contains proprietary and confidential information 342 of ANSYS. Release 15. A warning message is displayed if you select faces belonging to Surface (p. 212) bodies. 212) bodies.3D Modeling Note The Fill By Cavity option may only be used in conjunction with Solid (p. In the case of a rectangular cavity. both the base face and the circular face must be selected. otherwise the operation will fail. and each of the four side faces as shown here. all faces in the cavity must be selected to complete the Fill operation. All rights reserved. Finally. As shown here. Inc.

2. Then select the Solid (p. you can create the geometry that represents the fluid by using this method. 79). Create a Fill feature from the Tools Menu (p. 212) bodies. You can also pick Solid (p. • Preserve Solids: You can also delete the solid bodies by setting the “Preserve Solids” properties to No. Inc.© SAS IP. You can select multiple bodies which encloses the void regions. Click on the Extraction Type property in the Details View (p. a frozen body will be created that represents the inverse volume. 3. if you want to do a CFD analysis of the heat exchanger on a tube side as shown in the image below. • Preserve Capping Bodies: You can delete the Surface (p. the respective bodies will be deleted only if they are used in the construction of the inverse volume. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. By default the Target Bodies option is set to All Bodies.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 212) bodies that represent the tube. How to use this Method 1. 212) bodies used for capping inlets and outlets by setting the “Preserve Capping Bodies” property to No. First cap the inlet and outlet of the tube by creating Surface (p. 6). Inc. 212) and/or Surface (p.0 . Advanced Features and Tools Fill Using By Cavity Method Limitations Usage with faces The method has certain limitations: • You cannot pick faces of Surface (p. 343 . This method can fill multiple void regions in selected bodies. Select bodies in the model by setting the Target Bodies property to the Selected Bodies option in the Details View (p. . On generate. 6) and select the By Caps option. Release 15. 212) bodies. The selected solid bodies or all solid bodies in the model will be deleted based on the “Target Bodies” property value. Fill Using By Caps Method This method is used to extract inverse volumes enclosed by one or more bodies in a model. Note When either of the Preserve option is set to No. All rights reserved. 212) bodies. • All faces picked should belong to the same body. For example.

3. 298) Release 15. 6). Other Advanced Tools: • Freeze (p. Sets of edges that belong to the boundaries of surface bodies can be selected manually through an Apply/Cancel button property or you can search through the edges in the model. See Surface Extension User Interface and Behavior (p. All rights reserved. 348) Surface Extension User Interface and Behavior (p.3D Modeling 1. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. Set the appropriate value (No or Yes) of the Preserve Capping Bodies property and Preserve Solids property in the Details View (p. which can be extended to fill gaps by providing Gap value. Surface Extension topics: Surface Extension Selection Methods (p. The surface is extended naturally along the selected edge set. 354) Note The user interface and behavior of the Surface Extension feature changed at release 12.© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information 344 of ANSYS. The extension distance can be determined by a fixed number or by a set of bounding faces. 2. . 345) Surface Extension Properties (p. Click Generate to complete the feature creation. In the image below the tube side inverse volume is extracted by selecting a tube and two Surface (p. 212) bodies capping its two openings. 212) bodies. Surface Extension The Surface Extension feature allows the extension of Surface (p. Gap refers to the maximum distance you want a laminar edge to extend until bounded by other face surfaces. . Inc. 354) for details.0 .

301) • Attribute (p. 346) Manual You can create as many Surface Extension groups as you want manually by using the Context Menus (p. 368) • Projection (p. 404) • Face Delete (p. 310) • Joint (p. 322) • Face Split (p. 87) in the Details View (p. 308) • Mid-Surface (p. 337) • Fill (p. 345) (default) • Automatic (p. 361) • Merge (p. 419) Surface Extension Selection Methods • Manual (p. Inc. 6) and select the Edges of each group separately. All rights reserved.© SAS IP.0 . 363) • Connect (p. Inc. 385) • Body Operation (p. 378) • Conversion (p. 382) • Pattern (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . 317) • Enclosure (p. 327) • Symmetry (p. 345 . Release 15. 414) • Edge Delete (p. 357) • Surface Flip (p. 300) • Named Selection (p. 388) • Boolean (p. 399) • Slice (p. 340) • Surface Patch (p. Advanced Features and Tools • Unfreeze (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.

the Edge Selection Method property can be set to Simple or Advanced. Inc. then. Using this property you can specify the bodies you want the edges extended to. none of the selection properties should be in Apply/Cancel mode. Inc. 212) bodies typically created by the Mid-Surface (p. you can preselect edges and edit the edge selections like you usually would when using the ANSYS DesignModeler application.0 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. • Advanced: When you set this property to Advanced. 310) feature. If you select a new edge without pressing the control key.0.3D Modeling Introduced at release 13. a new Surface Extension Group is created and the edge is immediately added to it. The manual selection method also supports another property called Bounding Bodies. . The Advanced selection behavior is applicable only when none of the selection properties are active.© SAS IP. In the Details View.Contains proprietary and confidential information 346 of ANSYS. • Simple: When this property is set to Simple. they will be removed from that group and be placed in the newly selected group. when the Extent property is either To Next or Automatic. a new Surface Extension Group is created and the edge added to it. Release 15. All rights reserved. the Bounding Bodies property choices are: • All Bodies (default) • Visible Bodies • Selected Bodies Automatic You can perform an automatic search of edge sets that require extension to close gaps between Sur- face (p. that is. If the edges selected in this fashion already belong to other Surface Extension Groups. you can create Surface Extension groups and add edges quickly by only selecting edges in the Graphics menu. If you select more edges keeping the control key pressed. . When you select edges. the edges are selected to the same newly created Surface Extension Group.

In the Details View. The image shows the cursor change when Gap value provided is 2 millimeter. Release 15. The Edges found by this operation cannot be modified. Inc. Inc. All the extension groups found will have Automatic option preselected in Extent property Note Re-ordering of Extension Groups in the Details View (p. Advanced Features and Tools Properties that appear in the Details View (p. 6) when this option is selected include: • Bodies To Search: Here you choose which bodies to search. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. edges are found using the distance you have provided for the Gap. excess gap sizes can take longer to process and can cause difficulty in finding valid extensions.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. All rights reserved. • Gap: This defines the maximum distance an edge can be extended to the nearest face surfaces.0 . 6) will be disabled. 347 . This enables you to visualize the gap in the model workspace (Graphics Window (p. You should choose a large enough gap to find the extensions however. When you set it to Yes. though their Extent Type and Extent can be changed. In Edit Selections mode the mouse cursor is enclosed by a circle of diameter equal to the gap provided. Connected edges are grouped together in a single surface extension group. this value is automatically set back to No. 5)). . the Bounding Bodies property choices are: – All Bodies (default) – Visible Bodies – Selected Bodies If you choose Selected Bodies an additional Bodies property is displayed that allows you to select the bodies to process. When it is finished processing.© SAS IP. • Find Extension Groups now?: This property will always display a No as its value.

Additionally. the extension groups found by Automatic will be retained except for those groups with Extent property Do Not Extend.© SAS IP. ANSYS DesignModeler will automatically set these property to Se- lected Bodies upon generation and set the list of selected bodies same as the visible bodies. Faces with planar surfaces in the same plane are not considered to cross each other and therefore the automatic method will fail to determine the edge sets for extension. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 349) • Extent (p. Note Starting with ANSYS release 14. Inc. if the Bounding Bodies or the Bodies to Search property is set to Visible Bodies. 349) • Distance (p. Inc.3D Modeling You can avoid extending a surface extension group by selecting Do Not Extend option in the Extent property.5. In this regard. The following figures show examples where the automatic method of surface extension will not work satisfactorily. Surface Extension Properties There are six properties that define a Surface Extension : • Extent Type (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 348 of ANSYS. 353) Release 15. When Selection method is changed to Manual. . 349) • Edges (p. Surface Extension Automatic Method Limitations Faces with planar surfaces The Automatic search method searches for edges to extend by searching for bodies that cross the intersection or come in the way of the extension. databases from ANSYS release 13. .0 that include the Surface Extension feature having the Visible Bodies option will be resumed in the ANSYS DesignModeler application as Selected Bodies. All rights reserved.0 .

Only the faces. Had this surface been extended any further. Inc. Example 37: Fixed Not all surfaces are extendable. will be taken into account for trimming the extensions using their surfaces. Sometimes parametric surfaces twist awkwardly or become self inter- secting when extended. which are closer to the selected edge in accordance with the Gap provided. • Example 41: Automatic (p. 212) body cannot be extended. 353) Extent Type The Extent Type property defines two types of extension. 352): To Next will extend the selected surfaces up to the first encountered faces which fully bound the extension. 349) (default): Fixed means the surface will be extended an exact amount. The selected edges must be on the boundary of the surface. 350): To Surface allows the surface to be extended up to a single face's unbounded surface.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. This operation is similar to the To Faces option except you are not required to select the target faces. The default option is a natural. • Example 39: To Surface (p. 212) bodies in an assembly. natural or user-defined. This is most useful when joining Surface (p. Edges on the interior of the Surface (p. Since the extension distance is measured perpendicular to the edge set. Extent The Extent property includes the following options for defining the extent of the surface extension: • Example 37: Fixed (p. causing the surface extension operation to fail. All rights reserved. Consider the ellipse in the following picture. • Example 40: To Next (p. 353) (default for Automatic Selection Method): Automatic will extend the selected edges to bounding surfaces of the faces in the extension direction. Distance should be provided for this operation. After extending the surface along the elliptical edge. • Example 38: To Faces (p. Additionally. producing the result shown by the blue surface. one must be careful that the edges do not become twisted when extended. 353) • Target Face (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. You can limit surface extension to certain bodies by using the Bounding Bodies property in the Manual selection method or Bodies To Search property in the Automatic selection method. The gray surface is extended. Release 15. .0 . you can limit surface extension to certain bodies by using the Bounding Bodies property in the Manual selection method or Bodies To Search in the Automatic selection method. the resulting edge after the extension is not an ellipse. Advanced Features and Tools • Faces (p.© SAS IP. the resulting edge would have become self-intersecting. but rather a parametric curve. Edges Edges is an Apply/Cancel button property that facilitates the selection of the edge sets. Inc. 349 . 350): To Faces means the surface will be extended up to a bounding set of faces. • Do Not Extend (available only for Automatic selection method): Selecting this option for a surface extension group ignores the extension of its group edges.

first select the edges to be extended as with the other extent types: Release 15.3D Modeling Example 38: To Faces Another example of the Surface Extension (p. To extend the surface to the body.Contains proprietary and confidential information 350 of ANSYS. . Suppose you wish to extend the surface of the gray cone up to the cylindrical face and down to the planar surface.0 . Inc. 344) is shown here with the extent set as To Surface. 344) feature is shown here. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. select the edges along the surface to extend: Next.© SAS IP. Inc. the gray cone is extended up to the desired faces: Example 39: To Surface A final example of the Surface Extension (p. All rights reserved. First. . the extent faces for the extension are chosen: Upon generating the feature.

© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 212) body is extended to the desired face's surface: Release 15.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.0 . Inc. the Surface (p. Inc. 351 . All rights reserved. chose the face whose unbounded surface you wish to extend to: Upon generating the feature. Advanced Features and Tools Next. .

© SAS IP. select the edges along the surface to extend: Upon generating the feature. Inc. the Surface (p.0 .Contains proprietary and confidential information 352 of ANSYS. All rights reserved.3D Modeling Example 40: To Next An example of the To Next feature is shown here. . First. 212) body is extended to the desired faces: Release 15. Suppose you wish to extend the surface to the planar surface and the U-shape face. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . Inc.

0 .© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The value in this property may be promoted to a Design Parameter. 259) extent is chosen. The extended surface must be fully bounded by the selected faces to succeed. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Its value must be greater than zero or an error will occur. The extension is performed along the direction perpendicular to the selected edge set. In those cases. . This is similar to the To Next option except the extensions made are with respect to the face surfaces rather than faces. Also. the edges are extended: Distance The Distance property defines the distance to extend the surface. Example shown below has three extension groups where the connected edges are in the same group. note that some Non-Uniform Rational B-Splines (NURBS) target faces cannot be extended. Release 15. 353 . This property only appears if the To Faces extent is chosen. In this case a single target face is selected and its underlying (and possibly unbounded) surface is used as the extent. Faces Faces is an Apply/Cancel button property that allows selection of faces. All rights reserved. This property only appears if the To Surface Type (p. Target Face Target Face is an Apply/Cancel button property that allows the selection of a face to be used as the bounding surface. The extension need not be fully bounded by the faces to which it is extended. the Surface Extension feature may fail if the extension is not fully bounded by the se- lected target face's surface. Inc. The underlying surface must fully intersect the extruded profile or an error will result. Advanced Features and Tools Example 41: Automatic Automatic will extend the selected surfaces to the first encountered face surfaces in the extension dir- ection. It only appears if the Fixed extent is chosen. Upon generating the feature.

356) • GoTo Extension Group (p. 356) • Post Selection Color (p. 355) • Restore View (p.3D Modeling Surface Extension User Interface and Behavior Each Surface Extension feature hosts a list of extension groups that minimizes the number of surface extension features that need to be created for large models. Henceforth a group header or any of the property belonging to that group will be collectively referred to as “group”. 356) • Collapse All Groups (p. . All rights reserved. Clicking on the top most header (or any list view item belonging to the top most header) will deselect an already selected group. Extension Group Control via Context Menu A context menu is displayed on right-clicking in the list view. 355) • Select in All Below (p. 354) • Move Extension Group (p. Most of the options are shown only if you right click on a group except for “Add New Extension Group” which is always shown. The user interface allows you to: • Select a Group (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. 357) • Generate Status (p. Inc. The context menu is dynamic and rich in options. . The context menu has the following options for Manual selection method. 356) • Expand All Groups (p. 356) • Show Errors or Warnings (p. 354) • Extension Group Control via Context Menu (p.© SAS IP. Notice that the top feature header or any of the property belonging to the top header and the empty space in the list view is not a “group”. Release 15.0 .Contains proprietary and confidential information 354 of ANSYS. 356) • Show Problematic Geometry (p. 357) Select a Group An extension group is selected by clicking (right or left) on the group header or any of list view items contained in that group header.

All rights reserved.© SAS IP. Inc. Down: Moves the selected group down by one position To Bottom: Moves the selected group to the very bottom Moving a group in generated state marks the feature for generation.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. This is available for only the Manual Selection Method. Release 15.0 . The surface extension feature must have at least one group. Inc. Select in All Below Selects particular extent type in all extension groups below the selected extension group. Clear All Extension Groups: Deletes all existing extension groups. 355 . To Top: This will move the current selected group to the very top. the delete option is shown only if the total number of groups is more than one. Therefore the results could change if the order of groups is changed. Delete Extension Group: Deletes the selected extension group. 6). and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Move Extension Group The feature is generated sequentially starting from the first extension group to the last one. Note The add/insert/delete/clear options are available only during the feature edit state. An empty extension group will be created automatically in the Details View (p. . So. Insert New Extension Group: Inserts a new extension group just above the currently selected group. This behavior is similar to Repair (p. Up: Moves the selected group up by one position. 420) feature. Advanced Features and Tools Add New Extension Group: Adds a new extension group to the end of the group list.

© SAS IP. Note The “Show Errors or Warnings” option in the tree view displays all error or warning messages for all the groups. Expand All Groups Expands all the groups. Release 15.3D Modeling Restore View When a group is selected in Details View (p. 6). This behavior is similar to Re- pair (p. GoTo Extension Group If an edge is selected in graphics which is present in any one of the surface extension group. Inc. All rights reserved. View can be restored by this option. edges to be extended will be zoomed in and showed in graphics if the feature is in Edit Selections mode. This context menu item can be used to make the Surface Extension group's properties (which contains selected edge) visible and the group header is selected in Details View (p. Shows properties belonging to all groups Collapse All Groups Collapses all the groups. you can see "Go To Extension Group" option in graphics context menu. 6). Show Errors or Warnings Displays error or warning messages corresponding to the selected group. . Show Problematic Geometry Shows problematic geometry corresponding to the selected group. Hides properties belonging to all groups.Contains proprietary and confidential information 356 of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . the faces that took part in extension will be zoomed in and shown.0 . Only the group headers are visible. Similarly. 420) feature. After generate. the “Show Problematic Geometry” in the tree view displays all the problematic geometry for all the groups. Inc. The “additional information” in the message will indicate the group to which the error/warning belongs.

edges from other bodies may be selected that help to close the gap.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Here is an example with two holes selected for patching: Release 15. In these cases. Also. All rights reserved. 212) bodies in ANSYS DesignModeler. or may be a gap in the side of the model that does not form a closed loop of edges. it is not recom- mended to use those faces or edges directly in the creation of other features. Essen- tially. Typ- ically these will be holes in the body that can be closed by selecting the edges of that hole. Warning (yellow tick mark): If at least one group succeeds partially and if not all groups succeed completely. For each loop. it is important to select an edge from the surface body to be patched before selecting an edge from any other surface body to use for this patch. the feature looks for closed loops with which to patch surface bodies. The Patch Method option is very similar to the Healing Methods for Face Delete (p. as in Surfaces from Edges and Face Delete–Patch Healing. do not select Line Body edges that are coincident with existing edges of the surface being patched. In these cases. By modifying the source edges used in the feature. . In those cases. Success (green tick mark): If all groups succeed completely.© SAS IP. Surface Patch The Surface Patch feature is used to fill gaps in Surface (p. Because of this. Doing so will cause the feature to fail. Note that sometimes it is impossible to generate a single face that will span the patch area. When this happens. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. This logic allows for the selection of multiple patch operations in a single feature. Doing so may cause those other features to fail if model changes result in the multiple faces being generated differently. the first edge selected from a surface body determines which surface body is modified. there is no guarantee that the same number of faces will be created or stay in the same location during the next Generate. Inc. Inc. The Automatic option will try a robust combination of patch healing and natural healing to best complete the operation. However. Generate Status The failure status for each group is indicated with the text message “error” or “warning” in the group header. The generate status for the feature is determined by the following rules. in some cases the hole may be too complex to fill in a single operation. Error (red bolt): If all the extension groups fail completely. the faces that get generated are not guaranteed to remain persistent. while Line Body edges are useful for closing gaps. All entities (except for faces and surfaces) locked in for the other groups will be shown in purple color. The text “error” indicates that the group failed completely whereas the text “warning” indicates partial success. 414). Advanced Features and Tools Post Selection Color All entities locked in for the current selected group will be shown in the default post selection (cyan) color. DesignModeler may generate multiple faces. even if some of those patches are on different surface bodies.0 . 357 .

and its subsidiaries and affiliates.3D Modeling Here are the faces Surface Patch created to close those two areas. All rights reserved. Inc. Here is another example. the difference in patching is probably due to minor differences in their edge definitions. .© SAS IP. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information 358 of ANSYS. Note that in this example one hole was patched with 4 faces and the other with 6 faces. . Even though these areas appear symmetric. this time as a side notch: Here you see a Line from two points added to close the notch: Release 15.0 .

However. Advanced Features and Tools Here is the final patch: Here is an extremely complex example: In this case Surface Patch was not able to directly patch the opening.© SAS IP. 359 . it was patched. All rights reserved. Inc. Release 15. Inc. at least being able to create a patch was very beneficial.0 . and creating three separate patches. by adding a couple of Line Body edges between vertices. While not ne- cessarily smooth in this case. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.

298) Release 15. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information 360 of ANSYS.0 .© SAS IP. All rights reserved. Inc. .3D Modeling The following examples show the difference between Automatic/Natural Healing and Patch Healing. First Automatic or Natural Healing Patch Healing of the same model Other Advanced Tools: • Freeze (p. .

All rights reserved. This is useful when the surface normals of neighboring surface bodies must be compatible for a modeling operation to succeed. 378) • Conversion (p.0 . Note that the normals of all faces in a surface or Solid (p. 382) • Pattern (p. 385) • Body Operation (p. 310) • Joint (p.© SAS IP. 212) bodies. 337) • Fill (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 419) Surface Flip The Surface Flip feature reverses the orientation of Surface (p. a Boolean feature may fail due to opposing surface normals if a Unite operation is attempted between two surface bodies. For example. 340) • Surface Extension (p. 404) • Face Delete (p. 212) body must be consistent. Inc. 300) • Named Selection (p. 327) • Symmetry (p. 361 . 344) • Surface Flip (p. The side highlighted in green indicates the surface’s positive normal direction. 368) • Projection (p. The feature accepts surface bodies through an Apply/Cancel button property. Advanced Features and Tools • Unfreeze (p. 388) • Boolean (p. 363) • Connect (p. 414) • Edge Delete (p. 317) • Enclosure (p. Release 15. . Inc. 322) • Face Split (p. 301) • Attribute (p. Line body and Solid (p. 399) • Slice (p. Surface normals are distinguished in ANSYS DesignModeler by the green highlight shown when a face or body is selected. 212) body selections are not permitted. 308) • Mid-Surface (p. 361) • Merge (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.

Now the surface normals point in the opposite direction and the Plane feature has flipped to the opposite side of the face. A plane feature based on a face has been created. 310) • Joint (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. 357) Release 15. 327) • Symmetry (p. 298) • Unfreeze (p.3D Modeling Example 42: Reversing a surface body's orientation The faces of this surface body are selected. 322) • Face Split (p. 301) • Attribute (p. 317) • Enclosure (p.0 . 340) • Surface Extension (p. 300) • Named Selection (p. . Inc. A Surface Flip feature is inserted before the Plane feature. All rights reserved. . 308) • Mid-Surface (p. 337) • Fill (p. Other Advanced Tools: • Freeze (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 362 of ANSYS. Inc. 344) • Surface Patch (p.

363 . 368) Other Advanced Tools: • Freeze (p. . 317) • Enclosure (p. 365) Merge Properties (p. 308) • Mid-Surface (p. All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 365) Merge Automated Search (p. 300) • Named Selection (p. 364) Merging Faces (p. 340) Release 15.0 . 363) • Connect (p. 366) Merge Context Menu Options (p. Generally. 382) • Pattern (p. 310) • Joint (p. 327) • Symmetry (p. 301) • Attribute (p. merge may be useful for reducing the complexity of a model (defeaturing) in preparation for meshing. 388) • Boolean (p. 399) • Slice (p. Inc. 337) • Fill (p. 404) • Face Delete (p. 298) • Unfreeze (p. 414) • Edge Delete (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 322) • Face Split (p. 419) Merge The Merge feature may be used to merge a set of edges or faces. Inc. 385) • Body Operation (p. Merge topics: Merging Edges (p. 378) • Conversion (p. Advanced Features and Tools • Merge (p. 368) • Projection (p.© SAS IP.

414) • Edge Delete (p. 344) • Surface Patch (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 364 of ANSYS.3D Modeling • Surface Extension (p. with the result being a single edge. 404) • Face Delete (p. 399) • Slice (p. Edge merge may be used to merge several edges that satisfy specific criteria.© SAS IP. Release 15. Inc. single edges result from the merge. share common vertices). 419) Merging Edges Choose Merge Type as Edges from the Details View (p. 357) • Surface Flip (p. Example 43: Merging two clusters of edges Two clusters of edges have been selected for a merge feature. 6). and its subsidiaries and affiliates.0 . . It is possible to specify a set of edges consisting of multiple clusters of edges (that is. subsets that satisfy the above mentioned criteria). • The angle between edges at shared vertices must be greater than or equal to a minimum angle that is specified as a property of the feature. the program will identify and display the clusters that can be merged in the Details View (p. Inc. When this is the case. 368) • Projection (p. The feature accepts edges through an Apply/Cancel button property. All rights reserved. 382) • Pattern (p. 6) of the Merge feature to merge edges. • All shared vertices must connect to only two edges. 361) • Connect (p. Following merge feature generation. . 385) • Body Operation (p. The criteria are that: • Edges must be connected into a chain of edges (that is. 378) • Conversion (p. 388) • Boolean (p.

the sets of faces which can be merged are determined by certain criteria. share common edges). it can be merged. 364). • Two connected faces will be merged only if the minimum angle between them at the common edges is greater than or equal to the “Minimum Angle” that you specify. All rights reserved. 365 . Note that clusters are subsets of selected faces that satisfy the following criteria: • Faces must be connected together (that is. each of these clusters will be merged into separate faces. Inc. which form multiple subsets of faces that can be merged (clusters). If the Merge Type is Edges. Release 15. the Automatic Selection method searches for clusters in the regions specified by Targets To Search. Merge Automated Search The Merge feature supports an Automatic Selection method. • At least one of the edges of each face should be shared by another face in the same set. Upon Generate. based on the cri- teria given in Merging Edges (p.0 . . Out of the selected faces.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. If you select many faces. However if a set of faces is closed only in one direction like a cylinder. Multiple faces are merged by replacing the underlying geometry of the faces by a single geometry. Advanced Features and Tools Merging Faces Choose Merge Type as Faces from the Details View (p. Inc. 6) of Merge feature to merge a set of faces. • The minimum angle between the faces at the common edges must be greater than or equal to the “Minimum Angle” specified. the faces in the set are connected). 6). A set of faces can be merged into one face if: • All faces in the set should be of the same body. ANSYS DesignModeler will identify the clusters right after the selection and display them in the Details View (p.© SAS IP. spherical or toroidal) are not handled by the Merge feature. • Sets of faces that are fully closed (for example. (that is.

the Automatic Selection method searches for clusters in the regions specified by Targets To Search based on several criteria including the angle criteria used in the Manual Selection method. Minimum Angle should be greater than or equal to 90 degrees and less than or equal to 180 degrees. Inc. The Automatic Selection method also uses the curvature of the faces. if you choose a symmetric set of entities to search. . 366) • Selection Method (p. Also. the shape and area of the merged faces to decide how the selected set is divided into clusters. Merge Properties • Minimum Angle (p. The advantage of using the Automatic Selection method is that for a large selection set.Contains proprietary and confidential information 366 of ANSYS. For edge merge. the Automatic Selection method need not produce a symmetric set of clusters. 367) Minimum Angle The value specified for this property is used to determine sets of edges or faces that can be merged. 367) • Merge Boundary Edges (p. Minimum Angle should be positive and less than or equal to 180 degrees. Note that you might get a significantly different result if you alter the selection set even slightly. 367) • Find Clusters Now (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.0 .3D Modeling The Automatic Selection method is not guaranteed to produce the exact same set of clusters if the bodies are in the DesignModeler representation or the Workbench representation. only if the angle between them at the common vertex is greater than or equal to the “Minimum Angle”. . Note that the edges or faces that are ignored by the automated search are not shown in the “Edges Not Merged” or “Faces Not Merged” detail. Inc. that cluster will not be merged. Similarly two connected faces will be merged only if the minimum angle between them at the common edges is greater than or equal to the “Minimum Angle”. All rights reserved. For face merge.© SAS IP. Two connected edges will be merged. Release 15. If the minimum angle between the edges or faces of a cluster is less than the Minimum Angle specified. 367) • Targets to Search (p. The face clusters identified by the search are displayed in the graphics view in multiple colors to enable you to see the cluster set easily. you will get a set of clusters with each cluster containing a small set of faces. If the Merge Type is Faces.

If you opt for Automatic Selection method. Release 15. the face clusters identified by the search are highlighted with different colors in the graphics view. if any of the selected edges or faces are not part of any valid clusters. The clusters identified for merging are displayed at the end of the Details View (p.© SAS IP. 367 . search for clusters starts at that time. All rights reserved. . The default value is Visible Bodies. Merge Boundary Edges By setting this to Yes. 6) titled “Edges Not Merged” or “Faces Not Merged”. the valid clusters are shown under the “Merge Clusters” section in the Details View (p. you can merge the boundary edges of the merged face clusters. The “Minimum Angle” specified by you is considered here also to determine the edge clusters.0 . Find Clusters Now This property will always display No as its value. this value is automatically set back to No. In the case of face merge. you will be able to manually add clusters by selecting edges or faces from the graphics view. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The other choices available are All Bodies. The selected edges or faces will be divided into clusters depending on the connectivity and the Minimum Angle specified. the options shown for this property are No. Targets to Search You can choose which targets to search for the Automatic Selection method using this property. 6) that help you control the automatic search. 6). When you set it to Yes. The Automatic Selection method may be used to let ANSYS DesignModeler search for clusters that can be merged in the model. and the clusters found will be displayed in the Details View (p. 6). If there are clusters already present in selection. Note This property is applicable only to Automatic Selection method. Advanced Features and Tools Selection Method By using the default “Manual” setting here. additional properties show up in the Details View (p. Selected Bodies and Selected Faces. With the Manual Selection method. If you choose Selected Faces. The boundary edges are clustered as described in the “Merging Edges” section. Note This property is applicable only to Face Merge. If you choose Selected Bodies an additional Bodies property is displayed that allows you to select the Bodies to Search.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and Yes – Preserve Existing Clusters. Inc. In both Automatic and Manual modes. shows up so that faces can be selected to search for clusters. Inc. a new property. Yes – Replace Existing Clusters. they are shown in a separate section in the Details View (p. 6). When the search is completed. Note This property is applicable only to Automatic Selection method. Faces.

you can remove the cluster from selection. the option Remove Clusters will not be available in the context menu. You can add clusters to a selection manually using the Add Clusters option in the context menu of graphics view.3D Modeling Merge Context Menu Options You can remove selected clusters from the Details View (p. 376) for more details. 371) Using Connect after Share Topology (p. The selected clusters are added to the Details View (p. It is possible to select entities for which subsets are determined to be coincident to within the user-specified tolerance. edges or faces. Vertices. When this is the case.Contains proprietary and confidential information 368 of ANSYS.0 . 369) Topological Change Occurrences (p. To make use of this option. a Delete option shows up in the context menu. This enables you to visualize the tolerance in the model workspace (Graphics Win- dow (p. You can also remove selected cluster(s) from the graphics view. Connect The Connect feature may be used to align and possibly join a set of vertices. If you right click on the Details View (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the program will identify and connect the entities in each of the subsets. The alignment takes the form of a stretching and aligning of existing geometry. edges or faces may be selected through the Apply/Cancel button property. To do this. 6) when you click on this option. the Connect feature can be used after the Share Topology feature to selectively share faces between bodies. The option Remove Clusters will show in the context menu. Connect topics: Connect Properties (p. The image shows the cursor change when tolerance provided is 2 millimeter. . By clicking this option. Right click to see the option Add Clusters in the context menu. 5)). Inc. Note that in Edit Selections mode the mouse cursor is enclosed by a circle of diameter equal to the tolerance provided. See Using Connect after Share Topology (p.0. Note that if the selected edges or faces do not belong to any of the existing clusters. Note that you cannot select edges or faces that are already in the cluster list. all the clusters to which the selected edges or faces belong are removed from the cluster list. 371) Connect Feature Behavior (p. If you click on Remove Clusters. Starting from Release 15. Entities may be connected that are coincident to within a tolerance that is specified as a property of the feature. Inc. 376) Release 15. 6). select multiple edges or faces that form valid clusters from the graphics view. All rights reserved. select edges or faces of the cluster(s) to be removed.© SAS IP. Right click in the graphics view. 6) listing of clusters. 371) Release-specific Notations (p. .

370) • T-Junction Property (p. 344) • Surface Patch (p. 388) • Boolean (p. 414) • Edge Delete (p. 370) Release 15. 308) • Mid-Surface (p. 322) • Face Split (p. 300) • Named Selection (p. 361) • Merge (p. 382) • Pattern (p. 399) • Slice (p. 369 . 378) • Conversion (p. 363) • Projection (p. 298) • Unfreeze (p. Inc. 310) • Joint (p. 370) • Merge Bodies Property (p. 317) • Enclosure (p. All rights reserved. 337) • Fill (p. 301) • Attribute (p. 385) • Body Operation (p. 404) • Face Delete (p. 340) • Surface Extension (p. Inc. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 357) • Surface Flip (p. 419) Connect Properties The following properties allow you to control the behavior of the feature: • Location Property (p. 378) Other Advanced Tools: • Freeze (p. 327) • Symmetry (p. Advanced Features and Tools Connect Limitations (p.© SAS IP.0 .

Number of Connected Sets Property The Number of Connected Sets property is available only for faces. . Two options are provided. In this latter case. the Merge Bodies property is not available. switch the property value to On. surface (and Solid (p. the first entity in each subset will remain unchanged and all other entities in the subset will have their geometry modified so as to be coincident with the first entity. However. When using the Connect feature after Share Topology. additional coincident edges will not be fused. . For face connect. For connecting partial overlapping faces. 212) bodies are merged by a vertex or edge connect is controlled by a Merge Bodies property that may take values No. This property will display the number of successfully connected face sets. it is only possible for two laminar edges from one or two surface bodies to be fused. Inc. When set to Preserve First. then an average location will be taken from the set of coincident vertices that are within tolerance of an edge interior and from the projection of this average location onto the edge interior. When using the Connect feature after Share Topology. T-Junction property may be applicable when edge end-vertices. T-junctions will not be detected when this property has a value of Off.3D Modeling • Number of Connected Sets Property (p. T-Junction Property A T-Junction property is available for both edge and face connect. For example. 212)) bodies must remain manifold. edges and faces that can be selected from the drop down list. collected from the selected edges.0 . but the final location of the splitting vertices and the new vertex resulting from the edge split will be the edge split location. A value of If Compatible Attributes indicates that line body or surface body attributes must be compatible in order for merging to take place. This property will be visible only when the feature is in a generated state. Inc. A value of Yes indicates that multiple bodies may be merged if any associated subset of selected entities can be fused. Merge Bodies Property Whether or not multiple line or Surface (p. the Location property is not available and is defaulted to preserve first. While line bodies may be non-manifold. it is possible to fuse any number of vertices or edges from any number of line bodies. For edge connect. 370) Location Property A Location property is available for vertices. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. the T-Junction property has a default value of Off meaning that only fully overlapping faces can be connected. A value of No indicates that multiple bodies will not be merged. Release 15. The order of coincident entities in a particular subset will correspond to the order of entity selection by the Apply/Cancel button property. Yes. If this property has a value of Preserve Split-Edge. If this property has a value of Interpolated. All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information 370 of ANSYS. or If Compatible Attributes. then an average location will be taken from the set of coincident vertices that are within tolerance of an edge interior and this location will be projected onto the edge to split the edge (as with the Interpolated property value). When set to Interpolated (default). The final average location will become the new geometric location of the splitting vertices and the new vertex resulting from the edge split. are within the user-specified tolerance of the interior of one or more of the selected edges. all entities in a subset will be modified so that their new geometric location is computed as an average location.

faces may split when T-Junction property kept On. the earliest entity created is used to determine what survives when body merging or entity fusing takes place. If any edge of a selected face is not in tolerance with any edge on a paired face then the edge will be projected on the second face. Connect features existing in pre-12. • During face connect. a new check will be made for edges and vertices that are coincident to within the user-specified tolerance. boundary) edges for Surface (p. Edges may also be split when t-junctions are detected. Inc. a new check will be made for edges and vertices that are coincident to within the user-specified tolerance. if any vertex of a selected face is not in tolerance with any vertex on a paired face then the vertex will be projected on the second face. See Using Connect after Share Topology (p. • During an edge connect. shared) topology when the Share Topology (p. Instead. • During a vertex or edge connect. All rights reserved. if two vertices that are within the user-specified tolerance have a common edge with length less than or equal to this tolerance. • During face connect.© SAS IP. if faces lie between a set of vertices or edges that are within tolerance. then the two edges will be fused into one. vertices or edges that belong to line bodies may be fused so that a single line body results. . edges may also be split when t-junctions (see above) are detected. resulting face connects are listed in detail. then the faces may be deleted and the vertices or edges joined. Connect Feature Behavior Using the Connect feature and combining bodies into a multibody part will result in connected (that is. Topological Change Occurrences Topological changes may occur only in specified cases: • During a vertex or edge connect.1. Advanced Features and Tools Details View indicating Number of Connected Sets for Face Connect When using the Connect feature after Share Topology.0 . Following this splitting of edges.1 databases will continue to generate as they had before. Inc. Release-specific Notations Beginning with ANSYS release 12. 253) feature is used or when the model is brought Release 15. while connect features created in a 12. 212) bodies (possibly the same surface body). then the vertices will be fused into one and the edge will be deleted.1 or later version will use the earliest entity created to determine the resulting entity. 371 . Following this splitting of edges. • During an edge connect. then Number of Connected Sets property is not a selectable option. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. • During a vertex or edge connect. 376) for more information.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. if two edges are within the user-specified tolerance and both edges are laminar (that is.

.3D Modeling into the Mechanical application. . Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information 372 of ANSYS. All rights reserved. The Connect feature might also be used in combination with the Sew Body Operation (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.0 .© SAS IP. 212) bodies (excluding face connect). 388) feature when working with Surface (p. Inc. Example 44: Two vertices within a user-specified tolerance Example 45: Connecting two vertices with the Location property set to Interpolated Example 46: Connecting two vertices with the Location property set to Preserve First Example 47: Selected edges within a user-specified tolerance Release 15.

373 .0 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. All rights reserved. Inc. .© SAS IP. Advanced Features and Tools Example 48: Interpolated edge connect with interpolated t-junctions Example 49: Interpolated edge connect with t-junction preservation of split edges Example 50: Two selected edges within a user specified tolerance Example 51: Interpolated edge connect with interpolated t-junctions resulting in edges being fused (and surface bodies being sewed together) Release 15.

© SAS IP.0 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. . . Inc.3D Modeling Example 52: Selected edges within tolerance with small faces between the edges Example 53: Interpolated edge connect with fusing of edges and deletion of small faces Example 54: Selected line body edges from two line bodies Example 55: Interpolated edge connect with the Merge Bodies property set to Yes Release 15.Contains proprietary and confidential information 374 of ANSYS. All rights reserved.

Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.© SAS IP. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved.0 . 375 . . Inc. Advanced Features and Tools Example 56: Selected set of faces within tolerance for Face Connect Example 57: Face connect with the Location property set to Preserve First and T-Junction Off Example 58: Selected set of faces within tolerance for Face Connect Release 15.

right-clicking. You can do this by selecting the cluster in the Details View in Modeling Mode (p. Selecting a particular cluster will highlight the resulting faces.3D Modeling Example 59: Face connect with the Location property set to Interpolated and T-Junction Off Using Connect after Share Topology The Connect feature can be used after the Share Topology feature to selectively share faces between two bodies of a multibody part. You can specify the faces or bodies to search from and face sets that are coincident within the specified tolerance and belonging to the same part will be found.Contains proprietary and confidential information 376 of ANSYS. the number of connected faces for each Cluster will be shown. All rights reserved. . 238). . Faces within tolerances are grouped into Clusters of face sets.0 . The Face Connect feature requires that the two faces being connected belong to two different bodies of the same part. You will need to specify a tolerance and ANSYS DesignModeler will connect two faces into one face if the faces lie within the specified tolerance. Release 15. The T- Junction option is also available when using the Connect feature after Share Topology. ANSYS DesignModeler will first split faces and edges where faces are coincident within tolerance and then perform the connect operation. By turning on this option. You can review each Cluster and delete a cluster if their respective face sets do not need to be connected. Inc. An Automatic search option is also available to search for face sets coincident within a specified tolerance. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. and choosing Delete in the context menu.© SAS IP. After feature generation.

take care to resolve large intersections between the bodies of the Part. Inc. then a Slice oper- ation on such bodies will fail. you can choose the sets of faces you want shared and specify a tolerance and the connect feature will ensure that faces within the tolerance are shared between bodies. 377 . The Connect feature will not be able to resolve large inter- sections between bodies of a part. then.© SAS IP. Selectively Sharing of Faces: Sometimes you want face sharing between two bodies in a multibody part in one location. If you use the Share Topology type as None or Imprints. All rights reserved. It is recommended that you perform Slice operations before performing Connect operations. then you should give a tolerance value smaller than the thickness of the body. Inc. sometimes the Share Topology feature may fail to share faces. but not in another. If Short edges or Slivers are created by the Connect feature or the Share Topology feature. It is also recommended to use the manual option to specify face pairs in such cases. If the Connect operations are used to connect only some coincident face sets and not all. In such cases. Fix Face Sharing Failures: When you create a multibody part with the Share Topology method set to Automatic and execute the Share Topology feature.0 . . Advanced Features and Tools Use of the Connect feature after Share Topology The Connect feature can be used after Share Topology to address the following scenarios. You cannot use the Connect feature to share faces from a solid body to faces of a surface body. Release 15. you can set the Body Share Topology types to None and use the Connect feature to ensure face sharing only in desired locations. or can have imperfections due to transla- tions. In such situations.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Known Limitations of the Connect feature when used after Share Topology It is not possible to connect two faces that belong to the same body. Short edges and Sliver faces adjacent to the faces where the connect is attempted can cause the Connect feature to fail. adjust the tolerance or use Connect before Share Topology to align the geometry. This might happen when the faces required to be shared look identical but are not. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Sometimes there may be a small gap between them. It is recommended that you perform geometry cleanup to remove Sliver faces before attempting a Connect (when used after Share Topology). Note If your model contains thin Solid bodies.

• Extend Edges: This property is only applicable when projecting edges. • Direction Vector: You can select a particular direction to project the selected. . If no direction is selected. In such a case. If the complete selection set does not produce any results. • Imprint: If this property is set to Yes. then you will get an error message and can view problematic geometries. All rights reserved. 379) • Edges On Face Type (p. If this property is set to No.0 . 381) • Points On Edge Type (p. If a set of connected edges are chosen for the projection. then the entity will be projected in a direction that is Closest to the target. The projected entity will be a separate line body or a point depending on the geometry being projected. Other Advanced Tools: • Freeze (p. and selected entities could not be projected on all the targets then you will get a warning message. The tolerance provided must be a least one order of magnitude less than the smallest edge length. If this property is set to Yes. then. Inc. 380) • Points On Face Type (p. If multiple targets are selected. Projection Properties • Edges / Points: Depending on the Projection Type property you can select 3D Edges or Points to Project. This feature can be executed on both frozen and active bodies. only one target entity is allowed to be selected.© SAS IP. 79) and has four options (types): • Edges On Body Type (p. You must first split the edges before trying to connect the face. then the target entity is modified to include the projected entity. the projected edge is extended to the boundaries of the face being projected to. then the target entity is not modified. Projection The Projection feature allows you to project points on edges/faces and edges on faces/bodies. then. the extension occurs only at vertices which are open or uncon- nected.Contains proprietary and confidential information 378 of ANSYS. 381) Errors/Warnings/Problematic Geometry If some of the selection sets do not produce any result after selecting project/imprint. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.3D Modeling Connect Limitations Usage with face edges Face connect within the same body cannot be done. • Target: You can select the target entity or entities to project to. The target entity may also be divided into many entities if required. 298) Release 15. The function is inoperable on face edges that are periodic. The Projection feature is available via the Tools Menu (p. then you will get a warning message and can view the problematic geometries. . Inc.

340) • Surface Extension (p. 301) • Attribute (p. 414) • Edge Delete (p. 363) • Connect (p. 212) Bodies. 379 . 419) Edges On Body Type This option allows you to project or imprint edges onto a body. All rights reserved. 361) • Merge (p. . 388) • Boolean (p. Target entities must be Solid (p. 357) • Surface Flip (p. 327) • Symmetry (p. 368) • Pattern (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 399) • Slice (p. 404) • Face Delete (p. 212) or Surface (p. which means the imprint option is set to Yes and extend option is set to No. Advanced Features and Tools • Unfreeze (p. 300) • Named Selection (p. 310) • Joint (p. 385) • Body Operation (p. 344) • Surface Patch (p. Inc. Release 15. 322) • Face Split (p.© SAS IP.0 . 308) • Mid-Surface (p. It shows an edge and a target body using the default settings. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Example 60: Projection Feature's Edge On Body Usage The first figure shows the model prior to the projection operation. 317) • Enclosure (p. 337) • Fill (p.

and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Edges On Face Type This option allows you to project or imprint edges onto a face.0 . Example 61: Projection Feature's Edges On Face Usage The first figure shows the model prior to the projection operation. the extend option is set to No. Inc. Because the imprint option is selected.© SAS IP. . Inc. The second figure shows the model after the projection operation.Contains proprietary and confidential information 380 of ANSYS. Release 15. Target entities must be faces. the green edge is imprinted on the body. .3D Modeling The second figure shows the model after the projection operation. The green edge is the result after projecting the edge onto the target body. It shows 130 edges selected for projection and a target face using the default settings. and the direction vector is None (Closest Direction). It shows the face imprinted with edges resulting from projecting 130 edges onto the target face. All rights reserved. which means the imprint option is set to Yes.

Target entities must be 3D Edges.© SAS IP.0 . Inc. . Target entities must be faces. It shows both the vertices of the curved edge selected for projection and a face selected as target. Release 15. Example 62: Projection Feature's Points On Face Usage The first figure shows the model prior to the projection operation. Advanced Features and Tools Points On Face Type This option allows you to project or imprint points onto a face. ANSYS DesignModeler will create construction points at the projected location. If the imprint option is set to No. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. The second figure shows the model after to the projection operation. The two spots in green are the result of the projection of a selected point on target face. 381 . Points On Edge Type This option allows you to project or imprint points onto an edge. Here the setting for the direction vector is the default None (Closest Direction) and the imprint option is set to No. ANSYS DesignModeler will create construction points at the projected location.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. If the imprint option is set to No. All rights reserved.

Default is Yes. The second figure shows the model after the projection operation.Contains proprietary and confidential information 382 of ANSYS.© SAS IP. For more information on these principles. Conversion The Conversion feature is a tool that can be used to convert bodies of type Workbench to bodies of type DesignModeler. 205). It shows a vertex of a straight edge selected for the projection and a curved edges selected as the target. The Conversion feature supports taking selected bodies as input or converting all bodies in the model. . Here the setting for the direction is the default None (Closest Direction) and the imprint option is set to No. All rights reserved. Inc. The spot in green is the result of the projection of a selected point on the target edge. 51) features: • Simplify Geometry: If Yes. Default is No. Inc. Release 15. • Clean Bodies: Attempts to heal geometry for solid and surface bodies after performing conversion to DesignModeler format.3D Modeling Example 63: Projection Feature's Points On Edge Usage The first figure shows the model prior to the projection operation. Bodies must be converted to type DesignModeler if they are to be modified by DesignModeler features. Additionally. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 56) and Attach to Active CAD Geometry (p. see "DesignModeler Geometry Repres- entations" (p. the Conversion feature supports the following properties which are the identical to those available in the Import External Geometry File (p. Line bodies are ignored by the Clean Bodies option. The Conversion feature is typically utilized to resolve errors that may occur during this conversion. Default is Yes.0 . surfaces and curves of the model will be simplified into analytic geometry where possible. . • Heal Bodies: Attempts to heal geometry before converting geometry to DesignModeler format.

any new feature created from the DesignModeler menu or toolbar will be created as a child feature of the Conversion feature. When conversion does not fully succeed. DesignModeler will automatically activate all features and perform a generate before the transfer. NOTE 2: While clicking on the Add Cleanup button. notice that features below the Conversion feature are greyed out and the state of the model is rolled back to the last active feature. the icon preceding the Slice1 feature indicates conversion to the DesignModeler format has failed. if you attempt to perform a project save or close the DesignModeler application. This functionality can be used to organize features used for cleanup of converted bodies under the Conversion feature. NOTE 1: While in the Add Cleanup state. Finish Cleanup This context menu operation is available from the Conversion feature when you are in the cleanup state. review the features in the Tree Outline. At the end of the transfer the model will be restored back to the cleanup state that was active earlier. 383) Conversion Context Menu Options • Add Cleanup Features • Finish Cleanup Add Cleanup Features The Conversion feature supports the creation of most DesignModeler features as child features. DesignModeler will automatically activate all visible features and perform a generate before continuing to perform the requested operation. the DesignModeler application changes the visibility of bodies such that bodies related to the Conversion feature are visible and all other bodies are invisible. the visibility is restored back to the state the model visibility was in previously. Additionally. Inc. After clicking on Finish Cleanup. Advanced Features and Tools When converting a body from the Workbench type to DesignModeler type. The icon for Show Errors or Warnings precedes the feature icon. In the image below. Modeling features can then be applied to reconstruct the remainder of the geometry to get the exact replica of the Workbench type body in the DesignModeler geometry form. 383) GUI Navigation: to use Conversion to cleanup a body (p. When you exit the cleanup state. . To identify conversion failure. if geometry is transferred to a downstream application. GUI Navigation: to use Conversion to cleanup a body 1.0 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. Release 15. while in this state. 383 . Also while in this state. as much of the original body will be recovered as possible in DesignModeler format. Conversion topics: Conversion Context Menu Options (p.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. After clicking on the Add Cleanup features. the DesignModeler applic- ation tries to create an exact replica of the original body. All rights reserved. any new features created will be appended to the bottom of the feature list as usual.

. right-click on the failed feature (Slice1) and select the context menu item Add Conversion Feature> After Attach Feature. All rights reserved. Add any feature from the DesignModeler menus and provide the necessary inputs. 4.0 . Release 15.Contains proprietary and confidential information 384 of ANSYS. . Inc. Click Generate.© SAS IP. 5. To cleanup the converted body. To create the Conversion feature. 3. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc.3D Modeling 2. right-click the Conversion feature and click Add Cleanup Features in the context menu.

7. 212). the copied instance of the face set must remain coincident with the body it originated from. • Circular: a rotation axis and angle are required. Select the Conversion feature and click on Finish Adding Cleanup Features. Inc. then the patterned copies will be added to the model as active bodies and merged with other active bodies. All rights reserved. Its value must be non-zero. • Offset: The offset distance for a Linear pattern. 212). the in- stances for face sets may not intersect each other or the original face set. The properties of the Pattern feature are: • Pattern Type: Defines either a Linear. Circular. Inc. or the first of two directions for a Rectangular pattern. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. There are no such restrictions for selected bodies. For a face pattern to succeed. 385 . and line bodies are all acceptable. The default setting is Linear. 8. This is the distance between each instance of the pattern. Example 64: Base Region All instances of the pattern faces selected in the picture on the left must lie in the base region highlighted in the picture on the right. Additionally.0 .© SAS IP. Note that this means the instances may not intersect the hole where the original pattern faces reside. • Direction: The direction for a Linear pattern. If the selected bodies are active. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Click Generate. • Geometry: An Apply/Cancel button property that accepts face and body selections. Pattern The Pattern feature allows you to create copies of faces and bodies in three patterns: • Linear: a direction and offset distance is required. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until the converted body has the desired geometry. Release 15. • Rectangular: two sets of directions and offsets are needed. For selected bodies that are frozen. Surface (p. The new faces of the pattern must touch the topological entities that were incident to the original face set. Advanced Features and Tools 6. The faces may belong to either active or frozen bodies. also known as the base region. An example of the base region is shown below. Solid (p. their instances will be added to the model as frozen bodies. or the first of two offsets for a Rectangular pattern. each connected face set is patterned independently of other face sets. or be able to be easily extended to it. or Rectangular pattern. For face selections.

Its value must be positive. The default value for Angle is 0°. Inc. All rights reserved. Its value must be non-zero. • Copies: The number of copies to create for Linear and Circular patterns. The default value is 1.© SAS IP. 3D model edge. • Offset 2: The second of two offset distances for a Rectangular pattern.3D Modeling • Axis: The rotation axis for a Circular pattern. 2D sketch edge. • Direction 2: The second of two directions for a Rectangular pattern. Its value must be positive. then ANSYS DesignModeler will automatically calculate the angle necessary to evenly space the patterns about the rotation axis. Example 65: Linear patterns Example 66: Circular patterns Example 67: Rectangular patterns Release 15.0 . For Rectangular patterns this is the number of copies to create in the first direction. This is the angle between each instance of the pattern. 195) selected from a plane. . The axis can be a Direction Reference (p. This is the distance between each instance of the pattern in the second direction. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . Inc. face or two points. The default value is 1. and you will see "Evenly Spaced" in- dicated in the property instead of a numerical value. If the value of this property is 0°. • Angle: The rotation angle for a Circular pattern.Contains proprietary and confidential information 386 of ANSYS. • Copies 2: The number of copies to create in the second direction for Rectangular patterns.

414) Release 15. 361) • Merge (p. 322) • Face Split (p. Patterning a Multibody Part When patterning bodies of a multibody part. 388) • Boolean (p. 301) • Attribute (p. Inc. 298) • Unfreeze (p. For patterns that involve rotation.© SAS IP. Other Advanced Tools: • Freeze (p. 363) • Connect (p. 399) • Slice (p. 310) • Joint (p. You may need to adjust edge align- ments to orient patterned line bodies as desired. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.0 . 382) • Body Operation (p. if a new part is created (usually only for the first time) the share topology method of the new part is set to be the same as the share topology method of the original source part. 344) • Surface Patch (p. 327) • Symmetry (p. 378) • Conversion (p. 340) • Surface Extension (p. 317) • Enclosure (p. 300) • Named Selection (p. 308) • Mid-Surface (p. . each patterned edge will inherit the alignment from its source edge. The derived edge will attempt to use the same alignment object as its source edge. the bodies will rotate. 357) • Surface Flip (p. 404) • Face Delete (p. 368) • Projection (p. Inc. 387 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Advanced Features and Tools Patterning Line Bodies When patterning line bodies. 337) • Fill (p. but their alignments will not. All rights reserved.

© SAS IP. Performing a Simplify operation may increase the robustness of further modeling oper- ations. 391) • Imprint Faces (p. 388) • Sew (p. Simplify Use to select bodies to simplify. 393) • Clean Bodies (p. For selections. 419) Body Operation The Body Operation feature allows you to manipulate bodies. However. The default for this property is Yes. including Share Topology. All rights reserved. are designed to use bodies in Boolean Operations (p. The options are: • Simplify (p. 312) property. 242). You may choose whether you wish to keep or destroy the bodies you have chosen for the Boolean operation through the Preserve Bodies (p. attached to the faces or edges of the selected bodies. 393) The three Body Operation types. Any type of body can be used with body operations. The default value for Preserve Bodies (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. Imprint Faces. regardless of whether it is active or frozen. The Simplify Geometry option will simplify the surfaces and curves of the model into analytical geometry where possible.3D Modeling • Edge Delete (p. and vertices from the model where possible. . . bodies are selected via the Apply/Cancel button property in the Details View (p. edges. The Body Operation feature is available via the Create Menu (p. 276)). Planes are also selected via the Apply/Cancel button property. Example 68: Simplifying Geometry and Topology The body has three Non-Uniform Rational B-Splines (NURBS) surfaces and can be simplified: Release 15. The Simplify Topology will remove redundant faces. The default for this property is Yes. 312) is No. 76). It has up to six options. point feature points (PF points (p. 389) • Cut Material (p. are not affected by the body operation. 6). although not all of them will be available at all times. and then select the Simplify Geometry property and/or the Simplify Topology property. Cut Material. Inc. similar to the material types used in other features.0 . and Slice Material.Contains proprietary and confidential information 388 of ANSYS. 392) • Slice Material (p.

• Tolerance: Choose from Normal. 212) bodies together where they have edges common to within a given tolerance. • Merge Bodies: If Yes. All rights reserved.© SAS IP. or User Tolerance stitching tolerance. then DesignModeler will convert closed surface bodies to solids after sewing. Advanced Features and Tools After the simplification. Default is Normal.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. ANSYS DesignModeler will attempt to sew the selected Surface (p. Upon clicking Generate. This property has four options: • Create Solids: If Yes. the surfaces were reduced to planes and cones. The default is No. 212) bodies. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. then stitching will be attempted with all selected Surface (p. Inc. The cone faces were merged together: Sew Select bodies to use in a sewing operation. If Compatible Attributes means that stitching will be attempted for subsets of selected surface bodies that have attributes that are compatible. 389 . • User Tolerance: Enter user-defined tolerance (only if the Tolerance property has a value of User Tolerance).0 . . Example 69: Sewing Operation Multiple surface bodies before sewing operation: Release 15. Loose.

resulting in five surface bodies: Note that in Edit Selections mode the mouse cursor is enclosed by a circle of diameter equal to the “Tolerance” used for stitching. All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. .3D Modeling A single surface body after sewing operation: Example 70: If Compatible Attributes option A model consisting of 73 surface bodies before sewing operation: The same model with Merge Bodies set to If Compatible Attributes. .© SAS IP. Inc. Inc. This enables you to visualize the tolerance in the model workspace Release 15.Contains proprietary and confidential information 390 of ANSYS.0 .

All rights reserved. . 5)). 312) option to Yes.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Cut Material You select bodies to use in a cut operation that is performed on the active bodies in the model. but they can be protected by setting the Preserve Bodies (p. Body Operation's Cut Material option works the same way as Cut Material does for any of the basic features. The default value for the Preserve Bodies (p. Selected bodies will be destroyed by the operation by default. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 391 . Example 71: Cutting to form a mold A body is selected to cut into the block to form a mold: After the cut operation: Release 15. Advanced Features and Tools (Graphics Window (p. This option is available when active bodies exist in the model. Inc.0 .© SAS IP. The image shows the cursor change when user tolerance value provided is 2 millimeter. Note Cut Material is designed to use bodies in Boolean Operations (p. similar to the material types used in other features. 312) option is No. 242). Inc.

This option is available when active or frozen bodies exist in the model. both bodies are selected. All bodies will survive the operation. but they can be protected by setting the Preserve Bodies (p. selected bodies would only imprint on selected. An imprint operation is performed on the target bodies. Inc. and also imprinted itself onto the other body. 286) property. Body Operation features saved in a previous version and resumed in Release 15. The “Bodies” property is an “Apply/Cancel” button that facilitates the selection of target bodies that you wish to be imprinted. . Inc. active bodies in the model.© SAS IP.3D Modeling Imprint Faces The feature takes either all of the bodies (default) or selected bodies of the model as input. All rights reserved. the selected bodies would be destroyed by the operation by default. Example 72: Imprint faces of a block In this example of an imprint operation.” then an additional “Bodies” property becomes available. If the “Target Bodies” is set to “Selected Bodies.0 will execute as they did in the previous version. Any body not included in the target bodies will be unchanged. .5 and earlier. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. In Release 15. Furthermore. Faces from both bodies are used to imprint upon each other. based on the Target Bodies (p.0 . In ANSYS DesignModeler 14. Each target body will imprint and be imprinted upon by adjacent bodies that are also part of the target bodies. this behavior can be recreated by using the Boolean — Imprint Faces operation. 312) option to Yes. Release 15.Contains proprietary and confidential information 392 of ANSYS.0. Notice the block was imprinted upon.

312) option to Yes.” Release 15. Advanced Features and Tools Slice Material You select bodies for a slice operation. 312) is No. Inc. but they can be protected by setting the Preserve Bodies (p. The number of faults removed depends on the body. The Clean Bodies feature cleans each body and then performs an analysis. 242). and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. Note that Slice Material is designed to use bodies in Boolean Operations (p. Selected bodies will be destroyed by the operation by default. similar to the material types used in other features. The options are Normal and High.0 . Using the Normal option. Inc. if any faults are found the feature is marked as being in a warning mode. 393 .© SAS IP. To identify the remaining faults. Body Operation's Slice Material option works the same way as Slice Material does for any of the basic features. 442) option. . The default value for Preserve Bodies (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Example 73: Slicing a block An example of a slice operation where a body is selected to slice the block: Clean Bodies Select Clean Bodies to remove body faults via the Fault Detection (p. select the feature in the tree and click the right mouse button to select “Show Problematic Geometry. High is more thorough but also more time-consuming.

368) • Projection (p. Cleaning existing faults can significantly improve reliability of further modeling operations. The Clean Bodies option functions similarly during the model import process. 300) • Named Selection (p. Other Advanced Tools: • Freeze (p.0 .© SAS IP. 340) • Surface Extension (p. 60). Inc. 327) • Symmetry (p. 378) • Conversion (p. 399) • Slice (p. 363) • Connect (p. 414) • Edge Delete (p. . Inc. . 420) features to further improve the model. 419) Release 15. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 385) • Boolean (p. 357) • Surface Flip (p. 361) • Merge (p. 301) • Attribute (p.3D Modeling Subsequently you can select the High level of cleaning on the body.Contains proprietary and confidential information 394 of ANSYS. See Import and Attach Options (p. 308) • Mid-Surface (p. All rights reserved. 317) • Enclosure (p. or use other features such as the Repair (p. 344) • Surface Patch (p. 310) • Joint (p. 298) • Unfreeze (p. 337) • Fill (p. 322) • Face Split (p. 404) • Face Delete (p. 382) • Pattern (p.

Typically. set the Preserve Bodies option to No. Upon clicking Generate (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.0 . Any type of body can be used with body operations. are not affected by the body operation. Two imported bodies that do not align properly: The cap is moved using Body Operation's Move option: Release 15. regardless of whether it is active or frozen. . This is especially useful for aligning imported or attached bodies. Advanced Features and Tools Body Transformation The Body Transformation features allow you to reposition or transform bodies. If the original body is not required. All rights reserved. However. Inc. ANSYS DesignModeler will transform the selected bodies from the source plane to the destination plane. Inc. these planes will be planes created from the faces of the bodies at hand. attached to the faces or edges of the selected bodies. Example 74: Aligning Imported/Attached Bodies By Plane Select bodies and two planes: a source plane and a destination plane.© SAS IP. 6) is used to set the Move type: • By Plane • By Vertices • By Direction Use to keep the original body by setting the Preserve Bodies option to Yes. 395 . The Body Transformation features available are: • Move • Translate • Rotate • Mirror • Scale Move The Details View (p. point feature points (PF points).Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 252).

. ANSYS DesignModeler will transform selected bodies with Move vertices defining translation and Align.© SAS IP. ANSYS DesignModeler will transform selected bodies with Move vertices defining translation and Align.Contains proprietary and confidential information 396 of ANSYS. 252). Upon clicking Generate (p. However. Inc. . Typically. You can choose not to specify Orient and Align.0 . Typically. Example 76: Aligning Imported/Attached Bodies By Direction Select bodies. Align and Orient. Release 15. Orient defining rotation respectively. 252). input for Align property is necessary if Orient is specified. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. However. Align is necessary if Orient is specified. these vertices belong to source and destination bodies. You can choose not to specify Orient and Align. these vertices belong to source and destination bodies. All rights reserved. Orient defining rotation respectively.3D Modeling Example 75: Aligning Imported/Attached Bodies By Vertices Select bodies and pairs of vertices for Move. pair vertices for Source and Destination Move and directions for Source and Destination Align and Source and Destination Orient. Upon clicking Generate (p. Inc.

195). 312) option to Yes. 397 . Advanced Features and Tools Translate Use to select bodies to translate in a specified direction. By default. 195) and specify the distance along the vector to translate the body. Rotate Use to select bodies to rotate about a specified axis and by a specified angle. the mirror plane is initially the active plane. Z offsets that you want the body to be translated by.© SAS IP. You can specify the direction in one of two ways as listed in the Direction Definition property. Upon clicking Generate (p. 312) option to No. You can choose to keep the original body by setting the Preserve Bodies (p. You can choose to keep the original body by setting the Preserve Bodies (p. 252). 312) option to Yes. Inc. You can specify the axis in one of two ways as listed in the Axis Definition property. If the original body is not required.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. If the original body is not required. . Selection: You can specify the translation vector using a Direction Reference (p. Coordinates: You can specify the X. Inc. Example 77: Mirroring in XYPlane This body is selected to be mirrored in the XYPlane: After generating: Release 15. 312) option to No. 312) option to No. set the Preserve Bodies (p. If the original body is not required. whereas frozen bodies that are reflected will not. 312) option to Yes. Selection: You can specify the axis or rotation using a Direction Reference (p. ANSYS DesignModeler will create copies of the selected bodies that are reflections of the original bodies in the mirror plane. Active bodies that are reflected will be merged with the active model. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Mirror Use to select bodies and a mirror plane.0 . set the Preserve Bodies (p. Y. set the Preserve Bodies (p. All rights reserved. Components: Component definition for the directional vector used as the rotation axis and origin You can choose to keep the original body by setting the Preserve Bodies (p.

001 and 1000. If uniform scaling is required. 3D vertex. • Body Centroids: Each selected body is scaled about its own centroid. Example 78: Scaling about centroids The selected bodies will undergo a scaling operation about their centroids: Release 15. then select a scaling origin through the Scaling Origin property. to use as the scaling type: – Uniform :Global scaling factor. • Point: You can select a specific point. . You can choose to keep the original body by setting the Preserve Bodies option to Yes. 276). and entering an independent scale factor option for each axis. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. either a 2D sketch point.© SAS IP. Each scaling factor (global or non-uniform) must be a value between . or PF point (p. Inc. – Non-uniform: Independent scaling factor for each axis: → X-axis scaling factor → Y-axis scaling factor → Z-axis scaling factor Non-uniform scaling can be enabled by switching the Scale Type option to Non-Uniform. set the Preserve Bodies option to No. All rights reserved.3D Modeling Scale Use to select bodies to scale. Inc. . set the Scale Type option to Uniform and a single global scaling factor option will be presented.0 . If the original body is not required. This property is a combination box with three options: • World Origin: The origin of the world coordinate system is used as the scaling origin.Contains proprietary and confidential information 398 of ANSYS.

they will not be combined. the result would be that a Unite operation would be applied to the Solid (p. their normals must be in a consistent direction. Also. To correct this. when different. The bodies can be Solid (p. thickness.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 212) bodies. The Surface Flip feature can be used to reverse the normals of surface bodies. 402) of existing bodies. and active/frozen status. Subtract (p. When combining surface bodies. If two Solid (p. Intersect (p. An example of three original overlapping bodies: Unite This option allows all three body types. That function will internally reverse the normals of surface bodies as needed to complete the operation. All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. select all of the surface bodies and look at how they are highlighted to see which ones do not match. 399). then an error indicating opposite surface bodies will be reported. Advanced Features and Tools The bodies after scaling them about their centroids by a scale factor of 2x: Boolean Use the Boolean feature to Unite (p. but do note that different body types cannot be combined to- gether. but execution will continue. Inc. 212). is to use Body Operation (p. 212) bodies with different thicknesses. If not. Surface (p. . 388): Sew. Likewise. 399 . if the bodies have different material properties. the resulting body name for each region will normally be the name of the oldest existing body of the bodies being joined in that region. 212) bodies and separately to the surface bodies. will match that of the oldest body in the group. 212) bodies that overlap are selected along with two surface bodies (that meet at a common edge). or nearly so. Even if the surface bodies overlap with the Solid (p. or Imprint Faces (p. 212). or (for Unite only) Line bodies. In this case. other attributes like material. Inc.0 . or have Surface (p.© SAS IP. Release 15. it will cause a warning. 400). 400). An even better method of combining surface bodies when they are connected edge to edge. Multiple bodies can be selected that form several separate connected regions.

The Active/Frozen status of bodies and new pieces that result from that body will be preserved.0 . The Yes.© SAS IP. leaving a result similar to a slice operation. with the upper right selected as the target: Intersect Like Unite. Sliced option will preserve the tool bodies. an option is provided in the Intersect Result property that determines how the intersection is to be computed: • Intersection of All Bodies: Computes only the regions shared by all tool bodies • Union of All Intersections: Computes the regions where any two or more tool bodies intersect Additionally for the Intersect operation only. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. select a list of target bodies and a list of tool bodies. An example of Subtract. an option to preserve the tool bodies is available.3D Modeling An example of Unite: Subtract For this option. For Subtract. The intersection pieces generated by the operation will always be added to the model as frozen bodies. . Here.Contains proprietary and confidential information 400 of ANSYS. the Intersect option uses a single list of tool bodies. An example of Intersection of All Bodies: Release 15. Inc. but subtract the intersection regions from them. Inc. there is an additional Preserve Tool Bodies option. All rights reserved.

All rights reserved. . 401 . Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.0 . Advanced Features and Tools An example of Intersection of All Bodies. with Preserve Tool Bodies option as Sliced: An example of Union of All Intersections: An example of Union of All Intersections with Preserve Tool Bodies option as Sliced: Release 15.© SAS IP.

All rights reserved. Note that either the target or tool bodies can be frozen. • Yes.3D Modeling Imprint Faces For this option. .Contains proprietary and confidential information 402 of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. provided the tool and target are separate bodies that intersect. .0 . Inc. leaving the tool imprinted on the target. select a list of target bodies and a list of tool bodies which intersect the target bodies. The faces of the tool bodies will be imprinted on the faces of the target body where they intersect. An example of Imprint Faces before selecting Preserve Tool Bodies option: An example of Imprint Faces with Preserve Tool Bodies option as No Preserve: Release 15. • Yes: Will leave the tool body intact. imprinting only the target body. Imprinted: Will leave imprints of the intersection on both the tool and target. Preserve Tool Bodies has three options: • No (default): Will delete the tool body.© SAS IP. Inc.

Inc. Inc. 317) • Enclosure (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 310) • Joint (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 337) • Fill (p. . 403 . 322) • Face Split (p. 308) • Mid-Surface (p. 361) Release 15. 357) • Surface Flip (p. Advanced Features and Tools An example of Imprint Faces with Preserve Tool Bodies option as Yes Preserve: Other Advanced Tools: • Freeze (p.© SAS IP. 301) • Attribute (p. 327) • Symmetry (p. All rights reserved. 340) • Surface Extension (p. 300) • Named Selection (p. 298) • Unfreeze (p. 344) • Surface Patch (p.0 .

This feature is available before and after the Share Topology (p. 414) • Edge Delete (p. All rights reserved. Slice by Edge Loop (p. 419) Slice The Slice feature improves the usability of ANSYS DesignModeler as a tool to produce sweepable bodies for hex meshing and to assign different cross sections in a line body. 382) • Pattern (p. 405) • Slice After Share Topology Usage example • Body Persistence (p. 406) • Slice Limitations (p. 407) Release 15. 409): Select a face. and DesignModeler will separate or “slice off” these edges to form new bodies. The Slice feature is available via the Create Menu (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 76) and has five options: Slice by Plane (p. Slice Off Faces (p. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information 404 of ANSYS. 388) • Slice (p. . Slice Off Edges (p. and Solid/Surface can be sliced by the underlying surface of that selected face. 411): Select chains of closed loop of edges. This option is available only for the Slice feature before Share Topology. 408): Select a plane. . 385) • Body Operation (p. Inc. which are created by using edge loops. and the DesignModeler application will "slice off" these faces. 408): Select faces of Solid body. Solid/Surface body can be sliced by the selected plane. Slice by Surface (p. 378) • Conversion (p. 405) • Slice Feature After Share Topology (p. 404) • Face Delete (p.0 . Active bodies in the Slice operation will be frozen automatically. 368) • Projection (p. presumably forming some concavity. and Solid/Surface body will be sliced by the sheet bodies.© SAS IP. 253) feature. Slice topics: • Slice Usage example • Slice Targets Property (p. 363) • Connect (p. 411): Select edges of line body.3D Modeling • Merge (p.

404). All rights reserved. ANSYS DesignModeler is showing frozen bodies in a translucent manner (but you can change this behavior through an option in the View Menu (p. For example. Slice Feature After Share Topology The behavior of the Slice Feature After Share Topology feature is affected by the Share Topology Method property of the owner part of the bodies on which slice is performed. 85). Example 80: Slice After Share Topology Usage The body shown in following snapshot is sliced with the highlighted surface after Share Topology feature is generated in the ANSYS DesignModeler application. 6). 405 . If the Share Topology Method is "Auto". you might wish to slice a body by a plane. 76) and select Slice (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.0 . 252). This allows you to specify the bodies (All Bodies or Selected Bodies) that are subjected to the slice operation. Active bodies in the Slice operation will be frozen automatically. 411) or Slice by Surface (p. Note that. the resulting sliced bodies will not share topology. an Apply/Cancel button property will appear to facilitate body selection. . For all other share topology types. Click Generate (p. Advanced Features and Tools Example 79: Slice Usage For example. there is an additional property called Slice Targets listed in the Details View (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 408). and see how the model is sliced into different bodies. as illustrated below.© SAS IP.agdb file. This is the default option. Slice Targets Property When using the Slice by Plane (p. suppose you are using an . By default. Selected Bodies: Only the selected bodies are sliced by the plane. Select the faces you want to "slice off. Inc. but do not want to slice all bodies by it. Slice by Edge Loop (p. If this option is chosen. Inc. then the slice feature slices bodies in such a way that the topologies are shared at the location of slice. 409) options. in these screen shots. Slice Targets is a combination box with two options: All Bodies (default): The plane slices all bodies. Release 15. you show the frozen bodies in a "solid" manner." then bring down the Create Menu (p.

Inc.3D Modeling If the Share Topology Method property of owner part of the body is non "Auto". When it occurs.Contains proprietary and confidential information 406 of ANSYS. slicing operations may disrupt body persistence. the face bounded by the edges and vertices of the edges are shared between the two bodies. The fuchsia colored edges. Inc. However if the Share Topology Method property of owner part of body is "Auto". Body Persistence In some instances. edges and faces along the slice locations. Release 15. All rights reserved.© SAS IP. then the slice results in two separate manifold bodies which do not share any vertices. edges or faces in between. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. you may see two or more bodies swap places in the model. This can occur if a slicing operation slices a body into many pieces in a single feature. the slice feature results in two bodies sharing vertices.0 . These results are identical to the slice done before share topology. . .

300) • Named Selection (p. 344) • Surface Patch (p. 419) Release 15. 399) • Face Delete (p. 337) • Fill (p. 385) • Body Operation (p.0 . Inc. Inc. 361) • Merge (p. 317) • Enclosure (p. 414) • Edge Delete (p. . 407 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. for Other Advanced Tools: • Freeze (p. 308) • Mid-Surface (p. 408) after a shared topology operation. 409) options before the Share Topology Method may merge the target body faces coinciding with the slicing sheet bodies or plane.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Advanced Features and Tools Slice Limitations Faces coinciding with Slice Occasionally. 357) • Surface Flip (p. 388) • Boolean (p. 327) • Symmetry (p. 363) • Connect (p. 322) • Face Split (p. 382) • Pattern (p.© SAS IP. 368) • Projection (p. All rights reserved. 378) • Conversion (p. 301) • Attribute (p. 408) after Share Topology (p. 253). Shared faces cannot be used for Slice Off Faces (p. 298) • Unfreeze (p. 310) • Joint (p. 408) or Slice by Surface (p. Shared Faces You can not use a shared face for Slice Off Faces (p. 340) • Surface Extension (p. use the Slice by Plane (p.

and the engine may not be able to determine a suitable extension to cover the wound left by the removed faces. the selected faces are removed from the model and deleted.0 . 408) Slice by Surface (p. 411) Slice by Edge Loop (p. In Slice Off Faces. the engine will attempt to heal the remaining bodies. . An important similarity between Slice Off Faces and Face Delete is that both operations involve model healing. . only then they are not deleted. a Slice By Plane will operate only on the selected body.© SAS IP. After generating the Slice feature. If so. 411) Release 15. Other Slice feature options: Slice by Plane (p. the selected faces are also first removed from the existing model. then the feature will report an error stating that it cannot heal the wound. but rather. Other Slice feature options: Slice Off Faces (p. In Face Delete. All rights reserved. 411) Slice Off Faces Slice Off Faces can be used only on Solid body. 409) Slice Off Edges (p. Internally the Slice Off Faces option is very similar to Face Delete. 409) Slice Off Edges (p. 408) Slice by Surface (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 408 of ANSYS. Inc. ANSYS DesignModeler will attempt to create new bodies out of the sliced-off faces.3D Modeling Slice by Plane You can use Slice by Plane to slice Solid/Surface bodies. Afterwards. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. only the selected body is sliced. As illustrated below. Inc.

© SAS IP. An additional property Bounded Surface is shown when using the Slice by Surface option. . along with the selected Target Face. The figures below illustrate the Slice by Surface feature The first figure shows the body prior to the Slice by Surface operation. This option also allows you to specify Slice Targets if desired. 409 . Advanced Features and Tools Slice by Edge Loop (p. This allows you to specify whether to use bounded or unbounded region of the underlying surface when performing the slice. 411) Slice by Surface Similar to Slice by Plane. NURBS Surface as Target Face In some cases. The model has been sliced into seven bodies along a cylindrical surface generated from the target face. The Bounded Surface property is set to No. Inc. ANSYS DesignModeler may not be able to perform a slice when using the Slice by Surface option if a Non-Uniform Rational B-Splines (NURBS) surface is selected as the target face. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Slice by Surface can be used to slice Solid/Surface bodies. Release 15.0 . When Bounded Surface property is set to No the unbounded surface will be used to slice the model. The Slice by Surface option will use the underlying surface created from the selected Target Face to slice the model. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. All rights reserved. The next figure demonstrates the results after generation. the surface region bounded by the exterior loops of the selected target face will be used to slice the model. When Bounded Surface property is set to Yes.

Inc. All rights reserved. The following figure show the results after generation of Slice by Surface when the Bounded Surface property is set to No. Other Slice feature options: Release 15. .3D Modeling Bounded Surface Property Usage The figures below demonstrate the effect of the Slice by Surface operation with Bounded Surface property set to Yes. Note that the body has been sliced into five bodies. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The next figures show the results after generation. Note that the body has been sliced into three bodies when the Bounded Surface property is set to Yes.© SAS IP. The first figure shows a body prior to the operation. along with selected target face.0 .Contains proprietary and confidential information 410 of ANSYS. Inc. .

lower chords. 409) Slice by Edge Loop (p. Note If all edges of a body are selected for the Slice Off Edges option. The next figure demonstrates the results after generation. Other Slice feature options: Slice by Plane (p. If needed. Finally the model has three bodies. Suppose that you desire to separate the cross-chords into a separate body so it can be assigned a different cross-section than the upper and lower chords. one body for the upper chords and one body for the lower chords.0 . 411 . a separate line body must be created for each connected set. . 408) Slice Off Faces (p. The first figure shows the body prior to the Slice Off Edges operation. 411) Slice Off Edges In the Slice Off Edges option. Inc. 411) Slice by Edge Loop (p. the unselected edges will be separated into many line bodies such that each line body has only connected edges. Select all cross chords as shown in the figure (selected edges are in green). Release 15. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. and cross chords all in a single body. 411) Slice by Edge Loop Slice by Edge Loop is used to slice Solid/Surface bodies. All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. This is because this operation will not generate any new bodies. the cross chords are sliced off to a new body. 408) Slice Off Edges (p. they will be separated into two bodies. 408) Slice by Surface (p. Since the upper and lower chords which were unselected do not form a connected set. you select a set of line body edges that need to be separated from the body to which they belong. 408) Slice Off Faces (p. an error will be reported which can be examined using the problematic geometry menu. Advanced Features and Tools Slice by Plane (p. If you select a set of edges that are disconnected. Inc.© SAS IP. It shows a truss having upper chords. The figure below illustrates the Slice Off Edges option.

0 . The following figures demonstrate the slicing operation. using 3. The following figures demonstrate the results after slicing. there is only one open loop. Note Slice by Edge Loop is available only for the Slice (p. The figures below illustrate the Slice by Surface feature. they will slice only the selected target body (here the middle body is the target). the newly created sheets (from the selected loop of edges) are deleted automatically. Inc.line body edges and one sheet body edge. then using these sheets. The second figure shows the model after slicing. there are two closed loops in the edge set. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. This is demonstrated in the following two figures. Even though the selected loop of edges are able to slice two bodies. Inc. The first figure shows the body prior to the Slice by Edge Loop operation and the selected closed loop edges.3D Modeling The Slice by Edge Loop option creates sheet bodies using the closed loop of the edges selected. Once the slicing is done. 253). 404) feature before Share Topology (p. then slicing will not work. it will fail to generate slicing. Whereas in the second case (third figure). . Release 15. All rights reserved. so slicing will work fine. This option also enables you to specify Slice Targets. The individual set of closed loops should contain only one closed loop. by specifying the target bodies. In the first case (first two figures). So. If there are multiple loops in a set of connected edge set.© SAS IP. it slices the model. . The selected edges need not be the line body edges.Contains proprietary and confidential information 412 of ANSYS.

414) • Face Delete (p.0 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Advanced Features and Tools Case I Case II Note If any one of the sheet generated from the edge loops is partially inside to a target body (that is not slicing it completely). All rights reserved. then the slice feature will fail. Other Slice feature options: Slice by Plane (p. 419) Other Advanced Tools: • Freeze (p. 409) Slice Off Edges (p. 411) Delete The following features can be used to delete entities: • Body Delete (p. 414) • Edge Delete (p. 300) Release 15. 413 . Inc. 298) • Unfreeze (p. Inc. . 408) Slice by Surface (p.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 408) Slice Off Faces (p.

322) • Face Split (p. All rights reserved. It can be used for defeaturing and refeaturing of imported models. 308) • Mid-Surface (p. Release 15. 363) • Connect (p. 337) • Fill (p. remove a feature. 310) • Joint (p. 344) • Surface Patch (p. . or Line body. such as a hole. Use of the feature is graphically illustrated below. 419) Body Delete Use the Body Delete feature to remove a body. Face Delete can be used to remove unwanted features from imported models. Inc. 378) • Conversion (p. and recreate in ANSYS DesignModeler to get it parameterized. 399) • Slice (p. Inc.3D Modeling • Named Selection (p. 340) • Surface Extension (p. 385) • Body Operation (p.0 .© SAS IP. Face Delete Use the Face Delete feature to undo features such as blends and cuts by removing faces from the model and then healing it to patch up the holes left behind by the removed faces.Contains proprietary and confidential information 414 of ANSYS. 404) • Edge Delete (p. 382) • Pattern (p. 317) • Enclosure (p. 361) • Merge (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 301) • Attribute (p. 357) • Surface Flip (p. either a Solid. 327) • Symmetry (p. 388) • Boolean (p. 368) • Projection (p. Surface. which is a single component in the model. .

212) body are selected with the No Healing option. Advanced Features and Tools During feature creation of Face Delete. then the body is deleted. the selection will be ignored and a warning will be issued. select these four highlighted faces." unless the No Healing option is chosen.© SAS IP. Face Delete topics: Forms of Healing (p. this feature would only operate on active bodies. The 3D edge selection is only there to assist in selecting the faces with use of the Flood Area (p. 184) selection extension. if all faces of a body are selected. 419) Example 81: Deleting Blends and Cavity Suppose you wanted to delete the blends and cavity from this model. For any option except No Healing. and heal the resulting "wound. . Inc. 415 . Using the Face Delete feature. This feature can be executed on both frozen and active bodies beginning in version 11. you may select faces and 3D edges.0. Release 15. Inc.0 . The result is no blends or cavities. Prior to version 11. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.0. 417) Edge Delete (p. All rights reserved. Face Delete works by attempting to remove groups of adjacent selected faces from the model. When all faces of a Surface (p.

then. Release 15. The result is no grooves. It could be either Face A or Face B.© SAS IP. All rights reserved. Inc.0 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. would delete all the selected faces and close the hole left behind in the larger face with the square boundary. This could lead to persistence problems when resuming databases in later versions of ANSYS DesignModeler. . Inc. . shown below. including the circular face that forms the inside of the letter O. the face being retained after the operation is not guaranteed to be the same. This method of face selection is recommended for improved persistence behavior. Using Face Delete feature select all the highlighted faces.3D Modeling Example 82: Recommended Selection of Faces Suppose you wanted to delete the depression caused by the letter ‘O’ on the model shown below. the Face Delete feature. Then.Contains proprietary and confidential information 416 of ANSYS. If the circular face (face B) is not selected for the Face Delete feature.

0. Select these two faces. Patch Healing This method takes the edges surrounding the selected faces and tries to create a single face to cover the region. Example 83: Forms of Healing Illustrated Suppose this hole is to be deleted from this model. An error will only be reported if none of these methods succeed.© SAS IP. This is the default for features created prior to ANSYS ANSYS DesignModeler 11. it is treated like “Automatic” for them. the surrounding geometry can extend naturally to cover the wound(s) left by the removed faces. It allows for the deletion of faces from surface bodies without any healing. Release 15. Natural Healing For this option select the faces such that upon removing these groups. including an additional internal method that sometimes allows a smooth ‘natural’ healing when the standard Natural Healing fails.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 212) bodies are selected with this option. This can result in multiple surface bodies if deleting the selected faces leaves faces that are no longer connected. This is the default for new features. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Patch Healing is attempted. Inc. Then. the feature will report an error stating that it cannot heal the wound. If faces from Solid (p. Advanced Features and Tools Forms of Healing There are four options for how the healing should be done: • Automatic (default) • Natural Healing • Patch Healing • No Healing Automatic This will first attempt Natural Healing.0 . No Healing This is a special option for dealing with Surface (p. 417 . This can be useful for cleaning up some models. 212) bodies. if both of those fail. . If a suitable extension cannot be determined. Inc. All rights reserved.

0 .Contains proprietary and confidential information 418 of ANSYS. All rights reserved. . . and its subsidiaries and affiliates.3D Modeling Using Automatic or Natural Healing results in the following: Using Patch Healing the result would be as follows: For surface bodies the No Healing option may be applied: Release 15. Inc.© SAS IP. Inc.

If two or more selected edges are connected. Often it is useful for removing blends. Healing Methods There are three healing options in Edge Delete feature: • Automatic (default) : The automatic method will attempt natural healing first.0. • Natural Healing: Natural healing will attempt to naturally extend the adjacent edges to close the wound left behind by the removed edge(s). Inc.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. chamfers. 212) bodies. 419 .0 . It can also be applied to imprinted edges from both Solid (p. and holes from surface bodies. Release 15. it will attempt No Healing. as well as line body edges. Note that for boundary edges of surface bodies. This method cannot be applied to imprinted edges in features created prior to ANSYS release 14. then the entire connected set is deleted as a single operation. Inc. . This feature can be executed on either active or frozen bodies. Advanced Features and Tools Deleting with the No Healing option yields this result: Edge Delete Use the Edge Delete feature to remove unwanted edges from bodies. If unsuccessful. 212) and Surface (p. natural healing is the only applicable method.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. All rights reserved.

Repair features can be executed on both frozen and active bodies. Inc. also referred to as faults. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Example 84: Edge Delete A simple example showing natural heal.0 . The vertex blend is removed. . Inc. . This method can be applied to imprinted edges and line body edges only. from the model.Contains proprietary and confidential information 420 of ANSYS.3D Modeling • No Healing: Deletes edges without healing. Release 15. When all edges of a hole are selected. ANSYS DesignModeler will remove the hole entirely: Removal of an imprinted edge without healing: Removal of line body edges: Repair Repair features form a set of semiautomatic tools that allow you to easily search and easily fix unwanted geometries or geometric errors.© SAS IP. There are eight types of repair features. In the case of line body edges. All rights reserved. it is possible to end up creating new bodies when the original body is split into two or more pieces after removing edges. recreating the corner: ing.

Therefore. Repair • Repair Hard Edges (p. Inc. If you choose Selected Bodies an additional Bodies property is displayed that allows you to select the bodies to process. Repair topics: • Automatically Finding Faults (p. 425) Automatically Finding Faults All repair features incorporate an automatic fault finder. • The list of faults along with a recommended repair method is presented. • Review each fault as needed and change the repair method type or choose not to repair the fault. • Generate the feature and later examine each fault and if the repaired geometry is acceptable. and Selected Bodies. 423) • Viewing Faults/Results (p. 421) • Generating the Repair Feature (p. 429) • Repair Sharp Angles (p. All rights reserved. if the fault's method type is set to "Do Not Repair" it is possible that the fault is still repaired. The other choices are All Bodies. 421 . The default is Visible Bodies. The following properties are used for this purpose.© SAS IP. Note Use of any of the Repair features does not ensure that the fault will not be repaired or re- moved if you specify not to repair it. Repairing one fault can also lead to another fault being repaired.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 424) • Repair Context Menu Options (p. Release 15.0 . 427) • Repair Seams (p. 424) • Repair Feature Types (p. Inc. 425) • Repair Edges (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 432) • Repair Slivers (p. • Bodies to Search: Here you choose which bodies to search. 433) • Repair Spikes (p. 436) A typical usage of a repair feature is as follows: • First search for faults on a set of bodies based on particular criteria. 428) • Repair Holes (p. You can find faults by specifying the bodies on which the faults need to be found and the minimum and maximum limiting criteria. . 435) • Repair Faces (p.

433) and Repair Spikes (p. Note that in Edit Selections mode the mouse cursor is enclosed by a pair of concentric circles whose diameters are equal to the Minimum and Maximum Limit provided. set the maximum limit to 0. this value is automatically set back to No. 6) of the Repair Feature. The Details View (p. • Find Faults Now: This property will always display a No as its value. This value is automatically set and is based on the bodies that are to be searched. When all the faults are found. This feature if generated will have No Faults Found warning message. Note If faults are not found with the given criteria. All rights reserved. 427). Release 15. ANSYS DesignModeler suggests the best repair method for each fault based on a heuristic algorithm. The default limit is zero for most or all repair features. When you set it to 'Yes. You can modify this value. The maximum limit cannot be less than the minimum limit already specified. The image shows the cursor change when Minimum and Maximum limits provided are 1 and 2 millimeters respectively. This enables you to visualize the limits provided in the model workspace (Graphics Window (p.© SAS IP. For each fault you will see its criteria value and a suggested repair method. If the value of the limit is Unlimited or Zero. no circle will be drawn in the workspace (Graphics Win- dow (p. . Inc. Repair Slivers (p. Lists of Faults After you use the “Find Faults Now” property you will see the list of faults. 5)). Repair Seams (p. . This list is sorted based on the criteria value.0 . 5)). No Faults Found appears in the Details View (p. Inc.3D Modeling • Minimum Limit: This sets the minimum value of the criteria that the fault needs to satisfy to be found. Repair Holes (p. faults on specified bodies that satisfy the specified limit criteria are found. 435). 429). These circles will be visible only for Repair Edges (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 422 of ANSYS. the value will be reset to an automatic value when the bodies to search list is changed. but. 6) of one such repair feature after Generate is shown below. 428). and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The criteria is specific to each repair feature and is explained later. • Maximum Limit: This sets the maximum value of the criteria that the fault needs to satisfy to be found. Note that to get the automatic value.

• Partially Repaired: If the selected repair method is partially successful in fixing a fault then “Partially Repaired” status is shown in the group header.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. After the generation of the feature is complete. Repair If any Repair feature is generated without searching for faults. Other Repair topics: • Generating the Repair Feature (p. All rights reserved. This process is repeated until the fault is fixed or all available repair methods are attempted. you can change the repair method without entering into the Edit Selections mode. the status of each fault can be seen in the fault group header. Inc. Repair Methods ANSYS DesignModeler allows you to change the Repair Method from the suggested Repair Method. 425) Generating the Repair Feature On clicking generate. 424) • Repair Context Menu Options (p. 424) • Repair Feature Types (p. The Automatic repair method first tries to use a particular repair method to fix the fault. If this method fails. it will error out. Inc. 421) Release 15. Other Repair topics: • Automatically Finding Faults (p. if the output from specified repair method is not satisfactory. • Failed: If the selected repair method failed then a “Failed” status is shown in the group header. If you do not want to fix a particular fault then set the repair method to “Do Not Repair”. You can also change the Repair Method for first faults and then apply that method to all other faults.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Note After Generate. Some repair features support a repair method named “Automatic”. • Error: If the geometry specified in the fault is invalid then an “Error” status is shown in the group header. 423) • Viewing Faults/Results (p. Fault Status • Success: If the fault is successfully fixed by the selected repair method then no message is shown in the fault group header. 423 . the chosen repair method for each fault is executed.0 . then another repair method is automatically attempted. .

• Select in All Below: This sets the Repair Method of the selected fault to all the faults in the list below. Inc. 423) • Viewing Faults/Results (p. . 424) Release 15. 425) Repair Context Menu Options A context menu is displayed on a right click in the list view. Only the group headers are visible. 424) • Repair Feature Types (p.© SAS IP. • Expand All: Expands all the groups. • Show Reason: It shows the reason for failure.Contains proprietary and confidential information 424 of ANSYS. All rights reserved. 421) • Generating the Repair Feature (p. • Collapse All: Collapses all the groups.3D Modeling • Viewing Faults/Results (p. The context menu has the following options: • Restore View: It restores the view as it was prior to examining the fault. 424) • Repair Feature Types (p. 421) • Generating the Repair Feature (p. 424) • Repair Context Menu Options (p. The context menu is dynamic and rich in options. 423) • Repair Context Menu Options (p. Inc. 425) Viewing Faults/Results You can examine any fault or the results of the fault by selecting that fault in the repair feature’s list view. . The screen zooms to the neighborhood of the fault and a label is shown.0 . Other Repair topics: • Automatically Finding Faults (p. the view changes to a wireframe mode and all bodies expect the fault’s body are hidden. Hides properties belonging to all groups. When selecting the fault. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Selecting the fault after generate shows the results in a similar manner. Other Repair topics: • Automatically Finding Faults (p. Shows properties belonging to all groups.

427) • Repair Seams (p. Hard edges are undesirable as it would create unnecessary fine mesh near them. 428) • Repair Holes (p.0 . Inc. 425 . 432) • Repair Slivers (p. 425) • Repair Edges (p. 435) • Repair Faces (p. 436) Repair Hard Edges Edges which do not take part in defining the boundary of a face are called hard edges. All rights reserved. Inc. You can use this repair feature on Solid (p. 212) and Surface (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 433) • Repair Spikes (p. 425) Repair Feature Types The eight types are: • Repair Hard Edges (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. A typical detection of hard edges is shown below. 429) • Repair Sharp Angles (p. This will remove hard edges from the model. Release 15. Repair • Repair Feature Types (p. 212) bodies only.© SAS IP. .

All rights reserved. it can be processed using the property. However. 6). the face from which the hard edge is deleted is zoomed and shown. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. .© SAS IP. 429) • Repair Sharp Angles (p. Other Repair types: • Repair Edges (p. 436) Release 15. Fault Finding Criteria ANSYS DesignModeler finds all hard edges present in the model. Methods Available Only edge delete method is available for this feature. Example 85: Using Repair Hard Edges Results are shown in the figure below after Generate.0 . 433) • Repair Spikes (p. 435) • Repair Faces (p. 427) • Repair Seams (p. Inc. 428) • Repair Holes (p. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information 426 of ANSYS.3D Modeling By default. 432) • Repair Slivers (p. . • Edge Delete: The hard edge will be deleted using the Edge Delete method. While viewing the results. the joint edges will not be processed as hard edges. Process Edge Joints in the Details View (p.

consider the figure below. . you can select only those faces that use the vertices of the short edge or the short edge itself. You can change this selection if required. • Edge Delete: The short edge will be deleted using the Edge Delete method. One of the ad- jacent edges of fault edge is suggested as merging edge. Inc. an edge needs to be specified for the operation to be successful. you need to select the faces to merge.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 427 . But in case of Face Merge method. Any gaps left behind by the delete operation are healed by growing adjacent edges. Note The default value shown for Edge Merge method is “Automatic Selection” as ANSYS DesignModeler suggests one adjacent edge for merge.0 . while manually selecting faces for the face merge operation. and general body edges.© SAS IP. you can set the method to Edge Delete to get this result. Example 86: Using Repair Edges Function As an example of Repair Edges operation. However. An alternate method to fix this fault is to use the Face Merge method and choose the four neighboring faces. “0” is shown as you need to select the faces to merge. All rights reserved. If you search for fault entities with default settings then four faults will be listed. • Fault 1: ANSYS DesignModeler will suggest the Edge merge method to fix this fault. • Fault 3: ANSYS DesignModeler will suggest the Edge Merge method to fix this fault. You can select both the adjacent edges for merging edge. Note. The fused vertex will be at the mid point of the edge. wire edges. Methods Available • Vertex Connect: The two vertices of the short edge will be fused into one vertex and the edge will be deleted. An edge whose length lies between the minimum and maximum limit is determined to be a fault. • Edge Merge: The short edge will be merged with one or more adjacent edges. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. If the desired result is a sharp corner. Fault Finding Criteria ANSYS DesignModeler uses the length of the edge as the criteria to search for short edges in the model. Repair Repair Edges You can use this repair feature to remove short edges from the model. This method will not work for laminar edges. Inc. If this method is chosen. ANSYS DesignModeler automatically suggests one adjacent edge for merging. • Fault 4: ANSYS DesignModeler will suggest the Vertex Connect method to fix this fault. Release 15. • Fault 2: ANSYS DesignModeler will suggest Vertex Connect method to fix this fault. • Face Merge: The short edge will be fixed by merging a set of faces with the Face Merge method.

5) and choose “Add Group” from the context menu. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.0 . Other Repair types: • Repair Hard Edges (p. . 425) • Repair Seams (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 428 of ANSYS. select an edge in the model and right click in the Graphics Window (p. A typical seam is shown below. 429) • Repair Sharp Angles (p. ANSYS DesignModeler generally defines a seam as a set of connected laminar edges separated along their length by small gap.3D Modeling Results are shown in the figure below after Generate. . 432) • Repair Slivers (p. After selecting this option. First. Inc. Inc. All rights reserved.© SAS IP. 435) • Repair Faces (p. you are allowed to add faults manually. In case of Repair Edges. the edge will be added as a fault in the fault list. Release 15. 428) • Repair Holes (p. This will remove seams from the model. 436) Repair Seams You can use this repair feature in surface bodies only. 433) • Repair Spikes (p.

Other Repair types: • Repair Hard Edges (p. after applying the Generate option. 429 . it is recommended that you try higher and lower ranges of width criteria while searching for Seams. So. Release 15. Repair Fault Finding Criteria ANSYS DesignModeler uses the maximum width of gap along length between connected laminar edges as the criteria to search for seams in the model. All rights reserved. Methods Available • Automatic: If all the edges belong to one face then Edge Delete method is used to fix the fault. 429) • Repair Sharp Angles (p. The set of connected laminar edges whose maximum width lies between the minimum and maximum limit is determined to be a fault. 435) • Repair Faces (p. Inc. 212) or Solid (p. 425) • Repair Edges (p. Else Edge Connect method is used.0 . Results are shown of the case mentioned above in the figure shown below. the Edge Connect method is used to fix the fault. Note The seam width of the fault that is an approximate calculation and is dependent on the shape of the seam and the Maximum Seam Width criteria that is provided to perform the search. In this approach. The accuracy of the Seam Width calculation is less accurate when you specify a large Maximum Width criteria for the search and for Seams that are too wide. 427) • Repair Holes (p. 432) • Repair Slivers (p. Because all the edges in the seams are not from same face. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 212) body. 436) Repair Holes You can use this feature to remove holes from a Surface (p. edges that form the seam will be deleted and the gaps will be closed by extending the surface. .© SAS IP. 433) • Repair Spikes (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc.

then set the method to Surface Patch or Edge Delete. If successful. Methods Available • For Holes on Surface Bodies: 1. 2.0 . the edges of the hole may sometimes not be present in the final result. Surface Patch: The Surface is patched using the Surface Patch method to cover the hole. Edge Delete: The edge or edges that form the hole will be deleted and the gaps will be closed by extending the surface. 212) body contains rounds. Note For holes on surface bodies ANSYS DesignModeler suggests Edge Delete or Surface Patch as the repair method. Edge Connect: The edges that form the hole will be connected. All rights reserved. Fill Hole: The opening is first closed with the Surface Patch method and the inner volume is filled using the Fill By Caps method.© SAS IP. For Holes on Solid Bodies: ANSYS DesignModeler uses the diagonal length of the bounding box of the opening as the criteria to search for holes within a body. Example 87: Using Repair Holes Function An example of largest hole is shown in figure below. The edges that form the hole remain. the repair method on the largest hole of the body is set to Do Not Repair. . the repair tool may not be able to find all the holes correctly and the set of holes determined may vary if the geometry type is of type DesignModeler or Workbench. Release 15. Hole sizes computed can be different if the geometry type is DesignModeler or Workbench. Inc. If the Solid (p. If you need this hole to be closed. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. While finding holes in a surface body with maximum hole size as unlimited.Contains proprietary and confidential information 430 of ANSYS. An opening whose diagonal length lies between the minimum and maximum limit is determined to be a fault.3D Modeling Fault Finding Criteria For Holes on Surface Bodies: ANSYS DesignModeler uses the diagonal length of the hole’s bounding box as the criteria to search for holes within a body. • For Holes on Solid Bodies: 1. . 3. A hole whose diagonal length lies between the minimum and maximum limit are determined to be a fault. Inc.

291) having a through hole and a blind hole.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. 431 . After repair: Other Repair types: • Repair Hard Edges (p. ANSYS DesignModeler will set Do Not Repair method for largest hole. Consider an example for a solid hole. Inc. 425) Release 15. . For the case of the through hole. All rights reserved. because the inner face is spilled the two holes are searched. ANSYS DesignModeler detects both of them as holes.© SAS IP. Repair The list view for this geometry is shown here. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Shown here is a Parallelepiped (p. As written in Note.0 .

427) • Repair Seams (p. Release 15.© SAS IP. You can change this selection if required. All rights reserved. you can select only those faces that use the vertices of the face or the adjacent to the face. 433) • Repair Spikes (p. 428) • Repair Sharp Angles (p. A connected edge pair whose interior angle lies between the minimum and maximum limit is determined to be a fault. so that overall angle increases. Example 88: Using Repair Sharp Angles Function Consider the case shown below for sharp angle Suggested merging face is shown below in figure. . 432) • Repair Slivers (p. 436) Repair Sharp Angles You can use this feature to repair very small angles in a face. 435) • Repair Faces (p. Fault Finding Criteria ANSYS DesignModeler uses the interior angle formed by connected edge pair of the face as the criteria to search for sharp angles in the model. Methods Available • Face Merge: The sharp angle face will be merged with one or more adjacent faces. However.3D Modeling • Repair Edges (p. Inc.0 . Inc. Note. ANSYS DesignModeler automatically suggests one adjacent face for merging. a face needs to be specified for the operation to be successful. .Contains proprietary and confidential information 432 of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. while manually selecting faces for the face merge operation.

425) • Repair Edges (p. Other Repair types: • Repair Hard Edges (p. Inc. The face whose maximum width lies between the minimum and maximum limit is determined to be a fault. 433) • Repair Spikes (p. 436) Repair Slivers You can use this repair feature to remove slivers from the model. Repair The face will be merged with sharp angle face and the result highlight will be as shown below. Fault Finding Criteria ANSYS DesignModeler uses the maximum width of the narrow region as a criteria to search for sliver faces in the model.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 435) • Repair Faces (p.© SAS IP.0 . ANSYS DesignModeler defines a sliver as a face which is narrow provided that the face has two or more edges. Release 15. 427) • Repair Seams (p. All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 429) • Repair Slivers (p. 428) • Repair Holes (p. 433 . . Inc.

Note. while manually selecting faces for the face merge operation. Any gaps left behind by the delete operation are healed by growing adjacent faces. The sliver face is merged with one of the adjacent faces. Highlighted face is the Face merge result of fault face and neighboring face. you can select only those faces that use the vertices of the face or the adjacent to the face. Note In case of Repair Faces. . If this method also fails then the Face Delete method is attempted. Results are shown in the figure below after Generate. Inc. Automatic method is suggested. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Example 89: Using Repair Slivers Function As an example of Repair Slivers operation.Contains proprietary and confidential information 434 of ANSYS. Inc. the sliver face will be deleted and the gaps left behind are healed by connecting sliver face edge. You can change this selection if required. In this approach.© SAS IP. All rights reserved. ANSYS DesignModeler suggests Automatic method for fixing all the faults.0 . If you search the fault entities with default settings then one fault will be listed. If this method fails then Edge Connect method is attempted. For this fault. You can change the repair method to Face Merge or Edge Connect. However. If this method fails. ANSYS DesignModeler automatically suggests one adjacent face for merging. a face needs to be specified for the operation to be successful. In this approach. • Face Merge: The sliver face will be merged with one or more adjacent faces. Release 15. • Edge Connect: In this approach. consider the figure below. the sliver face will be deleted and the gaps left behind are healed by connecting sliver face edge. the sliver face will be deleted using the Face Delete method. an alternative approach is used to fix the sliver face.3D Modeling Methods Available • Automatic: A Face Merge method is used to fix the fault.

So. Note The edge set which satisfies the spike search criteria for a width is not necessarily detected as spike for larger width. 425) • Repair Edges (p. 435) • Repair Faces (p. Release 15. The edge set whose maximum width lies between the minimum and maximum limit is determined to be a fault. Other Repair types: • Repair Hard Edges (p. and then create another feature with a larger width to detect larger spikes. Start with the smaller width to remove the spike for the width.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. .0 . Fault Finding Criteria ANSYS DesignModeler uses the maximum width of the narrow region of the face edge set as the criteria to search for spikes in the model. 429) • Repair Sharp Angles (p. Inc. it is recommended that you try higher and lower ranges of width criteria while searching for Slivers. The accuracy of the Sliver Width calculation is less accurate when you specify a large Maximum Width cri- teria for the search and for the Slivers that are too wide. All rights reserved.© SAS IP. 436) Repair Spikes You can use this repair feature to remove spikes from the model. 432) • Repair Spikes (p. A typical spike is shown below. 428) • Repair Holes (p. 427) • Repair Seams (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 435 . Repair The Sliver width of the fault that is computed is an approximate calculation and is dependent on the shape of the sliver and the Maximum Sliver Width criteria that is provided to perform the search.

0 . 427) • Repair Seams (p. then the entire body will be deleted. Other Repair types: • Repair Hard Edges (p. 433) • Repair Faces (p. Example 90: Using Repair Spikes Function The results are shown of the case mentioned above in the figure shown below after applying the Gen- erate option. A face whose area lies between the minimum and maximum limit is determined to be a fault. the narrow edges of spike face will be deleted using the Edge Delete method. . 429) • Repair Sharp Angles (p. . Inc.3D Modeling Methods Available • Automatic: First. as there was not merging face so an alternative approach is used to fix the fault.© SAS IP. If this method also fails and the body is a Surface (p. All rights reserved. an alternative approach is used to fix the chopped face. Inc. 436) Repair Faces You can use this repair feature to remove small faces from the model. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 428) • Repair Holes (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 436 of ANSYS. 432) • Repair Slivers (p. a Face Merge method is used to fix the fault. If all faces of a body are chosen as faults. 425) • Repair Edges (p. The narrow region of spike face is chopped and merged with one of the adjacent faces. Fault Finding Criteria ANSYS DesignModeler uses the area of the face as the criteria to search for small faces in the model. In this approach. Release 15. If this method fails. 212) body then the Edge Delete method is attempted. In this case.

consider the figure below. For both the faults. you can select only those faces that use the vertices of the face or the adjacent to the face. However. Note In case of Repair Faces. Inc. the Automatic method is suggested Results are shown in the figure below after Generate. a face needs to be specified for the operation to be successful. You can change this selection if required. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.0 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. while manually selecting faces for the face merge operation. Example 91: Using Repair Faces Function As an example of Repair Faces operation. Note. a Face Merge method is used to fix the fault. Repair Methods Available • Automatic: First. ANSYS DesignModeler automatically suggests one adjacent face for merging. Note In case of Repair Faces. . select a face in the model and right click in the Graphics Window (p. First. If this method fails. If you search the fault entities with default settings then two faults will be listed. 5) and choose Add Group from the right- Release 15. an alternative approach is used to fix the small face. The small face is merged with one of the adjacent faces.© SAS IP. Inc. All rights reserved. you are allowed to add faults manually. 437 . ANSYS DesignModeler suggests Automatic method for fixing all the faults. • Face Merge: The small face will be merged with one or more adjacent faces. You can change the repair method to Face Merge if desired.

. 6).0 . 428) • Repair Holes (p. The function supports: Distance Finder (p. obtain model entity information. . 432) • Repair Slivers (p. All rights reserved. 438) Entity Information (p.© SAS IP. 425) • Repair Edges (p. and detect model faults.3D Modeling mouse button context menu. Inc. the face will be added as a fault in the fault list. 440) Bounding Box (p. 442) Small Entity Search (p. Each set is defined using the Apply/Cancel button properties. The selections may consist of any mix of topologies. In addition to the shortest distance. 429) • Repair Sharp Angles (p. 441) Mass Properties (p. Inc. Release 15. Once both sets are selected. component distances with respect to the Global and Local plane axes are computed and displayed in the Details View (p. 427) • Repair Seams (p. After selecting this option.Contains proprietary and confidential information 438 of ANSYS. Other Repair types: • Repair Hard Edges (p. 441) Fault Detection (p. the ANSYS DesignModeler will compute the shortest distance and display the result. 442) Distance Finder Use the Distance Finder tool to compute the shortest distance between two sets of inputs. 435) Analysis Tools The analysis tools consist of a set of functions which allow you to measure the distance between any two entities. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 433) • Repair Spikes (p.

Release 15. . Inc.0 . Inc. 439 . Analysis Tools The Local Plane property allows you to specify any coordinate system with respect to the component distances that are being computed. All rights reserved. 5) with an annotation as shown in the figure below.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The Active Plane is selected as a default Local Plane to begin.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The shortest path vector will be displayed in the Graphics Window (p.

440) Bounding Box (p. ellipse) Vertex: Coordinates Release 15. 441) Mass Properties (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 440 of ANSYS. radius (if circle.© SAS IP. curve type. 6) will show different properties: Body: Body type. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.0 . 441) Fault Detection (p. surface area (solid/surface). 442) Small Entity Search (p. surface type. . Inc. the Details View (p. radius (if cylinder/sphere/torus) Edge: Length. All rights reserved. Based on your se- lection. volume (if solid). . 442) Entity Information Use the Entity Information tool to provide information for a single selected entity. length (if line/winding) Face: Surface area.3D Modeling Other Analysis tools: Entity Information (p. Inc.

and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 5). 442) Small Entity Search (p.0 .© SAS IP. 438) Bounding Box (p. 438) Entity Information (p. 441) Fault Detection (p. . Analysis Tools The details update automatically each time you make a selection change. 5). 6) and draws the bounding box in the Graphics Win- dow (p. Other Analysis tools: Distance Finder (p. it will only allow the same types of bodies selected. The center location is indicated in the Graphics Window (p. 442) Bounding Box Use the Bounding Box tool to compute and display the bounding box of the selected entities. The selections may be any mix of topologies. and Z distances about the bounding box in the Details View (p. Other Analysis tools: Distance Finder (p. Because this function depends on the dimension of the selection. 438) Entity Information (p. 441) Mass Properties (p. 442) Mass Properties Use the Mass Properties tool to compute and display the center of gravity. 441 . 440) Bounding Box (p. Other Analysis tools: Distance Finder (p. Inc. All rights reserved. 442) Small Entity Search (p. Y. 440) Mass Properties (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 441) Fault Detection (p. ANSYS DesignModeler displays X. 441) Release 15. Inc.

It supports the search of small faces. The model faults are listed in the Details View (p. Select bodies in an Apply/Cancel button property and specify the searching criteria for those entities. manifold.Contains proprietary and confidential information 442 of ANSYS. When searching for small edges. spikes. 440) Bounding Box (p. Selecting single or a group of entities from the list view highlights the corresponding entities in the Graphics Window (p. 5). you can select different edge types. 441) Mass Properties (p. Inc. 442) Small Entity Search (p. shell or body orientation • Internal Checking Error Other Analysis tools: Distance Finder (p. The current detection tool supports bodies only. 441) Small Entity Search (p. Release 15. region. Selecting a fault from the list highlights its corresponding entities in the Graphics Window (p.© SAS IP. . laminar and wire edges. that is all edge type. 442) Fault Detection Use the Fault Detection tool to find faults in the selected topology. Inc. 5). and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 6).0 . Setting the Go button to Yes would perform the search and display the results in the list view property.3D Modeling Fault Detection (p. and slivers. All rights reserved. The following faults will be detected: • Corrupt Data Structure • Missing Geometry • Invalid Geometry • Self Intersection • Tolerance Mismatch • Size Violation • Invalid Line-Body Edge. 438) Entity Information (p. . 442) Small Entity Search Use the Small Entity Search tool to search small or troublesome entities based on your selection. short edges.

153) and Line (p. 148) features in the Draw Toolbox (p. 440) Bounding Box (p.0 .© SAS IP. To begin Concept Modeling. you can either create line bodies using the Construction Point (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. or use the Import External Geo- metry File (p. 442) Concept Menu Use the features in the Concept Menu to create and modify beam models. 450) Release 15. 147) to design a 2D sketch and generate a 3D model. 438) Entity Information (p. 56) feature. 441) Fault Detection (p. 441) Mass Properties (p. Line Bodies can be created using either method. Inc. The following feature options are available under the Concept Menu: • Lines From Points (p. Inc. All rights reserved. 443 . 447) • 3D Curve (p. 444) • Lines From Sketches (p. Concept Menu Other Analysis tools: Distance Finder (p. . 446) • Lines From Edges (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

The selection bar reads No Selection. 455) • Surfaces From Sketches (p. All rights reserved. The feature's selections are defined by a collection of point segments. 91) feature to group bodies. 445) GUI Navigation: to create lines from points 1.Contains proprietary and confidential information 444 of ANSYS. 5. and point feature points (PF points (p.3D Modeling • Split Edges (p. 4. 2.© SAS IP. 457) • Surfaces From Faces (p. . You automatically start in the Point Segments selection mode. depending on the connectivity of the chosen point segments.” 6. The formation of point segments is handled through an Apply/Cancel button property.0 . The Point Segments entry in the Details View (p. Inc. highlighted in the Details View (p. Lines From Points topics: • Point Segments (p. The feature can produce multiple line bodies. 3D model vertices. Use the Form New Part (p. 107). Inc. 5). Use Polygon from the Draw toolbox of the Sketching tab to draw a polygon in the Graphics Win- dow (p. 452) • Surfaces From Edges (p. 446) Release 15. 6) reads “1. 461) Using the Model Appearance Controls (p. Points can be any 2D sketch points. . Select Sketching tab.” Other Concept Menu (p. 6). Press the Control key and click another point. . The selection bar reads “1 Point Segment. 78) feature options: • Lines From Sketches (p. 3. Click Generate. A point segment is a straight line connecting two selected points. you can modify your model's cross section assignments and alignments before body grouping. 276)). and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 78). Lines From Points The Lines From Points feature allows the creation of Line Bodies in ANSYS DesignModeler that are based on existing points. 458) • Cross Section (p. Select Lines From Points from the Concept Menu (p. 445) • Adding Line Bodies Created by Point Segments (p. Click any point.

Thereafter. 276). All point segments highlighted in green will now turn blue to indicate they have been locked. 445) Adding Line Bodies Created by Point Segments The Operation property allows you to add the Line Bodies created by the feature to the model as either active or frozen. 458) • Cross Section (p. Release 15. one point segment is formed. 445 . The two points may be any combination of 2D sketch points. To lock in your point segment selection. Inc. To remove a point segment. Other Lines From Points topics: • Adding Line Bodies Created by Point Segments (p. as illustrated below. or all segments. While selecting point segments. 455) • Surfaces From Sketches (p. green lines will appear on screen indicating that a segment has been formed. 450) • Split Edges (p. Inc. 243). 461) Point Segments Each Line Body edge is defined by a line connecting two points.© SAS IP. 87) can also be used to remove either the last segment. To change se- lection modes. simply reselect the two points that define the segment and the segment will disappear. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The first segment is defined by the first two points selected.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. use the right mouse button Context Menus (p.0 . • Point Chains: Point Segments are formed in a continuous chain by selecting a chain of points. The Lines From Points (p. For every two points selected. forming a segment. . 447) • 3D Curve (p. using the end of the previous segment as the start of the next segment. each additional point selection defines another segment. and PF points (p. The default setting is Add Material (p. 87). All rights reserved. 452) • Surfaces From Edges (p. 457) • Surfaces From Faces (p. Concept Menu • Lines From Edges (p. 3D model vertices. click the Apply button. 444) feature starts off in Point Pairs selection mode by default. Point Segment selection is performed in two ways: • Point Pairs: Each segment is formed by selecting pairs of points. The right mouse buttonContext Menus (p.

multiple line bodies can be created. 457) Release 15. . Multiple sketches. 450) • Split Edges (p. Select sketches and planes from faces via the Tree Outline (p. 252) and lock in the selections through the Base Objects Apply/Cancel button property. depending on the connectivity of the edges within the base objects. such as sketches and planes from faces. 445) Lines From Sketches The Lines From Sketches feature allows the creation of Line Bodies in ANSYS DesignModeler that are based on base objects.Contains proprietary and confidential information 446 of ANSYS. and combinations of sketches and planes can be used as the Base Object for the creation of line bodies. 455) • Surfaces From Sketches (p. All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . Inc.0 . planes. 452) • Surfaces From Edges (p. Lines From Sketches topics: • Adding Line Bodies Created by Lines From Sketches (p. Inc. 447) Other Concept Menu (p.3D Modeling Other Lines From Points topics: • Point Segments (p. 78) feature options: • Lines From Points (p. The feature creates Line Bodies out of all sketch edges contained in the selected base objects. 447) • 3D Curve (p. 444) • Lines From Edges (p.© SAS IP.

Select 3D model edges. 461) Adding Line Bodies Created by Lines From Sketches The Operation property in the Details View (p. and faces through two Apply/Cancel button properties. Note Use the Lines From Sketches feature to create line bodies from sketch edges. Lines From Edges topics: Edges (p. Inc. All rights reserved. 446) • 3D Curve (p. . 78) feature options: • Lines From Points (p. 452) • Surfaces From Edges (p. 448) Faces (p. The feature can produce multiple line bodies. 458) • Cross Section (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 455) • Surfaces From Sketches (p.© SAS IP. 444) • Lines From Sketches (p. Concept Menu • Surfaces From Faces (p. 448) Edge Joints (p. The default setting is Add Materi- al (p. depending on the con- nectivity of the selected edges and faces.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 6) allows you to add the Line Bodies created by the feature to the model as either active or frozen. Inc. Lines From Edges The Lines From Edges feature allows the creation of Line Bodies in ANSYS DesignModeler that are based on existing model edges. 448) Adding Line Bodies Created by Lines From Edges (p. 243). 447 . 457) Release 15. 450) • Split Edges (p. 449) Other Concept Menu (p.0 . as illustrated below.

and its subsidiaries and affiliates.3D Modeling • Surfaces From Faces (p. 242). ANSYS DesignModeler may not be able to stitch together line body edges that are created from existing model edges that are defined by Non-Uniform Rational B- Splines (NURBS) curves or imported geometry. When line body edges are extracted from these original model edges.Contains proprietary and confidential information 448 of ANSYS. 449) Adding Line Bodies Created by Lines From Edges The operation property allows you to add the Line Bodies created by the feature to the model as either active or frozen. 448) • Adding Line Bodies Created by Lines From Edges (p. as illustrated below.© SAS IP. Inc. 449) Faces Line Body edges are created from the boundary edges of each selected face. 448) • Adding Line Bodies Created by Lines From Edges (p. they are not within DesignModeler’s default tolerance and can sometimes fail to merge together during Boolean Operations (p. 448) • Edge Joints (p. Inc. 243). Other Lines From Edges topics: • Faces (p. 461) Edges Line Body edges can be created from a combination of 2D sketch edges and 3D model edges.0 . The reason for the problem is that some Non- Uniform Rational B-Splines (NURBS) and/or imported geometry is defined with looser toler- ances. 448) • Edge Joints (p. . Release 15. Other Lines From Edges topics: • Edges (p. All rights reserved. 458) • Cross Section (p. . The default setting is Add Material (p. Note In some cases.

448) • Edge Joints (p.© SAS IP. 449 .0 . 448) • Faces (p. Inc. 447) feature executes. Concept Menu Other Lines From Edges topics: • Edges (p. 449) Edge Joints When the Lines From Edges (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . shared topology is created between the new line edges and the original model edges that created them. All rights reserved. Edges marked as shared are called edge joints.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. Release 15.

and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . The feature is useful for creating curves that may be used as a Named Selection (p. The feature's selections are defined by a collection of points in a chain. Empty lines are ignored. everything else on that line is considered a comment and is ignored. 448) 3D Curve The 3D Curve feature allows the creation of line bodies in ANSYS DesignModeler that are based on existing points or coordinates. The curve passes through all points in the chain. All points in the chain must be unique. If any edges in an edge joint are modified in any way. • Open End: forces a closed curve to be open again. After a pound sign (#).3D Modeling and are viewable by turning on edge joint display (see Show Edge Joints). For more information see Edge Joints in the Shared Topology feature. This property is not displayed if there are no expired edge joints for a Line From Edges feature. • Expired edge joints: This will inform you of any edge joints that have expired due to model changes.© SAS IP. then the edge joint will become expired and no longer appear when viewing the edge joints. Inc. 448) • Faces (p. All rights reserved. 301) base object. The last selected base plane will be used by default and the current unit used in the session will be used as the default unit. Other Lines From Edges topics: • Edges (p. • Delete Point: allows you to remove a point from the chain.0 . . Coordinates are read from text files in the unit specified by the Units property. 448) • Adding Line Bodies Created by Lines From Edges (p. a base plane must be selected. 3D model vertices. Note To view all edge joints the Shared Topology feature cannot be selected. 87) to help define the 3D Curve: • Closed End: connects the last point to the first point to form a closed curve. If the curve is created from a text file. A coordinate file must be a simple text file in the following format: 1. 2. • Clear All Points: removes all points from the chain.Contains proprietary and confidential information 450 of ANSYS. Release 15. and point feature points (PF points (p. Two additional properties list the results of the Lines From Edges operation: • Edge joints generated: This tells you the number of edge joints that the Lines From Edges feature created. Points can be any 2D sketch points. Use the Context Menus (p. Inc. 276)). The 3D Curve feature can produce multiple curves when reading the data from files.

3456 . Y coordinate e. 461) Release 15.6666 7.5555 6.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 78) feature options: • Lines From Points (p. . 458) • Cross Section (p. Inc. 455) • Surfaces From Sketches (p.5678 1 2 15. Z coordinate 4. Sequence number . Inc. X coordinate d.1515 2 2 -12.1357 25. then X Y Z all delimited by spaces.© SAS IP. Point number (integer) c. In this case.1928 1 3 5. A data line cannot contain the same Group number and Sequence number as a previous data line.7777 Group 2 (closed curve) 2 1 100.0101 200. 446) • Lines From Edges (p. 5. Group number (integer) b.4321 20.2021 15. All rights reserved. 452) • Surfaces From Edges (p.2468 20. Example 92: Coordinate File The number format is Group number.5678 2 0 Other Concept Menu (p. Data consists of five fields. 447) • Split Edges (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. separated by spaces and/or tabs: a. the point number of the last line should be 0. Group 1 (open curve) 1 1 10.9876 2 3 11.0 . For a closed curve. 444) • Lines From Sketches (p.4321 13. 451 .1234 15. A data line with the same Group number and Sequence number as a previous data line is an error.1234 12. the coordinate fields are ignored.8765 -. 457) • Surfaces From Faces (p. all on one line. Concept Menu 3.

any asso- ciativity between it and its corresponding Surface (p.75 will split the edge into two edges where the first edge is three quarters the length of the original edge and the other edge is only one quarter the length of the original edge. The length of the first segment however. 212) body edge is lost. a Fraction value of 0. The default value for Fraction is 0. then use the resultant edges in a subsequent Surfaces From Edges feature. For example. Release 15.3D Modeling Split Edges The Split Edges feature allows for the splitting of edges (including Line body edges) into two or more pieces. . Split by Delta The value for Delta specifies the distance between each split along the edge. according to the edge inheritance rules described in the Cross Section Inheritance section. is determined by the Sigma value. 453) Split Edges Restrictions One restriction of the Split Edges feature is that it cannot be applied to line body edges that have been used in a Surfaces From Edges operation. it is recommended that you split the edge first. A Fraction value of 0.5 will split the edge into two edges of equal length. The locations of the splits can be defined in four ways: • Fractional (p. If you wish to both split an edge and use it to create a surface body. then the length of the first segment will be equivalent to the Delta value.© SAS IP. . Inc. If the Sigma property is zero. All rights reserved. 453) • Split by Coordinates (p. 452) • Split by Delta (p. Fractional The value for Fraction specifies the ratio between the distance from the start point of the edge to the split location and the overall length of the edge. Splits are made until the remaining edge length is less than the Delta value.5. the alignment of the source edges being split will be passed to the split edges. Once the original edge is destroyed. The reason for this restriction is that the line splitting operation destroys the original edge to create several new edges. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 452) • Split by N (p. For line bodies. The edges selected for the operation can come from either active or frozen bodies.0 . Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information 452 of ANSYS.

Y Coordinate. Z Coordinate: When the property “Type” selected is “By Coordin- ates”. Inc. Y Coordinate. while the Omega property defines the length of the last segment. When Sigma and Delta are defined however.0 . Inc. The coordinates can be created on 3D edges only. The group properties shown in the Details View (p. Split by Coordinates Split by Coordinates is an Apply/Cancel button property that facilitates the selection of the coordinates. they count towards the N segments being split. these properties will be editable. Release 15. which means all resultant segments will be of equal length. The edges will be split into segments of equal length. “By Fraction” and “By Coordinates”. .© SAS IP. By changing Fraction or X Coordinate. Sigma and Omega are both zero. except when the Sigma and Omega properties are defined. Select a Group: Clicking on the group header will highlight the corresponding spot. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. this property will be editable. X Coordinate.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The default option is “By Fraction”. By default. Concept Menu Split by N The N property determines how many pieces to divide the edges into. Fraction: When the property “Type” selected is “By Fraction”. This property indicates the location of edge split in the global coordinate system. Z Coordinate the split location can be changed and corresponding spot will move to new location. 6) are: Type: This property defines two types of parameterizations. All rights reserved. 453 . The value for Fraction specifies the ratio between the length of the edge from the start point of the edge to the split location and the total length of the edge. The Sigma property specifies the length of the first segment.

Post Selection Color: All Edges present in groups will be shown in the default post selection (cyan) color. The context menu has the following options: Delete Coordinates Group: Deletes the selected coordinates group. Expand All Groups: Expands all the groups. Inc.© SAS IP. So. . 447) Release 15. the delete option is shown only if the total number of groups is at least one. Dragging Spot: A spot can be dragged to a new location while the “Split Location” property is not active. 78) feature options: • Lines From Points (p.3D Modeling Split Location Group Control via Context Menu: A context menu is displayed on a right click in the list view. 446) • Lines From Edges (p. Other Concept Menu (p. Only the group headers are visible. 444) • Lines From Sketches (p. 5) will be highlighted when the Apply/Cancel buttons in Split Location properties is active. The Edge Split feature. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . Properties in the group corresponding to the spot will be changed according to the coordinate of the new location. Shows properties belonging to all groups. Clicking on a highlighted spot will deselect the spot. Example 93: Graphics Options Deselecting Spot: All the Spots in Graphics Window (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 454 of ANSYS.0 . Inc. Hides properties belonging to all groups. Collapse All Groups: Collapses all the groups. All rights reserved. with definition as “Coordinates” must have at least one coordinates group.

© SAS IP. 212) body consisting of multiple faces. 461) Surfaces From Edges The Surfaces From Edges feature allows the creation of Surface bodies in ANSYS DesignModeler that use existing body edges. cylinders. Concept Menu • 3D Curve (p. and spheres. Each closed loop will create a frozen surface body that contains a single face. Simple ruled surfaces can also be created. you can choose to flip the normal of the surface by setting Flip Surface Normal to Yes. Note that sometimes it is impossible to generate a single surface that will span the closed profile of edges. cones. Edges should be chosen such that they produce non-intersecting closed loops.0 . Inc. 457) • Surfaces From Faces (p. You can also choose to set thickness in the Details View (p. Inc. Release 15. By modifying the source edges used in the feature. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. there is no guarantee that the same number of faces will be created or stay in the same location on the body. 450) • Surfaces From Edges (p. In these cases. 455 . After a surface has been generated. When this happens. 6). The loops should form a shape such that a simple surface can be inserted into the model. All rights reserved. Illustrated below is an example of a twisted surface. . ANSYS DesignModeler may still generate a Surface (p. tori. The Surfaces From Edges feature will be marked with a warning alerting you of this occurrence. including Line body edges as the boundary. Examples of simple surfaces are planes. 455) • Surfaces From Sketches (p. 458) • Cross Section (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Illustrated below is an example of a planar surface. the faces that get generated are not guaranteed to remain persistent.

Edges marked as shared are called edge joints.3D Modeling Illustrated below is an example of a Surface (p. If any edges in an edge joint are modified in any way. 446) • Lines From Edges (p. Surfaces From Edges topics: • Edge Joints (p. 78) feature options: • Lines From Points (p. All rights reserved. 212) Body containing multiple. Inc. then the edge joint will become expired and Release 15. 452) • Surfaces From Sketches (p. 455) feature executes. • Expired edge joints: This will inform you of any edge joints that have expired due to model changes. 461) Edge Joints When the Surfaces From Edges (p. 455) operation: • Edge joints generated: This tells you the number of edge joints that the Surfaces From Edges (p. Two additional properties list the results of the Surfaces From Edges (p. 457) • Surfaces From Faces (p. non-persistent faces. and are viewable by turning on edge joint display (see Edge Joints (p. 458) • Cross Section (p. 456) Other Concept Menu (p.0 . Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information 456 of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. shared topology is created between the new Surface (p. 115)). 455) feature created. 444) • Lines From Sketches (p. . 450) • Split Edges (p.© SAS IP. 447) • 3D Curve (p. . 212) body edges and the original line edges that defined the surface.

78). 243) operation with the Surfaces From Sketches feature may generate surfaces from intersecting base sketches successfully.0 . Inc. Note To view all edge joints the Shared Topology feature cannot be selected. For more information see Edge Joints in the Shared Topology feature. Concept Menu no longer appear when viewing the edge joints. Note Using the Add Material (p. Example 94: Surfaces From Sketches Usage An example of Surfaces From Sketches is shown below. but may also create problems in the later stage. Surfaces From Sketches The Surfaces From Sketches feature allows the creation of surface bodies using sketches as their boundary. the normal will be aligned to the plane normal. 244). 243) and Add Frozen (p. You can change this by setting Orient with Plane Normal to No in the Details View (p. Base sketches must include closed profiles and may not be self-intersecting. you can choose to adjust the normal of the surface. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. and has two operations: Add Material (p. By default. Inc. 455) feature.© SAS IP. All rights reserved. Before: After: Release 15. . The Surfaces From Sketches feature is located in the Concept Menu (p. 457 . Both single and multiple sketches may be used as the base objects for this feature. After a surface has been generated. 6). 6).Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. This property is not displayed if there are no expired edge joints for a Surfaces From Edges (p. You can also adjust the thickness of the surface in the Details View (p.

452) • Surfaces From Edges (p. 78). 211) ) in ANSYS DesignModeler by selecting the existing faces from Solid (p. 78) feature options: • Lines From Points (p.3D Modeling Other Concept Menu (p. 444) • Lines From Sketches (p. 6). and has two operations: Add Material (p. The Surfaces From Faces feature is located in the Concept Menu (p. 243) and Add Frozen (p. . Inc. All rights reserved. 458) • Cross Section (p. 447) • 3D Curve (p. Inc. 212) bodies. Release 15. if present inside a single face. 446) • Lines From Edges (p. 461) Surfaces From Faces The Surfaces From Faces feature allows the creation of Surface bodies (see Body Types (p.0 . 244). Example 95: Surfaces From Faces Usage Suppose you wanted to create surface body out of Face A and Face B for this model. 212) bodies can be created without the holes present in the selected faces. 450) • Split Edges (p. . depending on the connectivity of the selected faces. 212) and Surface (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Contains proprietary and confidential information 458 of ANSYS. This is done by specifying healing options in Holes Repair Method under Details View (p. 455) • Surfaces From Faces (p. The feature can produce multiple surface bodies.© SAS IP. Surface (p. Holes will be healed.

Inc. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. select the Faces A and B. All rights reserved. 459 . Release 15. The result is shown with the original Solid (p. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates.0 .© SAS IP. 212) body hidden for clarity. Concept Menu Using Surfaces From Faces feature.

© SAS IP. Here the original body is hidden for clarity. 450) • Split Edges (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Other Concept Menu (p.3D Modeling For the same model considered above. 452) • Surfaces From Edges (p. the result will be as shown below. if Natural Healing is selected for Holes Repair Method. 447) • 3D Curve (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 460 of ANSYS. All rights reserved. Inc. 455) Release 15. . 78) feature options: • Lines From Points (p.0 . 446) • Lines From Edges (p. 444) • Lines From Sketches (p. . Inc.

which allow you to create their own profiles using ANSYS DesignModeler's sketching tools. 464) Release 15. Cross sections are attributes assigned to line bodies to define beam properties in the Mechanical applic- ation. 462) Cross Section Assignment (p. 461) Cross Section The Cross Section menu is accessible via the Concept Menu (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 78) in the "DesignModeler Menus" (p. . Inc. 45) toolbar.0 . 457) • Cross Section (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 463) Cross Section Offset (p. The 12 cross section types supported in DesignModeler correspond directly to specialized beam section types used in the ANSYS Mechanical APDL application. Note The one exception is User Defined (p. Cross Section topics: Coordinate Systems for Cross Sections (p. 481) cross sections. cross sections are represented by sketches and are controlled by a set of dimensions. You may only modify the dimension values and dimension locations of a cross section. 461 . 464) Cross Section Alignment (p. 462) Editing Cross Sections (p. they are not to be edited in any other way. In ANSYS DesignModeler. All rights reserved. Inc.© SAS IP. Concept Menu • Surfaces From Sketches (p.

the cross section lies in the XYPlane and the Z direction corresponds to the edge tangent. 462) Cross Section Assignment (p. 464) Cross Section Inheritance (p. 450) • Split Edges (p. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . 468) Cross Section Types (p. 6) will display a list of dimensions as shown below. 458) Coordinate Systems for Cross Sections It should be noted however. The Details View (p.3D Modeling Cross Section Inheritance (p. 446) • Lines From Edges (p.0 . 455) • Surfaces From Sketches (p. 78) feature options: • Lines From Points (p. To edit the value of a cross section dimension. 469) Deleting Cross Sections (p. the cross section lies in the YZ plane and uses the X direction as the edge tangent. 469) Deleting Cross Sections (p. 463) Cross Section Offset (p. 468) Cross Section Types (p. This difference in orientation has no bearing on the analysis. Inc.© SAS IP. 252). Inc. 447) • 3D Curve (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 462 of ANSYS. 457) • Surfaces From Faces (p. 482) Other Concept Menu (p. 482) Editing Cross Sections Cross section dimension values and locations are editable. 452) • Surfaces From Edges (p. 464) Cross Section Alignment (p. New values may be entered into the dimension properties. 444) • Lines From Sketches (p. that ANSYS DesignModeler uses a different coordinate system for cross sections compared to the one used in the ANSYS environment. . select the cross section in the Tree Outline (p. as shown in the picture below. Other Cross Section topics: Editing Cross Sections (p. In DesignModeler. Cross section dimensions Release 15. In the ANSYS environment. All rights reserved.

463) Cross Section Offset (p. use the right mouse button option. the Move Dimensions option does not appear because there is no sketch representation for cross sections of this type. ANSYS DesignModeler will enter a dimen- sion moving state. All rights reserved. To change a cross section dimension's location. 464) Cross Section Inheritance (p. first select the line body in the Tree Outline (p. 252) or when right-clicking in the Graphics Window (p. When you are done moving dimensions on the cross section. 469) Deleting Cross Sections (p. an error will pop up. 462) Cross Section Assignment (p. all line bodies will have no cross sections until you assign them.0 . the Move Dimensions state is ended by clicking on another item in the Tree Outline (p. 252). At first. 464) Cross Section Alignment (p. Inc. In the Details View (p.© SAS IP. 6) will appear a Cross Section property.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 252) or by clicking the New Selec- tion (p. 167) Dimen- sions. 463 . 5) when viewing a cross section. When a line body has no cross section assigned to it. Move (p. available when right-clicking on the cross section in the Tree Outline (p. Other Cross Section topics: Coordinate Systems for Cross Sections (p. 482) Cross Section Assignment To assign a cross section to a line body. the Cross Section property will appear in yellow as "Not Selected." Next select the cross section to be assigned to the selected line Release 15. identical to the tool used to move dimensions in the Dimensions Toolbox (p. 163) in Sketching Mode. 178) button. 468) Cross Section Types (p. 480) cross sections. Concept Menu may not be deleted nor renamed. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . Inc. If you input an invalid dimension value for a cross section. Note that for User Integrated (p.

468) Cross Section Types (p. 462) Editing Cross Sections (p. the cross section assignment will apply to all selected bodies. When this option is chosen. 6) for you to specify the X and Y offsets. you can select multiple line bodies. the shear center is used. 469) Deleting Cross Sections (p. There are three choices: • Centroid: The cross section is centered on the edge according to its centroid. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. you can also assign cross sections to multiple bodies at once. 468) Cross Section Types (p.© SAS IP. a new property will appear where you can specify the type of offset to apply.0 . Inc. Note that for this setting. The drop-down menu will display all the cross section objects added to the Tree Outline (p. Though the properties shown are specific to the first line body selected. you will see the number of line bodies selected at the top of the property group. they must be aligned to ensure they have the proper ori- entation. • User Defined: Allows to you to define the cross section's offset. By using the Ctrl key or by using box selection. This is the default setting. 462) Editing Cross Sections (p. Other Cross Section topics: Coordinate Systems for Cross Sections (p. ANSYS DesignModeler draws the body's edges the same way it does for Centroid. 469) Deleting Cross Sections (p. 464) Cross Section Inheritance (p. 463) Cross Section Alignment (p. 464) Cross Section Inheritance (p. 6). 482) Cross Section Alignment Once cross sections are assigned and offset. two additional properties will appear in the Details View (p. To make cross section assignment faster. 462) Cross Section Assignment (p. When analyzed. In the Details View (p. 462) Cross Section Offset (p. Below is an example of what you would see when four line bodies are selected. . 482) Cross Section Offset After assigning a cross section to a line body. • Shear Center: The cross section is centered on the edge according to its shear center. Release 15. 6). .3D Modeling body from the drop-down menu available in the Details View (p. Other Cross Section topics: Coordinate Systems for Cross Sections (p.Contains proprietary and confidential information 464 of ANSYS. • Origin: The cross section is not offset and is taken exactly as it appears in its sketch. 464) Cross Section Alignment (p. Inc. All rights reserved. 252).

Concept Menu

To distinguish boundary edges, use the Edge Coloring (p. 110) option.

For line body edges, you will notice that each one has a small alignment triad shown with it, as shown
in the picture below. The blue arrow identifies the edge's tangent direction, while the green arrow
represents the alignment vector. It is this green arrow that defines the +Y direction of the cross section
on the edge. The green arrow is defined by a reference direction, which is set through an Apply/Cancel
button property for line body edges. A line body edge's alignment becomes invalid when its reference
direction is parallel to the edge's tangent direction.

By default, initially all line body edges are aligned in either the global +Z direction, or if that would be
invalid, the global +Y direction. The text for this property will indicate if +Z or +Y is being used and
will be colored if a valid alignment edge has not been selected. While a default alignment results in
valid edge orientation for most line body edges, it does not necessarily mean the cross section is aligned
in the desired manner. You should check the alignment arrows of your edges or inspect the line bodies
with their solid facet representation to ensure that your cross sections have the desired alignment on
the edges. See "DesignModeler Viewing" (p. 107) for more information on line body display modes.

Note

The line body's state icon can either be red or yellow if the alignment is invalid. For more
information see Body Status (p. 213).

To set the line body edge's alignment, first select the edge in the Graphics Window (p. 5). A property
called Cross Section Alignment will appear in the Details View (p. 6). If there is no alignment direction
defined for the edge, then the property will appear in yellow as "Not Selected". Activating the Apply/Can-
cel buttons of this property will place you in an alignment selection mode, where you may select entities
in the Tree Outline (p. 252) or from the graphics on screen to define a reference direction. The reference
direction may be any of the types described in Direction Reference (p. 195), though usually plane normal
directions are most often used. When you have selec